Residential Structural Design Guide: 2000 Edition

by HUD USER

U.S. Department of Housing and Urban Development
Office of Policy Development and Research
Residential Structural Design Guide:
2000 Edition
A State-of-the-Art Review and Application of
Engineering Information for Light-Frame Homes,
Apartments, and Townhouses

PATH (Partnership for Advanced Technology in Housing) is a new private/public effort to develop, demonstrate,
and gain widespread market acceptance for the “Next Generation” of American housing. Through the use of new or
innovative technologies the goal of PATH is to improve the quality, durability, environmental efficiency, and
affordability of tomorrow’s homes.
Initiated at the request of the White House, PATH is managed and supported by the Department of Housing and
Urban Development (HUD). In addition, all Federal Agencies that engage in housing research and technology
development are PATH Partners, including the Departments of Energy and Commerce, as well as the Environmental
Protection Agency (EPA) and the Federal Emergency Management Agency (FEMA). State and local governments
and other participants from the public sector are also partners in PATH. Product manufacturers, home builders,
insurance companies, and lenders represent private industry in the PATH Partnership.
To learn more about PATH, please contact:
Suite B133
451 7th Street, SW
Washington, DC 20410
202-708-4250 (fax)
e-mail: pathnet@pathnet.org
website: www.pathnet.org

Residential Structural Design Guide:
2000 Edition
A State-of-the-Art Review and Application of
Engineering Information for Light-Frame Homes,
Apartments, and Townhouses
Prepared for
U.S. Department of Housing and Urban Development
Office of Policy Development and Research
Washington, DC
Contract H-21065CA
and
National Association of Home Builders
Housing Affordability Through Design Efficiency Program
Washington, DC
by
NAHB Research Center, Inc.
Upper Marlboro, Maryland
February 2000

ii Residential Structural Design Guide
Acknowledgments
This document was prepared by the NAHB Research Center, Inc. The work was
sponsored by the U.S. Department of Housing and Urban Development (HUD) and cofunded by
the National Association of Home Builders (NAHB). The principal authors of the guide are Jay
Crandell, P.E., and Andrea Vrankar, P.E., R.A., with contributions from Donald F. Luebs.
Graphics were produced by Barbara Vrankar Karim, Lisa Zimmerman, and Mary Ellen Howard.
Special appreciation is extended to William Freeborne and Riley Chung of HUD for their review
and guidance throughout the project. Appreciation is also extended to the following individuals
whose comments made this work more complete: Patrick Bridges, Bridges and Associates;
Dr. Eric F.P. Burnett, Pennsylvania Housing Research Center; Kirk Grundahl, Wood Truss
Council of America; David Mason, Southern Forest Products Association; and Mark Nowak,
NAHB Research Center, Inc. A special thank you is extended to David Gromala, Brad Douglas,
David Rosowsky, Thomas Williamson, and Michael Baker for their instructive criticism and
technical suggestions that significantly improved the soundness of this work. The significant
editorial contributions of Carol Soble are certainly recognized for the improved quality of this
writing. Finally, for the hours of hard work and rework in pulling this document together, the
authors extend many thanks to Lynda Marchman.
ABOUT THE NAHB RESEARCH CENTER, INC.
The NAHB Research Center is a not-for-profit subsidiary of the National Association of Home Builders (NAHB).
The NAHB has 190,000 members, including 50,000 builders who build more than 80 percent of new American
homes. NAHB Research Center conducts research, analysis, and demonstration programs in all areas relating to
home building and carries out extensive programs of information dissemination and interchange among members of
the industry and between the industry and the public.
NOTICE
The contents of this report are the views of the contractor and do not necessarily reflect the views or policies of the
U.S. Department of Housing and Urban Development or the U.S. government.
While the information in this document is believed to be accurate, neither the authors, nor reviewers, nor the U.S.
Department of Housing and Urban Development, nor the NAHB Research Center, Inc., nor any of their employees or
representatives makes any warranty, guarantee, or representation, expressed or implied, with respect to the accuracy,
effectiveness, or usefulness of any information, method, or material in this document, nor assumes any liability for the
use of any information, methods, or materials disclosed herein, or for damages arising from such use. This publication is
intended for the use of professional personnel who are competent to evaluate the significance and limitations of the
reported information and who will accept responsibility for the application of the material it contains. All responsibility
as to the appropriate use of information in this document is the responsibility of the reader or user.
The U.S. government does not endorse products or manufacturers. Trade or manufacturer’s names that appear herein
are used solely because they are considered essential to the objective of this report.

Foreword
The increasing complexity of homes, the use of innovative materials and
technologies, and the increased population in high-hazard areas of the United States have
introduced many challenges to the building industry and design profession as a whole.
These challenges call for the development and continual improvement of efficient
engineering methods for housing applications as well as for the education of designers in
the uniqueness of housing as a structural design problem.
This text is an initial effort to document and improve the unique structural
engineering knowledge related to housing design and performance. It compliments
current design practices and building code requirements with value-added technical
information and guidance. In doing so, it supplements fundamental engineering principles
with various technical resources and insights that focus on improving the understanding
of conventional and engineered housing construction. Thus, it attempts to address
deficiencies and inefficiencies in past housing construction practices and structural
engineering concepts through a comprehensive design approach that draws on existing
and innovative engineering technologies in a practical manner. The guide may be viewed
as a “living document” subject to further improvement as the art and science of housing
design evolves.
We hope that this guide will facilitate and advance efficient design of future
housing whether built in conformance with prescriptive (i.e., “conventional”) practices or
specially engineered in part or whole. The desired effect is to continue to improve the
value of American housing in terms of economy and structural performance.
Susan M. Wachter
Assistant Secretary for Policy
Development and Research

Residential Structural Design Guide v
Preface
This document is a unique and comprehensive tool for design professionals,
particularly structural engineers, seeking to provide value-added services to the producers
and consumers of American housing. As such, the guide is organized around the
following major objectives:
• to present a sound perspective on American housing relative to its history,
construction characteristics, regulation, and performance experience;
• to provide the latest technical knowledge and engineering approaches for the
design of homes to complement current code-prescribed design methods;
• to assemble relevant design data and methods in a single, comprehensive
format that is instructional and simple to apply for the complete design of a
home; and
• to reveal areas where gaps in existing research, design specifications, and
analytic tools necessitate alternative methods of design and sound engineering
judgment to produce efficient designs.
This guide consists of seven chapters. The layout and application of the various
chapters are illustrated in the figure on page vii. Chapter 1 describes the basic substance
of American housing, including conventional construction practices, alternative
materials, building codes and standards, the role of design professionals, and actual
experience with respect to performance problems and successes, particularly as related to
natural hazards such as hurricanes and earthquakes. Chapter 2 introduces basic
engineering concepts regarding safety, load path, and the structural system response of
residential buildings, subassemblies, and components to various types of loads. Chapter 3
addresses design loads applicable to residential construction. Chapters 4 and 5 provide
step-by-step design procedures for the various components and assemblies comprising
the structure of a home—from the foundation to the roof. Chapter 6 is devoted to the
design of light-frame homes to resist lateral loads from wind and earthquakes. Chapter 7
addresses the design of various types of connections in a wood-framed home that are
important to the overall function of the numerous component parts. As appropriate, the
guide offers additional resources and references on the topics addressed.
Given that most homes in the United States are built with wood structural
materials, the guide focuses on appropriate methods of design associated with wood for
the above-grade portion of the structure. Concrete or masonry are generally assumed to
be used for the below-grade portion of the structure, although preservative-treated wood
may also be used. Other materials and systems using various innovative approaches are
considered in abbreviated form as appropriate. In some cases, innovative materials or
systems can be used to address specific issues in the design and performance of homes.
For example, steel framing is popular in Hawaii partly because of wood’s special

vi Residential Structural Design Guide
problems with decay and termite damage. Likewise, partially reinforced masonry
construction is used extensively in Florida because of its demonstrated ability to perform
in high winds.
For typical wood-framed homes, the primary markets for engineering services lie
in special load conditions, such as girder design for a custom house; corrective measures,
such as repair of a damaged roof truss or floor joist; and high-hazard conditions such as
on the West Coast (earthquakes) and the Gulf and Atlantic coasts (hurricanes). The
design recommendations in the guide are based on the best information available to the
authors for the safe and efficient design of homes. Much of the technical information and
guidance is supplemental to building codes, standards, and design specifications that
define current engineering practice. In fact, current building codes may not explicitly
recognize some of the technical information or design methods described or
recommended in the guide. Therefore, a competent professional designer should first
compare and understand any differences between the content of this guide and local
building code requirements. Any actual use of this guide by a competent professional
may require appropriate substantiation as an “alternative method of analysis.” The guide
and references provided herein should help furnish the necessary documentation.
The use of alternative means and methods of design should not be taken lightly or
without first carefully considering the wide range of implications related to the applicable
building code’s minimum requirements for structural design, the local process of
accepting alternative designs, the acceptability of the proposed alternative design method
or data, and exposure to liability when attempting something new or innovative, even
when carried out correctly. It is not the intent of this guide to steer a designer unwittingly
into non-compliance with current regulatory requirements for the practice of design as
governed by local building codes. Instead, the intent is to provide technical insights into
and approaches to home design that have not been compiled elsewhere but deserve
recognition and consideration. The guide is also intended to be instructional in a manner
relevant to the current state of the art of home design.
Finally, it is hoped that this guide will foster a better understanding among
engineers, architects, building code officials, and home builders by clarifying the
perception of homes as structural systems. As such, the guide should help structural
designers perform their services more effectively and assist in integrating their skills with
others who contribute to the production of safe and affordable homes in the United
States.

Residential Structural Design Guide vii
CHAPTER 1
BASICS OF RESIDENTIAL CONSTRUCTION
CHAPTER 2
STRUCTURAL DESIGN CONCEPTS
CHAPTER 3
DESIGN LOADS FOR
RESIDENTIAL BUILDINGS
CHAPTER 5
DESIGN OF WOOD
FRAMING
CHAPTER 4
DESIGN OF
FOUNDATIONS
CHAPTER 7
CONNECTIONS
CHAPTER 6
LATERAL RESISTANCE TO
WIND AND EARTHQUAKES
y
x
CHAPTER LAYOUT AND APPLICATION GUIDE

Residential Structural Design Guide ix
Contents
Page
1.1 Conventional Residential Construction......................................................................1-1
1.2 Industrialized Housing ...............................................................................................1-6
1.3 Alternative Materials and Methods............................................................................1-7
1.4 Building Codes and Standards .................................................................................1-11
1.5 Role of the Design Professional...............................................................................1-14
1.6 Housing Structural Performance ..............................................................................1-15
1.7 Summary ..................................................................................................................1-24
1.8 References ................................................................................................................1-25
y
x
2.1 General .......................................................................................................................2-1
2.2 What is Structural Design?.........................................................................................2-1
2.3 Load Conditions and Structural System Response ....................................................2-2
2.4 Load Path....................................................................................................................2-6
2.5 Structural Safety.......................................................................................................2-14
2.6 References ................................................................................................................2-23
3.1 General .......................................................................................................................3-1
3.2 Load Combinations ....................................................................................................3-2
3.3 Dead Loads.................................................................................................................3-4
3.4 Live Loads..................................................................................................................3-6
3.5 Soil Lateral Loads ......................................................................................................3-8
3.6 Wind Loads ..............................................................................................................3-11
3.7 Snow Loads..............................................................................................................3-20
3.8 Earthquake Loads.....................................................................................................3-22
3.9 Other Load Conditions.............................................................................................3-30
3.10 Design Examples......................................................................................................3-31
3.11 References ................................................................................................................3-38
4.1 General .......................................................................................................................4-1
Chapter 1 - Basics of Residential Construction
Chapter 2 - Structural Design Concepts
Chapter 3 - Design Loads for Residential Buildings
Chapter 4 - Design of Foundations

x Residential Structural Design Guide
4.2 Material Properties .....................................................................................................4-4
4.3 Soil Bearing Capacity and Footing Size ....................................................................4-8
4.4 Footings....................................................................................................................4-10
4.5 Foundation Walls .....................................................................................................4-19
4.6 Slabs on Grade .........................................................................................................4-49
4.7 Pile Foundations.......................................................................................................4-50
4.8 Frost Protection ........................................................................................................4-53
4.9 Design Examples......................................................................................................4-58
4.10 References ................................................................................................................4-88
5.1 General .......................................................................................................................5-1
5.2 Material Properties .....................................................................................................5-3
5.3 Structural Evaluation................................................................................................5-15
5.4 Floor Framing...........................................................................................................5-24
5.5 Wall Framing............................................................................................................5-32
5.6 Roofs ........................................................................................................................5-39
5.7 Design Examples......................................................................................................5-48
5.8 References ................................................................................................................5-81
6.1 General .......................................................................................................................6-1
6.2 Overview of Whole-Building Tests ...........................................................................6-3
6.3 LFRS Design Steps and Terminology........................................................................6-5
6.4 The Current LFRS Design Practice..........................................................................6-11
6.5 Design Guidelines ....................................................................................................6-19
6.6 Design Examples......................................................................................................6-41
6.7 References ................................................................................................................6-74
7.1 General .......................................................................................................................7-1
7.2 Types of Mechanical Fasteners..................................................................................7-3
7.3 Wood Connection Design ........................................................................................7-11
7.4 Design of Concrete and Masonry Connections........................................................7-23
7.5 Design Examples......................................................................................................7-28
7.6 References ................................................................................................................7-50
Appendix A - Shear and Moment Diagrams and Beam Equations
Appendix B - Unit Conversions
Chapter 5 - Design of Wood Framing
Chapter 6 - Lateral Resistance to Wind and Earthquakes
Chapter 7 - Connections

Residential Structural Design Guide xi
List of Figures
Page
Figure 1.1a: Post-and-Beam Construction (Historical) 1-2
Figure 1.1b: Balloon-Frame Construction (Historical) 1-3
Figure 1.1c: Modern Platform-Frame Construction 1-4
Figure 1.2: Modern Platform-Framed House under Construction 1-5
Figure 1.3: House Construction Using Engineered Wood Components 1-8
Figure 1.4: House Construction Using Cold-Formed Steel Framing 1-9
Figure 1.5: House Construction Using Insulating Concrete Forms 1-10
Figure 1.6: House Construction Using Concrete Masonry 1-11
Figure 1.7: Use of Model Building Codes in the United States 1-12
Figure 1.8: Maximum Gust Wind Speeds Experienced in Hurricane Andrew 1-19
y
x
Figure 2.1: Illustration of the Vertical Load Path for Gravity Loads 2-7
Figure 2.2: Illustration of the Vertical Load Path for Wind Uplift 2-8
Figure 2.3: Illustration of the Lateral Load Path 2-12
Figure 2.4: Illustration of Building Deformation under Lateral Load 2-13
Figure 2.5: Basic Concept of Safety in LRFD and ASD Considering
the Variability of Loads and Resistance 2-21
Figure 3.1: Triangular Pressure Distribution on a Basement Foundation Wall 3-9
Figure 3.2: Basic Design Wind Speed Map from ASCE 7-98 3-13
Figure 3.3: Ground Snow Loads (ASCE 7-98) 3-21
Figure 3.4: Seismic Map of Design Short-Period Spectral Response Acceleration (g)
(2 percent chance of exceedance in 50 years or 2,475-year return period) 3-23
Figure 4.1: Types of Foundations 4-3
Figure 4.2: Critical Failure Planes in Continuous or Square Concrete Spread Footings 4-13
Figure 4.3: Variables Defined for Shear Calculations in Plain Concrete Walls 4-22
Figure 4.4: Variables Defined for Shear Calculations in Reinforced Concrete Walls 4-25
Figure 4.5: Typical Interaction Diagrams for Plain and Reinforced Concrete Walls 4-29
Chapter 1 - Basics of Residential Construction
Chapter 2 - Structural Design Concepts
Chapter 3 - Design Loads for Residential Buildings
Chapter 4 - Design of Foundations

xii Residential Structural Design Guide
Figure 4.6: Design Variables Defined for Lintel Bending and Shear 4-31
Figure 4.7: Variables Defined for Shear Calculations in Reinforced Concrete
Masonry Walls 4-41
Figure 4.8: Concrete Masonry Wall Lintel Types 4-44
Figure 4.9: Preservative-Treated Wood Foundation Walls 4-46
Figure 4.10: Insulating Concrete Form Foundation Walls 4-48
Figure 4.11: Basic Coastal Foundation Construction 4-51
Figure 4.12: Air-Freezing Index Map (100-Year Return Period) 4-55
Figure 4.13: Frost-Protected Shallow Foundation Applications 4-56
Figure 5.1: Components and Assemblies of a Conventional Wood-Framed Home 5-2
Figure 5.2: Structural Elements of the Floor System 5-25
Figure 5.3: Conventional and Alternative Floor Framing Members 5-27
Figure 5.4: Examples of Beams and Girders 5-29
Figure 5.5: Structural Elements of the Wall System 5-33
Figure 5.6: Wood Column Types 5-39
Figure 5.7: Structural Elements of a Conventional Roof System 5-40
Figure 5.8: Design Methods and Assumptions for a Sloped Roof Rafter 5-43
Figure 5.9: Typical Roof Overhang Construction 5-47
Figure 6.1: Chords in Shear Walls and Horizontal Diaphragms Using the
“Deep Beam” Analogy 6-7
Figure 6.2: Shear Wall Collector and the Composite Failure Plane (Failure plane
also applies to diaphragm chords) 6-8
Figure 6.3: Two Types of Hold-Down Restraint and Basic Analytic Concepts 6-10
Figure 6.4: Lateral Force Distribution by a “Flexible” Diaphragm
(tributary area approach) 6-12
Figure 6.5: Illustration of a Basic Perforated Shear Wall 6-17
Figure 6.6: Evaluation of Overturning Forces on a Restrained Shear Wall Segment 6-33
Figure 7.1: Elements of a Nail and Nail Types 7-4
Figure 7.2: Bolt and Connection Types 7-8
Figure 7.3: Specialty Connector Hardware 7-10
Figure 7.4: Types of Connections and Loading Conditions 7-13
Figure 7.5: Concrete or Masonry Wall-to-Footing Connections 7-24
Figure 7.6: Key in Concrete Footings 7-25
Figure 7.7: Dowel Placement in Concrete Footings 7-26
Chapter 5 - Design of Wood Framing
Chapter 6 - Lateral Resistance to Wind and Earthquakes
Chapter 7 - Connections

Residential Structural Design Guide xiii
Appendix A: Shear and Moment Diagrams and Beam Equations
Figure A.1: Simple Beam (Foundation Wall) - Partial Triangular Load A-1
Figure A.2: Simple Beam (Wall or Column) – Eccentric Point Load A-2
Figure A.3: Simple Beam – Uniformly Distributed Load A-2
Figure A.4: Simple Beam – Load Increasing Uniformly to One End A-3
Figure A.5: Simple Beam – Concentrated Load at Any Point A-3
Figure A.6: Simple Beam – Two Unequal Concentrated Loads
Unsymmetrically Placed A-4
Figure A.7: Cantilever Beam – Uniformly Distributed Load A-4
Figure A.8: Cantilever Beam – Concentrated Load at Any Point A-5
Figure A.9: Beam Fixed at One End, Supported at Other –
Uniformly Distributed Load A-5
Figure A.10: Beam Fixed at One End, Supported at Other –
Concentrated Load at Any Point A-6
Figure A.11: Beam Fixed at Both Ends – Uniformly Distributed Loads A-6
Figure A.12: Beam Fixed at Both Ends – Concentrated Load at Any Point A-7
Figure A.13: Beam Overhanging One Support – Uniformly Distributed Load A-7
Figure A.14: Beam Overhanging One Support – Concentrated Load at
End of Overhang A-8
Figure A.15: Continuous Beam – Two Equal Spans and Uniformly Distributed Load A-8
Figure A.16: Continuous Beam – Two Equal Spans with Uniform Load on One Span A-9
Figure A.17: Continuous Beam – Two Unequal Spans and Uniformly Distributed Load A-9

xiv Residential Structural Design Guide

Residential Structural Design Guide xv
List of Tables
Page
Table 1.1: Top Five House Defects Based on Homeowner Warranty Claims 1-17
Table 1.2: Construction Characteristics of Sampled Single-Family Detached
Homes in Hurricane Andrew 1-18
Table 1.3: Components of Sampled Single-Family Detached Homes with
“Moderate” or “High” Damage Ratings in Hurricane Andrew 1-19
Table 1.4: Construction Characteristics of Sampled Single-Family
Detached Dwellings 1-22
Table 1.5: Damage to Sampled Single-Family Detached Homes in the Northridge
Earthquake (percent of sampled homes) 1-22
y
x
Table 2.1: Building Loads Categorized by Orientation 2-2
Table 2.2: Effect of Safety Factor on Level of Safety in ASD for a Typical
Hurricane-Prone Wind Climate 2-19
Table 2.3: Commonplace Risks and Mortality Rates 2-22
Table 2.4: Annual Economic Losses of Insured Buildings Associated
with Wind Damage 2-23
Table 3.1: Typical Load Combinations Used for the Design of Components
and Systems 3-4
Table 3.2: Dead Loads for Common Residential Construction 3-5
Table 3.3: Densities for Common Residential Construction Materials 3-6
Table 3.4: Live Loads for Residential Construction 3-7
Table 3.5: Values of K
a
, Soil Unit Weight, and Equivalent Fluid Density
by Soil Type 3-10
Table 3.6: Wind Speed Conversions 3-12
Table 3.7: Basic Wind Velocity Pressures (psf) for Suburban Terrain 3-14
Table 3.8: Lateral Pressure Coefficients for Application to Vertical Projected Areas 3-16
Table 3.9: Wind Pressure Coefficients for Systems and Components
(enclosed building) 3-17
Table 3.10: Missile Types for Wind-Borne Debris Impact Tests 3-18
Table 3.11: Site Soil Amplification Factor Relative to Acceleration
(short period, firm soil) 3-25
Table 3.12: Seismic Response Modifiers for Residential Construction 3-26
Chapter 1 - Basics of Residential Construction
Chapter 2 - Structural Design Concepts
Chapter 3 - Design Loads for Residential Buildings

xvi Residential Structural Design Guide
Table 4.1: Rebar Size, Diameter, and Cross-Sectional Areas 4-6
Table 4.2: Presumptive Soil Bearing Values by Soil Description 4-8
Table 4.3: Presumptive Soil Bearing Values (psf) Based on Standard
Penetrometer Blow Count 4-9
Table 4.4: Simplified Moment Magnification Factors, δ
ns
4-27
Table 4.5: Nominal Wall Thickness for 8-Foot-High Masonry Foundation Walls 4-35
Table 4.6: Allowable Flexural Tension Stresses F
a
for Allowable Stress Design
of Unreinforced Masonry 4-36
Table 4.7: Preservative-Treated Wood Foundation Framing 4-47
Table 4.8: Minimum Frost Depths for Residential Footings 4-54
Table 5.1: Design Properties and Associated Reduction Factors for ASD 5-10
Table 5.2: Adjustment Factor Applicability to Design Values for Wood 5-10
Table 5.3: Recommended Load Duration Factors for ASD 5-12
Table 5.4: Recommended Repetitive Member Factors for Dimension
Lumber Used in Framing Systems 5-13
Table 5.5: Recommended Allowable Deflection Limits 5-21
Table 5.6: System Deflection Adjustment Factors 5-22
Table 5.7: Fastening Floor Sheathing to Structural Members 5-31
Table 5.8: Recommended System Adjustment Factors for Header Design 5-37
Table 6.1: Unfactored (Ultimate) Shear Resistance (plf) for Wood Structural
Panel Shear Walls with Framing of Douglas-Fir, Larch, or Southern Pine 6-22
Table 6.2: Unfactored (Ultimate) Unit Shear Resistance (plf) for Walls with
Cold-Formed Steel Framing and Wood Structural Panels 6-23
Table 6.3: Unfactored (Ultimate) Unit Shear Values (plf) for 1/2-Inch-Thick
Gypsum Wall Board Sheathing 6-24
Table 6.4: Unfactored (Ultimate) Shear Resistance (lbs) for 1x4 Wood Let-ins
and Metal T-Braces 6-25
Table 6.5: Minimum Recommended Safety and Resistance Factors for
Residential Shear Wall Design 6-29
Table 6.6: Specific Gravity Values (Average) for Common Species
of Framing Lumber 6-29
Table 6.7: Values of C
ns
for Various Nail Sizes and Types 6-30
Table 6.8: Horizontal Diaphragm ASD Shear Values (plf) for unblocked Roof
and Floor Construction Using Douglas Fir or Southern Pine Framing 6-38
Chapter 4 - Design of Foundations
Chapter 5 - Design of Wood Framing
Chapter 6 - Lateral Resistance to Wind and Earthquakes

Residential Structural Design Guide xvii
Table 7.1: Recommended Nailing Schedule for a Wood-Framed Home 7-2
Table 7.2: Nail Types, Sizes, and Dimensions 7-6
Table 7.3: Common Framing Lumber Species and Specific Gravity Values 7-12
Chapter 7 - Connections

xviii Residential Structural Design Guide

Residential Structural Design Guide 1-1
CHAPTER 1
Basics of Residential
Construction
1.1 Conventional Residential
Construction
The conventional American house has been shaped over time by a variety
of factors. Foremost, the abundance of wood as a readily available resource has
dictated traditional American housing construction, first as log cabins, then as
post-and-beam structures, and finally as light-frame buildings. The basic
residential construction technique has remained much the same since the
introduction of light wood-framed construction in the mid-1800s and is generally
referred to as conventional construction. See Figures 1.1a through 1.1c for
illustrations of various historical and modern construction methods using wood
members.
In post-and-beam framing, structural columns support horizontal
members. Post-and-beam framing is typified by the use of large timber members.
Traditional balloon framing consists of closely spaced light vertical structural
members that extend from the foundation sill to the roof plates. Platform framing
is the modern adaptation of balloon framing whereby vertical members extend
from the floor to the ceiling of each story. Balloon and platform framings are not
simple adaptations of post-and-beam framing but are actually unique forms of
wood construction. Platform framing is used today in most wood-framed
buildings; however, variations of balloon framing may be used in certain parts of
otherwise platform-framed buildings, such as great rooms, stairwells, and gable-
end walls where continuous wall framing provides greater structural integrity.
Figure 1.2 depicts a modern home under construction.

1-2 Residential Structural Design Guide
Chapter 1 - Basics of Residential Construction
FIGURE 1.1a Post-and-Beam Construction (Historical)

Residential Structural Design Guide 1-3
Chapter 1 - Basics of Residential Construction
FIGURE 1.1b Balloon-Frame Construction (Historical)

1-4 Residential Structural Design Guide
Chapter 1 - Basics of Residential Construction
FIGURE 1.1c Modern Platform-Frame Construction

Residential Structural Design Guide 1-5
Chapter 1 - Basics of Residential Construction
FIGURE 1.2 Modern Platform-Framed House under Construction
Conventional or prescriptive construction practices are based as much on
experience as on technical analysis and theory (HEW, 1931). When incorporated
into a building code, prescriptive (sometimes called “cook book”) construction
requirements can be easily followed by a builder and inspected by a code official
without the services of a design professional. It is also common for design
professionals, including architects and engineers, to apply conventional practice
in typical design conditions but to undertake special design for certain parts of a
home that are beyond the scope of a prescriptive residential building code. Over
the years, the housing market has operated efficiently with minimal involvement
of design professionals. Section 1.5 explores the current role of design
professionals in residential construction as well as some more recent trends.
While dimensional lumber has remained the predominant material used in
twentieth-century house construction, the size of the material has been reduced
from the rough-sawn, 2-inch-thick members used at the turn of the century to
today’s nominal “dressed” sizes with actual thickness of 1.5 inches for standard
framing lumber. The result has been significant improvement in economy and
resource utilization, but not without significant structural trade-offs in the interest
of optimization. The mid- to late 1900s have seen several significant innovations
in wood-framed construction. One example is the development of the metal plate-
connected wood truss in the 1950s. Wood truss roof framing is now used in most
new homes because it is generally more efficient than older stick-framing
methods. Another example is plywood structural sheathing panels that entered the
market in the 1950s and quickly replaced board sheathing on walls, floors, and

1-6 Residential Structural Design Guide
Chapter 1 - Basics of Residential Construction
roofs. Another engineered wood product known as oriented strand board (OSB) is
now substantially replacing plywood.
In addition, it is important to recognize that while the above changes in
materials and methods were occurring, significant changes in house design have
continued to creep into the residential market in the way of larger homes with
more complicated architectural features, long-span floors and roofs, large open
interior spaces, and more amenities. Certainly, the collective effect of the above
changes on the structural qualities of most homes is notable.
The references below are recommended for a more in-depth understanding
of conventional housing design, detailing, and construction. Section 1.8–
References–provides detailed citations.
• Wood Frame House Construction, Second Edition (NAHB, 1992)
• Cost-Effective Home Building: A Design and Construction
Handbook (NAHB, 1994)
• Modern Carpentry–Building Construction Details in Easy-to-
Understand Form, Seventh Edition (Wagner, 1992)
• International One- and Two-Family Dwelling Code (ICC, 1998)
The following structural design references are also recommended for use
with Chapters 3 through 7 of this guide:
• NDS–National Design Specification for Wood Construction and
Supplement (AF&PA, 1997);
• ACI-318–Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete
(ACI, 1999);
• ACI-530–Building Code Requirements for Masonry Structures
(ACI, 1999);
• ASCE 7-98–Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other
Structures (ASCE, 1999); and
• local building code.
1.2 Industrialized Housing
Most homes in the United States are still site-built; that is, they follow a
“stick framing” approach. With this method, wood members are assembled on site
in the order of construction from the foundation up. The primary advantage of on-
site building is flexibility in meeting variations in housing styles, design details,
and changes specified by the owner or builder. However, an increasing number of
today’s site-built homes use components that are fabricated in an off-site plant.
Prime examples include wall panels and metal plate-connected wood roof trusses.
The blend of stick-framing and plant-built components is referred to as
“component building.”
A step beyond component building is modular housing. Modular housing
is constructed in essentially the same manner as site-built housing except that
houses are plant-built in finished modules (typically two or more modules) and
shipped to the jobsite for placement on conventional foundations. Modular

Residential Structural Design Guide 1-7
Chapter 1 - Basics of Residential Construction
housing is built to comply with the same building codes that govern site-built
housing. Generally, modular housing accounts for less than 10 percent of total
production of single-family housing units.
Manufactured housing (also called mobile homes) is also constructed by
using wood-framed methods; however, the methods comply with federal
preemptive standards specified in the Code of Federal Regulations (HUD Code).
This popular form of industrialized housing is completely factory-assembled and
then delivered to a site by using an integral chassis for road travel and foundation
support. In recent years, factory-built housing has captured more than 20 percent
of new housing starts in the United States.
1.3 Alternative Materials and Methods
More recently, several innovations in structural materials have been
introduced to residential construction. In fact, alternatives to conventional wood-
framed construction are gaining recognition in modern building codes. It is
important for designers to become familiar with these alternatives since their
effective integration into conventional home building may require the services of
a design professional. In addition, a standard practice in one region of the country
may be viewed as an alternative in another and provides opportunities for
innovation across regional norms.
Many options in the realm of materials are already available. The
following pages describe several significant examples. In addition, the following
contacts are useful for obtaining design and construction information on the
alternative materials and methods for house construction discussed next:
General Contacts
HUD User (800-245-2691, www.huduser.org)
ToolBase (800-898-2842, www.nahbrc.org)
Engineered Wood Products
American Wood Council (800-292-2372, www.awc.org)
APA–The Engineered Wood Association (206-565-6600, www.apawood.org)
Wood Truss Council of America (608-274-4849, www.woodtruss.com)
Wood I-Joist Manufacturer’s Association (www.i-joist.com)
Cold-Formed Steel
North American Steel Framing Alliance (202-785-2022, www.steelframingalliance.com)
American Iron and Steel Institute (1-800-898-2842, www.steel.org)
Light-Gauge Steel Engineer’s Association (615-386-7139, www.lgsea.com)
Steel Truss & Component Association (608-268-1031, www.steeltruss.org)
Insulating Concrete Forms
Portland Cement Association (847-966-6200, www.portcement.org)
Insulating Concrete Form Association (847-657-9730, www.forms.org)
Masonry
National Concrete Masonry Association (703-713-1900, www.ncma.org)

1-8 Residential Structural Design Guide
Chapter 1 - Basics of Residential Construction
Engineered wood products and components (see Figure 1.3) have
gained considerable popularity in recent years. Engineered wood products and
components include wood-based materials and assemblies of wood products with
structural properties similar to or better than the sum of their component parts.
Examples include metal plate-connected wood trusses, wood I-joists, laminated
veneer lumber, plywood, oriented strand board, glue-laminated lumber, and
parallel strand lumber. Oriented strand board (OSB) structural panels are rapidly
displacing plywood as a favored product for wall, floor, and roof sheathing. Wood
I-joists and wood trusses are now used in 31.5 and 12.5 percent, respectively, of
the total framed floor area in all new homes each year (NAHBRC, 1998). The
increased use of engineered wood products is the result of many years of research
and product development and, more important, reflects the economics of the
building materials market. Engineered wood products generally offer improved
dimensional stability, increased structural capability, ease of construction, and
more efficient use of the nation’s lumber resources. And they do not require a
significant change in construction technique. The designer should, however,
carefully consider the unique detailing and connection requirements associated
with engineered wood products and ensure that the requirements are clearly
understood in the design office and at the jobsite. Design guidance, such as span
tables and construction details, is usually available from the manufacturers of
these predominantly proprietary products.
FIGURE 1.3 House Construction Using Engineered Wood Components

Residential Structural Design Guide 1-9
Chapter 1 - Basics of Residential Construction
Cold-formed steel framing (previously known as light-gauge steel
framing) has been produced for many years by a fragmented industry with
nonstandardized products serving primarily the commercial design and
construction market. However, a recent cooperative effort between industry and
the U.S. Department of Housing and Urban Development (HUD) has led to the
development of standard minimum dimensions and structural properties for basic
cold-formed steel framing materials. The express purpose of the venture was to
create prescriptive construction requirements for the residential market. Cold-
formed steel framing is currently used in exterior walls and interior walls in about
1 and 7.6 percent, respectively, of annual new housing starts (NAHB, 1998). The
benefits of cold-formed steel include cost, durability, light weight, and strength
(NAHBRC, 1994; HUD, 1994). Figure 1.4 illustrates the use of cold-formed steel
framing in a home. The construction method is detailed in Prescriptive Method
for Residential Cold-Formed Steel Framing, Second Edition and has been adopted
by the International One- and Two-Family Dwelling Code (HUD, 1997; ICC,
1998). It is interesting to note that a similar effort for residential wood-framed
construction took place about 70 years ago (HEW, 1931).
FIGURE 1.4 House Construction Using Cold-Formed Steel Framing

1-10 Residential Structural Design Guide
Chapter 1 - Basics of Residential Construction
Insulating concrete form (ICF) construction, as illustrated in Figure 1.5,
combines the forming and insulating functions of concrete construction in a single
step. While the product class is relatively new in the United States, it appears to
be gaining acceptance. In a cooperative effort between industry and HUD, the
product class was recently included in building codes after the establishment of
minimum dimensions and standards for ICF concrete construction. The benefits
of ICF construction include durability, strength, noise control, and energy
efficiency (HUD, 1998). The method is detailed in Prescriptive Method for
Insulating Concrete Forms in Residential Construction and has been adopted by
the Standard Building Code (HUD, 1998; SBCCI, 1999). Additional building
code recognition is forthcoming.
FIGURE 1.5 House Construction Using Insulating Concrete Forms
Concrete masonry construction, illustrated in Figure 1.6, is essentially
unchanged in basic construction method; however, recently introduced products
offer innovations that provide structural as well as architectural benefits. Masonry
construction is well recognized for its fire-safety qualities, durability, noise
control, and strength. Like most alternatives to conventional wood-framed
construction, installed cost may be a local issue that needs to be balanced against
other factors. For example, in hurricane-prone areas such as Florida, standard
concrete masonry construction dominates the market where its performance in
major hurricanes has been favorable when nominally reinforced using
conventional practice. Nonetheless, at the national level, masonry above-grade
wall construction represents less than 10 percent of annual housing starts.

Residential Structural Design Guide 1-11
Chapter 1 - Basics of Residential Construction
FIGURE 1.6 House Construction Using Concrete Masonry
1.4 Building Codes and Standards
Virtually all regions of the United States are covered by a legally
enforceable building code that governs the design and construction of buildings,
including residential dwellings. Although building codes are legally a state police
power, most states allow local political jurisdictions to adopt or modify building
codes to suit their “special needs” or, in a few cases, to write their own code.
Almost all jurisdictions adopt one of the major model codes by legislative action
instead of attempting to write their own code.
There are three major model building codes in the United States that are
comprehensive; that is, they cover all types of buildings and occupancies–from a
backyard storage shed to a high-rise office building or sports complex. The three
major comprehensive building codes follow:
• National Building Code (NBC)
Building Officials and Code Administrators International, Inc.
4051 West Flossmoor Road
Country Club Hills, IL 60478-5795
708-799-2300
www.bocai.org
• Standard Building Code (SBC)
Southern Building Code Congress International, Inc.
9800 Montclair Road
Birmingham, AL 35213-1206
205-591-1853
www.sbcci.org

1-12 Residential Structural Design Guide
Chapter 1 - Basics of Residential Construction
• Uniform Building Code (UBC)
International Conference of Building Officials
5360 Workman Mill Road
Whittier, CA 90601-2298
562-699-0541
www.icbo.com
The three model codes are competitive in that they vie for adoption by
state and local jurisdictions. In reality, however, the three codes are regional in
nature, as indicated in Figure 1.7. Thus, the NBC tends to address conditions
indigenous to the northeastern quarter of the United States (e.g., frost) while the
SBC focuses on conditions in the southeastern quarter of the United States (e.g.,
hurricanes) and the UBC on conditions in the western half of the United States
(e.g., earthquakes).
FIGURE 1.7 Use of Model Building Codes in the United States
ICBO UNIFORM
BOCA
SBCCI
STATE-WRITTEN

Residential Structural Design Guide 1-13
Chapter 1 - Basics of Residential Construction
To help resolve the problem of disunity among the three major building
codes, the model building code organizations have recently entered into a joint
effort (under the auspices of the International Code Council or ICC) to develop a
single comprehensive building code called the International Building Code (IBC).
The IBC is under development at the time of this writing. It draws heavily from
the previous codes but adds new requirements for seismic design, wind design,
stair geometry, energy conservation, and other vital subject areas. The new code
is scheduled to be available in 2000, although several years may pass before
change is realized on a national scale. In addition, another code-writing body, the
National Fire Protection Association (NFPA), is developing a competitive model
building code.
While the major model codes include some “deemed-to-comply”
prescriptive requirements for conventional house construction, they focus
primarily on performance (i.e., engineering) requirements for more complex
buildings across the whole range of occupancy and construction types. To provide
a comprehensive, easier-to-use code for residential construction, the three major
code organizations participated in developing the International One- and Two-
Family Dwelling Code (ICC, 1998), first published in 1971 as the One- and Two-
Family Dwelling Code (OTFDC) by the Council of American Building Officials
(CABO). Presented in logical construction sequence, the OTFDC is devoted
entirely to simple prescriptive requirements for single-family detached and
attached (townhouse) homes. Many state and local jurisdictions have adopted the
OTFDC as an alternative to a major residential building code. Thus, designers and
builders enjoy a choice as to which set of requirements best suits their purpose.
The major code organizations are also developing a replacement for the
OTFDC in conjunction with the proposed IBC. Tentatively called the
International Residential Code for One- and Two-Family Dwellings (IRC), it
draws on earlier editions of the OTFDC and is slated for publication in 2000.
Model building codes do not provide detailed specifications for all
building materials and products but rather refer to established industry standards,
primarily those promulgated by the American Society for Testing and Materials
(ASTM). Several ASTM standards are devoted to the measurement, classification,
and grading of wood properties for structural applications as well as virtually all
other building materials, including steel, concrete, and masonry. Design standards
and guidelines for wood, steel, concrete materials, and other materials or
applications are also maintained as reference standards in building codes.
Currently, over 600 materials and testing standards are referenced in the building
codes used in the United States.
For products and processes not explicitly recognized in the body of any of
the model codes or standards, the model building code organizations provide a
special code evaluation service with published reports. These evaluation reports
are usually provided for a fee at the request of manufacturers. While the National
Evaluation Service, Inc. (NES) provides a comprehensive evaluation relative to
the three model codes mentioned above, each model code organization also
performs evaluations independently for its specific code.
Seasoned designers spend countless hours in careful study and application
of building codes and selected standards that relate to their area of practice. More
important, these designers develop a sound understanding of the technical

1-14 Residential Structural Design Guide
Chapter 1 - Basics of Residential Construction
rationale and intent behind various provisions in applicable building codes and
design standards. This experience and knowledge, however, can become even
more profitable when coupled with practical experiences from “the field.” One of
the most valuable sources of practical experience is the successes and failures of
past designs and construction practices as presented in Section 1.6.
1.5 Role of the Design Professional
Since the primary user of this guide is assumed to be a design
professional, it is important to understand the role that design professionals can
play in the residential construction process, particularly with respect to recent
trends. Design professionals offer a wide range of services to a builder or
developer in the areas of land development, environmental impact assessments,
geotechnical and foundation engineering, architectural design, structural
engineering, and construction monitoring. This guide, however, focuses on two
approaches to structural design as follows:
• Conventional design. Sometimes referred to as “nonengineered”
construction, conventional design relies on standard practice as
governed by prescriptive building code requirements for
conventional residential buildings (see Section 1.4); some parts of
the structure may be specially designed by an engineer or architect.
• Engineered design. Engineered design generally involves the
application of conventions for engineering practice as represented
in existing building codes and design standards.
Some of the conditions that typically cause concern in the planning and
preconstruction phases of home building and thus sometimes create the need for
professional design services are
• structural configurations, such as unusually long floor spans,
unsupported wall heights, large openings, or long-span cathedral
ceilings;
• loading conditions, such as high winds, high seismic risk, heavy
snows, or abnormal equipment loads;
• nonconventional building systems or materials, such as composite
materials, structural steel, or unusual connections and fasteners;
• geotechnical or site conditions, such as expansive soil, variable soil or
rock foundation bearing, flood-prone areas, high water table, or steeply
sloped sites; and
• owner requirements, such as special materials, appliance or fixture
loads, atriums, and other special features.
The involvement of architects and structural engineers in the current
residential market was recently studied. In a survey of 978 designers (594
architects and 384 structural engineers) in North America, at least 56 percent
believed they were qualified to design buildings of four stories or less (Kozak and
Cohen, 1999). Of this share, 80 percent noted that their workload was devoted to

Residential Structural Design Guide 1-15
Chapter 1 - Basics of Residential Construction
buildings of four stories or less, with about 33 percent of that workload
encompassing residential construction, including single-family dwellings,
duplexes, multifamily units, and commercial/residential combinations.
While some larger production builders produce sufficient volume to
justify an on-staff design professional, most builders use consultants on an as-
needed basis. However, as more and more homes are built along the earthquake-
prone West Coast and along the hurricane-prone Gulf and Atlantic seaboards, the
involvement of structural design professionals seems to be increasing. Further, the
added complexities of larger custom-built homes and special site conditions will
spur demand for design specialists. Moreover, if nonconventional materials and
methods of construction are to be used effectively, the services of a design
professional are often required. In some instances, builders in high-hazard areas
are using design professionals for on-site compliance inspections in addition to
designing buildings.
The following organization may serve as a valuable on-demand resource
for residential designers while creating better linkages with the residential
building community and its needs:
REACH
Residential Engineer’s and Architect’s Council for Housing
NAHB Research Center, Inc.
800-898-2842
www.nahbrc.org
1.6 Housing Structural Performance
1.6.1 General
There are well over 100 million housing units in the United States, and
approximately half are single-family dwellings. Each year, at least 1 million new
single-family homes and townhomes are constructed, along with thousands of
multifamily structures, most of which are low-rise apartments. Therefore, a small
percent of all new residences may be expected to experience performance
problems, most of which amount to minor defects that are easily detected and
repaired. Other performance problems are unforeseen or undetected and may not
be realized for several years, such as foundation problems related to subsurface
soil conditions.
On a national scale, several homes are subjected to extreme climatic or
geologic events in any given year. Some will be damaged due to a rare event that
exceeds the performance expectations of the building code (i.e., a direct tornado
strike or a large-magnitude hurricane, thunderstorm, or earthquake). Some
problems may be associated with defective workmanship, premature product
failure, design flaws, or durability problems (i.e., rot, termites, or corrosion).
Often, it is a combination of factors that leads to the most dramatic forms of
damage. Because the cause and effect of these problems do not usually fit simple
generalizations, it is important to consider cause and effect objectively in terms of
the overall housing inventory.

1-16 Residential Structural Design Guide
Chapter 1 - Basics of Residential Construction
To limit the threat of life-threatening performance problems to reasonable
levels, the role of building codes is to ensure that an acceptable level of safety is
maintained over the life of a house. Since the public cannot benefit from an
excessive degree of safety that it cannot afford, code requirements must also
maintain a reasonable balance between affordability and safety. As implied by
any rational interpretation of a building code or design objective, safety implies
the existence of an acceptable level of risk. In this sense, economy or affordability
may be broadly considered as a competing performance requirement. For a
designer, the challenge is to consider optimum value and to use cost-effective
design methods that result in acceptable performance in keeping with the intent or
minimum requirements of the building code. In some cases, designers may be
able to offer cost-effective options to builders and owners that improve
performance well beyond the accepted norm.
1.6.2 Common Performance Issues
Objective information from a representative sample of the housing stock is
not available to determine the magnitude and frequency of common performance
problems. Instead, information must be gleaned and interpreted from indirect
sources.
The following data are drawn from a published study of homeowner
warranty insurance records in Canada (ONHWP/CMHC, 1994); similar studies
are not easily found in the United States. The data do not represent the frequency
of problems in the housing population at large but rather the frequency of various
types of problems experienced by those homes that are the subject of an insurance
claim. The data do, however, provide valuable insights into the performance
problems of greatest concern–at least from the perspective of a homeowner
warranty business.
Table 1.1 shows the top five performance problems typically found in
Canadian warranty claims based on the frequency and cost of a claim. It may be
presumed that claims would be similar in the United States since housing
construction is similar, forgoing the difference that may be attributed to climate.
Considering the frequency of claim, the most common claim was for
defects in drywall installation and finishing. The second most frequent claim was
related to foundation walls; 90 percent of such claims were associated with cracks
and water leakage. The other claims were primarily related to installation defects
such as missing trim, poor finish, or sticking windows or doors.
In terms of cost to correct, foundation wall problems (usually associated
with moisture intrusion) were by far the most costly. The second most costly
defect involved the garage slab, which typically cracked in response to frost
heaving or settlement. Ceramic floor tile claims (the third most costly claim) were
generally associated with poor installation that resulted in uneven surfaces,
inconsistent alignment, or cracking. Claims related to septic drain fields were
associated with improper grading and undersized leaching fields. Though not
shown in Table 1.1, problems in the above-grade structure (i.e., framing defects)
resulted in about 6 percent of the total claims reported. While the frequency of
structural related defects is comparatively small, the number is still significant in
view of the total number of homes built each year. Even if many of the defects

Residential Structural Design Guide 1-17
Chapter 1 - Basics of Residential Construction
may be considered nonconsequential in nature, others may not be and some may
go undetected for the life of the structure. Ultimately, the significance of these
types of defects must be viewed from the perspective of known consequences
relative to housing performance and risk; refer to Sections 1.6.3 and 2.5.4.
TABLE 1.1
Top Five House Defects Based on Homeowner
Warranty Claims
Based on Frequency of Claim Based on Cost of Claim
1. Gypsum wall board finish 1. Foundation wall
2. Foundation wall 2. Garage slab
3. Window/door/skylight 3. Ceramic tiles
4. Trim and moldings 4. Septic drain field
5. Window/door/skylight frames 5. Other window/door/skylight
Source: Defect Prevention Research Project for Part 9 Houses (ONHWP/CMHC, 1994).
While the defects reported above are not necessarily related to building
products, builders are generally averse to products that are “too new.” Examples
of recent class-action lawsuits in the United States give builders some reason to
think twice about specifying new products such as
• Exterior Insulated Finish Systems (EIFS);
• fire-retardant treated plywood roof sheathing;
• certain composite sidings and exterior finishes; and
• polybutylene water piping.
It should be noted that many of these problems have been resolved by
subsequent product improvements. Unfortunately, it is beyond the scope of this
guide to give a complete account of the full range of problems experienced in
housing construction.
1.6.3 Housing Performance in Hurricanes and
Earthquakes
In recent years, scientifically designed studies of housing performance in
natural disasters have permitted objective assessments of actual performance
relative to that intended by building codes (HUD, 1993; HUD, 1994; HUD, 1998;
HUD, 1999; NAHBRC, 1996). Conversely, anecdotal damage studies are often
subject to notable bias. Nonetheless, both objective and subjective damage studies
provide useful feedback to builders, designers, code officials, and others with an
interest in housing performance. This section summarizes the findings from recent
scientific studies of housing performance in hurricanes and earthquakes.
It is likely that the issue of housing performance in high-hazard areas will
continue to increase in importance as the disproportionate concentration of
development along the U.S. coastlines raises concerns about housing safety,
affordability, and durability. Therefore, it is essential that housing performance is
understood objectively as a prerequisite to guiding rational design and

1-18 Residential Structural Design Guide
Chapter 1 - Basics of Residential Construction
construction decisions. Proper design that takes into account the wind and
earthquake loads in Chapter 3 and the structural analysis procedures in Chapters
4, 5, 6, and 7 should result in efficient designs that address the performance issues
discussed below. Regardless of the efforts made in design, however, the intended
performance can be realized only with an adequate emphasis on installed quality.
For this reason, some builders in high-hazard areas have retained the services of a
design professional for on-site compliance inspections as well as for their design
services. This practice offers additional quality assurance to the builder, designer,
and owner in high-hazard areas of the country.
Hurricane Andrew
Without doubt, housing performance in major hurricanes provides ample
evidence of problems that may be resolved through better design and construction
practices. At the same time, misinformation and reaction following major
hurricanes often produce a distorted picture of the extent, cause, and meaning of
the damage relative to the population of affected structures. This section discusses
the actual performance of the housing stock based on a damage survey and
engineering analysis of a representative sample of homes subjected to the most
extreme winds of Hurricane Andrew (HUD, 1998; HUD, 1993).
Hurricane Andrew struck a densely populated area of south Florida on
August 24, 1992, with the peak recorded wind speed exceeding 175 mph
(Reinhold, Vickery, and Powell, 1993). At speeds of 160 to 165 mph over a
relatively large populated area, Hurricane Andrew was estimated to be about a
300-year return period event (Vickery and Twisdale, 1995; Vickery et al., 1998)
(see Figure 1.8). Given the distance between the shoreline and the housing stock,
most damage resulted from wind, rain, and wind-borne debris, not from the storm
surge. Table 1.2 summarizes the key construction characteristics of the homes that
experienced Hurricane Andrew’s highest winds (as shown in Figure 1.8). Most
homes were one-story structures with nominally reinforced masonry walls, wood-
framed gable roofs, and composition shingle roofing.
Table 1.3 summarizes the key damage statistics for the sampled homes. As
expected, the most frequent form of damage was related to windows and roofing,
with 77 percent of the sampled homes suffering significant damage to roofing
materials. Breakage of windows and destruction of roofing materials led to
widespread and costly water damage to interiors and contents.
TABLE 1.2
Construction Characteristics of Sampled Single-Family
Detached Homes in Hurricane Andrew
Component Construction Characteristics
Number of stories 80% one 18% two 2% other
Roof construction 81% gable 13% hip 6% other
Wall construction 96% masonry 4% wood-framed
Foundation type 100% slab
Siding material 94% stucco 6% other
Roofing material 73% composition shingle 18% tile 9% other
Interior finish Primarily gypsum board

Residential Structural Design Guide 1-19
Chapter 1 - Basics of Residential Construction
FIGURE 1.8
Maximum Gust Wind Speeds Experienced
in Hurricane Andrew
1
Source: Applied Research Associates, Raleigh, NC.
Note:
1
Wind speeds are normalized to a standard 33-foot height over open terrain.
Roof sheathing was the most significant aspect of the structural damage,
with 64 percent of the sampled homes losing one or more roof sheathing panels.
As a result, about 24 percent of sampled homes experienced a partial or complete
collapse of the roof framing system.
TABLE 1.3
Components of Sampled Single-Family Detached Homes with
“Moderate” or “High” Damage Ratings in Hurricane Andrew
Component Damage Frequency (percent of sampled homes)
Roof sheathing 24% (64%)
1
Walls 2%
Foundation 0%
Roofing 77%
Interior finish (water damage) 85%
Source: Assessment of Damage to Single-Family Homes Caused by Hurricanes Andrew and Iniki (HUD, 1993).
Note:
1
Percent in parentheses includes “low” damage rating and therefore corresponds to homes with roughly one or more sheathing panels lost.
Other values indicate the percent of homes with moderate or high damage ratings only, including major component or structural failures
such as partial roof collapse (i.e., 24 percent) due to excessive roof sheathing loss.

1-20 Residential Structural Design Guide
Chapter 1 - Basics of Residential Construction
Given the magnitude of Hurricane Andrew, the structural (life-safety)
performance of the predominantly masonry housing stock in south Florida was,
with the prominent exception of roof sheathing attachment, entirely reasonable.
While a subset of homes with wood-framed wall construction were not evaluated
in a similarly rigorous fashion, anecdotal observations indicated that additional
design and construction improvements, such as improved wall bracing, would be
necessary to achieve acceptable performance levels for the newer styles of homes
that tended to use wood framing. Indeed, the simple use of wood structural panel
sheathing on all wood-framed homes may have avoided many of the more
dramatic failures. Many of these problems were also exacerbated by shortcomings
in code enforcement and compliance (i.e., quality). The following summarizes the
major findings and conclusions from the statistical data and performance
evaluation (HUD, 1993; HUD, 1998):
• While Hurricane Andrew exacted notable damage, overall residential
performance was within expectation given the magnitude of the event
and the minimum code-required roof sheathing attachment relative to the
south Florida wind climate (i.e., a 6d nail).
• Masonry wall construction with nominal reinforcement (less than that
required by current engineering specifications) and roof tie-down
connections performed reasonably well and evidenced low damage
frequencies, even through most homes experienced breached envelopes
(i.e., broken windows).
• Failure of code-required roof tie-down straps were infrequent (i.e., less
than 10 percent of the housing stock).
• Two-story homes sustained significantly (95 percent confidence level)
greater damage than one-story homes.
• Hip roofs experienced significantly (95 percent confidence level) less
damage than gable roofs on homes with otherwise similar
characteristics.
Some key recommendations on wind-resistant design and construction
include the following:
• Significant benefits in reducing the most frequent forms of hurricane
damage can be attained by focusing on critical construction details
related to the building envelope, such as correct spacing of roof
sheathing nails (particularly at gable ends), adequate use of roof tie-
downs, and window protection in the more extreme hurricane-prone
environments along the southern U.S. coast.
• While construction quality was not the primary determinant of
construction performance on an overall population basis, it is a
significant factor that should be addressed by proper inspection of key
components related to the performance of the structure, particularly
connections.
• Reasonable assumptions are essential when realistically determining
wind loads to ensure efficient design of wind-resistant housing.

Residential Structural Design Guide 1-21
Chapter 1 - Basics of Residential Construction
Assumptions pertain to wind exposure condition, the internal pressure
condition, and other factors as addressed later in Chapter 3.
Chapters 3 through 7 present design methods and guidance that address
many of the above concerns.
Hurricane Opal
Hurricane Opal struck the Florida panhandle near Pensacola on October 4,
1995, with wind speeds between 100 and 115 mph at peak gust (normalized to an
open exposure and elevation of 33 feet) over the sample region of the housing
stock (Powell and Houston, 1995). Again, roofing (i.e., shingles) was the most
common source of damage, occurring in 4 percent of the sampled housing stock
(NAHBRC, 1996). Roof sheathing damage occurred in less than 2 percent of the
affected housing stock.
The analysis of Hurricane Opal contrasts sharply with the Hurricane
Andrew study. Aside from Hurricane Opal’s much lower wind speeds, most
homes were shielded by trees, whereas homes in south Florida were subjected to
typical suburban residential exposure with relatively few trees (wind exposure B).
Hurricane Andrew denuded any trees in the path of strongest wind. Clearly,
housing performance in protected, noncoastal exposures is improved because of
the generally less severe wind exposure and the shielding provided when trees are
present. However, trees become less reliable sources of protection in more
extreme hurricane-prone areas.
Northridge Earthquake
While the performance of houses in earthquakes provides objective data
for measuring the acceptability of past and present seismic design and building
construction practices, typical damage assessments have been based on “worst-
case” observations of the most catastrophic forms of damage, leading to a skewed
view of the performance of the overall population of structures. The information
presented in this section is, however, based on two related studies that, like the
hurricane studies, rely on objective methods to document and evaluate the overall
performance of single-family attached and detached dwellings (HUD, 1994;
HUD, 1999).
The Northridge Earthquake occurred at 4:31 a.m. on January 17, 1994.
Estimates of the severity of the event place it at a magnitude of 6.4 on the Richter
scale (Hall, 1994). Although considered a moderately strong tremor, the Northridge
Earthquake produced some of the worst ground motions in recorded history for the
United States, with estimated return periods of more than 10,000 years. For the most
part, these extreme ground motions were highly localized and not necessarily
representative of the general near-field conditions that produced ground motions
representative of a 200- to 500-year return period event (HUD, 1999).
Table 1.4 summarizes the single-family detached housing characteristics
documented in the survey. About 90 percent of the homes in the sample were built
before the 1971 San Fernando Valley Earthquake, at which time simple prescriptive
requirements were normal for single-family detached home construction. About 60
percent of the homes were built during the 1950s and 1960s, with the rest

1-22 Residential Structural Design Guide
Chapter 1 - Basics of Residential Construction
constructed between the 1920s and early 1990s. Styles ranged from complex custom
homes to simple affordable homes. All homes in the sample had wood exterior wall
framing, and most did not use structural sheathing for wall bracing. Instead, wood
let-in braces, Portland cement stucco, and interior wall finishes of plaster or gypsum
wall board provided lateral racking resistance. Most of the crawl space foundations
used full-height concrete or masonry stem walls, not wood cripple walls that are
known to be prone to damage when not properly braced.
TABLE 1.4
Construction Characteristics of Sampled Single-Family
Detached Dwellings
Component Frequency of Construction Characteristics
Number of stories 79% one 18% two 3% other
Wall sheathing 80% none 7% plywood 13% unknown
Foundation type 68% crawl space 34% slab 8% other
Exterior finish 50% stucco/mix 45% stucco only 6% other
Interior finish 60% plaster board 26% gypsum board 14% other/unknown
Source: HUD, 1994.
Table 1.5 shows the performance of the sampled single-family detached
homes. Performance is represented by the percent of the total sample of homes that
fell within four damage rating categories for various components of the structure
(HUD, 1994).
TABLE 1.5
Damage to Sampled Single-Family Detached Homes in the
Northridge Earthquake (percent of sampled homes)
Estimated Damage within
Survey Area
No Damage Low Damage Moderate Damage High Damage
Foundation 90.2% 8.0% 0.9% 0.9%
Walls 98.1% 1.9% 0.0% 0.0%
Roof 99.4% 0.6% 0.0% 0.0%
Exterior finish 50.7% 46.1% 2.9% 0.3%
Interior finish 49.8% 46.0% 4.2% 0.0%
Source: HUD, 1994.
Serious structural damage to foundations, wall framing, and roof framing
was limited to a small proportion of the surveyed homes. In general, the homes
suffered minimal damage to the elements that are critical to occupant safety. Of the
structural elements, damage was most common in foundation systems. The small
percent of surveyed homes (about 2 percent) that experienced moderate to high
foundation damage were located in areas that endured localized ground effects (i.e.,
fissuring or liquefaction) or problems associated with steep hillside sites.
Interior and exterior finishes suffered more widespread damage, with only
about half the residences escaping unscathed. However, most of the interior/exterior
finish damage in single-family detached homes was limited to the lowest rating
categories. Damage to stucco usually appeared as hairline cracks radiating from the
corners of openings—particularly larger openings such as garage doors—or along
the tops of foundations. Interior finish damage paralleled the occurrence of exterior

Residential Structural Design Guide 1-23
Chapter 1 - Basics of Residential Construction
finish (stucco) damage. Resilient finishes—such as wood panel or lap board
siding—fared well and often showed no evidence of damage even when stucco on
other areas of the same unit was moderately damaged. However, these seemingly
minor types of damage were undoubtedly a major source of the economic impact in
terms of insurance claims and repair cost. In addition, it is often difficult to separate
the damage into categories of “structural” and “nonstructural,” particularly when
some systems, such as Portland cement stucco, are used as an exterior cladding as
well as structural bracing. It is also important to recognize that the Northridge
Earthquake is not considered a “maximum” earthquake event.
The key findings of an evaluation of the above performance data are
summarized below (HUD, 1999). Overall, the damage relative to key design
features showed no discernable pattern, implying great uncertainties in seismic
design and building performance that may not be effectively addressed by simply
making buildings “stronger.”
The amount of wall bracing using conventional stucco and let-in braces
typically ranged from 30 to 60 percent of the wall length (based on the street-
facing walls of the sampled one-story homes). However, there was no observable
or statistically significant trend between amount of damage and amount of stucco
wall bracing. Since current seismic design theory implies that more bracing is
better, the Northridge findings are fundamentally challenging yet offer little in the
way of a better design theory. At best, the result may be explained by the fact that
numerous factors govern the performance of a particular building in a major
seismic event. For example, conventional seismic design, while intending to do
so, may not effectively consider the optimization of flexibility, ductility,
dampening, and strength–all of which are seemingly important.
The horizontal ground motions experienced over the sample region for the
study ranged from 0.26 to 2.7 g for the short-period (0.2 second) spectral response
acceleration and from 0.10 to 1.17 g for the long-period (1 second) spectral
response acceleration. The near-field ground motions represent a range between
the 100- and 14,000-year return period, but a 200- to 500-year return period is
more representative of the general ground motion experienced. The short-period
ground motion (typically used in the design of light-frame structures) had no
apparent correlation with the amount of damage observed in the sampled homes,
although a slight trend with respect to the long-period ground motion was
observed in the data.
The Northridge damage survey and evaluation of statistical data suggest
the following conclusions and recommendations (HUD, 1994; HUD, 1999):
• Severe structural damage to single-family detached homes was
infrequent and primarily limited to foundation systems. Less than 2
percent of single-family detached homes suffered moderate to high
levels of foundation damage, and most occurrences were associated with
localized site conditions, including liquefaction, fissuring, and steep
hillsides.
• Structural damage to wall and roof framing in single-family detached
homes was limited to low levels for about 2 percent of the walls and for
less than 1 percent of all roofs.
• Exterior stucco and interior finishes experienced the most widespread
damage, with 50 percent of all single-family detached homes suffering at

1-24 Residential Structural Design Guide
Chapter 1 - Basics of Residential Construction
least minor damage and roughly 4 percent of homes sustaining moderate
to high damage. Common finish damage was related to stucco and
drywall/plaster cracks emanating from the foundation or wall openings.
• Homes on slab foundations suffered some degree of damage to exterior
stucco finishes in about 30 percent of the sample; crawl space homes
approached a 60 percent stucco damage rate that was commonly
associated with the flexibility of the wall-floor-foundation interface.
• Peak ground motion records in the near-field did not prove to be a
significant factor in relation to the level of damage as indicated by the
occurrence of stucco cracking. Peak ground acceleration may not of itself
be a reliable design parameter in relation to the seismic performance of
light-frame homes. Similarly, the amount of stucco wall bracing on
street-facing walls showed a negligible relationship with the variable
amount of damage experienced in the sampled housing.
Some basic design recommendations call for
• simplifying seismic design requirements to a degree commensurate
with knowledge and uncertainty regarding how homes actually
perform (see Chapter 3);
• using fully sheathed construction in high-hazard seismic regions (see
Chapter 6);
• taking design precautions or avoiding steeply sloped sites or sites
with weak soils; and,
• when possible, avoiding brittle interior and exterior wall finish
systems in high-hazard seismic regions.
1.7 Summary
Housing in the United States has evolved over time under the influence of
a variety of factors. While available resources and the economy continue to play a
significant role, building codes, consumer preferences, and alternative
construction materials are becoming increasingly important factors. In particular,
many local building codes in the United States now require homes to be specially
designed rather than following conventional construction practices. In part, this
apparent trend may be attributed to changing perceptions regarding housing
performance in high-risk areas. Therefore, greater emphasis must be placed on
efficient structural design of housing. While efficient design should also strive to
improve construction quality through simplified construction, it also places
greater importance on the quality of installation required to achieve the intended
performance without otherwise relying on “overdesign” to compensate partially
for real or perceived problems in installation quality.

Residential Structural Design Guide 1-25
Chapter 1 - Basics of Residential Construction
1.8 References
ACI, Building Code Requirements for Masonry Structures, ACI Standard 530,
American Concrete Institute, Farmington Hills, MI, 1999.
ACI, Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete and Commentary, ACI
Standard 318, American Concrete Institute, Farmington Hills, MI, 1999.
AF&PA, National Design Specification for Wood Construction and Supplement,
American Forest & Paper Association, Washington, DC, 1997.
ASCE, Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures, ASCE
Standard 7-98, American Society of Civil Engineers, Reston, VA, 1999.
BOCA, National Building Code (NBC), Building Officials and Code
Administrators International, Inc. (BOCA), Country Club Hills, IL, 1999.
HEW, Light Frame House Construction, Vocational Division Bulletin No. 145,
U.S. Department of Health, Education, and Welfare (HEW) (GPO:
Washington, DC), 1931 (reprinted 1956).
Hall, John F., “Northridge Earthquake January 17, 1994: Preliminary
Reconnaissance Report,” Earthquake Engineering Research Institute,
Oakland, CA, March 1994.
HUD, Alternative Framing Materials in Residential Construction: Three Case
Studies, prepared by the NAHB Research Center, Inc., for the U.S.
Department of Housing and Urban Development, Washington, DC, 1994.
HUD, Assessment of Damage to Residential Buildings Caused by the Northridge
Earthquake, prepared by the NAHB Research Center, Inc., for the U.S.
Department of Housing and Urban Development, Washington, DC, 1994.
HUD, Assessment of Damage to Single-Family Homes Caused by Hurricanes
Andrew and Iniki, prepared by the NAHB Research Center, Inc., for the U.S.
Department of Housing and Urban Development, Washington, DC, 1993.
HUD, Evaluation of Housing Performance and Seismic Design Implications in the
Northridge Earthquake, prepared by the NAHB Research Center, Inc., for
the U.S. Department of Housing and Urban Development, Washington, DC,
1999.
HUD, Insulating Concrete Forms: Installed Cost and Acoustic Performance,
prepared by the NAHB Research Center, Inc., for the Portland Cement
Association, National Association of Home Builders, and U.S. Department
of Housing and Urban Development, Washington, DC, 1998.

1-26 Residential Structural Design Guide
Chapter 1 - Basics of Residential Construction
HUD, Prescriptive Method for Insulating Concrete Forms in Residential
Construction, prepared by the NAHB Research Center, Inc., for the
Portland Cement Association, National Association of Home Builders, and
U.S. Department of Housing and Urban Development, Washington, DC,
1998.
HUD, Prescriptive Method for Residential Cold-Formed Steel Framing, Second
Edition, prepared by the NAHB Research Center, Inc., for the American
Iron and Steel Institute, National Association of Home Builders, and U.S.
Department of Housing and Urban Development, Washington, DC, 1997.
HUD, Reliability of Conventional Residential Construction: An Assessment of
Roof Component Performance in Hurricane Andrew and Typical Wind
Regions of the United States, prepared by the NAHB Research Center,
Inc., for the U.S. Department of Housing and Urban Development,
Washington, DC, 1998.
ICBO, Uniform Building Code (UBC), International Conference of Building
Officials (ICBO), Whittier, CA, 1997.
ICC, International Building Code–2000 Edition, International Code Council, Inc.,
Falls Church, VA, 1999 (final draft).
ICC, International One- and Two-Family Dwelling Code, International Code
Council, Inc., Falls Church, VA, 1998.
ICC, International Residential Code for One- and Two-Family Dwellings–2000
Edition, International Code Council, Inc., Falls Church, VA, 1999 (final
draft).
Kozak, R. and Cohen, D., “Architects and Structural Engineers: An Examination
of Wood Design and Use in Nonresidential Construction,” Forest
Products Journal, Vol. 49 No. 4., April 1999, 37-46.
NAHB, Cost-Effective Home Building: A Design and Construction Handbook,
prepared by the NAHB Research Center, Inc., for the National Association
of Home Builders (NAHB), Washington, DC, 1994.
NAHB, Wood Frame House Construction, Second Edition, edited by Robert
Stroh, Ph.D., and Gerald Sherwood, P.E., Delmar Publications and
NAHB Home Builder Press, Washington, DC, 1992.
NAHBRC, Assessment of Damage to Homes Caused by Hurricane Opal,
prepared for the Florida State Home Builders Association by the NAHB
Research Center, Inc., Upper Marlboro, MD, 1996.
NAHBRC, Building with Alternatives to Lumber and Plywood, NAHB Research
Center, Inc., and Home Builder Press, Washington, DC, 1994.

Residential Structural Design Guide 1-27
Chapter 1 - Basics of Residential Construction
NAHBRC, Survey of Builder Practices, NAHB Research Center, Inc., Upper
Marlboro, MD, 1998.
ONHWP/CMHC, Defect Prevention Research Project for Part 9 Houses, Final
Report, prepared for the Ontario New Home Warranty Program
(ONHWP) and Canada Mortgage and Housing Corporation (CMHC) by
Protor & Redfern Ltd., Don Mills, Ontario, October 1993 (revised
November 1994).
Powell, M.D. and Houston, S.H., “Hurricane Opal at Landfall: A Complex
Surface Wind Field,” preliminary draft, NOAA–Hurricane Research
Division, Miami, FL, December 18, 1995.
Reinhold, T.A., Vickery, P.J., and Powell, M.D. “Windspeeds in Hurricane
Andrew: Myths and Reality,” 7th U.S. National Conference on Wind
Engineering, University of California, Los Angeles, CA, 1993, 553-562.
SBCCI, Standard Building Code (SBC), Southern Building Code Congress
International, Inc. (SBCCI), Birmingham, AL, 1999.
Vickery, P.J., Skerlj, P.F., Steckley, A.C., and Twisdale, L.A., Simulation of
Hurricane Risk in the United States Using an Empirical Storm Track
Modeling Technique, Applied Research Associates, Raleigh, NC, 1998.
Vickery, P.J. and Twisdale, L.A., “Prediction of Hurricane Wind Speeds in the
United States,” Journal of Structural Engineering, American Society of
Civil Engineers, Reston, VA, November 1995, 1691-1699.
Wagner, Willis H., Modern Carpentry–Building Construction Details in Easy-to-
Understand Form, Goodheart-Willcox Company, Inc., South Holland, IL,
1992.

1-28 Residential Structural Design Guide
Chapter 1 - Basics of Residential Construction

Residential Structural Design Guide 2-1
y
x
CHAPTER 2
Structural Design
Concepts
2.1 General
This chapter reviews some fundamental concepts of structural design and
presents them in a manner relevant to the design of light-frame residential
structures. The concepts form the basis for understanding the design procedures
and overall design approach addressed in the remaining chapters of the guide.
With this conceptual background, it is hoped that the designer will gain a greater
appreciation for creative and efficient design of homes, particularly the many
assumptions that must be made.
2.2 What Is Structural Design?
The process of structural design is simple in concept but complex in detail.
It involves the analysis of a proposed structure to show that its resistance or
strength will meet or exceed a reasonable expectation. This expectation is usually
expressed by a specified load or demand and an acceptable margin of safety that
constitutes a performance goal for a structure.
The performance goals of structural design are multifaceted. Foremost, a
structure must perform its intended function safely over its useful life. Safety is
discussed later in this chapter. The concept of useful life implies considerations of
durability and establishes the basis for considering the cumulative exposure to
time-varying risks (i.e., corrosive environments, occupant loads, snow loads, wind
loads, and seismic loads). Given, however, that performance is inextricably linked
to cost, owners, builders, and designers must consider economic limits to the
primary goals of safety and durability.
The appropriate balance between the two competing considerations of
performance and cost is a discipline that guides the “art” of determining value in
building design and construction. However, value is judged by the “eye of the

y
x
2-2 Residential Structural Design Guide
Chapter 2 – Structural Design Concepts
beholder,” and what is an acceptable value to one person may not be acceptable
value to another (i.e., too costly versus not safe enough or not important versus
important). For this reason, political processes mediate minimum goals for
building design and structural performance, with minimum value decisions
embodied in building codes and engineering standards that are adopted as law.
In view of the above discussion, a structural designer may appear to have
little control over the fundamental goals of structural design, except to comply
with or exceed the minimum limits established by law. While this is generally
true, a designer can still do much to optimize a design through alternative means
and methods that call for more efficient analysis techniques, creative design
detailing, and the use of innovative construction materials and methods.
In summary, the goals of structural design are generally defined by law
and reflect the collective interpretation of general public welfare by those
involved in the development and local adoption of building codes. The designer's
role is to meet the goals of structural design as efficiently as possible and to
satisfy a client’s objectives within the intent of the building code. Designers must
bring to bear the fullest extent of their abilities, including creativity, knowledge,
experience, judgment, ethics, and communication–aspects of design that are
within the control of the individual designer and integral to a comprehensive
approach to design. Structural design is much, much more than simply crunching
numbers.
2.3 Load Conditions and Structural
System Response
The concepts presented in this section provide an overview of building
loads and their effect on the structural response of typical wood-framed homes.
As shown in Table 2.1, building loads can be divided into two types based on the
orientation of the structural actions or forces that they induce: vertical loads and
horizontal (i.e., lateral) loads.
TABLE 2.1 Building Loads Categorized by Orientation
Vertical Loads Horizontal (Lateral) Loads
• Dead (gravity) • Wind
• Live (gravity) • Seismic (horizontal ground motion)
• Snow (gravity) • Flood (static and dynamic hydraulic forces)
• Wind (uplift on roof) • Soil (active lateral pressure)
• Seismic and wind (overturning)
• Seismic (vertical ground motion)

y
x
Residential Structural Design Guide 2-3
Chapter 2 – Structural Design Concepts
2.3.1 Vertical Loads
Gravity loads act in the same direction as gravity (i.e., downward or
vertically) and include dead, live, and snow loads. They are generally static in
nature and usually considered a uniformly distributed or concentrated load. Thus,
determining a gravity load on a beam or column is a relatively simple exercise
that uses the concept of tributary areas to assign loads to structural elements. The
tributary area is the area of the building construction that is supported by a
structural element, including the dead load (i.e., weight of the construction) and
any applied loads (i.e., live load). For example, the tributary gravity load on a
floor joist would include the uniform floor load (dead and live) applied to the area
of floor supported by the individual joist. The structural designer then selects a
standard beam or column model to analyze bearing connection forces (i.e.,
reactions), internal stresses (i.e., bending stresses, shear stresses, and axial
stresses), and stability of the structural member or system; refer to Appendix A
for beam equations. The selection of an appropriate analytic model is, however,
no trivial matter, especially if the structural system departs significantly from
traditional engineering assumptions that are based on rigid body and elastic
behavior. Such departures from traditional assumptions are particularly relevant to
the structural systems that comprise many parts of a house, but to varying
degrees.
Wind uplift forces are generated by negative (suction) pressures acting in
an outward direction from the surface of the roof in response to the aerodynamics
of wind flowing over and around the building. As with gravity loads, the
influence of wind uplift pressures on a structure or assembly (i.e., roof) are
analyzed by using the concept of tributary areas and uniformly distributed loads.
The major difference is that wind pressures act perpendicular to the building
surface (not in the direction of gravity) and that pressures vary according to the
size of the tributary area and its location on the building, particularly proximity to
changes in geometry (e.g., eaves, corners, and ridges). Even though the wind
loads are dynamic and highly variable, the design approach is based on a
maximum static load (i.e., pressure) equivalent.
Vertical forces are also created by overturning reactions due to wind and
seismic lateral loads acting on the overall building and its lateral force resisting
systems. Earthquakes also produce vertical ground motions or accelerations which
increase the effect of gravity loads. However, vertical earthquake loads are
usually considered to be implicitly addressed in the gravity load analysis of a
light-frame building.
2.3.2 Lateral Loads
The primary loads that produce lateral forces on buildings are attributable
to forces associated with wind, seismic ground motion, floods, and soil. Wind and
seismic lateral loads apply to the entire building. Lateral forces from wind are
generated by positive wind pressures on the windward face of the building and by
negative pressures on the leeward face of the building, creating a combined push-
and-pull effect. Seismic lateral forces are generated by a structure’s dynamic
inertial response to cyclic ground movement. The magnitude of the seismic shear

y
x
2-4 Residential Structural Design Guide
Chapter 2 – Structural Design Concepts
(i.e., lateral) load depends on the magnitude of the ground motion, the building’s
mass, and the dynamic structural response characteristics (i.e., dampening,
ductility, natural period of vibration, etc.). For houses and other similar low-rise
structures, a simplified seismic load analysis employs equivalent static forces
based on fundamental Newtonian mechanics (F=ma) with somewhat subjective
(i.e., experience-based) adjustments to account for inelastic, ductile response
characteristics of various building systems. Flood loads are generally minimized
by elevating the structure on a properly designed foundation or avoided by not
building in a flood plain. Lateral loads from moving flood waters and static
hydraulic pressure are substantial. Soil lateral loads apply specifically to
foundation wall design, mainly as an “out-of-plane” bending load on the wall.
Lateral loads also produce an overturning moment that must be offset by
the dead load and connections of the building. Therefore, overturning forces on
connections designed to restrain components from rotating or the building from
overturning must be considered. Since wind is capable of generating simultaneous
roof uplift and lateral loads, the uplift component of the wind load exacerbates the
overturning tension forces due to the lateral component of the wind load.
Conversely, the dead load may be sufficient to offset the overturning and uplift
forces as is often the case in lower design wind conditions and in many seismic
design conditions.
2.3.3 Structural Systems
As far back as 1948, it was determined that “conventions in general use
for wood, steel and concrete structures are not very helpful for designing houses
because few are applicable” (NBS, 1948). More specifically, the NBS document
encourages the use of more advanced methods of structural analysis for homes.
Unfortunately, the study in question and all subsequent studies addressing the
topic of system performance in housing have not led to the development or
application of any significant improvement in the codified design practice as
applied to housing systems. This lack of application is partly due to the
conservative nature of the engineering process and partly due to the difficulty of
translating the results of narrowly-focused structural systems studies to general
design applications. Since this document is narrowly scoped to address residential
construction, relevant system-based studies and design information for housing
are discussed, referenced, and applied as appropriate.
If a structural member is part of a system, as is typically the case in light-
frame residential construction, its response is altered by the strength and stiffness
characteristics of the system as a whole. In general, system performance includes
two basic concepts known as load sharing and composite action. Load sharing is
found in repetitive member systems (i.e., wood framing) and reflects the ability of
the load on one member to be shared by another or, in the case of a uniform load,
the ability of some of the load on a weaker member to be carried by adjacent
members. Composite action is found in assemblies of components that, when
connected to one another, form a “composite member” with greater capacity and
stiffness than the sum of the component parts. However, the amount of composite
action in a system depends on the manner in which the various system elements
are connected. The aim is to achieve a higher effective section modulus than the

y
x
Residential Structural Design Guide 2-5
Chapter 2 – Structural Design Concepts
component members taken separately. For example, when floor sheathing is
nailed and glued to floor joists, the floor system realizes a greater degree of
composite action than a floor with sheathing that is merely nailed; the adhesive
between components helps prevent shear slippage, particularly if a rigid adhesive
is used. Slippage due to shear stresses transferred between the component parts
necessitates consideration of partial composite action, which depends on the
stiffness of an assembly’s connections. Therefore, consideration of the floor as a
system of fully composite T-beams may lead to an unconservative solution
whereas the typical approach of only considering the floor joist member without
composite system effect will lead to a conservative design.
This guide addresses the strength-enhancing effect of load sharing and
partial composite action when information is available for practical design
guidance. Establishment of repetitive-member increase factors (also called system
factors) for general design use is a difficult task because the amount of system
effect can vary substantially depending on system assembly and materials.
Therefore, system factors for general design use are necessarily conservative to
cover broad conditions. Those that more accurately depict system effects also
require a more exact description of and compliance with specific assembly details
and material specifications.
It should be recognized, however, that system effects do not only affect
the strength and stiffness of light-frame assemblies (including walls, floors, and
roofs). They also alter the classical understanding of how loads are transferred
among the various assemblies of a complex structural system, including a
complete wood-framed home. For example, floor joists are sometimes doubled
under nonload-bearing partition walls “because of the added dead load and
resulting stresses” determined in accordance with accepted engineering practice.
Such practice is based on a conservative assumption regarding the load path and
the structural response. That is, the partition wall does create an additional load,
but the partition wall is relatively rigid and actually acts as a deep beam,
particularly when the top and bottom are attached to the ceiling and floor framing,
respectively. As the floor is loaded and deflects, the interior wall helps resist the
load. Of course, the magnitude of effect depends on the wall configuration (i.e.,
amount of openings) and other factors.
The above example of composite action due to the interaction of separate
structural systems or subassemblies points to the improved structural response of
the floor system such that it is able to carry more dead and live load than if the
partition wall were absent. One whole-house assembly test has demonstrated this
effect (Hurst, 1965). Hence, a double joist should not be required under a typical
nonload-bearing partition; in fact, a single joist may not even be required directly
below the partition, assuming that the floor sheathing is adequately specified to
support the partition between the joists. While this condition cannot yet be
duplicated in a standard analytic form conducive to simple engineering analysis, a
designer should be aware of the concept when making design assumptions
regarding light-frame residential construction.
At this point, the reader should consider that the response of a structural
system, not just its individual elements, determines the manner in which a
structure distributes and resists horizontal and vertical loads. For wood-framed
systems, the departure from calculations based on classical engineering mechanics

y
x
2-6 Residential Structural Design Guide
Chapter 2 – Structural Design Concepts
(i.e., single members with standard tributary areas and assumed elastic behavior)
and simplistic assumptions regarding load path can be substantial.
2.4 Load Path
Loads produce stresses on various systems, members, and connections as
load-induced forces are transferred down through the structure to the ground. The
path through which loads are transferred is known as the load path. A continuous
load path is capable of resisting and transferring the loads that are realized
throughout the structure from the point of load origination down to the
foundation.
As noted, the load path in a conventional home may be extremely complex
because of the structural configuration and system effects that can result in
substantial load sharing, partial composite action, and a redistribution of forces
that depart from traditional engineering concepts. In fact, such complexity is an
advantage that often goes overlooked in typical engineering analyses.
Further, because interior nonload-bearing partitions are usually ignored in
a structural analysis, the actual load distribution is likely to be markedly different
from that assumed in an elementary structural analysis. However, a strict
accounting of structural effects would require analytic methods that are not yet
available for general use. Even if it were possible to capture the full structural
effects, future alterations to the building interior could effectively change the
system upon which the design was based. Thus, there are practical and technical
limits to the consideration of system effects and their relationships to the load
path in homes.
2.4.1 The Vertical Load Path
Figures 2.1 and 2.2 illustrate vertically oriented loads created,
respectively, by gravity and wind uplift. It should be noted that the wind uplift
load originates on the roof from suction forces that act perpendicular to the
exterior surface of the roof as well as from internal pressure acting perpendicular
to the interior surface of the roof-ceiling assembly in an outward direction. In
addition, overturning forces resulting from lateral wind or seismic forces create
vertical uplift loads (not shown in Figure 2.2). In fact, a separate analysis of the
lateral load path usually addresses overturning forces, necessitating separate
overturning connections for buildings located in high-hazard wind or seismic
areas (see Section 2.3). As addressed in Chapter 6, it may be feasible to combine
these vertical forces and design a simple load path to accommodate wind uplift
and overturning forces simultaneously.

y
x
Residential Structural Design Guide 2-7
Chapter 2 – Structural Design Concepts
FIGURE 2.1 Illustration of the Vertical Load Path for Gravity Loads

y
x
2-8 Residential Structural Design Guide
Chapter 2 – Structural Design Concepts
FIGURE 2.2 Illustration of the Vertical Load Path for Wind Uplift

y
x
Residential Structural Design Guide 2-9
Chapter 2 – Structural Design Concepts
In a typical two-story home, the load path for gravity loads and wind uplift
involves the following structural elements:
• roof sheathing;
• roof sheathing attachment;
• roof framing member (rafter or truss);
• roof-to-wall connection;
• second-story wall components (top plate, studs, sole plate, headers,
wall sheathing, and their interconnections);
• second-story-wall-to-second-floor connection;
• second-floor-to-first-story-wall connection;
• first-story wall components (same as second story);
• first-story-wall-to-first-floor or foundation connection;
• first-floor-to-foundation connection; and
• foundation construction.
From the above list, it is obvious that there are numerous members,
assemblies, and connections to consider in tracking the gravity and wind uplift
load paths in a typical wood-framed home. The load path itself is complex, even
for elements such as headers that are generally considered simple beams. Usually,
the header is part of a structural system (see Figure 2.1), not an individual element
single-handedly resisting the entire load originating from above. Thus, a framing
system around a wall opening, not just a header, comprises a load path.
Figure 2.1 also demonstrates the need for appropriately considering the
combination of loads as the load moves “down” the load path. Elements that
experience loads from multiple sources (e.g., the roof and one or more floors) can
be significantly overdesigned if design loads are not proportioned or reduced to
account for the improbability that all loads will occur at the same time. Of course,
the dead load is always present, but the live loads are transient; even when one
floor load is at its life-time maximum, it is likely that the others will be at only a
fraction of their design load. Current design load standards generally allow for
multiple transient load reductions. However, with multiple transient load
reduction factors intended for general use, they may not effectively address
conditions relevant to a specific type of construction (i.e., residential).
Consider the soil-bearing reaction at the bottom of the footing in Figure
2.1. As implied by the illustration, the soil-bearing force is equivalent to the sum
of all tributary loads–dead and live. However, it is important to understand the
combined load in the context of design loads. Floor design live loads are based on
a life-time maximum estimate for a single floor in a single level of a building.
But, in the case of homes, the upper and lower stories or occupancy conditions
typically differ. When one load is at its maximum, the other is likely to be at a
fraction of its maximum. Yet, designers are not able to consider the live loads of
the two floors as separate transient loads because specific guidance is not
currently available. In concept, the combined live load should therefore be
reduced by an appropriate factor, or one of the loads should be set at a point-in-
time value that is a fraction of its design live load. For residential construction, the
floor design live load is either 30 psf (for bedroom areas) or 40 psf (for other
areas), although some codes require a design floor live load of 40 psf for all areas.

y
x
2-10 Residential Structural Design Guide
Chapter 2 – Structural Design Concepts
In contrast, average sustained live loads during typical use conditions are about 6
psf (with one standard deviation of 3 psf), which is about 15 to 20 percent of the
design live load (Chalk and Corotis, 1980). If actual loading conditions are not
rationally considered in a design, the result may be excessive footing widths,
header sizes, and so forth.
When tracking the wind uplift load path (Figure 2.2), the designer must
consider the offsetting effect of the dead load as it increases down the load path.
However, it should be noted that building codes and design standards do not
permit the consideration of any part of the sustained live load in offsetting wind
uplift, even though it is highly probable that some minimum point-in-time value
of floor live load is present if the building is in use, i.e., furnished and/or
occupied. In addition, other “nonengineered” load paths, such as provided by
interior walls and partitions, are not typically considered. While these are prudent
limits, they help explain why certain structures may not “calculate” but otherwise
perform adequately.
Depending on the code, it is also common to consider only two-thirds of
the dead load when analyzing a structure’s net wind uplift forces. The two-thirds
provision is a way of preventing the potential error of requiring insufficient
connections where a zero uplift value is calculated in accordance with a nominal
design wind load (as opposed to the ultimate wind event that is implied by the use
of a safety margin for material strength in unison with a nominal design wind
speed). Furthermore, code developers have expressed a concern that engineers
might overestimate actual dead loads.
For complicated house configurations, a load of any type may vary
considerably at different points in the structure, necessitating a decision of
whether to design for the worst case or to accommodate the variations. Often the
worst-case condition is applied to the entire structure even when only a limited
part of the structure is affected. For example, a floor joist or header may be sized
for the worst-case span and used throughout the structure. The worst-case
decision is justified only when the benefit of a more intensive design effort is not
offset by a significant cost reduction. It is also important to be mindful of the
greater construction complexity that usually results from a more detailed analysis
of various design conditions. Simplification and cost reduction are both important
design objectives, but they may often be mutually exclusive. However, the
consideration of system effects in design, as discussed earlier, may result in both
simplification and cost efficiencies that improve the quality of the finished
product.
One helpful attribute of traditional platform-framed home construction is
that the floor and roof gravity loads are typically transferred through bearing
points, not connections. Thus, connections may contribute little to the structural
performance of homes with respect to vertical loads associated with gravity (i.e.,
dead, live, and snow loads). While outdoor deck collapses have occurred on
occasion, the failure in most instances is associated with an inadequate or
deteriorated connection to the house, not a bearing connection.
By contrast, metal plate-connected roof and floor trusses rely on
connections to resist gravity loads, but these engineered components are designed
and produced in accordance with a proven standard and are generally highly
reliable (TPI, 1996). Indeed, the metal plate-connected wood truss was first
conceived in Florida in the 1950s to respond to the need for improved roof

y
x
Residential Structural Design Guide 2-11
Chapter 2 – Structural Design Concepts
structural performance, particularly with respect to connections in roof
construction (WTCA, 1998).
In high-wind climates where the design wind uplift load approaches the
offsetting dead load, the consideration of connection design in wood-framed
assemblies becomes critical for roofs, walls, and floors. In fact, the importance of
connections in conventionally built homes is evidenced by the common loss of
weakly attached roof sheathing or roofs in extreme wind events such as moderate-
to large-magnitude hurricanes.
Newer prescriptive code provisions have addressed many of the historic
structural wind damage problems by specifying more stringent general
requirements (SBCCI, 1999; AF&PA, 1996). In many cases, the newer high-wind
prescriptive construction requirements may be improved by more efficient site-
specific design solutions that consider wind exposure, system effects, and other
analytic improvements. The same can be said for prescriptive seismic provisions
found in the latest building codes for conventional residential construction (ICC,
1999; ICBO, 1997).
2.4.2 Lateral Load Path
The overall system that provides lateral resistance and stability to a
building is known as the lateral force resisting system (LFRS). In light-frame
construction, the LFRS includes shear walls and horizontal diaphragms. Shear
walls are walls that are typically braced or clad with structural sheathing panels to
resist racking forces. Horizontal diaphragms are floor and roof assemblies that are
also usually clad with structural sheathing panels. Though more complicated and
difficult to visualize, the lateral forces imposed on a building from wind or
seismic action also follow a load path that distributes and transfers shear and
overturning forces from lateral loads. The lateral loads of primary interest are
those resulting from
• the horizontal component of wind pressures on the building’s exterior
surface area; and
• the inertial response of a building’s mass and structural system to
seismic ground motions.
As seen in Figure 2.3, the lateral load path in wood-framed construction
involves entire structural assemblies (i.e., walls, floors, and roofs) and their
interconnections, not just individual elements or frames as would be the case with
typical steel or concrete buildings that use discrete braced framing systems. The
distribution of loads in Figure 2.3’s three-dimensional load path depends on the
relative stiffness of the various components, connections, and assemblies that
comprise the LFRS. To complicate the problem further, stiffness is difficult to
determine due to the nonlinearity of the load-displacement characteristics of
wood-framed assemblies and their interconnections. Figure 2.4 illustrates a
deformed light-frame building under lateral load; the deformations are
exaggerated for conceptual purposes.

y
x
2-12 Residential Structural Design Guide
Chapter 2 – Structural Design Concepts
FIGURE 2.3 Illustration of the Lateral Load Path

y
x
Residential Structural Design Guide 2-13
Chapter 2 – Structural Design Concepts
FIGURE 2.4 Illustration of Building Deformation under Lateral Load

y
x
2-14 Residential Structural Design Guide
Chapter 2 – Structural Design Concepts
Lateral forces from wind and seismic loads also create overturning forces
that cause a “tipping” or “roll-over” effect. When these forces are resisted, a
building is prevented from overturning in the direction of the lateral load. On a
smaller scale than the whole building, overturning forces are realized at the shear
walls of the LFRS such that the shear walls must be restrained from rotating or
rocking on their base by proper connection. On an even smaller scale, the forces
are realized in the individual shear wall segments between openings in the walls.
As shown in Figure 2.3, the overturning forces are not necessarily distributed as
might be predicted. The magnitude and distribution of the overturning force can
depart significantly from a typical engineering analysis depending on the building
or wall configuration.
The overturning force diagrams in Figure 2.3 are based on conventionally
built homes constructed without hold-down devices positioned to restrain shear
wall segments independently. It should be noted that the effect of dead loads that
may offset the overturning force and of wind uplift loads that may increase the
overturning force is not necessarily depicted in Figure 2.3’s conceptual plots of
overturning forces at the base of the walls. If rigid steel hold-down devices are
used in designing the LFRS, the wall begins to behave in a manner similar to a
rigid body at the level of individual shear wall segments, particularly when the
wall is broken into discrete segments as a result of the configuration of openings
in a wall line.
In summary, significant judgment and uncertainty attend the design
process for determining building loads and resistance, including definition of the
load path and the selection of suitable analytic methods. Designers are often
compelled to comply with somewhat arbitrary design provisions or engineering
conventions, even when such conventions are questionable or incomplete for
particular applications such as a wood-framed home. At the same time, individual
designers are not always equipped with sufficient technical information or
experience to depart from traditional design conventions. Therefore, this guide is
intended to serve as a resource for designers who are considering the use of
improved analytic methods when current analytic approaches may be lacking.
2.5 Structural Safety
Before addressing the “nuts and bolts” of structural design of single-
family dwellings, it is important to understand the fundamental concept of safety.
While safety is generally based on rational principles of risk and probability
theory, it is also subject to judgment, particularly the experience and
understanding of those who participate in the development of building codes and
design standards. For this reason, it is not uncommon to find differences in
various code-approved sources for design loads, load combinations, load factors,
and other features that affect structural safety and design economy. Despite these
inconsistencies, the aim of any design approach is to ensure that the probability of
failure (i.e., load exceeding resistance) is acceptably small or, conversely, that the
level of safety is sufficiently high.
A common misconception holds that design loads determine the amount of
“safety” achieved. It is for this reason that some people tend to focus on design
loads to solve real or perceived problems associated with structural performance

y
x
Residential Structural Design Guide 2-15
Chapter 2 – Structural Design Concepts
(i.e., safety or property damage). For example, a typical conclusion reached in the
aftermath of Hurricane Andrew was that the storm’s wind speed exceeded the
design wind speed map value; therefore, the wind map (i.e., design load) was
insufficient. In other cases, such as the Northridge Earthquake, reaction to various
anecdotal observations resulted in increased safety factors for certain materials
(i.e., wood design values were decreased by 25 percent by the City of Los
Angeles, California). In reality, several factors affect the level of safety just as
several factors determine the level of performance realized by buildings in a
single extreme event such as Hurricane Andrew or the Northridge Earthquake
(see Chapter 1).
Structural safety is a multifaceted performance goal that integrates all
objective and subjective aspects of the design process, including the following
major variables:
• determination of characteristic material or assembly strength values
based on tested material properties and their variabilities;
• application of a nominal or design load based on a statistical
representation of load data and the data’s uncertainty or variability;
• consideration of various uncertainties associated with the design
practice (e.g., competency of designers and accuracy of analytic
approaches), the construction practice (e.g., quality or workmanship),
and durability; and
• selection of a level of safety that considers the above factors and the
consequences of exceeding a specified design limit state (i.e., collapse,
deformation, or the onset of “unacceptable” damage).
When the above variables are known or logically conceived, there are
many ways to achieve a specified level of safety. However, as a practical
necessity, the design process has been standardized to provide a reasonably
consistent basis for applying the following key elements of the design process:
• characterizing strength properties for various material types (e.g., steel,
wood, concrete, masonry, etc.);
• defining nominal design loads and load combinations for crucial inputs
into the design process; and
• conveying an acceptable level of safety (i.e., safety margin) that can be
easily and consistently applied by designers.
Institutionalized design procedures provide a basis for selecting from the
vast array of structural material options available in the construction market.
However, the generalizations necessary to address the multitude of design
conditions rely on a simplified and standardized format and thus often overlook
special aspects of a particular design application.

y
x
2-16 Residential Structural Design Guide
Chapter 2 – Structural Design Concepts
While the following sections discuss safety, they are intentionally basic
and focus on providing the reader with a conceptual understanding of safety and
probability as a fundamental aspect of engineering. Probability concepts are
fundamental to modern design formats, such as load and resistance factor design
(LRFD), which is also known as reliability-based design or simply strength
design. The same concepts are also crucial to understanding the implications of
the simple safety factor in traditional allowable stress design (ASD). As with
many aspects of engineering, it is important to realize that the treatment of safety
is not an exact science but rather depends on the application of sound judgment as
much as on the application of complex or sophisticated statistical theories to
analyze the many variables in the design process that affect reliability (Gromala et
al., 1999). The following references are recommended for further study:
• Probability Concepts in Engineering Planning and Design, Volume I–
Basic Principles (Ang and Tang, 1975)
• CRC Structural Engineering Handbook, Chapter 29: Structural
Reliability (Chen, 1997)
• Probabilistic Structural Mechanics Handbook: Theory and Industrial
Applications (Sundararajan, 1995)
• Uncertainty Analysis, Loads, and Safety in Structural Engineering
(Hart, 1982)
• Statistical Models in Engineering (Hahn and Shapiro, 1967)
2.5.1 Nominal Design Loads
Nominal design loads are generally specified on the basis of probability,
with the interchangeable terms “return period” and “mean recurrence interval”
often used to describe the probability of loads. Either term represents a condition
that is predicted to be met or exceeded once on average during the reference time
period. For design purposes, loads are generally evaluated in terms of annual
extremes (i.e., variability of the largest load experienced in any given one-year
period) or maximum life-time values.
The choice of the return period used to define a nominal design load is
somewhat arbitrary and must be applied appropriately in the design process. The
historical use of safety factors in allowable stress design (ASD) has generally
been based on a 50-year return period design load. With the advent of load and
resistance factor design (LRFD), the calculation of nominal loads has shifted
away from ASD for some load types. For example, earthquake design loads are
now based on a 475-year return period event. As a result, a load factor of less than
one (i.e., 0.7) must now be used to adjust the earthquake load basis roughly back
to a 50-year return period magnitude so that the appropriate level of safety is
achieved relative to allowable material strength values used in ASD. This
condition is reflected in the design load combinations in Chapter 3.

y
x
Residential Structural Design Guide 2-17
Chapter 2 – Structural Design Concepts
The method of determining a design load also differs according to the type
of load and the availability of data to evaluate the time-varying nature of loads.
The derivation of various nominal loads may be assembled from information and
references contained in the ASCE 7 standard (ASCE, 1999). A brief summary is
provided here. Design wind loads are based on a probabilistic analysis of wind
speed data collected from numerous weather stations across the United States.
Given, however, the absence of sufficiently long-term weather data to quantify
hurricane risk accurately, wind loads along the hurricane coastline are determined
by using a hurricane simulation model that is based on past hurricane tracking
records as well as on an examination of the physical characteristics of hurricanes.
1
Snow loads are based on snowfall or ground snow depth data and are correlated to
roof snow loads through somewhat limited studies. Snow drift loads are
conservatively based on drifting on failed roofs and therefore do not necessarily
represent the snow-drifting probability that occurs at random in the building
population. Earthquake loads are defined from historical ground motion data and
conceptualized risk models based on direct or indirect evidence of past earthquake
activity. Thus, considerable uncertainty exists in the estimation of seismic
hazards, particularly in areas that are believed to have low seismicity (i.e., few
events) but the potential for major seismic events. Floor live loads are modeled by
using live load surveys of “point-in-time” loading conditions and hypotheses or
judgment concerning extreme or maximum life-time loads. In some cases, expert
panels decide on appropriate loads or related load characteristics when adequate
data are not available.
In summary, the determination of load characteristics is based on
historical data, risk modeling, and expert opinion, which, in turn, guide the
specification of nominal design loads for general design purposes in both the ASD
and LRFD formats. As noted, nominal design loads were usually based on a 50-
year return period. Today, however, the calculation of seismic loads and wind
loads along the hurricane coastline are based on a return period substantially
greater than the 50-year return period used in the past. Thus, traditional
perceptions of safety may become somewhat more obscure or even confused with
the more recent changes to the design process. It is also important to remember
that the return period of the design load is not the only factor determining safety;
the selection of safety factors (ASD) and load factors (LRFD) depends on the
definition of a nominal design load (i.e., its return period) and the material’s
strength characterization to achieve a specified level of safety.
2.5.2 Basic Safety Concepts in Allowable Stress Design
The concept of ASD is demonstrated in a generic design equation or
performance function (see Equation 2.5-1). In traditional allowable stress design,
it is common to divide the characteristic (i.e., fifth percentile) material strength
value by a safety factor of greater than 1 to determine an allowable design
strength dependent on a selected limit state (i.e., proportional limit or rupture) and
material type, among other factors that involve the judgment of specification-

1
The apparent lack of agreement between a few long-term wind speed records beckons a more thorough validation
of hurricane risk models and predicted design wind speeds along the Gulf and Atlantic coasts (Rosowsky and
Cheng, 1999).

y
x
2-18 Residential Structural Design Guide
Chapter 2 – Structural Design Concepts
writing groups. The allowable design strength is then compared to the stresses
created by a nominal design load combination, usually based on a 50-year mean
recurrence interval event. A lower safety factor is generally applied to design
conditions that are less variable or that are associated with a “noncritical”
consequence, while the higher safety factor is typically applied to elements
associated with greater uncertainty, such as connections. In addition, a higher
safety factor is usually selected for materials, systems, or stress conditions that
result in an abrupt failure mode without warning. Recognizing the impracticality
of introducing a safety factor for each load type, the safety factor is also intended
to cover the variability in loads.
Equation 2.5-1
L
S.F.
R
≥
where,
R = nominal resistance (or design stress), usually based on the fifth percentile
strength property of interest (also known as the characteristic strength
value)
S.F. = the safety factor (R/S.F. is known as the allowable stress)
L = the load effect caused by the nominal design load combination (in units of
R)
The equation refers to characteristic material strength, which represents
the material stress value used for design purposes (also known as nominal or
design strength or stress). When characteristic material strength (normalized to
standard conditions) is divided by a safety factor, the result is an allowable
material strength or stress. Given that materials exhibit variability in their stress
capacity (some more variable than others), it is necessary to select a statistical
value from the available material test data. Generally, though not always, the test
methods, data, and evaluations of characteristic material strength values follow
standardized procedures that vary across material industries (i.e., concrete, wood,
steel, etc.) due in part to the uniqueness of each material. In most cases, the
characteristic strength value is based on a lower-bound test statistic such as the
fifth percentile, which is a value at which no more than 5 percent of the material
specimens from a sample exhibit a lesser value. Since sampling is involved, the
sampling methodology and sample size become critical to confidence in the
characteristic strength value for general design applications.
In some cases, procedures for establishing characteristic material strength
values are highly sophisticated and address many of the concerns mentioned
above; in other cases, the process is simple and involves reduced levels of
exactness or confidence (i.e., use of the lowest value in a small number of tests).
Generally, the more variable a material, the more sophisticated the determination
of characteristic material strength properties. A good example is the wood
industry, whose many species and grades of lumber further complicate the
inherent nonhomogenity of the product. Therefore, the wood industry uses fairly
sophisticated procedures to sample and determine strength properties for a
multitude of material conditions and properties (see Chapter 5).
Obviously, increasing the safety factor enhances the level of safety
achieved in ASD (see Table 2.2 for the effect of varying safety factors to resist

y
x
Residential Structural Design Guide 2-19
Chapter 2 – Structural Design Concepts
wind loads in a typical hurricane-prone wind environment). The level of safety in
Table 2.2 is presented as the probability of exceeding the characteristic material,
connection, or assembly strength (i.e., fifth percentile strength value) over a 50-
year reference period. While Table 2.2 is a nonconventional representation of
safety, it demonstrates that an increase in the safety factor has a disproportionate
effect on the level of safety achieved in terms of reducing the probability of
failure. For example, increasing the safety factor substantially above 1 eventually
begins to yield diminishing returns in terms of safety benefits. Clearly, the
sensitivity of safety to adjustments in the safety factor is not a linear relationship
(i.e., doubling the safety factor does not double safety). For this and other reasons,
decisions regarding safety are embodied in the various material design
specifications used by designers.
TABLE 2.2
Effect of Safety Factor on Level of Safety in ASD for a
Typical Hurricane-Prone Wind Climate
1
ABCDEF
ASD Safety Factor
Equivalent Wind
Speed Factor ( A )
Design Wind
Speed (mph
gust)
‘Ultimate’
Event Wind
Speed B x C
(mph, gust)
‘Ultimate’
Event Return
Period (years)
Chance of
Exceedance
in a 50-Year
Period
1.0 1.00 120 120 50 63.46%
2.0 1.41 120 170 671 7.18%
3.0 1.73 120 208 4,991 1.00%
4.0 2.00 120 240 27,318 0.18%
Note:
1
The “ultimate” event is determined by multiplying the design (i.e., 50-year return period) wind speed by the square root of the safety factor.
The derivation is based on multiplying both sides of Equation 2.5-1 by the safety factor and realizing that the wind load is related to the wind
speed squared. Thus, the design or performance check is transformed to one with a safety factor of 1, but the load (or event) is increased to a
higher return period to maintain an equivalent performance function.
As represented in current material design specifications and building code
provisions, the ASD safety factors are the product of theory, past experience, and
judgment and are intended for general design purposes. As such, they may not be
specially “tuned” for specific applications such as housing. Further, various
material specifications and standards vary in their treatment of safety factors and
associated levels of safety (i.e., target safety).
2.5.3 Basic Safety Concepts in Load and Resistance
Factor Design
The LRFD format has been conservatively calibrated to the level of safety
represented by past ASD design practice and thus retains a tangible connection
with historically accepted norms of structural safety (Galambos et al., 1982;
Ellingwood et al., 1982; and others).
2
Thus, a similar level of safety is achieved
with either method. However, the LRFD approach uses two factors–one applied

2
It should be noted that historically accepted performance of wood-framed design, particularly housing, has not been
specially considered in the development of modern LRFD design provisions for wood or other materials (i.e.,
concrete in foundations).

y
x
2-20 Residential Structural Design Guide
Chapter 2 – Structural Design Concepts
to the load and one applied to the resistance or strength property–that permits a
more consistent treatment of safety across a broader range of design conditions.
Equation 2.5-2 shows conceptually the LRFD design format (i.e.,
performance function) and compares a factored characteristic resistance value
with a factored nominal load. Thus, for a given hazard condition and given
material, and similar to the outcome described in the previous section on ASD,
increasing the load factor and/or decreasing the resistance factor has the effect of
increasing the level of safety. Figure 2.5 depicts the variable nature of building
loads and resistance and the safety margin relative to design loads and nominal
resistance.
Equation 2.5-2
φ ∑ γ≥ LR
where,
φ = resistance factor (phi)
R = nominal resistance or design stress usually based on the fifth percentile
strength property of interest (also known as the characteristic strength value)
γ = load factor for each load in a given load combination (gamma)
L = the stress created by each load in a nominal design load combination (in units
of R)
A resistance factor is applied to a characteristic material strength value to
account for variability in material strength properties. The resistance factor
generally ranges from 0.5 to 0.9, with the lower values applicable to those
strength properties that have greater variability or that are associated with an
abrupt failure that gives little warning. The resistance factor also depends on the
selected characterization of the nominal or characteristic strength value for design
purposes (i.e., average, lower fifth percentile, lowest value of a limited number of
tests, etc.).
A load factor is individually applied to each load in a nominal design load
combination to account for the variability and nature of the hazard or combined
hazards. It also depends on the selected characterization of the nominal load for
design purposes (i.e., 50-year return period, 475-year return period, or others). In
addition, the load factors proportion the loads relative to each other in a
combination of loads (i.e., account for independence or correlation between loads
and their likely “point-in-time” values when one load assumes a maximum value).
Thus, the load factor for a primary load in a load combination may range from 1
to 1.6 in LRFD. For other transient loads in a combination, the factors are
generally much less than 1. In this manner, the level of safety for a given material
and nominal design load is determined by the net effect of factors–one on the
resistance side of the design equation and the others on the load side. For ASD,
the factors and their purpose are embodied in one simple factor–the safety factor.

y
x
Residential Structural Design Guide 2-21
Chapter 2 – Structural Design Concepts
FIGURE 2.5
Basic Concept of Safety in LRFD and ASD Considering the
Variability of Loads and Resistance
2.5.4 Putting Safety into Perspective
As discussed in Section 2.5, there is no absolute measure of safety.
Therefore, the theory used to quantify safety is, at best, a relative measure that
must be interpreted in consideration of the many assumptions underlying the
treatment of uncertainty in the design process. Any reliable measure of safety
must look to past experience and attempt to evaluate historic data in a rational
manner to predict the future. Some indication of past experience with respect to
housing performance was discussed in Chapter 1. However, it is important to

y
x
2-22 Residential Structural Design Guide
Chapter 2 – Structural Design Concepts
understand the risk associated with structural failures relative to other sources of
risk. It is also instructive to understand the economic significance of damage to a
structure as it, too, is a particular consequence of risk that may be associated with
design decisions, even though it is beyond the primary concern of life-safety.
Economic consequences are becoming increasingly debated and influential in the
development of codified guidelines for structural design. Thus, some engineering
requirements in codes may address two very different objectives–one being life-
safety and the other being property protection or damage reduction. Finally, the
manner in which these two different forms of risk are presented can have a
profound impact on the perspective of risk and the perceived need for action or
inaction.
Natural disasters and other events that affect buildings are given great
attention in the media. In part, this attention is due to the relative infrequency of
catastrophic (i.e., life-threatening) failures of buildings (such as homes) as
compared to other consumer risks. Table 2.3 lists various risks and the associated
estimates of mortality (i.e., life-safety). As illustrated in the data of Table 2.3,
building related failures present relatively low risk in comparison to other forms
of consumer risks. In fact, the risk associated with auto accidents is about two to
three orders of magnitude greater than risks associated with building structural
failures and related extreme loads. Also, the data must be carefully interpreted
relative to a particular design objective and the ability to effectively address the
risk through design solutions. For example, most deaths in hurricanes are related
to flooding and indirect trauma following an event. These deaths are not related to
wind damage to the structure. In fact, the number of deaths related to hurricane
wind damage to houses is likely to be less than 10 persons in any given year and,
of these, only a few may be eliminated by reasonable alterations of building
design or construction practices. On the other hand, deaths due to flooding may be
best resolved by improved land management practices and evacuation. A similar
breakdown can be applied to other structural life-safety risks in Table 2.3.
TABLE 2.3 Commonplace Risks and Mortality Rates

1
Commonplace Risks Mean Annual Mortality Risk
(average per capita)
Estimated Annual Mortality
2
Smoking 3.6 x 10
-3
1,000,000
Cancer 2.8 x 10
-3
800,000
Auto accidents 2.4 x 10
-4
66,000
Homocide 1.0 x 10
-4
27,400
Fires 1.4 x 10
-5
3,800
Building collapse
3
1.0 x 10
-6
N/A
3
Lightening 5.0 x 10
-7
136
Tornadoes
4
3.7 x 10
-7
100
Hurricanes
4
1.5 x 10
-7
40
Earthquakes
5
9.1 x 10
-8
25
Notes
1
Data based on Wilson and Crouch, Science, 236 (1987) as reported by Ellingwood, Structural Safety, 13, Elsevier Science B.V. (1994) except as
noted.
2
Mortality rate based on October 1999 estimated population of 273,800,000 (U.S. Census)
3
Annual probability is associated with building damage or failure, not the associated mortality.
4
Data based on Golden and Snow, Reviews of Geophysics, 29, 4, November, 1991
5
Data published in Discover, May 1996, p82 (original source unknown).

y
x
Residential Structural Design Guide 2-23
Chapter 2 – Structural Design Concepts
Property damage and insurance claims are also subject to significant
media attention following building failures due to natural disasters and other
extreme events. The conglomeration of economic impacts can indeed be
staggering in appearance as shown in Table 2.4. However, the interpretation of
the economic consequence must consider the appropriate application and
perspective. For example, assuming that about 50 percent of insurance claims
may be associated with housing damage and given that there are roughly
110,000,000 existing housing units in the United States, the total wind-related
claims per housing unit in any given year may be about $32 (i.e., $7 million x 50
percent/110 million housing units). For a per unit national average, this loss is a
small number. However, one must consider the disproportionate risk assumed by
homes along the immediate hurricane coastlines which may experience more than
an order of magnitude greater risk of damage (i.e., more than $320 per year of
wind damage losses on average per housing unit). A similar break-down of
economic loss can be made for other risks such as flooding and earthquakes.
TABLE 2.4
Annual Economic Losses of Insured Buildings Associated
with Wind Damage

1
Type of Wind Hazard Annual Cost of Damage
(all types of insured buildings)
Hurricanes $5 billion
1
Tornadoes $1 billion
2
Thunderstorm and other winds $1 billion
3
Notes:
1
Data is based on Pielke and Landsea, Weather and Forecasting, September 1998 (data from 1925-1995, normalized to 1997 dollars). The
normalized average has been relatively stable for the 70-year period of record. However, overall risk exposure has increased due to increasing
population in hurricane-prone coastal areas.
2
Data is based on National Research Council, Facing the Challenge, 1994.
3
Data is based on a rough estimate from NCPI, 1993 for the period from 1986-1992.
While not a complete evaluation of life-safety data and economic loss
data, the information in this section should establish a realistic basis for
discerning the significance of safety and economic loss issues. Since engineers
are often faced with the daunting task of balancing building initial cost with long
term economic and life-safety consequences, a proper perspective on past
experience is paramount to sound decision-making. In some cases, certain design
decisions may affect insurance rates and other building ownership costs that
should be considered by the designer.
2.6 References
AF&PA, Wood Frame Construction Manual for One- and Two-Family
Dwellings, 1995 High Wind Edition, American Forest & Paper
Association, Washington, DC, 1996.
Ang, Alfredo H.S. and Tang, Wilson H., Probability Concepts in Engineering
Planning and Design, Volume I–Basic Principles, John Wiley & Sons,
New York, NY, 1975.

y
x
2-24 Residential Structural Design Guide
Chapter 2 – Structural Design Concepts
ASCE, Minimum Building Loads for Buildings and Other Structures (ASCE 7-
95), American Society of Civil Engineers, Reston, VA, 1996.
ASCE, Minimum Building Loads for Buildings and Other Structures (ASCE 7-
98), American Society of Civil Engineers, Reston, VA, 1999.
Chalk, P. and Corotis, R., “Probability Model for Design Live Loads,” Journal of
the Structural Division, American Society of Civil Engineers, Reston, VA,
October 1980.
Chen, W.F., Structural Engineering Handbook, Chapter 29: Structural
Reliability, CRC Press, 1997.
Ellingwood, B. et al., “Probability Based Load Criteria: Load Factors and Load
Combinations,” Journal of the Structural Division, Vol. 108 No. ST5,
American Society of Civil Engineers, May 1982, 978-997.
Galambos, T.V. et al., “Probability Based Load Criteria: Assessment of Current
Design Practice,” Journal of the Structural Division, Vol. 108 No. ST5,
American Society of Civil Engineers, May 1982, 959-977.
Gromala, D.S., Douglas, B.K., Rosowsky, D.V., and Sharp, D.J., “Why Is
Reliability Analysis So Unreliable?,” Proceedings of Pacific Timber
Engineering Conference (Forest Research Bulletin 212), Rotura, New
Zealand, March 14–18, 1999.
Hahn, G.J., and Shapiro, S.S., Statistical Models in Engineering, John Wiley &
Sons, New York, NY, 1967.
Hart, Gary C., Uncertainty Analysis, Loads, and Safety in Structural Engineering,
Prentice-Hall, Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ, 1982.
Hurst, Homer T., The Wood-Frame House as a Structural Unit, Technical Report
No. 5, National Forest Products Association, Washington, DC, 1965.
ICBO, Uniform Building Code (UBC), International Conference of Building
Officials (ICBO), Whittier, CA, 1997.
ICC, International Residential Code for One- and Two-Family Dwellings–2000
Edition, International Code Council, Falls Church, VA, 1999 (final draft).
NBS, Strength of Houses: Application of Engineering Principles to Structural
Design, Building Materials and Structures Report 109, U.S. Department of
Commerce, National Bureau of Standards (GPO: Washington, DC),
April 1, 1948.

y
x
Residential Structural Design Guide 2-25
Chapter 2 – Structural Design Concepts
Rosowsky, D.V. and Cheng, N., “Reliability of Light-Frame Roofs in High-Wind
Regions. I: Wind Loads,” Journal of Structural Engineering, Vol. 125 No.
7, American Society of Civil Engineers, Reston, VA, July 1999, 725-730.
SBCCI, Standard for Hurricane Resistant Residential Construction (SSTD 10-
99), Southern Building Code Congress International, Birmingham, AL,
1999.
Sundararajan, C., Probabilistic Structural Mechanics Handbook: Theory and
Industrial Applications, Chapman & Hall, New York, NY, 1995.
TPI, National Design Standard for Metal Plate Connected Wood Trusses, Truss
Plate Institute (TPI), Madison, WI, 1996.
WTCA, Metal Plate Connected Wood Truss Handbook, Second Edition, prepared
by Edward E. Callahan for the Wood Truss Council of America, Madison,
WI, 1998.

y
x
2-26 Residential Structural Design Guide
Chapter 2 – Structural Design Concepts

Residential Structural Design Guide 3-1
CHAPTER 3
Design Loads for
Residential Buildings
3.1 General
Loads are a primary consideration in any building design because they
define the nature and magnitude of hazards or external forces that a building must
resist to provide reasonable performance (i.e., safety and serviceability)
throughout the structure’s useful life. The anticipated loads are influenced by a
building’s intended use (occupancy and function), configuration (size and shape),
and location (climate and site conditions). Ultimately, the type and magnitude of
design loads affect critical decisions such as material selection, construction
details, and architectural configuration. Thus, to optimize the value (i.e.,
performance versus economy) of the finished product, it is essential to apply
design loads realistically.
While the buildings considered in this guide are primarily single-family
detached and attached dwellings, the principles and concepts related to building
loads also apply to other similar types of construction, such as low-rise apartment
buildings. In general, the design loads recommended in this guide are based on
applicable provisions of the ASCE 7 standard–Minimum Design Loads for
Buildings and Other Structures (ASCE, 1999). The ASCE 7 standard represents
an acceptable practice for building loads in the United States and is recognized in
virtually all U.S. building codes. For this reason, the reader is encouraged to
become familiar with the provisions, commentary, and technical references
contained in the ASCE 7 standard.
In general, the structural design of housing has not been treated as a
unique engineering discipline or subjected to a special effort to develop better,
more efficient design practices. Therefore, this part of the guide focuses on those
aspects of ASCE 7 and other technical resources that are particularly relevant to
the determination of design loads for residential structures. The guide provides
supplemental design assistance to address aspects of residential construction
where current practice is either silent or in need of improvement. The guide’s

3-2 Residential Structural Design Guide
Chapter 3 – Design Loads for Residential Buildings
methods for determining design loads are complete yet tailored to typical
residential conditions. As with any design function, the designer must ultimately
understand and approve the loads for a given project as well as the overall design
methodology, including all its inherent strengths and weaknesses. Since building
codes tend to vary in their treatment of design loads the designer should, as a
matter of due diligence, identify variances from both local accepted practice and
the applicable building code relative to design loads as presented in this guide,
even though the variances may be considered technically sound.
Complete design of a home typically requires the evaluation of several
different types of materials as in Chapters 4 through 7. Some material
specifications use the allowable stress design (ASD) approach while others use
load and resistance factor design (LRFD). Chapter 4 uses the LRFD method for
concrete design and the ASD method for masonry design. For wood design,
Chapters 5, 6, and 7 use ASD. Therefore, for a single project, it may be necessary
to determine loads in accordance with both design formats. This chapter provides
load combinations intended for each method. The determination of individual
nominal loads is essentially unaffected. Special loads such as flood loads, ice
loads, and rain loads are not addressed herein. The reader is referred to the ASCE
7 standard and applicable building code provisions regarding special loads.
3.2 Load Combinations
The load combinations in Table 3.1 are recommended for use with design
specifications based on allowable stress design (ASD) and load and resistance
factor design (LRFD). Load combinations provide the basic set of building load
conditions that should be considered by the designer. They establish the
proportioning of multiple transient loads that may assume point-in-time values
when the load of interest attains its extreme design value. Load combinations are
intended as a guide to the designer, who should exercise judgment in any
particular application. The load combinations in Table 3.1 are appropriate for use
with the design loads determined in accordance with this chapter.
The principle used to proportion loads is a recognition that when one load
attains its maximum life-time value, the other loads assume arbitrary point-in-
time values associated with the structure’s normal or sustained loading conditions.
The advent of LRFD has drawn greater attention to this principle (Ellingwood et
al., 1982; Galambos et al., 1982). The proportioning of loads in this chapter for
allowable stress design (ASD) is consistent with and normalized to the
proportioning of loads used in newer LRFD load combinations. However, this
manner of proportioning ASD loads has seen only limited use in current code-
recognized documents (AF&PA, 1996) and has yet to be explicitly recognized in
design load specifications such as ASCE 7. ASD load combinations found in
building codes have typically included some degree of proportioning (i.e., D + W
+ 1/2S) and have usually made allowance for a special reduction for multiple
transient loads. Some earlier codes have also permitted allowable material stress
increases for load combinations involving wind and earthquake loads. None of
these adjustments for ASD load combinations is recommended for use with Table
3.1 since the load proportioning is considered sufficient.

Residential Structural Design Guide 3-3
Chapter 3 – Design Loads for Residential Buildings
It should also be noted that the wind load factor of 1.5 in Table 3.1 used
for load and resistant factor design is consistent with traditional wind design
practice (ASD and LRFD) and has proven adequate in hurricane-prone
environments when buildings are properly designed and constructed. The 1.5
factor is equivalent to the earlier use of a 1.3 wind load factor in that the newer
wind load provisions of ASCE 7-98 include separate consideration of wind
directionality by adjusting wind loads by an explicit wind directionality factor,
K
D
, of 0.85. Since the wind load factor of 1.3 included this effect, it must be
adjusted to 1.5 in compensation for adjusting the design wind load instead (i.e.,
1.5/1.3 = 0.85). The 1.5 factor may be considered conservative relative to
traditional design practice in nonhurricane-prone wind regions as indicated in the
calibration of the LRFD load factors to historic ASD design practice (Ellingwood
et al., 1982; Galambos et al., 1982). In addition, newer design wind speeds for
hurricane-prone areas account for variation in the extreme (i.e., long return
period) wind probability that occurs in hurricane hazard areas. Thus, the return
period of the design wind speeds along the hurricane-prone coast varies from
roughly a 70- to 100-year return period on the wind map in the 1998 edition of
ASCE 7 (i.e., not a traditional 50-year return period wind speed used for the
remainder of the United States). The latest wind design provisions of ASCE 7
include many advances in the state of the art, but the ASCE commentary does not
clearly describe the condition mentioned above in support of an increased wind
load factor of 1.6 (ASCE, 1999). Given that the new standard will likely be
referenced in future building codes, the designer may eventually be required to
use a higher wind load factor for LRFD than that shown in Table 3.1. The above
discussion is intended to help the designer understand the recent departure from
past successful design experience and remain cognizant of its potential future
impact to building design.
The load combinations in Table 3.1 are simplified and tailored to specific
application in residential construction and the design of typical components and
systems in a home. These or similar load combinations are often used in practice
as short-cuts to those load combinations that govern the design result. This guide
makes effective use of the short-cuts and demonstrates them in the examples
provided later in the chapter. The short-cuts are intended only for the design of
residential light-frame construction.

3-4 Residential Structural Design Guide
Chapter 3 – Design Loads for Residential Buildings
TABLE 3.1
Typical Load Combinations Used for the Design of
Components and Systems
1
Component or System ASD Load Combinations LRFD Load Combinations
Foundation wall
(gravity and soil lateral loads)
D + H
D + H + L
2
+ 0.3(L
r
+ S)
D + H + (L
r
or S) + 0.3L
2
1.2D + 1.6H
1.2D + 1.6H + 1.6L
2
+ 0.5(L
r
+ S)
1.2D + 1.6H + 1.6(L
r
or S) + 0.5L
2
Headers, girders, joists, interior load-
bearing walls and columns, footings
(gravity loads)
D + L
2
+ 0.3 (L
r
or S)
D + (L
r
or S) + 0.3 L
2
1.2D + 1.6L
2
+ 0.5 (L
r
or S)
1.2D + 1.6(L
r
or S) + 0.5 L
2
Exterior load-bearing walls and
columns (gravity and transverse
lateral load)
3
Same as immediately above plus
D + W
D + 0.7E + 0.5L
2
+ 0.2S
4
Same as immediately above plus
1.2D + 1.5W
1.2D + 1.0E + 0.5L
2
+ 0.2S
4
Roof rafters, trusses, and beams; roof
and wall sheathing (gravity and wind
loads)
D + (L
r
or S)
0.6D + W
u
5
D + W
1.2D + 1.6(L
r
or S)
0.9D + 1.5W
u
5
1.2D + 1.5W
Floor diaphragms and shear walls
(in-plane lateral and overturning
loads)
6
0.6D + (W or 0.7E) 0.9D + (1.5W or 1.0E)
Notes:
1
The load combinations and factors are intended to apply to nominal design loads defined as follows: D = estimated mean dead weight of
the construction; H = design lateral pressure for soil condition/type; L = design floor live load; L
r
= maximum roof live load anticipated
from construction/maintenance; W = design wind load; S = design roof snow load; and E = design earthquake load. The design or nominal
loads should be determined in accordance with this chapter.
2
Attic loads may be included in the floor live load, but a 10 psf attic load is typically used only to size ceiling joists adequately for access
purposes. However, if the attic is intended for storage, the attic live load (or some portion) should also be considered for the design of
other elements in the load path.
3
The transverse wind load for stud design is based on a localized component and cladding wind pressure; D + W provides an adequate and
simple design check representative of worst-case combined axial and transverse loading. Axial forces from snow loads and roof live loads
should usually not be considered simultaneously with an extreme wind load because they are mutually exclusive on residential sloped
roofs. Further, in most areas of the United States, design winds are produced by either hurricanes or thunderstorms; therefore, these wind
events and snow are mutually exclusive because they occur at different times of the year.
4
For walls supporting heavy cladding loads (such as brick veneer), an analysis of earthquake lateral loads and combined axial loads should
be considered. However, this load combination rarely governs the design of light-frame construction.
5
W
u
is wind uplift load from negative (i.e., suction) pressures on the roof. Wind uplift loads must be resisted by continuous load path
connections to the foundation or until offset by 0.6D.
6
The 0.6 reduction factor on D is intended to apply to the calculation of net overturning stresses and forces. For wind, the analysis of
overturning should also consider roof uplift forces unless a separate load path is designed to transfer those forces.
3.3 Dead Loads
Dead loads consist of the permanent construction material loads
comprising the roof, floor, wall, and foundation systems, including claddings,
finishes, and fixed equipment. The values for dead loads in Table 3.2 are for
commonly used materials and constructions in light-frame residential buildings.
Table 3.3 provides values for common material densities and may be useful in
calculating dead loads more accurately. The design examples in Section 3.10
demonstrate the straight-forward process of calculating dead loads.

Residential Structural Design Guide 3-5
Chapter 3 – Design Loads for Residential Buildings
TABLE 3.2 Dead Loads for Common Residential Construction
1
Roof Construction
Light-frame wood roof with wood structural panel
sheathing and 1/2-inch gypsum board ceiling (2 psf) with
asphalt shingle roofing (3 psf)
- with conventional clay/tile roofing
- with light-weight tile
- with metal roofing
- with wood shakes
- with tar and gravel
15 psf
27 psf
21 psf
14 psf
15 psf
18 psf
Floor Construction
Light-frame 2x12 wood floor with 3/4-inch wood
structural panel sheathing and 1/2-inch gypsum board
ceiling (without 1/2-inch gypsum board, subtract 2 psf
from all values) with carpet, vinyl, or similar floor
covering
10 psf
2
- with wood flooring 12 psf
- with ceramic tile 15 psf
- with slate 19 psf
Wall Construction
Light-frame 2x4 wood wall with 1/2-inch wood
structural panel sheathing and 1/2-inch gypsum board
finish (for 2x6, add 1 psf to all values)
6 psf
- with vinyl or aluminum siding 7 psf
- with lap wood siding 8 psf
- with 7/8-inch portland cement stucco siding 15 psf
- with thin-coat-stucco on insulation board 9 psf
- with 3-1/2-inch brick veneer 45 psf
Interior partition walls (2x4 with 1/2-inch gypsum board
applied to both sides)
6 psf
Foundation Construction
6-inch-thick wall
8-inch-thick wall
10-inch-thick wall
12-inch-thick wall
6-inch x 12-inch concrete footing
6-inch x 16-inch concrete footing
8-inch x 24-inch concrete footing
Masonry
3
Concrete
Hollow Solid or Full Grout
28 psf 60 psf 75 psf
36 psf 80 psf 100 psf
44 psf 100 psf 123 psf
50 psf 125 psf 145 psf
73 plf
97 plf
193 plf
Notes:
1
For unit conversions, see Appendix B.
2
Value also used for roof rafter construction (i.e., cathedral ceiling).
3
For partially grouted masonry, interpolate between hollow and solid grout in accordance with the fraction of masonry cores that are
grouted.

3-6 Residential Structural Design Guide
Chapter 3 – Design Loads for Residential Buildings
TABLE 3.3 Densities for Common Residential Construction Materials
1
Aluminum
Copper
Steel
Concrete (normal weight with light reinforcement)
Masonry, grout
Masonry, brick
Masonry, concrete
Glass
Wood (approximately 10 percent moisture content)
2
- spruce-pine-fir (G = 0.42)
- spruce-pine-fir, south (G = 0.36)
- southern yellow pine (G = 0.55)
- Douglas fir–larch (G = 0.5)
- hem-fir (G = 0.43)
- mixed oak (G = 0.68)
Water
Structural wood panels
- plywood
- oriented strand board
Gypsum board
Stone
- Granite
- Sandstone
Sand, dry
Gravel, dry
170 pcf
556 pcf
492 pcf
145–150 pcf
140 pcf
100–130 pcf
85–135 pcf
160 pcf
29 pcf
25 pcf
38 pcf
34 pcf
30 pcf
47 pcf
62.4 pcf
36 pcf
36 pcf
48 pcf
96 pcf
82 pcf
90 pcf
105 pcf
Notes:
1
For unit conversions, see Appendix B.
2
The equilibrium moisture content of lumber is usually not more than 10 percent in protected building construction. The specific gravity,
G, is the decimal fraction of dry wood density relative to that of water. Therefore, at a 10 percent moisture content, the density of wood is
1.1(G)(62.4 lbs/ft
3
). The values given are representative of average densities and may easily vary by as much as 15 percent depending on
lumber grade and other factors.
3.4 Live Loads
Live loads are produced by the use and occupancy of a building. Loads
include those from human occupants, furnishings, nonfixed equipment, storage,
and construction and maintenance activities. Table 3.4 provides recommended
design live loads for residential buildings. Example 3.1 in Section 3.10
demonstrates use of those loads and the load combinations specified in Table 3.1,
along with other factors discussed in this section. As required to adequately define
the loading condition, loads are presented in terms of uniform area loads (psf),
concentrated loads (lbs), and uniform line loads (plf). The uniform and
concentrated live loads should not be applied simultaneously in a structural
evaluation. Concentrated loads should be applied to a small area or surface

Residential Structural Design Guide 3-7
Chapter 3 – Design Loads for Residential Buildings
consistent with the application and should be located or directed to give the
maximum load effect possible in end-use conditions. For example, the stair
concentrated load of 300 pounds should be applied to the center of the stair tread
between supports. The concentrated wheel load of a vehicle on a garage slab or
floor should be applied to all areas or members subject to a wheel or jack load,
typically using a loaded area of about 20 square inches.
TABLE 3.4 Live Loads for Residential Construction
1
Application Uniform Load Concentrated Load
Roof
2
Slope ≥ 4:12 15 psf 250 lbs
Flat to 4:12 slope 20 psf 250 lbs
Attic
3
With limited storage 10 psf 250 lbs
With storage 20 psf 250 lbs
Floors
Bedroom areas
3,4
30 psf 300 lbs
Other areas 40 psf 300 lbs
Garages 50 psf 2,000 lbs (vans, light trucks)
1,500 lbs (passenger cars)
Decks 40 psf 300 lbs
Balconies 60 psf 300 lbs
Stairs 40 psf 300 lbs
Guards and handrails 20 plf 200 lbs
Grab bars N/A 250 lbs
Notes:
1
Live load values should be verified relative to the locally applicable building code.
2
Roof live loads are intended to provide a minimum load for roof design in consideration of maintenance and construction activities. They
should not be considered in combination with other transient loads (i.e., floor live load, wind load, etc.) when designing walls, floors, and
foundations. A 15 psf roof live load is recommended for residential roof slopes greater than 4:12; refer to ASCE 7-98 for an alternate
approach.
3
Loft sleeping and attic storage loads should be considered only in areas with a clear height greater than about 3 feet. The concept of a
“clear height” limitation on live loads is logical, but it may not be universally recognized.
4
Some codes require 40 psf for all floor areas.
The floor live load on any given floor area may be reduced in accordance
with Equation 3.4-1 (Harris, Corotis, and Bova, 1980). The equation applies to
floor and support members, such as beams or columns, that experience floor loads
from a total tributary floor area greater than 200 square feet. This equation is
different from that in ASCE 7-98 since it is based on data that applies to
residential floor loads rather than commercial buildings.

3-8 Residential Structural Design Guide
Chapter 3 – Design Loads for Residential Buildings
[Equation 3.4-1]








+=
t
o
A
6.10
25.0LL ≥ 0.75
where,
L = the adjusted floor live load for tributary areas greater than 200 square feet
A
t
= the tributary from a single-story area assigned to a floor support member
(i.e., girder, column, or footing)
L
o
= the unreduced live load associated with a floor area of 200 ft
2
from Table
3.4
It should also be noted that the nominal design floor live load in Table 3.4
includes both a sustained and transient load component. The sustained component
is that load typically present at any given time and includes the load associated
with normal human occupancy and furnishings. For residential buildings, the
mean sustained live load is about 6 psf but typically varies from 4 to 8 psf (Chalk,
Philip, and Corotis, 1978). The mean transient live load for dwellings is also
about 6 psf but may be as high as 13 psf. Thus, a total design live load of 30 to 40
psf is fairly conservative.
3.5 Soil Lateral Loads
The lateral pressure exerted by earth backfill against a residential
foundation wall (basement wall) can be calculated with reasonable accuracy on
the basis of theory, but only for conditions that rarely occur in practice
(University of Alberta, 1992; Peck, Hanson, and Thornburn, 1974). Theoretical
analyses are usually based on homogeneous materials that demonstrate consistent
compaction and behavioral properties. Such conditions are rarely experienced in
the case of typical residential construction projects.
The most common method of determining lateral soil loads on residential
foundations follows Rankine’s (1857) theory of earth pressure and uses what is
known as the Equivalent Fluid Density (EFD) method. As shown in Figure 3.1,
pressure distribution is assumed to be triangular and to increase with depth.
In the EFD method, the soil unit weight w is multiplied by an empirical
coefficient K
a
to account for the fact that the soil is not actually fluid and that the
pressure distribution is not necessarily triangular. The coefficient K
a
is known as
the active Rankine pressure coefficient. Thus, the equivalent fluid density (EFD)
is determined as follows:
[Equation 3.5-1] wKq
a
=

Residential Structural Design Guide 3-9
Chapter 3 – Design Loads for Residential Buildings
FIGURE 3.1
Triangular Pressure Distribution
on a Basement Foundation Wall
It follows that for the triangular pressure distribution shown in Figure 3.1,
the pressure at depth, h, in feet is
[Equation 3.5-2] qhP =
The total active soil force (pounds per lineal foot of wall length) is
[Equation 3.5-3]
2
qh
2
1
)h)(qh(
2
1
H ==
where,
h = the depth of the unbalanced fill on a foundation wall
H = the resultant force (plf) applied at a height of h/3 from the base of the
unbalanced fill since the pressure distribution is assumed to be triangular
The EFD method is subject to judgment as to the appropriate value of the
coefficient K
a
. The values of K
a
in Table 3.5 are recommended for the
determination of lateral pressures on residential foundations for various types of
backfill materials placed with light compaction and good drainage. Given the
long-time use of a 30 pcf equivalent fluid density in residential foundation wall
prescriptive design tables (ICC, 1998), the values in Table 3.5 may be considered
somewhat conservative for typical conditions. A relatively conservative safety
factor of 3 to 4 is typically applied to the design of unreinforced or nominally
reinforced masonry or concrete foundation walls (ACI 1999a and b). Therefore, at

3-10 Residential Structural Design Guide
Chapter 3 – Design Loads for Residential Buildings
imminent failure of a foundation wall, the 30 psf design EFD would correspond to
an active soil lateral pressure determined by using an equivalent fluid density of
about 90 to 120 pcf or more. The design examples in Chapter 4 demonstrate the
calculation of soil loads.
TABLE 3.5
Values of K
a
, Soil Unit Weight, and Equivalent Fluid
Density by Soil Type
1,2,3
Type of Soil
4
(unified soil classification)
Active Pressure
Coefficient (K
a
)
Soil Unit Weight (pcf) Equivalent Fluid
Density (pcf)
Sand or gravel
(GW, GP, GM, SW, SP)
0.26 115 30
Silty sand, silt, and sandy silt
(GC, SM)
0.35 100 35
Clay-silt, silty clay
(SM-SC, SC, ML, ML-CL)
0.45 100 45
Clay
5
(CL, MH, CH)
0.6 100 60
Notes:
1
Values are applicable to well-drained foundations with less than 10 feet of backfill placed with light compaction or natural settlement as
is common in residential construction. The values do not apply to foundation walls in flood-prone environments. In such cases, an
equivalent fluid density value of 80 to 90 pcf would be more appropriate (HUD, 1977).
2
Values are based on the Standard Handbook for Civil Engineers, Third Edition, 1983, and on research on soil pressures reported in Thin
Wall Foundation Testing, Department of Civil Engineering, University of Alberta, Canada, March 1992. It should be noted that the values
for soil equivalent fluid density differ from those recommended in ASCE 7-98 but are nonetheless compatible with current residential
building codes, design practice, and the stated references.
3
These values do not consider the significantly higher loads that can result from expansive clays and the lateral expansion of moist, frozen
soil. Such conditions should be avoided by eliminating expansive clays adjacent to the foundation wall and providing for adequate surface
and foundation drainage.
4
Organic silts and clays and expansive clays are unsuitable for backfill material.
5
Backfill in the form of clay soils (nonexpansive) should be used with caution on foundation walls with unbalanced fill heights greater
than 3 to 4 feet and on cantilevered foundation walls with unbalanced fill heights greater than 2 to 3 feet.
Depending on the type and depth of backfill material and the manner of its
placement, it is common practice in residential construction to allow the backfill
soil to consolidate naturally by providing an additional 3 to 6 inches of fill
material. The additional backfill ensures that surface water drainage away from
the foundation remains adequate (i.e., the grade slopes away from the building). It
also helps avoid heavy compaction that could cause undesirable loads on the
foundation wall during and after construction. If soils are heavily compacted at
the ground surface or compacted in lifts to standard Proctor densities greater than
about 85 percent of optimum (ASTM, 1998), the standard 30 pcf EFD assumption
may be inadequate. However, in cases where exterior slabs, patios, stairs, or other
items are supported on the backfill, some amount of compaction is advisable
unless the structures are supported on a separate foundation bearing on
undisturbed ground.

Residential Structural Design Guide 3-11
Chapter 3 – Design Loads for Residential Buildings
3.6 Wind Loads
3.6.1 General
Wind produces nonstatic loads on a structure at highly variable
magnitudes. The variation in pressures at different locations on a building is
complex to the point that pressures may become too analytically intensive for
precise consideration in design. Therefore, wind load specifications attempt to
simplify the design problem by considering basic static pressure zones on a
building representative of peak loads that are likely to be experienced. The peak
pressures in one zone for a given wind direction may not, however, occur
simultaneously with peak pressures in other zones. For some pressure zones, the
peak pressure depends on a narrow range of wind direction. Therefore, the wind
directionality effect must also be factored into determining risk-consistent wind
loads on buildings. In fact, most modern wind load specifications take account of
wind directionality and other effects in determining nominal design loads in some
simplified form (SBCCI, 1999; ASCE, 1999). This section further simplifies wind
load design specifications to provide an easy yet effective approach for designing
typical residential buildings.
Because they vary substantially over the surface of a building, wind loads
are considered at two different scales. On a large scale, the loads produced on the
overall building, or on major structural systems that sustain wind loads from more
than one surface of the building, are considered the main wind force-resisting
system (MWFRS). The MWFRS of a home includes the shear walls and
diaphragms that create the lateral force-resisting system (LFRS) as well as the
structural systems such as trusses that experience loads from two surfaces (or
pressure regimes) of the building. The wind loads applied to the MWFRS account
for the large-area averaging effects of time-varying wind pressures on the surface
or surfaces of the building.
On a smaller scale, pressures are somewhat greater on localized surface
areas of the building, particularly near abrupt changes in building geometry (e.g.,
eaves, ridges, and corners). These higher wind pressures occur on smaller areas,
particularly affecting the loads borne by components and cladding (e.g.,
sheathing, windows, doors, purlins, studs). The components and cladding (C&C)
transfer localized time-varying loads to the MWFRS, at which point the loads
average out both spatially and temporally since, at a given time, some components
may be at near peak loads while others are at substantially less than peak.
The next section presents a simplified method for determining both
MWFRS and C&C wind loads. Since the loads in Section 3.6.2 are determined for
specific applications, the calculation of MWFRS and C&C wind loads is implicit
in the values provided. Design Example 3.2 in Section 3.10 demonstrates the
calculation of wind loads by applying the simplified method of the following
Section 3.6.2 to several design conditions associated with wind loads and the load
combinations presented in Table 3.1.

3-12 Residential Structural Design Guide
Chapter 3 – Design Loads for Residential Buildings
3.6.2 Determination of Wind Loads on
Residential Buildings
The following method for the design of residential buildings is based on a
simplification of the ASCE 7-98 wind provisions (ASCE, 1999); therefore, the
wind loads are not an exact duplicate. Lateral loads and roof uplift loads are
determined by using a projected area approach. Other wind loads are determined
for specific components or assemblies that comprise the exterior building
envelope. Five steps are required to determine design wind loads on a residential
building and its components.
Step 1: Determine site design wind speed and basic velocity
pressure
From the wind map in Figure 3.2 (refer to ASCE 7-98 for maps with
greater detail), select a design wind speed for the site (ASCE, 1999). The wind
speed map in ASCE 7-98 (Figure 3.2) includes the most accurate data and
analysis available regarding design wind speeds in the United States. The new
wind speeds may appear higher than those used in older design wind maps. The
difference is due solely to the use of the “peak gust” to define wind speeds rather
than an averaged wind speed as represented by the “fastest mile of wind” used in
older wind maps. Nominal design peak gust wind speeds are typically 85 to 90
mph in most of the United States; however, along the hurricane-prone Gulf and
Atlantic coasts, nominal design wind speeds range from 100 to 150 mph for the
peak gust.
If relying on either an older fastest-mile wind speed map or older design
provisions based on fastest-mile wind speeds, the designer should convert wind
speed in accordance with Table 3.6 for use with this simplified method, which is
based on peak gust wind speeds.
TABLE 3.6 Wind Speed Conversions
Fastest mile (mph) 70 75 80 90 100 110 120 130
Peak gust (mph) 85 90 100 110 120 130 140 150
Once the nominal design wind speed in terms of peak gust is determined,
the designer can select the basic velocity pressure in accordance with Table 3.7.
The basic velocity pressure is a reference wind pressure to which pressure
coefficients are applied to determine surface pressures on a building. Velocity
pressures in Table 3.7 are based on typical conditions for residential construction,
namely, suburban terrain exposure and relatively flat or rolling terrain without
topographic wind speed-up effects.

Residential Structural Design Guide 3-13
Chapter 3 – Design Loads for Residential Buildings
FIGURE 3.2 Basic Design Wind Speed Map from ASCE 7-98
Source: Reprinted with permission from the American Society of Civil Engineers, 1801 Alexander Bell Road, Reston, VA. Copyright
ASCE.
Notes: 1.
Values are nomi
nal design
3-second gus
t wind spe
eds in mile
s per hour (
m/s) at 33ft (
10m) abov
e ground
for Exposure C c
ategory.
2.
Linear Interpolati
on between
wind contour
s is permitt
ed
3.
Islands and coa
stal areas
outside the l
ast contour
shall use th
e last wind
speed cont
our of the co
astal area.
4.

Mountainous terr
ain, gorges,
ocean prom
ontories, a
nd special
wind regions
shall be e
xamined for
unusual
wind
conditions
L
o
ca
tio
n
V
m
p
h
(m
/s)
Hawa
ii
105
(47
)
P
u
er
t
o
R
i
co
145
(65
)
Guam
170
(76
)
V
i
r
g
in
Isl
a
n
d
s
145
(65
)
A
m
er
ica
n
S
a
m
o
a
125
(56
)

3-14 Residential Structural Design Guide
Chapter 3 – Design Loads for Residential Buildings
TABLE 3.7 Basic Wind Velocity Pressures (psf) for Suburban Terrain
1
Design Wind Speed, V
(mph, peak gust)
One-Story Building
(K
Z
= 0.6)
2
Two-Story Building
(K
Z
= 0.67)
2
Three-Story Building
(K
Z
= 0.75)
85
90
100
110
120
130
140
150
9.4
10.6
13.1
15.8
18.8
22.1
25.6
29.4
10.5
11.8
14.6
17.6
21.0
24.6
28.6
32.8
11.8
13.2
16.3
19.7
23.5
27.6
32.0
36.7
Notes:
1
Velocity pressure (psf) equals 0.00256 K
D
K
Z
V
2
, where K
Z
is the velocity pressure exposure coefficient associated with the vertical wind
speed profile in suburban terrain at the mean roof height of the building. K
D
is the wind directionality factor with a default value of 0.85.
2
These two K
z
factors are adjusted from that in ASCE 7 based on a recent study of the near-ground wind profile (NAHBRC, 1999). To be
compliant with ASCE 7-98, a minimum K
z
of 0.7 should be applied to determine velocity pressure for one-and two-story buildings in
exposure B (suburban terrain) for the design of components and cladding only. For exposure C, the values are consistent with ASCE 7-98
and require no adjustment except that all tabulated values must be multiplied by 1.4 as described in Step 2.
Step 2: Adjustments to the basic velocity pressure
If appropriate, the basic velocity pressure from Step 1 should be adjusted
in accordance with the factors below. The adjustments are cumulative.
Open exposure. The wind values in Table 3.7 are based on typical
residential exposures to the wind. If a site is located in generally open, flat terrain
with few obstructions to the wind in most directions or is exposed to a large body
of water (i.e., ocean or lake), the designer should multiply the values in Table 3.7
by a factor of 1.4. The factor may be adjusted for sites that are considered
intermediate to open suburban exposures. It may also be used to adjust wind loads
according to the exposure related to the specific directions of wind approach to
the building. The wind exposure conditions used in this guide are derived from
ASCE 7-98 with some modification applicable to small residential buildings of
three stories or less.
• Open terrain. Open areas with widely scattered obstructions, including

shoreline exposures along coastal and noncoastal bodies of water.
• Suburban terrain. Suburban areas or other terrain with closely spaced
obstructions that are the size of single-family dwellings or larger and
extend in the upwind direction a distance no less than ten times the
height of the building.
Protected exposure. If a site is generally surrounded by forest or densely
wooded terrain with no open areas greater than a few hundred feet, smaller
buildings such as homes experience significant wind load reductions from the
typical suburban exposure condition assumed in Table 3.7. If such conditions
exist and the site’s design wind speed does not exceed about 120 mph peak gust,
the designer may consider multiplying the values in Table 3.7 by 0.8. The factor
may be used to adjust wind loads according to the exposure related to the specific
directions of wind approach to the building. Wind load reductions associated with

Residential Structural Design Guide 3-15
Chapter 3 – Design Loads for Residential Buildings
a protected exposure in a suburban or otherwise open exposure have been shown
to approximate 20 percent (Ho, 1992). In densely treed terrain with the height of
the building below that of the tree tops, the reduction factor applied to Table 3.7
values can approach 0.6. The effect is known as shielding; however, it is not
currently permitted by ASCE 7-98. Two considerations require judgment: Are the
sources of shielding likely to exist for the expected life of the structure? Are the
sources of shielding able to withstand wind speeds in excess of a design event?
Wind directionality. As noted, the direction of the wind in a given event
does not create peak loads (which provide the basis for design pressure
coefficients) simultaneously on all building surfaces. In some cases, the pressure
zones with the highest design pressures are extremely sensitive to wind direction.
In accordance with ASCE 7-98, the velocity pressures in Table 3.7 are based on a
directionality adjustment of 0.85 that applies to hurricane wind conditions where
winds in a given event are multidirectional but with varying magnitude. However,
in “straight” wind climates, a directionality factor of 0.75 has been shown to be
appropriate (Ho, 1992). Therefore, if a site is in a nonhurricane-prone wind area
(i.e., design wind speed of 110 mph gust or less), the designer may also consider
multiplying the values in Table 3.7 by 0.9 (i.e., 0.9 x 0.85 ≅ 0.75) to adjust for
directionality effects in nonhurricane-prone wind environments. ASCE 7-98
currently does not recognize this additional adjustment to account for wind
directionality in “straight” wind environments.
Topographic effects. If topographic wind speed-up effects are likely
because a structure is located near the crest of a protruding hill or cliff, the
designer should consider using the topographic factor provided in ASCE 7-98.
Wind loads can be easily doubled for buildings sited in particularly vulnerable
locations relative to topographic features that cause localized wind speed-up for
specific wind directions (ASCE, 1999).
Step 3: Determine lateral wind pressure coefficients
Lateral pressure coefficients in Table 3.8 are composite pressure
coefficients that combine the effect of positive pressures on the windward face of
the building and negative (suction) pressures on the leeward faces of the building.
When multiplied by the velocity pressure from Steps 1 and 2, the selected
pressure coefficient provides a single wind pressure that is applied to the vertical
projected area of the roof and wall as indicated in Table 3.8. The resulting load is
then used to design the home’s lateral force-resisting system (see Chapter 6). The
lateral wind load must be determined for the two orthogonal directions on the
building (i.e., parallel to the ridge and perpendicular to the ridge), using the
vertical projected area of the building for each direction. Lateral loads are then
assigned to various systems (e.g., shear walls, floor diaphragms, and roof
diaphragms) by use of tributary areas or other methods described in Chapter 6.

3-16 Residential Structural Design Guide
Chapter 3 – Design Loads for Residential Buildings
TABLE 3.8
Lateral Pressure Coefficients for Application
to Vertical Projected Areas
Application Lateral Pressure Coefficients
Roof Vertical Projected Area (by slope)
Flat
3:12
6:12
≥9:12
0.0
0.3
0.5
0.8
Wall Projected Area 1.2
Step 4: Determine wind pressure coefficients for components
and assemblies
The pressure coefficients in Table 3.9 are derived from ASCE 7-98 based
on the assumption that the building is enclosed and not subject to higher internal
pressures that may result from a windward opening in the building. The use of the
values in Table 3.9 greatly simplifies the more detailed methodology described in
ASCE 7-98; as a result, there is some “rounding” of numbers. With the exception
of the roof uplift coefficient, all pressures calculated with the coefficients are
intended to be applied to the perpendicular building surface area that is tributary
to the element of concern. Thus, the wind load is applied perpendicular to the
actual building surface, not to a projected area. The roof uplift pressure coefficient
is used to determine a single wind pressure that may be applied to a horizontal
projected area of the roof to determine roof tie-down connection forces.
For buildings in hurricane-prone regions subject to wind-borne debris, the
GC
p
values in Table 3.9 are required to be increased in magnitude by ±0.35 to
account for higher potential internal pressures due to the possibility of a windward
wall opening (i.e., broken window). The adjustment is not required by ASCE 7-98
in “wind-borne debris regions” if glazing is protected against likely sources of
debris impact as shown by an “approved” test method; refer to Section 3.6.3.
Step 5: Determine design wind pressures
Once the basic velocity pressure is determined in Step 1 and adjusted in
Step 2 for exposure and other site-specific considerations, the designer can
calculate the design wind pressures by multiplying the adjusted basic velocity
pressure by the pressure coefficients selected in Steps 3 and 4. The lateral
pressures based on coefficients from Step 3 are applied to the tributary areas of
the lateral force-resisting systems such as shear walls and diaphragms. The
pressures based on coefficients from Step 4 are applied to tributary areas of
members such as studs, rafters, trusses, and sheathing to determine stresses and
connection forces.

Residential Structural Design Guide 3-17
Chapter 3 – Design Loads for Residential Buildings
TABLE 3-9
Wind Pressure Coefficients for Systems and Components
(enclosed building)
1
Application Pressure Coefficients (GC
p
)
2
Roof
Trusses, roof beams, ridge and hip/valley rafters
Rafters and truss panel members
Roof sheathing
Skylights and glazing
Roof uplift
3
- hip roof with slope between 3:12 and 6:12
- hip roof with slope greater than 6:12
- all other roof types and slopes
Windward overhang
4
-0.9, +0.4
-1.2, +0.7
-2.2, +1.0
-1.2, +1.0
-0.9
-0.8
-1.0
+0.8
Wall
All framing members
Wall sheathing
Windows, doors, and glazing
Garage doors
Air-permeable claddings
5
-1.2, +1.1
-1.3, +1.2
-1.3, +1.2
-1.1, +1.0
-0.9, 0.8
Notes:
1
All coefficients include internal pressure in accordance with the assumption of an enclosed building. With the exception of the categories
labeled trusses, roof beams, ridge and hip/valley rafters, and roof uplift, which are based on MWFRS loads, all coefficients are based on
component with cladding wind loads.
2
Positive and negative signs represent pressures acting inwardly and outwardly, respectively, from the building surface. A negative
pressure is a suction or vacuum. Both pressure conditions should be considered to determine the controlling design criteria.
3
The roof uplift pressure coefficient is used to determine uplift pressures that are applied to the horizontal projected area of the roof for the
purpose of determining uplift tie-down forces. Additional uplift force on roof tie-downs due to roof overhangs should also be included.
The uplift force must be transferred to the foundation or to a point where it is adequately resisted by the dead load of the building and the
capacity of conventional framing connections.
4
The windward overhang pressure coefficient is applied to the underside of a windward roof overhang and acts upwardly on the bottom
surface of the roof overhang. If the bottom surface of the roof overhang is the roof sheathing or the soffit is not covered with a structural
material on its underside, then the overhang pressure shall be considered additive to the roof sheathing pressure.
5
Air-permeable claddings allow for pressure relief such that the cladding experiences about two-thirds of the pressure differential
experienced across the wall assembly (FPL, 1999). Products that experience reduced pressure include lap-type sidings such as wood,
vinyl, aluminum, and other similar sidings. Since these components are usually considered “nonessential,” it may be practical to multiply
the calculated wind load on any nonstructural cladding by 0.75 to adjust for a serviceability wind load (Galambos and Ellingwood, 1986).
Such an adjustment would also be applicable to deflection checks, if required, for other components listed in the table. However, a
serviceability load criterion is not included or clearly defined in existing design codes.
3.6.3 Special Considerations in
Hurricane-Prone Environments
3.6.3.1 Wind-Borne Debris
The wind loads determined in the previous section assume an enclosed
building. If glazing in windows and doors is not protected from wind-borne debris
or otherwise designed to resist potential impacts during a major hurricane, a
building is more susceptible to structural damage owing to higher internal
building pressures that may develop with a windward opening. The potential for
water damage to building contents also increases. Openings formed in the
building envelope during a major hurricane or tornado are often related to
unprotected glazing, improperly fastened sheathing, or weak garage doors and
their attachment to the building. Section 3.9 briefly discusses tornado design
conditions.

3-18 Residential Structural Design Guide
Chapter 3 – Design Loads for Residential Buildings
Recent years have focused much attention on wind-borne debris but with
comparatively little scientific direction and poorly defined goals with respect to
safety (i.e., acceptable risk), property protection, missile types, and reasonable
impact criteria. Conventional practice in residential construction has called for
simple plywood window coverings with attachments to resist the design wind
loads. In some cases, homeowners elect to use impact-resistant glazing or
shutters. Regardless of the chosen method and its cost, the responsibility for
protection against wind-borne debris has traditionally rested with the homeowner.
However, wind-borne debris protection has recently been mandated in some local
building codes.
Just what defines impact resistance and the level of impact risk during a
hurricane has been the subject of much debate. Surveys of damage following
major hurricanes have identified several factors that affect the level of debris
impact risk, including
• wind climate (design wind speed);
• exposure (e.g., suburban, wooded, height of surrounding buildings);
• development density (i.e., distance between buildings);
• construction characteristics (e.g., type of roofing, degree of wind
resistance); and
• debris sources (e.g., roofing, fencing, gravel, etc.).
Current standards for selecting impact criteria for wind-borne debris
protection do not explicitly consider all of the above factors. Further, the primary
debris source in typical residential developments is asphalt roof shingles, which
are not represented in existing impact test methods. These factors can have a
dramatic effect on the level of wind-borne debris risk; moreover, existing impact
test criteria appear to take a worst-case approach. Table 3.10 presents an example
of missile types used for current impact tests. Additional factors to consider
include emergency egress or access in the event of fire when impact-resistant
glazing or fixed shutter systems are specified, potential injury or misapplication
during installation of temporary methods of window protection, and durability of
protective devices and connection details (including installation quality) such that
they themselves do not become a debris hazard over time.
TABLE 3.10 Missile Types for Wind-Borne Debris Impact Tests
1,2
Description Velocity Energy
2-gram steel balls 130 fps 10 ft-lb
4.5-lb 2x4 40 fps 100 ft-lb
9.0-lb 2x4 50 fps 350 ft-lb
Notes:
1
Consult ASTM E 1886 (ASTM, 1997) or SSTD 12-97 (SBCCI, 1997) for guidance on testing apparatus and
methodology.
2
These missile types are not necessarily representative of the predominant types or sources of debris at any particular
site. Steel balls are intended to represent small gravels that would be commonly used for roof ballast. The 2x4 missiles
are intended to represent a direct, end-on blow from construction debris without consideration of the probability of
such an impact over the life of a particular structure.

Residential Structural Design Guide 3-19
Chapter 3 – Design Loads for Residential Buildings
In view of the above discussion, ASCE 7-98 identifies “wind-borne debris
regions” as areas within hurricane-prone regions that are located (1) within one
mile of the coastal mean high water line where the basic wind speed is equal to or
greater than 110 mph or in Hawaii or (2) where the basic wind speed is equal to or
greater than 120 mph. As described in Section 3.6.2, ASCE 7-98 requires higher
internal pressures to be considered for buildings in wind-borne debris regions
unless glazed openings are protected by impact-resistant glazing or protective
devices proven as such by an approved test method. Approved test methods
include ASTM E1886 and SSTD 12-97 (ASTM, 1997; SBCCI, 1997).
The wind load method described in Section 3.6.2 may be considered
acceptable without wind-borne debris protection, provided that the building
envelope (i.e., windows, doors, sheathing, and especially garage doors) is
carefully designed for the required pressures. Most homes that experience wind-
borne debris damage do not appear to exhibit more catastrophic failures, such as a
roof blow-off, unless the roof was severely underdesigned in the first place (i.e.,
inadequate tie-down) or subject to poor workmanship (i.e., missing fasteners at
critical locations). Those cases are often the ones cited as evidence of internal
pressure in anecdotal field studies. However, garage doors that fail due to wind
pressure more frequently precipitate additional damage related to internal
pressure. Therefore, in hurricane-prone regions, garage door reinforcement or
pressure-rated garage doors should be specified and their attachment to structural
framing carefully considered.
3.6.3.2 Building Durability
Roof overhangs increase uplift loads on roof tie-downs and the framing
members that support the overhangs. They do, however, provide a reliable means
of protection against moisture and the potential decay of wood building materials.
The designer should therefore consider the trade-off between wind load and
durability, particularly in the moist, humid climate zones associated with
hurricanes.
For buildings that are exposed to salt spray or mist from nearby bodies of
salt water, the designer should also consider a higher-than-standard level of
corrosion resistance for exposed fasteners and hardware. Truss plates near roof
vents have also shown accelerated rates of corrosion in severe coastal exposures.
The building owner, in turn, should consider a building maintenance plan that
includes regular inspections, maintenance, and repair.
3.6.3.3 Tips to Improve Performance
The following design and construction tips are simple options for reducing
a building's vulnerability to hurricane damage:
• One-story buildings are much less vulnerable to wind damage than
two- or three-story buildings.
• On average, hip roofs have demonstrated better performance than
gable-end roofs.

3-20 Residential Structural Design Guide
Chapter 3 – Design Loads for Residential Buildings
• Moderate roof slopes (i.e., 4:12 to 6:12) tend to optimize the trade-off
between lateral loads and roof uplift loads (i.e., more aerodynamically
efficient).
• Roof sheathing installation should be inspected for the proper type and
spacing of fasteners, particularly at connections to gable-end framing.
• The installation of metal strapping or other tie-down hardware should
be inspected as required to ensure the transfer of uplift loads.
• If composition roof shingles are used, high-wind fastening
requirements should be followed (i.e., 6 nails per shingle in lieu of the
standard 4 nails). A similar concern exists for tile roofing, metal
roofing, and other roofing materials.
• Consider some practical means of glazed opening protection in the
most severe hurricane-prone areas.
3.7 Snow Loads
For design purposes, snow is typically treated as a simple uniform gravity
load on the horizontal projected area of a roof. The uniformly distributed design
snow load on residential roofs can be easily determined by using the unadjusted
ground snow load. This simple approach also represents standard practice in some
regions of the United States; however, it does not account for a reduction in roof
snow load that may be associated with steep roof slopes with slippery surfaces
(refer to ASCE 7-98). To consider drift loads on sloped gable or hip roofs, the
design roof snow load on the windward and leeward roof surfaces may be
determined by multiplying the ground snow load by 0.8 and 1.2 respectively. In
this case, the drifted side of the roof has 50 percent greater snow load than the
non-drifted side of the roof. However, the average roof snow load is still
equivalent to the ground snow load.
Design ground snow loads may be obtained from the map in Figure 3.3;
however, snow loads are usually defined by the local building department.
Typical ground snow loads range from 0 psf in the South to 50 psf in the northern
United States. In mountainous areas, the ground snow load can surpass 100 psf
such that local snow data should be carefully considered. In areas where the
ground snow load is less than 15 psf, the minimum roof live load (refer to Section
3.4) is usually the controlling gravity load in roof design. For a larger map with
greater detail, refer to ASCE 7-98.

Residential Structural Design Guide 3-21
Chapter 3 – Design Loads for Residential Buildings
FIGURE 3.3 Ground Snow Loads (ASCE 7-98)
Source: Reprinted with permission from the American Society of Civil Engineers, 1801 Alexander Bell Road, Reston, VA. Copyright
ASCE.

3-22 Residential Structural Design Guide
Chapter 3 – Design Loads for Residential Buildings
3.8 Earthquake Loads
3.8.1 General
This section provides a simplified earthquake load analysis procedure
appropriate for use in residential light-frame construction of not more than three
stories above grade. As described in Chapter 2, the lateral forces associated with
seismic ground motion are based on fundamental Newtonian mechanics (F = ma)
expressed in terms of an equivalent static load. The method provided in this
section is a simplification of the most current seismic design provisions (NEHRP,
1997[a and b]). It is also similar to a simplified approach found in more recent
building code development (ICC, 1999).
Most residential designers use a simplified approach similar to that in
older seismic design codes. The approach outlined in the next section follows the
older approach in terms of its simplicity while using the newer seismic risk maps
and design format of NEHRP-97 as incorporated into recent building code
development efforts (ICC, 1999); refer to Figure 3.4. It should be noted, however,
that the newer maps are not without controversy relative to seismic risk
predictions, particularly in the eastern United States. For example, the newer
maps are believed to overstate significantly the risk of earthquakes in the New
Madrid seismic region around St. Louis, MO (Newman et al., 1999). Based on
recent research and the manner of deriving the NEHRP-97 maps for the New
Madrid seismic region, the design seismic loads may be conservative by a factor
of 2 or more. The designer should bear in mind these uncertainties in the design
process.
Chapter 1 discussed the performance of conventional residential
construction in the Northridge Earthquake. In general, wood-framed homes have
performed well in major seismic events, probably because of, among many
factors, their light-weight and resilient construction, the strength provided by
nonstructural systems such as interior walls, and their load distribution
capabilities. Only in the case of gross absence of good judgment or misapplication
of design for earthquake forces have severe life-safety consequences become an
issue in light-frame, low-rise structures experiencing extreme seismic events.

Residential Structural Design Guide 3-23
Chapter 3 – Design Loads for Residential Buildings
FIGURE 3.4
Seismic Map of Design Short-Period Spectral Response
Acceleration (g) (2 percent chance of exceedance in 50 years
or 2,475-year return period)
Source: Reprinted with permission from the American Society of Civil Engineers, 1801 Alexander Bell Road, Reston, VA. Copyright
ASCE.

3-24 Residential Structural Design Guide
Chapter 3 – Design Loads for Residential Buildings
3.8.2 Determination of Earthquake Loads on Houses
The total lateral force at the base of a building is called seismic base shear.
The lateral force experienced at a particular story level is called the story shear.
The story shear is greatest in the ground story and least in the top story. Seismic
base shear and story shear (V) are determined in accordance with the following
equation:
[Equation 3.8-1]
W
R
S2.1
V
DS
= ,
where,
S
DS
= the design spectral response acceleration in the short-period range
determined by Equation 3.8-2 (g)
R = the response modification factor (dimensionless)
W = the total weight of the building or supported by the story under consideration
(lb); 20 percent of the roof snow load is also included where the ground
snow load exceeds 30 psf
1.2 = factor to increase the seismic shear load based on the belief that the
simplified method may result in greater uncertainty in the estimated seismic
load
When determining story shear for a given story, the designer attributes to
that story one-half of the dead load of the walls on the story under consideration
and the dead load supported by the story. Dead loads used in determining seismic
story shear or base shear are found in Section 3.3. For housing, the interior
partition wall dead load is reasonably accounted for by the use of a 6 psf load
distributed uniformly over the floor area. When applicable, the snow load may be
determined in accordance with Section 3.7. The inclusion of any snow load,
however, is based on the assumption that the snow is always frozen solid and
adhered to the building such that it is part of the building mass during the entire
seismic event.
The design spectral response acceleration for short-period ground motion
S
DS
is typically used because light-frame buildings such as houses are believed to
have a short period of vibration in response to seismic ground motion (i.e., high
natural frequency). In fact, nondestructive tests of existing houses have confirmed
the short period of vibration, although once ductile damage has begun to occur in
a severe event, the natural period of the building likely increases. Chapter 1
discussed the apparent correlation between housing performance (degree of
damage) and long-period (one-second) ground motion characteristics in the
Northridge Earthquake (HUD, 1999). As yet, no valid methods are available to
determine the natural period of vibration for use in the seismic design of light-
frame houses. Therefore, the short-period ground motion is used in the interest of
following traditional practice.
Values of S
s
are obtained from Figure 3.7. For a larger map with greater
detail, refer to ASCE 7-98. The value of S
DS
should be determined in
consideration of the mapped short-period spectral response acceleration S
s
and the
required soil site amplification factor F
a
as follows:

Residential Structural Design Guide 3-25
Chapter 3 – Design Loads for Residential Buildings
[Equation 3.8-2]
)F)(S(3/2S
asDS
=
The value of S
s
ranges from practically zero in low-risk areas to 3g in the
highest-risk regions of the United States. A typical value in high seismic areas is
1.5g. In general, wind loads control the design of the lateral force-resisting system
of light-frame houses when S
s
is less than about 1g. The 2/3 coefficient in
Equation 3.8-2 is used to adjust to a design seismic ground motion value from that
represented by the mapped S
s
values (i.e., the mapped values are based on a
“maximum considered earthquake” generally representative of a 2,475-year return
period, with the design basis intended to represent a 475-year return period event).
Table 3.11 provides the values of F
a
associated with a standard “firm” soil
condition used for the design of residential buildings. F
a
decreases with increasing
ground motion because the soil begins to dampen the ground motion as shaking
intensifies. Therefore, the soil can have a moderating effect on the seismic shear
loads experienced by buildings in high seismic risk regions. Dampening also
occurs between a building foundation and the soil and thus has a moderating
effect. However, the soil-structure interaction effects on residential buildings have
been the topic of little study; therefore, precise design procedures have yet to be
developed. If a site is located on fill soils or “soft” ground, a different value of F
a
should be considered. Nonetheless, as noted in the Anchorage Earthquake of 1964
and again 30 years later in the Northridge Earthquake (see Chapter 1), soft soils
do not necessarily affect the performance of the above-ground house structure as
much as they affect the site and foundations (e.g., settlement, fissuring,
liquefaction, etc.).
TABLE 3.11
Site Soil Amplification Factor Relative to Acceleration
(short period, firm soil)
S
s
≤ 0.25g 0.5g 0.75g 1.0g ≥ 1.25g
F
a
1.6 1.4 1.2 1.1 1.0
The seismic response modifier R has a long history in seismic design, but
with little in the way of scientific underpinnings. In fact, it can be traced back to
expert opinion in the development of seismic design codes during the 1950s
(ATC, 1995). In recognition that buildings can effectively dissipate energy from
seismic ground motions through ductile damage, the R factor was conceived to
adjust the shear forces from that which would be experienced if a building could
exhibit perfectly elastic behavior without some form of ductile energy dissipation.
The concept has served a major role in standardizing the seismic design of
buildings even though it has evolved in the absence of a repeatable and
generalized evaluation methodology with a known relationship to actual building
performance.
Those structural building systems that are able to withstand greater ductile
damage and deformation without substantial loss of strength are assigned a higher
value for R. The R factor also incorporates differences in dampening that are
believed to occur for various structural systems. Table 3.12 provides some values
for R that are relevant to residential construction.

3-26 Residential Structural Design Guide
Chapter 3 – Design Loads for Residential Buildings
TABLE 3.12 Seismic Response Modifiers for Residential Construction
Structural System Seismic Response Modifier, R
1
Light-frame shear walls with wood structural panels used as bearing walls 6.0
2
Light-frame shear walls with wall board/lath and plaster 2.0
Reinforced concrete shear walls
3
4.5
Reinforced masonry shear walls
3
3.5
Plain concrete shear walls 1.5
Plain masonry shear walls 1.25
Notes:
1
The R-factors may vary for a given structural system type depending on wall configuration, material selection, and connection detailing,
but these considerations are necessarily matters of designer judgment.
2
The R for light-frame shear walls (steel-framed and wood-framed) with shear panels has been recently revised to 6 but is not yet
published (ICC, 1999). Current practice typically uses an R of 5.5 to 6.5 depending on the edition of the local building code.
3
The wall is reinforced in accordance with concrete design requirements in ACI-318 or ACI-530. Nominally reinforced concrete or
masonry that has conventional amounts of vertical reinforcement such as one #5 rebar at openings and at 4 feet on center may use the
value for reinforced walls provided the construction is no more than two stories above grade.
Design Example 3.3 in Section 3.10 demonstrates the calculation of design
seismic shear load based on the simplified procedures. The reader is referred to
Chapter 6 for additional information on seismic loads and analysis.
3.8.3 Seismic Shear Force Distribution
As described in the previous section, the vertical distribution of seismic
forces to separate stories on a light-frame building is assumed to be in accordance
with the mass supported by each story. However, design codes vary in the
requirements related to vertical distribution of seismic shear. Unfortunately, there
is apparently no clear body of evidence to confirm any particular method of
vertical seismic force distribution for light-frame buildings. Therefore, in keeping
with the simplified method given in Section 3.8.2, the approach used in this guide
reflects what is considered conventional practice. The horizontal distribution of
seismic forces to various shear walls on a given story also varies in current
practice for light-frame buildings. In Chapter 6, several existing approaches to the
design of the lateral force-resisting system of light-frame houses address the issue
of horizontal force distribution with varying degrees of sophistication. Until
methods of vertical and horizontal seismic force distribution are better understood
for application to light-frame buildings, the importance of designer judgment
cannot be overemphasized.
3.8.4 Special Seismic Design Considerations
Perhaps the single most important principle in seismic design is to ensure
that the structural components and systems are adequately tied together to
perform as a structural unit. Underlying this principle are a host of analytic
challenges and uncertainties in actually defining what “adequately tied together”
means in a repeatable, accurate, and theoretically sound manner.
Recent seismic building code developments have introduced several new
factors and provisions that attempt to address various problems or uncertainties in
the design process. Unfortunately, these factors appear to introduce as many

Residential Structural Design Guide 3-27
Chapter 3 – Design Loads for Residential Buildings
uncertainties as they address. Codes have tended to become more complicated to
apply or decipher, perhaps detracting from some important basic principles in
seismic design that, when understood, would provide guidance in the application
of designer judgment. Many of the problems stem from the use of the seismic
response modifier R which is a concept first introduced to seismic design codes in
the 1950s (see discussion in previous section). Some of the issues and concerns
are briefly described below based on a recent critique of seismic design
approaches and other sources (ATC, 1995; NEHRP 1997a and b; ICBO, 1997).
Also known as “reserve strength,” the concept of overstrength is a
realization that a shear resisting system’s ultimate capacity is usually significantly
higher than required by a design load as a result of intended safety margins. At the
same time, the seismic ground motion (load) is reduced by the R factor to account
for ductile response of the building system, among other things. Thus, the actual
forces experienced on various components (i.e. connections) during a design level
event can be substantially higher, even though the resisting system may be able to
effectively dissipate that force. Therefore, overstrength factors have been included
in newer seismic codes with recommendations to assist in designing components
that may experience higher forces than determined otherwise for the building
lateral force resisting system using methods similar to Equation 3.8-1. It should
be noted that current overstrength factors should not be considered exact and that
actual values of overstrength can vary substantially.
In essence, the overstrength concept is an attempt to address the principle
of balanced design. It strives to ensure that critical components, such as
connections, have sufficient capacity so that the overall lateral force-resisting
system is able to act in its intended ductile manner (i.e., absorbing higher-than-
design forces). Thus, a premature failure of a critical component (i.e., a
restraining connection failure) is avoided. An exact approach requires near-perfect
knowledge about various connections, details, safety margins, and system-
component response characteristics that are generally not available. However, the
concept is extremely important and, for the most part, experienced designers have
exercised this principle through a blend of judgment and rational analysis.
The concept of overstrength is addressed in Chapter 6 relative to the
design of restraining connections for light-frame buildings by providing the
designer with ultimate capacity values for light-frame shear wall systems. Thus,
the designer is able to compare the unfactored shear wall capacity to that of hold-
down restraints and other connections to ensure that the ultimate connection
capacity is at least as much as that of the shear wall system. Some consideration
of the ductility of the connection or component may also imply a response
modification factor for a particular connection or framing detail. In summary,
overstrength is an area where exact guidance does not exist and the designer must
exercise reasonable care in accordance with or in addition to the applicable
building code requirements.
The redundancy factor was postulated to address the reliability of lateral
force-resisting systems by encouraging multiple lines of shear resistance in a
building (ATC, 1995). It is now included in some of the latest seismic design
provisions (NEHRP, 1997). Since it appears that redundancy factors have little
technical basis and insufficient verification relative to light-frame structures
(ATC, 1995), they are not explicitly addressed in this guide. In fact, residential
buildings are generally recognized for their inherent redundancies that are

3-28 Residential Structural Design Guide
Chapter 3 – Design Loads for Residential Buildings
systematically overlooked when designating and defining a lateral force resisting
system for the purpose of executing a rational design. However, the principle is
important to consider. For example, it would not be wise to rely on one or two
shear-resisting components to support a building. In typical applications of light-
frame construction, even a single shear wall line has several individual segments
and numerous connections that resist shear forces. At a minimum, there are two
such shear wall lines in either orientation of the building, not to mention interior
walls and other nonstructural elements that contribute to the redundancy of typical
light-frame homes. In summary, redundancy is an area where exact guidance does
not exist and the designer must exercise reasonable care in accordance with or in
addition to the applicable building code requirements.
Deflection amplification has been applied in past and current seismic
design codes to adjust the deflection or story drift determined by use of the design
seismic shear load (as adjusted downward by the R factor) relative to that actually
experienced without allowance for modified response (i.e., load not adjusted
down by the R factor). For wood-framed shear wall construction, the deflection
calculated at the nominal seismic shear load (Equation 3.8-1) is multiplied by a
factor of 4 (NEHRP, 1997). Thus, the estimate of deflection or drift of the shear
wall (or entire story) based on the design seismic shear load would be increased
four-fold. Again, the conditions that lead to this level of deflection amplification
and the factors that may affect it in a particular design are not exact (and are not
obvious to the designer). As a result, conservative drift amplification values are
usually selected for code purposes. Regardless, deflection or drift calculations are
rarely applied in a residential (low-rise) wood-framed building design for three
reasons. First, a methodology is not generally available to predict the drift
behavior of light-frame buildings reliably and accurately. Second, the current
design values used for shear wall design are relatively conservative and are
usually assumed to provide adequate stiffness (i.e., limit drift). Third, code-
required drift limits have not been developed for specific application to light-
frame residential construction. Measures to estimate drift, however, are discussed
in Chapter 6 in terms of nonlinear approximations of wood-frame shear wall load-
drift behavior (up to ultimate capacity). In summary, deformation amplification is
an area where exact guidance does not exist and predictive tools are unreliable.
Therefore, the designer must exercise reasonable care in accordance with or in
addition to the applicable building code requirements.
Another issue that has received greater attention in seismic design
provisions is irregularities. Irregularities are related to special geometric or
structural conditions that affect the seismic performance of a building and either
require special design attention or should be altogether avoided. In essence, the
presence of limits on structural irregularity speaks indirectly of the inability to
predict the performance of a structure in a reliable, self-limiting fashion on the
basis of analysis alone. Therefore, many of the irregularity limitations are based
on judgment from problems experienced in past seismic events.
Irregularities are generally separated into plan and vertical structural
irregularities. Plan structural irregularities include torsional imbalances that result
in excessive rotation of the building, re-entrant corners creating “wings” of a
building, floor or roof diaphragms with large openings or nonuniform stiffness,
out-of-plane offsets in the lateral force resistance path, and nonparallel resisting
systems. Vertical structural irregularities include stiffness irregularities (i.e., a

Residential Structural Design Guide 3-29
Chapter 3 – Design Loads for Residential Buildings
“soft” story), capacity irregularities (i.e., a “weak” story), weight (mass)
irregularity (i.e., a “heavy” story), and geometric discontinuities affecting the
interaction of lateral resisting systems on adjacent stories.
The concept of irregularities is associated with ensuring an adequate load
path and limiting undesirable (i.e., hard to control or predict) building responses
in a seismic event. Again, experienced designers generally understand the effect
of irregularities and effectively address or avoid them on a case-by-case basis. For
typical single-family housing, all but the most serious irregularities (i.e., “soft
story&rdquo;) are generally of limited consequence, particularly given the apparently
significant system behavior of light-frame homes (provided the structure is
reasonably “tied together as a structural unit”). For larger structures, such as low-
and high-rise commercial and residential construction, the issue of
irregularity−and loads−becomes more significant. Because structural irregularities
raise serious concerns and have been associated with building failures or
performance problems in past seismic events, the designer must exercise
reasonable care in accordance with or in addition to the applicable building code
requirements.
A key issue related to building damage involves deformation compatibility
of materials and detailing in a constructed system. This issue may be handled
through specification of materials that have similar deformation capabilities or by
system detailing that improves compatibility. For example, a relatively flexible
hold-down device installed near a rigid sill anchor causes greater stress
concentration on the more rigid element as evidenced by the splitting of wood sill
plates in the Northridge Earthquake. The solution can involve increasing the
rigidity of the hold-down device (which can lessen the ductility of the system,
increase stiffness, and effectively increase seismic load) or redesigning the sill
plate connection to accommodate the hold-down deformation and improve load
distribution. As a nonstructural example of deformation compatibility, gypsum
board interior finishes crack in a major seismic event well before the structural
capability of the wall’s structural sheathing is exhausted. Conversely, wood
exterior siding and similar resilient finishes tend to deform compatibly with the
wall and limit observable or unacceptable visual damage (HUD, 1994). A gypsum
board interior finish may be made more resilient and compatible with structural
deformations by using resilient metal channels or similar detailing; however, this
enhancement has not yet been proven. Unfortunately, there is little definitive
design guidance on deformation compatibility considerations in seismic design of
wood-framed buildings and other structures.
As a final issue, it should be understood that the general objective of
current and past seismic building code provisions has been to prevent collapse in
extreme seismic events such that “protection of life is reasonably provided, but
not with complete assurance” as stated in the 1990 Blue Book (SEAOC, 1990). It
is often believed that damage can be controlled by use of a smaller R factor or, for
a similar effect, a larger safety factor. Others have suggested using a higher
design event. While either approach may indirectly reduce damage or improve
performance, it does not necessarily improve the predictability of building
performance and, therefore, may have uncertain benefits, if any, in many cases.
However, some practical considerations as discussed above may lead to better-
performing buildings, at least from the perspective of controlling damage.

3-30 Residential Structural Design Guide
Chapter 3 – Design Loads for Residential Buildings
3.9 Other Load Conditions
In addition to the loads covered in Sections 3.3 through 3.8 that are
typically considered in the design of a home, other “forces of nature” may create
loads on buildings. Some examples include
• frost heave;
• expansive soils;
• temperature effects; and
• tornadoes.
In certain cases, forces from these phenomena can drastically exceed
reasonable design loads for homes. For example, frost heave forces can easily
exceed 10,000 pounds per square foot (Linell and Lobacz, 1980). Similarly, the
force of expanding clay soil can be impressive. In addition, the self-straining
stresses induced by temperature-related expansion or contraction of a member or
system that is restrained against movement can be very large, although they are
not typically a concern in wood-framed housing. Finally, the probability of a
direct tornado strike on a given building is much lower than considered practical
for engineering and general safety purposes. The unique wind loads produced by
an extreme tornado (i.e., F5 on the Fujita scale) may exceed typical design wind
loads by almost an order of magnitude in effect. Conversely, most tornadoes have
comparatively low wind speeds that can be resisted by attainable design
improvements. However, the risk of such an event is still significantly lower than
required by minimum accepted safety requirements.
It is common practice to avoid the above loads by using sound design
detailing. For example, frost heave can be avoided by placing footings below a
“safe” frost depth, building on nonfrost-susceptible materials, or using other frost
protection methods (see Chapter 4). Expansive soil loads can be avoided by
isolating building foundations from expansive soil, supporting foundations on a
system of deep pilings, and designing foundations that provide for differential
ground movements. Temperature effects can be eliminated by providing
construction joints that allow for expansion and contraction. While such
temperature effects on wood materials are practically negligible, some finishes
such as ceramic tile can experience cracking when inadvertently restrained against
small movements resulting from variations in temperature. Unfortunately,
tornadoes cannot be avoided; therefore, it is not uncommon to consider the
additional cost and protection of a tornado shelter in tornado-prone areas. A
tornado shelter guide is available from the Federal Emergency Management
Agency, Washington, DC.
As noted at the beginning of the chapter, this guide does not address loads
from flooding, ice, rain, and other exceptional sources. The reader is referred to
ASCE 7 and other resources for information regarding special load conditions
(ASCE, 1999).

Residential Structural Design Guide 3-31
Chapter 3 – Design Loads for Residential Buildings
3.10 Design Examples
EXAMPLE 3.1 Design Gravity Load Calculations and
Use of ASD Load Combinations
Given
• Three-story conventional wood-framed home
• 28’ x 44’ plan, clear-span roof, floors supported at mid-span
• Roof dead load = 15 psf (Table 3.2)
• Wall dead load = 8 psf (Table 3.2)
• Floor dead load = 10 psf (Table 3.2)
• Roof snow load = 16 psf (Section 3.7)
• Attic live load = 10 psf (Table 3.4)
• Second- and third-floor live load = 30 psf (Table 3.4)
• First-floor live load = 40 psf (Table 3.4)
Find 1. Gravity load on first-story exterior bearing wall
2. Gravity load on a column supporting loads from two floors
Solution
1. Gravity load on first-story exterior bearing wall
• Determine loads on wall
Dead load = roof DL + 2 wall DL + 2 floor DL
= 1/2 (28 ft)(15 psf) + 2(8 ft)(8 psf) + 2(7 ft)(10 psf)
= 478 plf
Roof snow = 1/2(28 ft)(16 psf) = 224 plf
Live load = (30 psf + 30 psf)(7 ft) = 420 plf
(two floors)
Attic live load = (10 psf)(14 ft - 5 ft*) = 90 plf
*edges of roof span not accessible to roof storage due to
low clearance
• Apply applicable ASD load combinations (Table 3.1)
(a) D + L + 0.3 (L
r
or S)
Wall axial gravity load = 478 plf + 420 plf + 0.3 (224 plf)
= 965 plf*
*equals 1,055 plf if full attic live load allowance is included with L
(b) D + (L
r
or S) + 0.3L
Wall axial gravity load = 478 plf + 224 plf + 0.3 (420 plf)
= 828 plf
Load condition (a) controls the gravity load analysis for the bearing wall. The
same load applies to the design of headers as well as to the wall studs. Of course,
combined lateral (bending) and axial loads on the wall studs also need to be
checked (i.e., D+W); refer to Table 3.1 and Example 3.2. For nonload-bearing
exterior walls (i.e., gable-end curtain walls), contributions from floor and roof live
loads may be negligible (or significantly reduced), and the D+W load combination
likely governs the design.

3-32 Residential Structural Design Guide
Chapter 3 – Design Loads for Residential Buildings
2. Gravity load on a column supporting a center floor girder carrying loads from two
floors (first and second stories)
• Assume a column spacing of 16 ft
• Determine loads on column
(a) Dead load = Second floor + first floor + bearing wall supporting second
floor
= (14 ft)(16 ft)(10 psf) + (14 ft)(16 ft)(10 psf) + (8 ft)(16 ft)(7 psf)
= 5,376 lbs
(b) Live load area reduction (Equation 3.4-1)
- supported floor area = 2(14 ft)(16 ft) = 448 ft
2
per floor
- reduction =






+
448
6.10
25.0 = 0.75 ≥ 0.75 OK
- first-floor live load = 0.75 (40 psf) = 30 psf
- second-floor live load = 0.75 (30 psf) = 22.5 psf
(c) Live load = (14 ft)(16 ft)[30 psf + 22.5 psf]
= 11,760 lbs
• Apply ASD load combinations (Table 3.1)
The controlling load combination is D+L since there are no attic or roof loads
supported by the column. The total axial gravity design load on the column is
17,136 lbs (5,376 lbs + 11,760 lbs).
Note. If LRFD material design specifications are used, the various loads would be
factored in accordance with Table 3.1. All other considerations and calculations remain
unchanged.

Residential Structural Design Guide 3-33
Chapter 3 – Design Loads for Residential Buildings
EXAMPLE 3.2 Design Wind Load Calculations and
Use of ASD Load Combinations
Given
• Site wind speed−100 mph, gust
• Site wind exposure−suburban
• Two-story home, 7:12 roof pitch, 28’ x 44’ plan (rectangular), gable roof, 12-
inch overhang
Find 1. Lateral (shear) load on lower-story end wall
2. Net roof uplift at connections to the side wall
3. Roof sheathing pull-off (suction) pressure
4. Wind load on a roof truss
5. Wind load on a rafter
6. Lateral (out-of-plane) wind load on a wall stud
Solution
1. Lateral (shear) load on lower-story end wall
Step 1: Velocity pressure = 14.6 psf (Table 3.7)
Step 2: Adjusted velocity pressure = 0.9* x 14.6 psf = 13.1 psf
*adjustment for wind directionality (V<110 mph)
Step 3: Lateral roof coefficient = 0.6 (Table 3.8)
Lateral wall coefficient = 1.2 (Table 3.8)
Step 4: Skip
Step 5: Determine design wind pressures
Wall projected area pressure = (13.1 psf)(1.2) = 15.7 psf
Roof projected area pressure = (13.1 psf)(0.6) = 7.9 psf
Now determine vertical projected areas (VPA) for lower-story end-wall tributary
loading (assuming no contribution from interior walls in resisting lateral loads)
Roof VPA = [1/2 (building width)(roof pitch)] x [1/2 (building length)]
= [1/2 (28 ft)(7/12)] x [1/2 (44 ft)]
= [8.2 ft] x [22 ft]
= 180 ft
2
Wall VPA = [(second-story wall height) + (thickness of floor) + 1/2 (first-
story wall height)] x [1/2 (building length)]
= [8 ft + 1 ft + 4 ft] x [1/2 (44 ft)]
= [13 ft] x [22 ft]
= 286 ft
2
Now determine shear load on the first-story end wall
Shear = (roof VPA)(roof projected area pressure) + (wall VPA)(wall
projected area pressure)
= (180 ft
2
)(7.9 psf) + (286 ft
2
)(15.7 psf)
= 5,912 lbs
The first-story end wall must be designed to transfer a shear load of 5,169 lbs. If
side-wall loads were determined instead, the vertical projected area would include
only the gable-end wall area and the triangular wall area formed by the roof. Use
of a hip roof would reduce the shear load for the side and end walls.

3-34 Residential Structural Design Guide
Chapter 3 – Design Loads for Residential Buildings
2. Roof uplift at connection to the side wall (parallel-to-ridge)
Step 1: Velocity pressure = 14.6 psf (as before)
Step 2: Adjusted velocity pressure = 13.1 psf (as before)
Step 3: Skip
Step 4: Roof uplift pressure coefficient = -1.0 (Table 3.9)
Roof overhang pressure coefficient = 0.8 (Table 3.9)
Step 5: Determine design wind pressure
Roof horizontal projected area (HPA) pressure = -1.0 (13.1 psf)
= -13.1 psf
Roof overhang pressure = 0.8 (13.1 psf) = 10.5 psf (upward)
Now determine gross uplift at roof-wall reaction
Gross uplift = 1/2 (roof span)(roof HPA pressure) + (overhang)(overhang pressure
coefficient)
= 1/2 (30 ft)(-13.1 psf) + (1 ft)(-10.5 psf)
= -207 plf (upward)
Roof dead load reaction = 1/2 (roof span)(uniform dead load)
= 1/2 (30 ft)(15 psf*)
*Table 3.2
= 225 plf (downward)
Now determine net design uplift load at roof-wall connection
Net design uplift load = 0.6D + W
u
(Table 3.1)
= 0.6 (225 plf) + (-207 plf)
= -54 plf (net uplift)
The roof-wall connection must be capable of resisting a design uplift load of 54 plf.
Generally, a toenail connection can be shown to meet the design requirement depending
on the nail type, nail size, number of nails, and density of wall framing lumber (see
Chapter 7). At appreciably higher design wind speeds or in more open wind exposure
conditions, roof tie-down straps, brackets, or other connectors should be considered and
may be required.
3. Roof sheathing pull-off (suction) pressure
Step 1: Velocity pressure = 14.6 psf (as before)
Step 2: Adjusted velocity pressure = 13.1 psf (as before)
Step 3: Skip
Step 4: Roof sheathing pressure coefficient (suction) = -2.2 (Table 3.9)
Step 5: Roof sheathing pressure (suction) = (13.1 psf)(-2.2)
= -28.8 psf
The fastener load depends on the spacing of roof framing and spacing of the fastener.
Fasteners in the interior of the roof sheathing panel usually have the largest tributary
area and therefore are critical. Assuming 24-inch-on-center roof framing, the fastener
withdrawal load for a 12-inch-on-center fastener spacing is as follows:
Fastener withdrawal load = (fastener spacing)(framing spacing)
(roof sheathing pressure)
= (1 ft)(2 ft)(-28.8 psf)
= -57.6 lbs

Residential Structural Design Guide 3-35
Chapter 3 – Design Loads for Residential Buildings
This load exceeds the allowable capacity of minimum conventional roof sheathing
connections (i.e., 6d nail). Therefore, a larger nail (i.e., 8d) would be required for the given
wind condition. At appreciably higher wind conditions, a closer fastener spacing or higher-
capacity fastener (i.e., deformed shank nail) may be required; refer to Chapter 7.
4. Load on a roof truss
Step 1: Velocity pressure = 14.6 psf (as before)
Step 2: Adjusted velocity pressure = 13.1 psf (as before)
Step 3: Skip
Step 4: Roof truss pressure coefficient = -0.9, +0.4 (Table 3.9)
Step 5: Determine design wind pressures
(a) Uplift = -0.9 (13.1 psf) = -11.8 psf
(b) Inward = 0.4 (13.1 psf) = 5.2 psf
Since the inward wind pressure is less than the minimum roof live load (i.e., 15 psf, Table
3.4), the following load combinations would govern the roof truss design while the D+W
load combination could be dismissed (refer to Table 3.1):
D + (L
r
or S)
0.6D + W
u
*
*The net uplift load for truss design is relatively small in this case (approximately
3.5 psf) and may be dismissed by an experienced designer.
5. Load on a rafter
Step 1: Velocity pressure = 14.6 psf (as before)
Step 2: Adjusted velocity pressure = 13.1 psf (as before)
Step 3: Skip
Step 4: Rafter pressure coefficient = -1.2, +0.7 (Table 3.9)
Step 5: Determine design wind pressures
(a) Uplift = (-1.2)(13.1 psf) = -15.7 psf
(b) Inward = (0.7)(13.1 psf) = 9.2 psf
Rafters in cathedral ceilings are sloped, simply supported beams, whereas rafters that are
framed with cross-ties (i.e., ceiling joists ) constitute a component (i.e., top chord) of a site-
built truss system. Assuming the former in this case, the rafter should be designed as a
sloped beam by using the span measured along the slope. By inspection, the minimum roof
live load (D+L
r
) governs the design of the rafter in comparison to the wind load
combinations (see Table 3.1). The load combination 0.6 D+W
u
can be dismissed in this case
for rafter sizing but must be considered when investigating wind uplift for the rafter-to-wall
and rafter-to-ridge beam connections.

3-36 Residential Structural Design Guide
Chapter 3 – Design Loads for Residential Buildings
6. Lateral (out-of-plane) wind load on a wall stud
Step 1: Velocity pressure = 14.6 psf (as before)
Step 2: Adjusted velocity pressure = 13.1 psf (as before)
Step 3: Skip
Step 4: Wall stud pressure coefficient = -1.2, +1.1 (Table 3.9)
Step 5: Determine design wind pressures
(a) Outward = (-1.2)(13.1 psf) = -15.7 psf
(b) Inward = (1.1)(13.1 psf) = 14.4 psf
Obviously, the outward pressure of 15.7 psf governs the out-of-plane bending load design
of the wall stud. Since the load is a lateral pressure (not uplift), the applicable load
combination is D+W (refer to Table 3.1), resulting in a combined axial and bending load.
The axial load would include the tributary building dead load from supported assemblies
(i.e., walls, floors, and roof). The bending load would the be determined by using the wind
pressure of 15.7 psf applied to the stud as a uniform line load on a simply supported beam
calculated as follows:
Uniform line load, w = (wind pressure)(stud spacing)
= (15.7 psf)(1.33 ft*)
*assumes a stud spacing of 16 inches on center
= 20.9 plf
Of course, the following gravity load combinations would also need to be considered in the
stud design (refer to Table 3.1):
D + L + 0.3 (L
r
or S)
D + (L
r
or S) + 0.3 L
It should be noted that the stud is actually part of a wall system (i.e., sheathing and interior
finish) and can add substantially to the calculated bending capacity; refer to Chapter 5.

Residential Structural Design Guide 3-37
Chapter 3 – Design Loads for Residential Buildings
EXAMPLE 3.3 Design Earthquake Load Calculation
Given
• Site ground motion, S
s
= 1g
• Site soil condition = firm (default)
• Roof snow load < 30 psf
• Two-story home, 28’ x 44’ plan, typical construction
Find Design seismic shear on first-story end wall assuming no interior shear walls or
contribution from partition walls
Solution
1. Determine tributary mass (weight) of building to first-story seismic shear
Roof dead load = (28 ft)(44 ft)(15 psf) = 18,480 lb
Second-story exterior wall dead load = (144 lf)(8 ft)(8 psf) = 9,216 lb
Second-story partition wall dead load = (28 ft)(44 ft)(6 psf) = 7,392 lb
Second-story floor dead load = (28 ft)(44 ft)(10 psf) = 12,320 lb
First-story exterior walls (1/2 height) = (144 lf)(4 ft)(8 psf) = 4,608 lb
Assume first-story interior partition walls are capable of at least supporting the
seismic shear produced by their own weight
Total tributary weight = 52,016 lb
2. Determine total seismic story shear on first story
S
DS
=2/3 (S
s
)(F
a
) (Equation 3.8-2)
= 2/3 (1.0g)(1.1) (F
a
= 1.1 from Table 3.11)
= 0.74 g
V=
R
S2.1
DS
W
=
5.5
)g74.0(2.1
(52,016 lb) (R = 5.5 from Table 3.12)
= 8,399 lb
3. Determine design shear load on the 28-foot end walls
Assume that the building mass is evenly distributed and that stiffness is also
reasonably balanced between the two end walls; refer to Chapter 6 for additional
guidance.
With the above assumption, the load is simply distributed to the end walls
according to tributary weight (or plan area) of the building. Therefore,
End wall shear = 1/2 (8,399 lb) = 4,200 lb
Note that the design shear load from wind (100 mph gust, exposure B) in Example
3.2 is somewhat greater (5,912 lbs).

3-38 Residential Structural Design Guide
Chapter 3 – Design Loads for Residential Buildings
3.11 References
ACI, Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete and Commentary, ACI
Standard 318, American Concrete Institute, Farmington Hills, MI,
February 1999a.
ACI, Building Code Requirements for Masonry Construction and Commentary,
ACI Standard 530, American Concrete Institute, Detroit, MI, 1999b.
AF&PA, Wood Frame Construction Manual for One- and Two-Family
Dwellings, SBC High Wind Edition, American Forest & Paper
Association, Washington, DC, 1996.
ASCE, Minimum Building Loads for Buildings and Other Structures, ASCE
Standard 7-98, American Society of Civil Engineers, Reston, VA, 1999.
ASTM, Standard Test Method for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil
Using Standard Effort (D 698-91), American Society of Testing and
Materials, West Conshohocken, PA, 1998.
ASTM, Standard Test Method for Performance of Exterior Windows, Curtain
Walls, Doors and Storm Shutters Impacted by Missile(s) and Exposed to
Cyclic Pressure Differentials (ASTM E1886), American Society of
Testing and Materials, West Conshohocken, PA, 1997.
ATC, A Critical Review of Current Approaches to Earthquake-Resistant Design,
Applied Technology Council (ATC-34), Redwood City, CA, 1995.
Chalk, Philip L. and Corotis, Ross B., “Probability Models for Design Live
Loads,” Journal of the Structural Division, Vol. 106 No. ST10, American
Society of Civil Engineers, Reston, VA, December 1978.
Ellingwood, B., MacGregor, J.G., Galambos, T.V., and Cornell, C.A.,
“Probability Based Load Criteria: Load Factors and Load Combinations,”
Journal of the Structural Division, Vol. 108 No. ST5, American Society of
Civil Engineers, Reston, VA, May 1982.
Galambos, T.V. and Ellingwood, B., “Serviceability Limit States: Deflection,”
Journal of Structural Engineering, Vol. 112 No. 1, American Society of
Civil Engineers, Reston, VA, January 1986.
FPL, Performance of Backprimed and Factory Finished Hardboard Siding,
USDA Forest Products Laboratory, Madison, WI, 1999.
Galambos, T.V., Ellingwood, B., MacGregor, J.G., and Cornell, C.A.,
“Probability Based Load Criteria: Assessment of Current Design
Practice,” Journal of the Structural Division, Vol. 108 No. ST5, American
Society of Civil Engineers, Reston, VA, May 1982.

Residential Structural Design Guide 3-39
Chapter 3 – Design Loads for Residential Buildings
Harris, Michael E., Corotis, Ross B., and Bova, Carl J., “Area-Dependent
Processes for Structural Live Loads,” Journal of the Structural Division,
Vol. 107 No. ST5, American Society of Civil Engineers, Reston, VA, May
1980.
Ho, Tat Chiu Eric, Variability of Low Building Wind Loads, Ph.D. thesis
submitted to the Department of Civil Engineering, University of Western
Ontario, London, Ontario, Canada, July 1992.
HUD, Assessment of Damage to Residential Buildings Caused by the Northridge
Earthquake, prepared for the U.S. Department of Housing and Urban
Development by the NAHB Research Center, Inc, Upper Marlboro, MD,
1994.
HUD, Housing Performance Evaluation and Seismic Design Implications in the
Northridge Earthquake, prepared for the U.S. Department of Housing and
Urban Development by the NAHB Research Center, Inc, Upper Marlboro,
MD, 1999.
HUD, Manual for the Construction of Residential Basements in Non-Coastal
Flood Environments, prepared for the U.S. Department of Housing and
Urban Development by the NAHB Research Foundation, Rockville, MD,
1977.
ICBO, Uniform Building Code, Vol. 2, International Conference of Building
Officials, Whittier, CA, 1997.
ICC, International Building Code (Final Draft), International Code Council, Inc.,
Falls Church, VA, 1999.
ICC, International One- and Two-Family Dwelling Code, International Code
Council, Inc., Falls Church, VA, 1998.
Linell, K.A. and Lobacz, E.F., Design and Construction of Foundations in Areas
of Deep Seasonal Frost and Permafrost, Special Report 80-34, Cold
Regions Research and Engineering Laboratory, Hanover, New Hampshire,
August 1980.
NAHBRC, Near Ground Wind and Its Characterization for Engineering
Applications, prepared for the U.S. Department of Housing and Urban
Development and the National Association of Home Builders by the
NAHB Research Center, Inc., Upper Marlboro, MD, 1999.
NEHRP, Recommended Provisions for Seismic Regulations for New Buildings
and Other Structures, Part 1: Provisions (FEMA 302), prepared for the
Federal Emergency Management Agency by the Building Seismic Safety
Council, Washington, DC, 1997a.

3-40 Residential Structural Design Guide
Chapter 3 – Design Loads for Residential Buildings
NEHRP, Recommended Provisions for Seismic Regulations for New Buildings
and Other Structures, Part 2: Commentary (FEMA 303), prepared for the
Federal Emergency Management Agency by the Building Seismic Safety
Council, Washington, DC, 1997b.
Newman, A. et al., “"Slow Deformation and Lower Seismic Hazard at the New
Madrid Seismic Zone,” Science, Vol. 284, April 23, 1999, 619-621.
Peck, R.B., Hanson, W.E. and Thornburn, T.H., Foundation Engineering, John
Wiley & Sons, Inc., New York, NY, 1974.
SBCCI, Standard Building Code, Southern Building Code Congress International,
Birmingham, AL, 1999.
SBCCI, Test Standard for Determining Impact Resistance from Windborne
Debris (SSTD 12-97), Southern Building Code Congress International,
Birmingham, AL, 1997.
Standard Handbook for Civil Engineers, Third Edition, McGraw-Hill, New York,
1983.
University of Alberta, Thin Wall Foundation Testing, Department of Civil
Engineering, University of Alberta, Canada, March 1992.

Residential Structural Design Guide 4-1
CHAPTER 4
Design of Foundations
4.1 General
A foundation transfers the load of a structure to the earth and resists loads
imposed by the earth. A foundation in residential construction may consist of a
footing, wall, slab, pier, pile, or a combination of these elements. This chapter
addresses the following foundation types:
• crawl space;
• basement;
• slab-on-grade with stem wall;
• monolithic slab;
• piles;
• piers; and
• alternative methods.
As discussed in Chapter 1, the most common residential foundation
materials are concrete masonry (i.e., concrete block) and cast-in-place concrete.
Preservative-treated wood, precast concrete, and other methods may also be used.
The concrete slab on grade is the most popular foundation type in the Southeast;
basements are the most common type in the East and Midwest. Crawl spaces are
common in the Northwest and Southeast. Pile foundations are commonly used in
coastal flood zones to elevate structures above flood levels, in weak or expansive
soils to reach a stable stratum, and on steeply sloped sites. Figure 4.1 depicts
different foundation types; a brief description follows.
A crawl space is a building foundation that uses a perimeter foundation
wall to create an under-floor space that is not habitable; the interior crawl space
elevation may or may not be below the exterior finish grade. A basement is
typically defined as a portion of a building that is partly or completely below the
exterior grade and that may be used as habitable or storage space.
A slab on grade with an independent stem wall is a concrete floor
supported by the soil independently of the rest of the building. The stem wall
supports the building loads and in turn is supported directly by the soil or a

4-2 Residential Structural Design Guide
Chapter 4 - Design of Foundations
footing. A monolithic or thickened-edge slab is a ground-supported slab on grade
with an integral footing (i.e., thickened edge); it is normally used in warmer
regions with little or no frost depth but is also used in colder climates when
adequate frost protection is provided (see Section 4.7).
When necessary, piles are used to transmit the load to a deeper soil
stratum with a higher bearing capacity, to prevent failure due to undercutting of
the foundation by scour from flood water flow at high velocities, and to elevate
the building above required flood elevations. Piles are also used to isolate the
structure from expansive soil movements.
Post-and-pier foundations can provide an economical alternative to crawl
space perimeter wall construction. It is common practice to use a brick curtain
wall between piers for appearance and bracing purposes.
The design procedures and information in this chapter cover
• foundation materials and properties;
• soil bearing capacity and footing size;
• concrete or gravel footings;
• concrete and masonry foundation walls;
• preservative-treated wood walls;
• insulating concrete foundations;
• concrete slabs on grade;
• pile foundations; and
• frost protection.
Concrete design procedures generally follow the strength design method
contained in ACI-318 (ACI, 1999), although certain aspects of the procedures
may be considered conservative relative to conventional residential foundation
applications. For this reason, some supplemental design guidance is provided
when practical and technically justified. Masonry design procedures follow the
allowable stress design method of ACI-530 (ACI, 1999). Wood design procedures
are used to design the connections between the foundation system and the
structure above and follow the allowable stress design method for wood
construction; refer to Chapter 7 for connection design information. In addition,
the designer is referred to the applicable design standards for symbol definitions
and additional guidance since the intent of this chapter is to provide supplemental
instruction in the efficient design of residential foundations.
As a matter of consistency within the scope of this guide, the LRFD load
combinations of Chapter 3 (Table 3.1) are used in lieu of those required in ACI-
318 for strength design of concrete. The designer is advised of this variance from
what may be considered accepted practice in the local building code. However,
the intent is to provide designs that are at least consistent with current residential
building code and construction practice. With respect to the design of concrete in
residential foundations, it is also intended to provide reasonable safety margins
that are at least consistent with the minimums required for other more crucial (i.e.,
life-safety) elements of a home. If an actual design is performed in accordance
with this guide, it is the responsibility of the designer to seek any special approval
that may be required for “alternative means and methods” of design and to
identify where and when such approval is needed.

Residential Structural Design Guide 4-3
Chapter 4 - Design of Foundations
FIGURE 4.1 Types of Foundations

4-4 Residential Structural Design Guide
Chapter 4 - Design of Foundations
4.2 Material Properties
A residential designer using concrete and masonry materials must have a
basic understanding of such materials as well as an appreciation of variations in
the materials’ composition and structural properties. In addition, soils are
considered a foundation material (Section 4.3 provides information on soil
bearing). A brief discussion of the properties of concrete and masonry follows.
4.2.1 Concrete
The concrete compressive strength f
c
' used in residential construction is
typically either 2,500 or 3,000 psi, although other values may be specified. For
example, 3,500 psi concrete may be used for improved weathering resistance in
particularly severe climates or unusual applications. The concrete compressive
strength may be verified in accordance with ASTM C39 (ASTM, 1996). Given
that concrete strength increases at a diminishing rate with time, the specified
compressive strength is usually associated with the strength attained after 28 days
of curing time. At that time, concrete generally attains about 85 percent of its fully
cured compressive strength.
Concrete is a mixture of cement, water, sand, gravel, crushed rock, or
other aggregates. Sometimes one or more admixtures are added to change certain
characteristics of the concrete, such as workability, durability, and time of
hardening. The proportions of the components determine the concrete mix’s
compressive strength and durability.
Type
Portland cement is classified into several types in accordance with ASTM
C150 (ASTM, 1998). Residential foundation walls are typically constructed with
Type I cement, which is a general-purpose Portland cement used for the vast
majority of construction projects. Other types of cement are appropriate in
accommodating conditions related to heat of hydration in massive pours and
sulfate resistance. In some regions, sulfates in soils have caused durability
problems with concrete. The designer should check into local conditions and
practices.
Weight
The weight of concrete varies depending on the type of aggregates used in
the concrete mix. Concrete is typically referred to as lightweight or normal
weight. The density of unreinforced normal weight concrete ranges between 144
and 156 pounds per cubic foot (pcf) and is typically assumed to be 150 pcf.
Residential foundations are constructed with normal weight concrete.

Residential Structural Design Guide 4-5
Chapter 4 - Design of Foundations
Slump
Slump is the measure of concrete consistency; the higher the slump, the
wetter the concrete and the easier it flows. Slump is measured in accordance with
ASTM C143 (ASTM, 1998) by inverting a standard 12-inch-high metal cone,
filling it with concrete, and then removing the cone; the amount the concrete
settles in units of inches is the slump. Most foundations, slabs, and walls
consolidated by hand methods have a slump between 4 and 6 inches. One problem
associated with a high-slump concrete is segregation of the aggregate, which leads
to cracking and scaling. Therefore, a slump of greater than 6 should be avoided.
Admixtures
Admixtures are materials added to the concrete mix to improve
workability and durability and to retard or accelerate curing. Some of the most
common admixtures are described below.
• Water reducers improve the workability of concrete without reducing
its strength.
• Retarders are used in hot weather to allow more time for placing and
finishing concrete. Retarders may also reduce the early strength of
concrete.
• Accelerators reduce the setting time, allowing less time for placing
and finishing concrete. Accelerators may also increase the early
strength of concrete.
• Air-entrainers are used for concrete that will be exposed to freeze-
thaw conditions and deicing salts. Less water is needed, and
desegregation of aggregate is reduced when air-entrainers are added.
Reinforcement
Concrete has high compressive strength but low tensile strength; therefore,
reinforcing steel is often embedded in the concrete to provide additional tensile
strength and ductility. In the rare event that the capacity may be exceeded, the
reinforcing steel begins to yield, eliminating an abrupt failure that may otherwise
occur in plain, unreinforced concrete. For this reason, a larger safety margin is
used in the design of plain concrete construction than in reinforced concrete
construction.
Steel reinforcement is available in Grade 40 or Grade 60; the grade
number refers to the minimum tensile yield strength f
y
of the steel (i.e., Grade 40
is minimum 40 ksi steel and Grade 60 is minimum 60 ksi steel). Either grade may
be used for residential construction; however, most reinforcement in the U.S.
market today is Grade 60. It is also important that the concrete mix or slump is
adjusted through the addition of an appropriate amount of water to allow the
concrete to flow easily around the reinforcement bars, particularly when the bars
are closely spaced or crowed at points of overlap. However, close spacing is
rarely required in residential construction and should be avoided in design.

4-6 Residential Structural Design Guide
Chapter 4 - Design of Foundations
The most common steel reinforcement or rebar sizes in residential
construction are No. 3, No. 4, and No. 5, which correspond to diameters of 3/8-
inch, 1/2-inch, and 5/8-inch, respectively. These three sizes of rebar are easily
handled at the jobsite by using manual bending and cutting devices. Table 4.1
provides useful relationships among the rebar number, diameter, and cross-
sectional for reinforced concrete and masonry design.
TABLE 4.1 Rebar Size, Diameter, and Cross-Sectional Areas
Size Diameter (inches) Area (square inches)
No. 3 3/8 0.11
No. 4 1/2 0.20
No. 5 5/8 0.31
No. 6 3/4 0.44
No. 7 7/8 0.60
No. 8 1 0.79
4.2.2 Concrete Masonry Units
Concrete masonry units (CMU) are commonly referred to as concrete
blocks. They are composed of Portland cement, aggregate, and water. Admixtures
may also be added in some situations. Low-slump concrete is molded and cured to
produce strong blocks or units. Residential foundation walls are typically
constructed with units 7-5/8 inches high by 15-5/8 inches long, providing a 3/8-
inch allowance for the width of mortar joints.
In residential construction, nominal 8-inch-thick concrete masonry units
are readily available. It is generally more economical if the masonry unit
compressive strength f’
m
ranges between 1,500 and 3,000 psi. The standard block
used in residential and light-frame commercial construction is generally rated
with a design strength f’
m
of 1,900 psi, although other strengths are available.
Grade
Concrete masonry units are described by grades according to their
intended use per ASTM C90 (ASTM, 1999) or C129 (ASTM, 1999). Residential
foundation walls should be constructed with Grade N units. Grade S may be used
above grade. The grades are described below.
• Grade N is typically required for general use such as in interior and
backup walls and in above- or below-grade exterior walls that may or
may not be exposed to moisture penetration or the weather.
• Grade S is typically limited to above-grade use in exterior walls with
weather-protective coatings and in walls not exposed to the weather.

Residential Structural Design Guide 4-7
Chapter 4 - Design of Foundations
Type
Concrete masonry units are classified in accordance with ASTM C90 as
Type I or II (ASTM, 1999). Type I is a moisture-controlled unit that is typically
specified where drying shrinkage of the block due to moisture loss may result in
excessive cracking in the walls. Type II is a nonmoisture-controlled unit that is
suitable for all other uses. Residential foundation walls are typically constructed
with Type II units.
Weight
Concrete masonry units are available with different densities by altering
the type(s) of aggregate used in their manufacture. Concrete masonry units are
typically referred to as lightweight, medium weight, or normal weight with
respective unit weights or densities less than 105 pcf, between 105 and 125 pcf,
and more than 125 pcf. Residential foundation walls are typically constructed
with low- to medium-weight units because of the low compressive strength
required. However, lower-density units are generally more porous and must be
properly protected to resist moisture intrusion. A common practice in residential
basement foundation wall construction is to provide a cement-based parge coating
and a brush- or spray-applied bituminous coating on the below-ground portions of
the wall. This treatment is usually required by code for basement walls of
masonry or concrete construction; however, in concrete construction, the parge
coating is not necessary.
Hollow or Solid
Concrete masonry units are classified as hollow or solid in accordance
with ASTM C90 (ASTM, 1999). The net concrete cross-sectional area of most
concrete masonry units ranges from 50 to 70 percent depending on unit width,
face-shell and web thicknesses, and core configuration. Hollow units are defined
as those in which the net concrete cross-sectional area is less than 75 percent of
the gross cross-sectional area. Solid units are not necessarily solid but are defined
as those in which the net concrete cross-sectional area is 75 percent of the gross
cross-sectional area or greater.
Mortar
Masonry mortar is used to join concrete masonry units into a structural
wall; it also retards air and moisture infiltration. The most common way to lay
block is in a running bond pattern where the vertical head joints between blocks
are offset by half the block length from one course to the next. Mortar is
composed of cement, lime, clean, well-graded sand, and water and is typically
classified into Types M, S, N, O, and K in accordance with ASTM C270 (ASTM,
1999). Residential foundation walls are typically constructed with Type M or Type
S mortar, both of which are generally recommended for load-bearing interior and
exterior walls including above- and below-grade applications.

4-8 Residential Structural Design Guide
Chapter 4 - Design of Foundations
Grout
Grout is a slurry consisting of cementitious material, aggregate, and water.
When needed, grout is commonly placed in the hollow cores of concrete masonry
units to provide a wall with added strength. In reinforced load-bearing masonry
wall construction, grout is usually placed only in those hollow cores containing
steel reinforcement. The grout bonds the masonry units and steel so that they act
as a composite unit to resist imposed loads. Grout may also be used in
unreinforced concrete masonry walls for added strength.
4.3 Soil Bearing Capacity
and Footing Size
Soil bearing investigations are rarely required for residential construction
except in the case of known risks as evidenced by a history of local problems
(e.g., organic deposits, landfills, expansive soils, etc.). Soil bearing tests on
stronger-than-average soils can, however, justify smaller footings or eliminate
footings entirely if the foundation wall provides sufficient bearing surface. For a
conservative relationship between soil type and load-bearing value, refer to Table
4.2. A similar table is typically published in the building codes.
TABLE 4.2 Presumptive Soil Bearing Values by Soil Description
Presumptive Load-Bearing
Value (psf)
Soil Description
1,500 Clay, sandy clay, silty clay, clayey silt, silt, and sandy silt
2,000 Sand, silty sand, clayey sand, silty gravel, and clayey gravel
3,000 Gravel and sandy gravel
4,000 Sedimentary rock
12,000 Crystalline bedrock
Source: Naval Facilities Command, 1986.
When a soil bearing investigation is desired to determine more accurate
and economical footing requirements, the designer commonly turns to ASTM
D1586, Standard Penetration Test (SPT) and Split-Barrel Sampling of Soils
(ASTM, 1999). This test relies on a 2-inch-diameter device driven into the ground
with a 140-pound hammer dropped from a distance of 30 inches. The number of
hammer drops or blows needed to create a one-foot penetration (blow count) is
recorded. Values can be roughly correlated to soil bearing values as shown in
Table 4.3. The instrumentation and cost of conducting the SPT test is usually not
warranted for typical residential applications. Nonetheless, the SPT test method
provides information on deeper soil strata and thus can offer valuable guidance
for foundation design and building location, particularly when subsurface
conditions are suspected to be problematic. The values in Table 4.3 are associated

Residential Structural Design Guide 4-9
Chapter 4 - Design of Foundations
with the blow count from the SPT test method. Many engineers can provide
reasonable estimates of soil bearing by using smaller penetrometers at less cost,
although such devices and methods may require an independent calibration to
determine presumptive soil bearing values and may not be able to detect deep
subsurface problems. Calibrations may be provided by the manufacturer or,
alternatively, developed by the engineer.
The designer should exercise judgment when selecting the final design
value and be prepared to make adjustments (increases or decreases) in interpreting
and applying the results to a specific design. The values in Tables 4.2 and 4.3 are
generally associated with a safety factor of 3 (Naval Facilities Engineering
Command, 1996) and are considered appropriate for noncontinuous or
independent spread footings supporting columns or piers (i.e., point loads). Use of
a minimum safety factor of 2 (corresponding to a higher presumptive soil bearing
value) is recommended for smaller structures with continuous spread footings
such as houses. To achieve a safety factor of 2, the designer may multiply the
values in Tables 4.2 and 4.3 by 1.5.
Table 4.3
Presumptive Soil Bearing Values (psf) Based on Standard
Penetrometer Blow Count
In Situ Consistency, N
1
Loose
2
(5 to 10 blows per
foot)
Firm
(10 to 25 blows per
foot)
Compact
(25 to 50 blows per
foot)
Gravel 4,000 (10) 8,000 (25) 11,000 (50)
Sand 2,500 (6) 5,000 (20) 6,000 (35)
Fine sand 1,000 (5) 3,000 (12) 5,000 (30)
Noncohes
i
ve
So
ils
Silt 500 (5) 2,000 (15) 4,000 (35)
Insitu Consistency, N
1
:
Soft
3
(3 to 5 blows per
foot)
Medium
( about 10 blows
per foot)
Stiff
(> 20 blows per
foot)
Clay, Sand, Gravel Mixtures 2,000 (3) 5,000 (10) 8,000 (20)
Sandy or Silty Clay 1,000 (4) 3,000 (8) 6,000 (20)
C
ohes
i
ve
So
ils
Clay 500 (5) 2,000 (10) 4,000 (25)
Source: Naval Facilities Command, 1986.
Notes:
1
N denotes the standard penetrometer blow count in blows per foot in accordance with ASTM D1586; shown in parentheses.
2
Compaction should be considered in these conditions, particularly when the blow count is five blows per foot or less.
3
Pile and grade beam foundations should be considered in these conditions, particularly when the blow count is five blows per foot or less.
The required width or area of a spread footing is determined by dividing
the building load on the footing by the soil bearing capacity from Table 4.2 or
Table 4.3 as shown below. Building design loads, including dead and live loads,
should be determined in accordance with Chapter 3 by using allowable stress
design (ASD) load combinations.

4-10 Residential Structural Design Guide
Chapter 4 - Design of Foundations
psfincapacitybearingSoil
lbsinLoad
Area
footingspreadtindependen
=
psfincapacitybearingSoil
plfinLoad
Width
footingcontinuous
=
4.4 Footings
The objectives of footing design are
• to provide a level surface for construction of the foundation wall;
• to provide adequate transfer and distribution of building loads to
the underlying soil;
• to provide adequate strength, in addition to the foundation wall, to
prevent differential settlement of the building in weak or uncertain
soil conditions;
• to place the building foundation at a sufficient depth to avoid frost
heave or thaw weakening in frost-susceptible soils and to avoid
organic surface soil layers; and
• to provide adequate anchorage or mass (when needed in addition to
the foundation wall) to resist potential uplift and overturning forces
resulting from high winds or severe seismic events.
This section presents design methods for concrete and gravel footings.
The designer is reminded that the required footing width is first established in
accordance with Section 4.3. Further, if soil conditions are stable or the
foundation wall can adequately resist potential differential settlement, the footing
may be completely eliminated.
By far, the most common footing in residential construction is a
continuous concrete spread footing. However concrete and gravel footings are
both recognized in prescriptive footing size tables in residential building codes for
most typical conditions (ICC, 1998). In contrast, special conditions give rise to
some engineering concerns that need to be addressed to ensure the adequacy of
any foundation design. Special conditions include
• steeply sloped sites requiring a stepped footing;
• high-wind conditions;
• inland or coastal flooding conditions;
• high-hazard seismic conditions; and
• poor soil conditions.
4.4.1 Simple Gravel and Concrete Footing Design
Building codes for residential construction contain tables that prescribe
minimum footing widths for plain concrete footings (ICC, 1998). Alternatively,
footing widths may be determined in accordance with Section 4.3 based on a

Residential Structural Design Guide 4-11
Chapter 4 - Design of Foundations
site’s particular loading condition and presumptive soil bearing capacity. The
following are general rules of thumb for determining the thickness of plain
concrete footings for residential structures once the required bearing width is
calculated:
• The minimum footing thickness should not be less than the distance the
footing extends outward from the edge of the foundation wall or 6 inches,
whichever is greater.
• The footing width should project a minimum of 2 inches from both faces
of the wall (to allow for a minimum construction tolerance) but not greater
than the footing thickness.
These rules of thumb generally result in a footing design that differs
somewhat from the plain concrete design provisions of Chapter 22 of ACI-318. It
should also be understood that footing widths generally follow the width
increments of standard excavation equipment (i.e., a backhoe bucket size of 12,
16, or 24 inches). Even though some designers and builders may specify one or
two longitudinal No. 4 bars for wall footings, steel reinforcement is not required
for residential-scale structures in typical soil conditions. For situations where the
rules of thumb or prescriptive code tables do not apply or where a more
economical solution is possible, a more detailed footing analysis may be
considered (see Section 4.4.2). Refer to Example 4.1 for a plain concrete footing
design in accordance with the simple method described herein.
Much like a concrete footing, a gravel footing may be used to distribute
foundation loads to a sufficient soil bearing surface area. It also provides a
continuous path for water or moisture and thus must be drained in accordance
with the foundation drainage provisions of the national building codes. Gravel
footings are constructed of crushed stone or gravel that is consolidated by tamping
or vibrating. Pea gravel, which is naturally consolidated, does not require
compaction and can be screeded to a smooth, level surface much like concrete.
Although typically associated with pressure-treated wood foundations (refer to
Section 4.5.3), a gravel footing can support cast-in-place or precast concrete
foundation walls.
The size of a gravel footing is usually based on a 30- to 45-degree angle of
repose for distributing loads; therefore, as with plain concrete footings, the
required depth and width of the gravel footing depends on the width of the
foundation wall, the foundation load, and soil bearing values. Following a rule of
thumb similar to that for a concrete footing, the gravel footing thickness should be
no less than 1.5 times its extension beyond the edge of the foundation wall or, in
the case of a pressure-treated wood foundation, the mud sill. Just as with a
concrete footing, the thickness of a gravel footing may be considered in meeting
the required frost depth. In soils that are not naturally well-drained, provision
should be made to adequately drain a gravel footing.
4.4.2 Concrete Footing Design
For the vast majority of residential footing designs, it quickly becomes
evident that conventional residential footing requirements found in residential
building codes are adequate, if not conservative (ICC,1998). However, to improve

4-12 Residential Structural Design Guide
Chapter 4 - Design of Foundations
performance and economy or to address peculiar conditions, a footing may need
to be specially designed.
A footing is designed to resist the upward-acting pressure created by the
soil beneath the footing; that pressure tends to make the footing bend upward at
its edges. According to ACI-318, the three modes of failure considered in
reinforced concrete footing design are one-way shear, two-way shear, and flexure
(see Figure 4.2). Bearing (crushing) is also a possible failure mode, but is rarely
applicable to residential loading conditions. To simplify calculations for the three
failure modes, the following discussion explains the relation of the failure modes
to the design of plain and reinforced concrete footings. The designer should refer
to ACI-318 for additional commentary and guidance. The design equations used
later in this section are based on ACI-318 and principles of engineering
mechanics as described below. Moreover, the approach is based on the
assumption of uniform soil bearing pressure on the bottom of the footing;
therefore, walls and columns should be supported as close as possible to the
center of the footings.
One-Way (Beam) Shear
When a footing fails due to one-way (beam) shear, the failure occurs at an
angle approximately 45 degrees to the wall as shown in Figure 4.2. For plain
concrete footings, the soil bearing pressure has a negligible effect on the diagonal
shear tension for distance t from the wall edge toward the footing edge; for
reinforced concrete footings, the distance used is d, which equals the depth to the
footing rebar (see Figure 4.2). As a result, one-way shear is checked by assuming
that beam action occurs at a critical failure plane extending across the footing
width as shown in Figure 4.2. One-way shear must be considered in similar
fashion in both continuous wall and rectangular footings; however, for ease of
calculation, continuous wall footing design is typically based on one lineal foot of
wall/footing.
Two-Way (Punching) Shear
When a footing fails by two-way (punching) shear, the failure occurs at an
angle approximately 30 degrees to the column or pier as shown in Figure 4.2.
Punching shear is rarely a concern in the design of continuous wall footings and
thus is usually checked only in the case of rectangular or circular footings with a
heavily loaded pier or column that creates a large concentrated load on a
relatively small area of the footing. For plain concrete footings, the soil bearing
pressure has a negligible effect on the diagonal shear tension at distance t/2 from
the face of a column toward the footing edges; for reinforced concrete footings,
the distance from the face of the column is d/2 (see Figure 4.2). Therefore, the
shear force consists of the net upward-acting pressure on the area of the footing
outside the “punched-out” area (hatched area in Figure 4.2). For square, circular,
or rectangular footings, shear is checked at the critical section that extends in a
plane around a concrete, masonry, wood, or steel column or pier that forms the
perimeter b
o
of the area described above.

Residential Structural Design Guide 4-13
Chapter 4 - Design of Foundations
FIGURE 4.2
Critical Failure Planes in Continuous or Square Concrete
Spread Footings

4-14 Residential Structural Design Guide
Chapter 4 - Design of Foundations
Flexure (Bending)
The maximum moment in a footing deformed by the upward-acting soil
pressures would logically occur in the middle of the footing; however, the rigidity
of the wall or column above resists some of the upward-acting forces and affects
the location of maximum moment. As a result, the critical flexure plane for
footings supporting a rigid wall or column is assumed to be located at the face of
the wall or column. Flexure in a concrete footing is checked by computing the
moment created by the soil bearing forces acting over the cantilevered area of the
footing that extends from the critical flexure plane to the edge of the footing
(hatched area in Figure 4.2). The approach for masonry walls in ACI-318 differs
slightly in that the failure plane is assumed to be located one-fourth of the way
under a masonry wall or column, creating a slightly longer cantilever. For the
purpose of this guide, the difference is considered unnecessary.
Bearing Strength
It is difficult to contemplate conditions where concrete bearing or
compressive strength is a concern in typical residential construction; therefore, a
design check can usually be dismissed as “OK by inspection.” In rare and
peculiar instances where bearing compressive forces on the concrete are extreme
and approach or exceed the specified concrete compressive strength, ACI-
318•10.17 and ACI-318•12.3 should be consulted for appropriate design
guidance.
4.4.2.1 Plain Concrete Footing Design
In this section, the design of plain concrete footings is presented by using
the concepts related to shear and bending covered in the previous section. Refer to
Example 4.1 in Section 4.9 for a plain concrete footing design example.
Shear
In the equations given below for one- and two-way shear, the dimensions
are in accordance with Figure 4.2; units of inches should be used. ACI-318
requires an additional 2 inches of footing thickness to compensate for uneven
trench conditions and does not allow a total footing thickness less than 8 inches
for plain concrete. These limits may be relaxed for residential footing design,
provided that the capacity is shown to be sufficient in accordance with the ACI-
318 design equations. Footings in residential construction are often 6 inches thick.
The equations below are specifically tailored for footings supporting walls or
square columns since such footings are common in residential construction. The
equations may be generalized for use with other conditions (i.e., rectangular
footings and rectangular columns, round footings, etc.) by following the same
principles. In addition, the terms 4/3
c
’f and 4
c
’f are in units of pounds per
square inch and represent “lower-bound” estimates of the ultimate shear stress
capacity of unreinforced concrete.

Residential Structural Design Guide 4-15
Chapter 4 - Design of Foundations
[ACI-318•22.5,22.7]
One-Way (Beam) Shear
uc
VV ≥φ basic design check for shear
() ( ) ltTb5.0qV
su
−−= factored shear load (lb)
lb
P
q
u
s
=
ltf
3
4
V
cc
′φ=φ factored shear capacity (lb)
65.0=φ resistance factor
Two-Way (Punching) Shear
uc
VV ≥φ basic design check for shear
() ( )
2
su
tTbqV +−= l shear load (lb) due to factored load P
u
(lb)
lb
P
q
u
s
=
tbf4V
occ
′φ=φ factored shear capacity (lb)
()tT4b
o
+=
65.0=φ resistance factor
Flexure
For a plain concrete footing, flexure (bending) is checked by using the
equations below for footings that support walls or square columns (see Figure
4.2). The dimensions in the equations are in accordance with Figure 4.2 and use
units of inches. The term
c
’f5 is in units of pounds per square inch (psi) and
represents a “lower-bound” estimate of the ultimate tensile (rupture) stress of
unreinforced concrete in bending.
[ACI-318•22.5,22.7]
un
MM ≥φ basic design check for bending
()
2
su
Tbq
8
1
M −= l

bl
P
q
u
s
=
Sf5M
cn
′φ=φ factored moment capacity (in-lb) for plain concrete
2
t
6
1
S l=
section modulus (in
3
) for footing
65.0=φ resistance factor for plain concrete in bending
uniform soil bearing pressure (psi) due to
factored foundation load P
u
(lb)
uniform soil bearing pressure (psi) due to
factored foundation load P
u
(lb)
perimeter of critical failure plane
around a square column or pier
factored moment (in-lb) due to soil pressure q
s
(psi) acting on
cantilevered portion of footing
uniform soil bearing pressure (psi) due to factored load P
u
(lb)

4-16 Residential Structural Design Guide
Chapter 4 - Design of Foundations
4.4.2.2 Reinforced Concrete Footing Design
For infrequent situations in residential construction where a plain concrete
footing may not be practical or where it is more economical to reduce the footing
thickness, steel reinforcement may be considered. A reinforced concrete footing is
designed similar to a plain concrete footing; however, the concrete depth d to the
reinforcing bar is used to check shear instead of the entire footing thickness t. The
depth of the rebar is equal to the thickness of the footing minus the diameter of
the rebar d
b
and the concrete cover c. In addition, the moment capacity is
determined differently due to the presence of the reinforcement, which resists the
tension stresses induced by the bending moment. Finally, a higher resistance
factor is used to reflect the more consistent bending strength of reinforced
concrete relative to unreinforced concrete.
As specified by ACI-318, a minimum of 3 inches of concrete cover over
steel reinforcement is required when concrete is in contact with soil. In addition,
ACI-318 does not permit a depth d less than 6 inches for reinforced footings
supported by soil. These limits may be relaxed by the designer, provided that
adequate capacity is demonstrated in the strength analysis; however, a reinforced
footing thickness of significantly less than 6 inches may be considered impractical
even though it may calculate acceptably. One exception may be found where a
nominal 4-inch-thick slab is reinforced to serve as an integral footing for an
interior load-bearing wall (that is not intended to transmit uplift forces from a
shear wall overturning restraint anchorage in high-hazard wind or seismic
regions). Further, the concrete cover should not be less than 2 inches for
residential applications, although this recommendation may be somewhat
conservative for interior footings that are generally less exposed to ground
moisture and other corrosive agents. Example 4.2 of Section 4.9 illustrates
reinforced concrete footing design.
Shear
In the equations given below for one- and two-way shear, the dimensions
are in accordance with Figure 4.2; units of inches should be used. Shear
reinforcement (i.e., stirrups) is usually considered impractical for residential
footing construction; therefore, the concrete is designed to withstand the shear
stress as expressed in the equations. The equations are specifically tailored for
footings supporting walls or square columns since such footings are common in
residential construction. The equations may be generalized for use with other
conditions (i.e., rectangular footings and rectangular columns, round footings,
etc.) by following the same principles. In addition, the terms 2
c
’f and 4
c
’f are
in units of pounds per square inch and represent “lower-bound” estimates of the
ultimate shear stress capacity of reinforced concrete.

Residential Structural Design Guide 4-17
Chapter 4 - Design of Foundations
[ACI-318•11.12,15.5]
One-Way (Beam) Shear
uc
VV ≥φ basic design check for shear
() ( ) ldTb5.0qV
su
−−=
lb
P
q
u
s
=
df2V
cc
l′φ=φ factored shear capacity (lb)
b
d5.0ctd −−= depth of reinforcement
85.0=φ
Two-Way (Punching) Shear
uc
VV ≥φ basic design check for shear
()()
2u
u
dTb
b
P
V +−








= l
l
shear load (lb) due to factored load P
u
(lb)
dbf4V
occ
′φ=φ factored shear capacity (lb)
()dT4b
o
+=
85.0=φ
Flexure
The flexure equations below pertain specifically to reinforced concrete
footings that support walls or square columns. The equations may be generalized
for use with other conditions (i.e., rectangular footings and rectangular columns,
round footings, etc.) by following the same principles. The alternative equation
for nominal moment strength M
n
is derived from force and moment equilibrium
principles by using the provisions of ACI-318. Most designers are familiar with
the alternative equation that uses the reinforcement ratio ρ and the nominal
strength coefficient of resistance R
n
. The coefficient is derived from the design
check that ensures that the factored moment (due to factored loads) M
u
is less than
the factored nominal moment strength
n
Mφ of the reinforced concrete. To aid the
designer in short-cutting these calculations, design manuals provide design tables
that correlate the nominal strength coefficient of resistance R
n
to the
reinforcement ratio ρ for a specific concrete compressive strength and steel yield
strength.
resistance factor for reinforced concrete in
shear
perimeter of punching shear failure plane
around a square column or pier
resistance factor for reinforced concrete in
shear
shear load (lb) due to uniform soil bearing
pressure, q
s
(psi)
uniform solid bearing pressure (psi) due to
factored foundation load P
u
(lb)

4-18 Residential Structural Design Guide
Chapter 4 - Design of Foundations
[ACI-318•15.4]
un
MM ≥φ basic design check for bending
2
su
)Tb(q
8
1
M −= l
)
2
a
d(fAM
ysn
−φ=φ factored nominal moment capacity (in-lb)
lc’f85.0
fA
a
ys
=
9.0=φ resistance factor for reinforced concrete in
bending
Alternate method to determine M
n








′
ρ
−φρ=φ
c
y
yn
f85.0
fd5.0
dbdfM








′
−








′
=ρ
c
n
y
c
f85.0
R2
f
f85.0
l reinforcement ratio determined by use of R
n
nominal strength “coefficient of resistance”
2
u
n
d
M
R
c108φ
=
defines reinforcement ratio ρ
dA
s
lρ=
Minimum Reinforcement
Owing to concerns with shrinkage and temperature cracking, ACI-318
requires a minimum amount of steel reinforcement. The following equations
determine minimum reinforcement, although many plain concrete residential
footings have performed successfully and are commonly used. Thus, the ACI
minimums may be considered arbitrary, and the designer may use discretion in
applying the ACI minimums in residential footing design. The minimums
certainly should not be considered a strict “pass/fail” criterion.
[ACI-318•7.12, 10.5]
y
min
f
200
=ρ or 0.0018
ldA
mins,min
ρ= (l is substituted for the ACI-318 symbol b for the concrete beam
width and is consistent with the footing dimensioning in Figure
4.2)
Designers often specify one or two longitudinal No. 4 bars for wall
footings as nominal reinforcement in the case of questionable soils or when
required to maintain continuity of stepped footings on sloped sites or under
conditions resulting in a changed footing depth. However, for most residential
foundations, the primary resistance against differential settlement is provided by
the deep beam action of the foundation wall; footing reinforcement may provide
factored moment (in-lb) due to soil pressure q
s
(psi) acting on cantilevered portion of the footing
(l is substituted for the ACI-318 symbol b for the
concrete beam width and is consistent with the
footing dimensioning in Figure 4.2)
(l is substituted for the ACI-318 symbol b for the
concrete beam width and is consistent with the
footing dimensioning in Figure 4.2)
(l is substituted for the ACI-318 symbol b for the
concrete beam width and is consistent with the
footing dimensioning in Figure 4.2)

Residential Structural Design Guide 4-19
Chapter 4 - Design of Foundations
limited benefit. In such cases, the footing simply acts as a platform for the wall
construction and distributes loads to a larger soil bearing area.
Lap Splices
Where reinforcement cannot be installed in one length to meet
reinforcement requirements, as in continuous wall footings, reinforcement bars
must be lapped to develop the bars’ full tensile capacity across the splice. In
accordance with ACI-318, a minimum lap length of 40 times the diameter of the
reinforcement bar is required for splices in the reinforcement. In addition, the
separation between spliced or lapped bars is not to exceed eight times the
diameter of the reinforcement bar or 6 inches, whichever is less.
4.5 Foundation Walls
The objectives of foundation wall design are
• to transfer the load of the building to the footing or directly to the
earth;
• to provide adequate strength, in combination with the footing when
required, to prevent differential settlement;
• to provide adequate resistance to shear and bending stresses
resulting from lateral soil pressure;
• to provide anchorage for the above-grade structure to resist wind or
seismic forces;
• to provide a moisture-resistant barrier to below-ground habitable
space in accordance with the building code; and
• to isolate nonmoisture-resistant building materials from the

ground.
In some cases, masonry or concrete foundation walls incorporate a
nominal amount of steel reinforcement to control cracking. Engineering
specifications generally require reinforcement of concrete or masonry foundation
walls because of somewhat arbitrary limits on minimum steel-to-concrete ratios,
even for “plain” concrete walls. However, residential foundation walls are
generally constructed of unreinforced or nominally reinforced concrete or
masonry or of preservative-treated wood. The nominal reinforcement approach
has provided many serviceable structures. This section discusses the issue of
reinforcement and presents rational design approach for residential concrete and
masonry foundation walls.
In most cases, a design for concrete or concrete masonry walls can be
selected from the prescriptive tables in the applicable residential building code or
the International One- and Two-Family Dwelling Code (ICC, 1998). Sometimes,
a specific design applied with reasonable engineering judgment results in a more
efficient and economical solution than that prescribed by the codes. The designer
may elect to design the wall as either a reinforced or plain concrete wall. The
following sections detail design methods for both wall types.

4-20 Residential Structural Design Guide
Chapter 4 - Design of Foundations
4.5.1 Concrete Foundation Walls
Regardless of the type of concrete foundation wall selected, the designer
needs to determine the nominal and factored loads that in turn govern the type of
wall (i.e., reinforced or unreinforced) that may be appropriate for a given
application. Based on Table 3.1 of Chapter 3, the following LRFD load
combinations are suggested for the design of residential concrete foundation
walls:
• 1.2 D + 1.6 H
• 1.2 D + 1.6 H + 1.6 L + 0.5 (L
r
or S)
• 1.2 D + 1.6 H + 1.6 (L
r
or S) + 0.5 L
In light-frame homes, the first load combination typically governs
foundation wall design. Axial load increases moment capacity of concrete walls
when they are not appreciably eccentric, as is the case in typical residential
construction.
To simplify the calculations further, the designer may conservatively
assume that the foundation wall acts as a simple span beam with pinned ends,
although such an assumption will tend to overpredict the stresses in the wall. In
any event, the simple span model requires the wall to be adequately supported at
its top by the connection to the floor framing and at its base by the connection to
the footing or bearing against a basement floor slab. Appendix A contains basic
load diagrams and beam equations to assist the designer in analyzing typical
loading conditions and element-based structural actions encountered in residential
design. Once the loads are known, the designer can perform design checks for
various stresses by following ACI-318 and the recommendations contained
herein.
As a practical consideration, residential designers need to keep in mind
that concrete foundation walls are typically 6, 8, or 10 inches thick (nominal). The
typical concrete compressive strength used in residential construction is 2,500 or
3,000 psi, although other strengths are available. Typical reinforcement tensile
yield strength is 60,000 psi (Grade 60) and is primarily a matter of market supply.
Refer to Section 4.2.1 for more information on concrete and steel reinforcement
material properties.
4.5.1.1 Plain Concrete Wall Design
ACI-318 allows the design of plain concrete walls with some limits as
discussed in ACI-318•22.0. ACI-318 recommends the incorporation of
contraction and isolation joints to control cracking; however, this is not a typical
practice for residential foundation walls and temperature and shrinkage cracking
is practically unavoidable. It is considered to have a negligible impact on the
structural integrity of a residential wall. However, cracking may be controlled
(i.e., minimize potential crack widening) by reasonable use of horizontal
reinforcement.
ACI-318 limits plain concrete wall thickness to a minimum of 7.5 inches;
however, the International One- and Two-Family Dwelling Code (ICC, 1998)

Residential Structural Design Guide 4-21
Chapter 4 - Design of Foundations
permits nominal 6-inch-thick foundation walls when the height of unbalanced fill
is less than a prescribed maximum. The 7.5-inch-minimum thickness requirement
is obviously impractical for a short concrete stem wall as in a crawl space
foundation.
Adequate strength needs to be provided and should be demonstrated by
analysis in accordance with the ACI-318 design equations and the
recommendations of this section. Depending on soil loads, analysis should
confirm conventional residential foundation wall practice in typical conditions.
Refer to Example 4.3 of Section 4.9 for an illustration of a plain concrete
foundation wall design.
The following checks are used to determine if a plain concrete wall has
adequate strength.
Shear Capacity
Shear stress is a result of the lateral loads on a structure associated with
wind, earthquake, or backfill forces. Lateral loads are, however, either normal to
the wall surface (i.e., perpendicular or out of plane) or parallel to the wall surface
(i.e., in plane). The designer must consider both perpendicular and parallel shear
in the wall.
Perpendicular shear is rarely a controlling factor in the design of
residential concrete foundation walls. Parallel shear is also usually not a
controlling factor in residential foundation walls.
If greater shear capacity is required in a plain concrete wall, it may be
obtained by increasing the wall thickness or increasing the concrete compressive
strength. Alternatively, a wall can be reinforced in accordance with Section
4.5.1.2.
The following equations apply to both perpendicular and parallel shear in
conjunction with Figure 4.3 for plain concrete walls. For parallel shear, the
equations do not address overturning and bending action that occurs in a direction
parallel to the wall, particularly for short segments of walls under significant
parallel shear load. For concrete foundation walls, this is generally not a concern.
For above-grade wood-frame walls, this is addressed in Chapter 6 in detail.
[ACI-318•22.5.4]
nu
VV φ≤
V
u
= maximum factored shear load on the wall
bhf
3
4
V
cn
′φ=φ
65.0=φ

4-22 Residential Structural Design Guide
Chapter 4 - Design of Foundations
FIGURE 4.3
Variables Defined for Shear Calculations in
Plain Concrete Walls
Combined Axial and Bending Capacity
The ACI-318 equations listed below account for the combined effects of
axial load and bending moment on a plain concrete wall. The intent is to ensure
that the concrete face in compression and the concrete face in tension resulting
from factored nominal axial and bending loads do not exceed the factored
nominal capacity for concrete. A method of plotting the interaction equation
below is shown in Example 4.4 of Section 4.9; refer to Section 4.5.1.3 for
information on interaction diagrams.
[ACI-318•22.5.3, 22.6.3]
1
M
M
P
P
n
u
n
u
≤
φ
+
φ
on the compression face

Residential Structural Design Guide 4-23
Chapter 4 - Design of Foundations
’f5
A
P
S
M
c
g
uu
φ≤− on the tension face
M
u
> M
u,min
M
u
= maximum factored nominal moment on wall
umin,u
hP1.0M =
S’f85.0M
cn
=
g
2
c
cn
A
h32
l
1’f6.0P
















−=
P
u
= factored nominal axial load on the wall at point of maximum moment
65.0=φ
Even though a plain concrete wall often calculates as adequate, the
designer may elect to add a nominal amount of reinforcement for crack control or
other reasons. Walls determined inadequate to withstand combined axial load and
bending moment may gain greater capacity through increased wall thickness or
increased concrete compressive strength. Alternatively, the wall may be
reinforced in accordance with Section 4.5.1.2. Walls determined to have adequate
strength to withstand shear and combined axial load and bending moment may
also be checked for deflection, but this is usually not a limiting factor for typical
residential foundation walls.
4.5.1.2 Reinforced Concrete Design
ACI-318 allows two approaches to the design of reinforced concrete with
some limits on wall thickness and the minimum amount of steel reinforcement;
however, ACI-318 also permits these requirements to be waived in the event that
structural analysis demonstrates adequate strength and stability in accordance
with ACI-318•14.2.7. Refer to Examples 4.5, 4.6, and 4.7 in Section 4.9 for the
design of a reinforced concrete foundation wall.
Reinforced concrete walls should be designed in accordance with ACI-
318•14.4 by using the strength design method. The following checks for shear
and combined flexure and axial load determine if a wall is adequate to resist the
applied loads.
Shear Capacity
Shear stress is a result of the lateral loads on a structure associated with
wind, earthquake, or lateral soil forces. The loads are, however, either normal to
the wall surface (i.e., perpendicular or out of plane) or parallel to the wall surface
(i.e., in plane). The designer must check both perpendicular and parallel shear in
the wall to determine if the wall can resist the lateral loads present.
Perpendicular shear is rarely a controlling factor in the design of typical
residential foundation concrete walls. The level of parallel shear is also usually
not a controlling factor in residential foundation walls.
If greater shear capacity is required, it may be obtained by increasing the
wall thickness, increasing the concrete compressive strength, adding horizontal

4-24 Residential Structural Design Guide
Chapter 4 - Design of Foundations
shear reinforcement, or installing vertical reinforcement to resist shear through
shear friction. Shear friction is the transfer of shear through friction between two
faces of a crack. Shear friction also relies on resistance from protruding portions
of concrete on either side of the crack and by dowel action of the reinforcement
that crosses the crack. The maximum limit on reinforcement spacing of 12 or 24
inches specified in ACI-318•11.5.4 is considered to be an arbitrary limit. When
reinforcement is required, 48 inches as an adequate maximum spacing for
residential foundation wall design agrees with practical experience.
The following equations provide checks for both perpendicular and
parallel shear in conjunction with Figure 4.4. For parallel shear, the equations do
not address overturning and bending action that occurs in a direction parallel to
the wall, particularly for short segments of walls under significant parallel shear
load. For concrete foundation walls, this is generally not a concern. For above-
grade wood-frame walls, this is addressed in Chapter 6 in detail.
[ACI-318•11.5,11.7, 11.10]
nu
VV φ≤
V
u
= maximum factored shear load on wall
scn
VVV +=
dbf2V
wcc
′=
dbf8
s
dfA
V
wc
yv
s
′≤= when
cu
VV φ>
85.0=φ
Shear-Friction Method
nu
VV φ≤
ccyvfn
Af2.0fAV ′≤µ= and
c
A800≤
hbA
wc
=
85.0=φ

Residential Structural Design Guide 4-25
Chapter 4 - Design of Foundations
FIGURE 4.4
Variables Defined for Shear Calculations
in Reinforced Concrete Walls
Combined Flexural and Axial Load Capacity
ACI-318 prescribes reinforcement requirements for concrete walls.
Foundation walls commonly resist both an applied axial load from the structure
above and an applied lateral soil load from backfill. To ensure that the wall’s
strength is sufficient, the designer must first determine slenderness effects (i.e.,
Euler buckling) in the wall. ACI-318•10.10 provides an approximation method to
account for slenderness effects in the wall; however, the slenderness ratio must
not be greater than 100. The slenderness ratio is defined in the following section
as the ratio between unsupported length and the radius of gyration. In residential
construction, the approximation method, more commonly known as the moment
magnifier method, is usually adequate because slenderness ratios are typically less
than 100 in foundation walls.
The moment magnifier method is based on the wall’s classification as a
“sway frame” or “nonsway frame.” In concept, a sway frame is a frame (i.e.,
columns and beams) as opposed to a concrete bearing wall system. Sway frames
are not discussed in detail herein because the soil pressures surrounding a

4-26 Residential Structural Design Guide
Chapter 4 - Design of Foundations
residential foundation typically provide lateral support to resist any racking and
deflections associated with a sway frame. More important, foundation walls
generally have few openings and thus do not constitute a framelike system. For
more information on sway frames and their design procedure, refer to ACI-
318•10.13.
The moment magnifier method uses the relationship of the axial load and
lateral load in addition to wall thickness and unbraced height to determine a
multiplier of 1 or greater, which accounts for slenderness in the wall. The
multiplier is termed the moment magnifier. It magnifies the calculated moment in
the wall resulting from the lateral soil load and any eccentricity in axial load.
Together, the axial load and magnified moment are used to determine whether the
foundation wall section is adequate to resist the applied loads. The following steps
are required to determine the amount of reinforcement required in a typical
residential concrete foundation wall to resist combined flexure and axial loads:
• calculate axial and lateral loads;
• verify that the nonsway condition applies;
• calculate slenderness;
• calculate the moment magnifier; and
• plot the axial load and magnified moment on an interaction diagram.
The following sections discuss the procedure in detail.
Slenderness
Conservatively, assuming that the wall is pinned at the top and bottom,
slenderness in the wall can be calculated by using the equation below. The effective
length factor k is conservatively assumed to equal 1 in this condition. It should be
noted that a value of k much less than 1 (i.e., 0.7) may actually better represent the
end conditions (i.e., nonpinned) of residential foundation walls.
[ACI-318•10.10]
34
r
kl
u
< slenderness ratio
12
d
bd
12
bd
A
I
r
2
3
=== radius of gyration
Moment Magnifier Method
The moment magnifier method is an approximation method allowed in ACI-
318•10.10 for concrete walls with a slenderness ratio less than or equal to 100. If the
slenderness ratio is less than 34, then the moment magnifier is equal to 1 and
requires no additional analysis. The design procedure and equations below follow
ACI-318•10.12. The equation for EI, as listed in ACI-318, is applicable to walls
containing a double layer of steel reinforcement. Residential walls typically contain
only one layer of steel reinforcement; therefore, the equation for EI, as listed herein,
is based on Section 10.12 (ACI, 1996).

Residential Structural Design Guide 4-27
Chapter 4 - Design of Foundations
[ACI-318•10.12.3]
umag,u
MM δ= ⇐ Magnified Moment
1
P75.0
P
1
C
c
u
m
≥






−
=δ
()
2
u
2
c
kl
EI
P
pi
=
6.0C
m
=
or
1C
m
= for members with transverse loads between supports
()h03.06.0PM
umin,u
+=
( )
β
≥
β
−
≥
β
=
gc
gc
gc
IE1.0
h
e
5.0IE
IE4.0
EI
u
2
P
M
e =
0.1125.09.0
2
d
≥ρ−β+=β
g
s
A
A
=ρ
u
dead,u
d
P
P
=β
c
5.1
ccc
f33worf000,57E ′′=
Given that the total factored axial load in residential construction typically
falls below 3,000 pounds per linear foot of wall and that concrete compressive
strength is typically 3,000 psi, Table 4.4 provides prescriptive moment
magnifiers. Interpolation is permitted between wall heights and between factored
axial loads. Depending on the reinforcement ratio and the eccentricity present,
some economy is lost in using the Table 4.4 values instead of the above
calculation method.
TABLE 4.4 Simplified Moment Magnification Factors, δ
ns
Factored Axial Load (plf)
Minimum Wall
Thickness (inches)
Maximum Wall Height
(feet)
2,000 4,000
8 1.07 1.15
5.5
10 1.12 1.26
8 1.03 1.06
7.5
10 1.04 1.09
8 1.00 1.03
9.5
10 1.00 1.04

4-28 Residential Structural Design Guide
Chapter 4 - Design of Foundations
Example 4.6 in Section 4.9 presents the complete design of a reinforced
concrete foundation wall. The magnified moment and corresponding total
factored axial load are plotted on an interaction diagram as shown in Example 4.7.
Refer to Section 4.5.1.3 for a description of interaction diagrams and additional
resources.
4.5.1.3 Interaction Diagrams
An interaction diagram is a graphic representation of the relationship
between the axial load and bending capacity of a reinforced or plain concrete
wall. The primary use of interaction diagrams is as a design aid for selecting
predetermined concrete wall or column designs for varying loading conditions.
Several publications provide interaction diagrams for use with concrete. These
publications, however, typically focus on column or wall design that is heavily
reinforced in accordance with design loads common in commercial construction.
Residential concrete walls are either plain or slightly reinforced with one layer of
reinforcement typically placed near the center of the wall. Plain and reinforced
concrete interaction diagrams for residential applications and the methods for
deriving them may be found in Structural Design of Insulating Concrete Form
Walls in Residential Construction (PCA, 1998). PCA also offers a computer
program that plots interaction diagrams based on user input; the program is
entitled PCA Column (PCACOL).
An interaction diagram assists the designer in determining the wall’s
structural adequacy at various loading conditions (i.e., combinations of axial and
bending loads). Figure 4.5 illustrates interaction diagrams for plain and reinforced
concrete. Both the design points located within the interaction curve for a given
wall height and the reference axes represent a combination of axial load and
bending moment that the wall can safely support. The most efficient design is
close to the interaction diagram curve. For residential applications, the designer,
realizing that the overall design process is not exact, usually accepts designs
within plus or minus 5 percent of the interaction curve.

Residential Structural Design Guide 4-29
Chapter 4 - Design of Foundations
FIGURE 4.5
Typical Interaction Diagrams for Plain
and Reinforced Concrete Walls

4-30 Residential Structural Design Guide
Chapter 4 - Design of Foundations
4.5.1.4 Minimum Concrete Wall Reinforcement
Plain concrete foundation walls provide serviceable structures when they
are adequately designed (see Section 4.5.1.1). However, when reinforcement is
used to provide additional strength in thinner walls or to address more heavily
loaded conditions, tests have shown that horizontal and vertical wall
reinforcement spacing limited to a maximum of 48 inches on center results in
performance that agrees reasonably well with design expectations (Roller, 1996).
ACI-318•22.6.6.5 requires two No. 5 bars around all wall openings. As an
alternative more suitable to residential construction, a minimum of one rebar
should be placed on each side of openings between 2 and 4 feet wide and two
rebars on each side and one on the bottom of openings greater than 4 feet wide.
The rebar should be the same size required by the design of the reinforced wall or
a minimum No. 4 for plain concrete walls. In addition, a lintel (i.e., concrete
beam) is required at the top of wall openings; refer to Section 4.5.1.6 for more
detail on lintels.
4.5.1.5 Concrete Wall Deflection
ACI-318 does not specifically limit wall deflection. Therefore, deflection
is usually not analyzed in residential foundation wall design. Regardless, a
deflection limit of L/240 for unfactored soil loads is not unreasonable for below-
grade walls.
When using the moment magnifier method, the designer is advised to
apply the calculated moment magnification factor to the unfactored load moments
used in conducting the deflection calculations. The calculation of wall deflection
should also use effective section properties based on E
c
I
g
for plain concrete walls
and E
c
I
e
for reinforced concrete walls; refer to ACI 318•9.5.2.3 to calculate the
effective moment of inertia, I
e
.
If unfactored load deflections prove unacceptable, the designer may
increase the wall thickness or the amount of vertical wall reinforcement. For most
residential loading conditions, however, satisfying reasonable deflection
requirements should not be a limiting condition.
4.5.1.6 Concrete Wall Lintels
Openings in concrete walls are constructed with concrete, steel, precast
concrete, cast stone, or reinforced masonry wall lintels. Wood headers are also
used when not supporting concrete construction above and when continuity at the
top of the wall (i.e., bond beam) is not critical, as in high-hazard seismic or
hurricane coastal zones, or is maintained sufficiently by a wood sill plate and
other construction above.
This section focuses on the design of concrete lintels in accordance with
Chapters 10 and 11 of ACI-318. The concrete lintel is often assumed to act as a
simple span with each end pinned. However, the assumption implies no top
reinforcement to transfer the moment developed at the end of the lintel. Under
that condition, the lintel is assumed to be cracked at the ends such that the end

Residential Structural Design Guide 4-31
Chapter 4 - Design of Foundations
moment is zero and the shear must be transferred from the lintel to the wall
through the bottom reinforcement.
If the lintel is assumed to act as a fixed-end beam, sufficient embedment
of the top and bottom reinforcement beyond each side of the opening should be
provided to fully develop a moment-resisting end in the lintel. Though more
complicated to design and construct, a fixed-end beam reduces the maximum
bending moment (i.e., wl
2
/12 instead of wl
2
/8) on the lintel and allows increased
spans. A concrete lintel cast in a concrete wall acts somewhere between a true
simple span beam and a fixed-end beam. Thus, a designer may design the bottom
bar for a simple span condition and the top bar reinforcement for a fixed-end
condition (conservative). Often, a No. 4 bar is placed at the top of each wall story
to help tie the walls together (bond beam) which can also serve as the top
reinforcement for concrete lintels. Figure 4.6 depicts the cross section and
dimensions for analysis of concrete lintels. Example 4.8 demonstrates the design
of a concrete lintel; refer to Section 4.9.
For additional information on concrete lintels and their design procedure,
refer to the Structural Design of Insulating Concrete Form Walls in Residential
Construction (PCA, 1998) and to Testing and Design of Lintels Using Insulating
Concrete Forms (HUD, 2000). The latter, demonstrates through testing that shear
reinforcement (i.e., stirrups) of concrete lintels is not necessary for short spans
(i.e., 3 feet or less) with lintel depths of 8 inches or more. This research also
indicates that the minimum reinforcement requirements in ACI-318 for beam
design are conservative when a minimum #4 rebar is used as bottom
reinforcement. Further, lintels with small span-to-depth ratios can be accurately
designed as deep beams in accordance with ACI-318 when the minimum
reinforcement ratios are met; refer to ACI-318•11.4.
FIGURE 4.6 Design Variables Defined for Lintel Bending and Shear

4-32 Residential Structural Design Guide
Chapter 4 - Design of Foundations
Flexural Capacity
The following equations are used to determine the flexural capacity of a
reinforced concrete lintel in conjunction with Figure 4.6. An increase in the lintel
depth or area of reinforcement is suggested if greater bending capacity is required.
As a practical matter, though, lintel thickness is limited to the thickness of the
wall in which a lintel is placed. In addition, lintel depth is often limited by the
floor-to-floor height and the vertical placement of the opening in the wall.
Therefore, in many cases, increasing the amount or size of reinforcement is the
most practical and economical solution.
[ACI-318•10]
nu
MM φ≤
12
w
M
2
u
l
= for fixed-end beam model
8
w
M
2
u
l
= for simple span beam model






−φ=φ
2
a
dfAM
ysn
bf85.0
fA
a
c
ys
′
=
9.0=φ
Shear Capacity
Concrete lintels are designed for shear resulting from wall, roof, and floor
loads in accordance with the equations below and Figure 4.6.
[ACI-318•11]
nu
VV φ≤
scn
VVV +=
dbf2V
wcc
′=
cuwc
yv
s
VVwhendbf8
s
dfA
V φ>′≤=
2
V
Vwhen
f
sb50
A
c
u
y
w
v,min
φ
>=
{ }in24or
2
d
ofminimums ≤
{ } dbf4Vwhenin12or
4
d
ofminimums
wcs
′>≤
85.0=φ
Check Concrete Lintel Deflection
ACI-318 does not specifically limit lintel deflection. Therefore, a
reasonable deflection limit of L/240 for unfactored live loads is suggested. The
selection of an appropriate deflection limit, however, is subject to designer

Residential Structural Design Guide 4-33
Chapter 4 - Design of Foundations
discretion. In some applications, a lintel deflection limit of L/180 with live and
dead loads is adequate. A primary consideration is whether lintel is able to move
independently of door and window frames. Calculation of lintel deflection should
use unfactored loads and the effective section properties E
c
I
e
of the assumed
concrete section; refer to ACI-318•9.5.2.3 to calculate the effective moment of
inertia I
e
of the section.
4.5.2 Masonry Foundation Walls
Masonry foundation wall construction is common in residential
construction. It is used in a variety of foundation types, including basements,
crawl spaces, and slabs on grade. For prescriptive design of masonry foundation
walls in typical residential applications, a designer or builder may use the
International One- and Two-Family Dwelling Code (ICC, 1998) or the local
residential building code.
ACI-530 provides for the design of masonry foundation walls by using
allowable stress design (ASD). Therefore, design loads may be determined
according to load combinations presented in Chapter 3 as follows:
• D + H
• D + H + L + 0.3 (L
r
or S)
• D + H + (L
r
or S) + 0.3 L
In light-frame homes, the first load combination typically governs
masonry walls for the same reasons stated in Section 4.5.1 for concrete foundation
walls. To simplify the calculations, the designer may conservatively assume that
the wall story acts as a simple span with pinned ends, although such an
assumption may tend to overpredict the stresses in the wall. For a discussion on
calculating the loads on a structure, refer to Chapter 3. Appendix A contains basic
load diagrams and equations to assist the designer in calculating typical loading
conditions and element-based structural actions encountered in residential design.
Further, walls that are determined to have adequate strength to withstand shear
and combined axial load and bending moment generally satisfy unspecified
deflection requirements. Therefore, foundation wall deflection is not discussed in
this section. However, if desired, deflection may be considered as discussed in
Section 4.5.1.5 for concrete foundation walls.
To follow the design procedure, the designer needs to know the strength
properties of various types and grades of masonry, mortar, and grout currently
available on the market; Section 4.2.2 discusses the material properties. With the
loads and material properties known, the designer can then perform design checks
for various stresses by following ACI-530. Residential construction rarely
involves detailed masonry specifications but rather makes use of standard
materials and methods familiar to local suppliers and trades.
An engineer’s inspection of a home is hardly ever required under typical
residential construction conditions. Designers should be aware, however, that in
jurisdictions covered by the Uniform Building Code (ICBO, 1997), lack of
inspection on the jobsite requires reductions in the allowable stresses to account
for potentially greater variability in material properties and workmanship. Indeed,

4-34 Residential Structural Design Guide
Chapter 4 - Design of Foundations
a higher level of inspection should be considered when masonry construction is
specified in high-hazard seismic or severe hurricane areas. ACI-530 makes no
distinction between inspected and noninspected masonry walls and therefore does
not require adjustments in allowable stresses based on level of inspection.
As a residential designer, keep in mind that concrete masonry units (i.e.,
block) are readily available in nominal 6-, 8-, 10-, and 12-inch thicknesses. It is
generally more economical if the masonry unit compressive strength f’
m
ranges
between 1,500 and 3,000 psi. The standard block used in residential and light
commercial construction is usually rated at 1,900 psi.
4.5.2.1 Unreinforced Masonry Design
ACI-530 addresses the design of unreinforced masonry to ensure that unit
stresses and flexural stresses in the wall do not exceed certain maximum
allowable stresses. It provides for two methods of design: an empirical design
approach and an allowable stress design approach.
Walls may be designed in accordance with ACI-530•5 by using the
empirical design method under the following conditions:
• The building is not located in Seismic Design Category D or E as
defined in NEHRP-97 or ASCE 7-98 (i.e., Seismic Zones 3 or 4 in
most current and local building codes); refer to Chapter 3.
• Foundation walls do not exceed 8 feet in unsupported height.
• The length of the foundation walls between perpendicular masonry
walls or pilasters is a maximum of 3 times the basement wall height.
This limit typically does not apply to residential basements as required
in the International One- and Two-Family Dwelling Code (ICC, 1998)
and other similar residential building codes.
• Compressive stresses do not exceed the allowable stresses listed in
ACI-530; compressive stresses are determined by dividing the design
load by the gross cross-sectional area of the unit per ACI-530•5.4.2.
• Backfill heights do not exceed those listed in Table 4.5.
• Backfill material is nonexpansive and is tamped no more than
necessary to prevent excessive settlement.
• Masonry is laid in running bond with Type M or S mortar.
• Lateral support is provided at the top of the foundation wall before
backfilling.
Drainage is important when using the empirical table because lack of good
drainage may substantially increase the lateral load on the foundation wall if the
soil becomes saturated. As required in standard practice, the finish grade around
the structure should be adequately sloped to drain surface water away from the
foundation walls. The backfill material should also be drained to remove ground
water from poorly drained soils.
Wood floor framing typically provides lateral support to the top of
masonry foundation walls and therefore should be adequately connected to the
masonry in accordance with one of several options. The most common method of

Residential Structural Design Guide 4-35
Chapter 4 - Design of Foundations
connection calls for a wood sill plate, anchor bolts, and nailing of the floor
framing to the sill plate (see Chapter 7).
When the limits of the empirical design method are exceeded, the
allowable stress design procedure for unreinforced masonry, as detailed below,
provides a more flexible approach by which walls are designed as compression
and bending members in accordance with ACI-530•2.2.
TABLE 4.5
Nominal Wall Thickness for 8-Foot-High Masonry
Foundation Walls
1,2
Maximum Unbalanced Backfill HeightNominal
Wall
Thickness
Hollow Unit Masonry Solid Unit Masonry
Fully Grouted Unit
Masonry
6 inches 355
8 inches 557
10 inches 678
12 inches 778
Source: Modified from the ACI-530• 9.6 by using the International One-and Two-Family Dwelling Code (ICC, 1998).
Notes:
1
Based on a backfill with an assumed equivalent fluid density of 30 pcf.
2
Backfill height is measured from the top of the basement slab to the finished exterior grade; wall height is measured from the top of the
basement slab to the top of the wall.
Walls may be designed in accordance with ACI-530•2.2 by using the
allowable stress design method. The fundamental assumptions, derivation of
formulas, and design procedures are similar to those developed for strength-based
design for concrete except that the material properties of masonry are substituted
for those of concrete. Allowable masonry stresses used in allowable stress design
are expressed in terms of a fraction of the specified compressive strength of the
masonry at the age of 28 days, f’
m
. A typical fraction of the specified compressive
strength is 0.25 or 0.33, which equates to a conservative safety factor between 3
and 4 relative to the minimum specified masonry compressive strength. Design
values for flexural tension stress are given in Table 4.6. The following design
checks are used to determine if an unreinforced masonry wall is structurally
adequate (refer to Example 4.9 for the design of an unreinforced concrete
masonry wall).

4-36 Residential Structural Design Guide
Chapter 4 - Design of Foundations
TABLE 4.6
Allowable Flexural Tension Stresses F
a
for Allowable Stress
Design of Unreinforced Masonry
Mortar Type M or S
Type of Masonry Unit Construction Portland Cement/Lime
(psi)
Masonry Cement and Air-Entrained
Portland Cement/Lime
(psi)
Normal to Bed Joints
Solid 40 24
Hollow
1
Ungrouted 25 15
Fully grouted 68 41
Parallel to Bed Joints in Running Bond
Solid 80 48
Hollow
Ungrouted/partially grouted 50 30
Fully grouted 80 48
Source: Table 6.3.1.1 in ACI-530•6.0.
Note:
1
For partially grouted masonry, allowable stresses may be determined on the basis of linear interpolation between fully grouted and
ungrouted hollow units based on the amount of grouting.
Shear Capacity
Shear stress is a result of the lateral loads on the structure associated with
wind, earthquakes, or backfill forces. Lateral loads are both normal to the wall
surface (i.e., perpendicular or out of plane) and parallel to the wall surface (i.e.,
parallel or in plane). Both perpendicular and parallel shear should be checked;
however, neither perpendicular nor parallel shear is usually a controlling factor in
residential foundation walls.
If greater perpendicular shear capacity is required, it may be obtained by
increasing the wall thickness, increasing the masonry unit compressive strength,
or adding vertical reinforcement in grouted cells. If greater parallel shear capacity
is required, it may be obtained by increasing the wall thickness, reducing the size
or number of wall openings, or adding horizontal joint reinforcement. Horizontal
truss-type joint reinforcement can substantially increase parallel shear capacity,
provided that it is installed properly in the horizontal mortar bed joints. If not
installed properly, it can create a place of weakness in the wall, particularly in
out-of-plane bending of an unreinforced masonry wall.
The equations below are used to check perpendicular and parallel shear in
masonry walls. The variable N
v
is the axial design load acting on the wall at the
point of maximum shear. The equations are based on A
n
, which is the net cross-
sectional area of the masonry. For parallel shear, the equations do not address
overturning and bending action that occurs in a direction parallel to the wall,
particularly for short segments of walls under significant parallel shear load. For
concrete foundation walls, this is generally not a concern. For above-grade wood-
frame walls, this is addressed in Chapter 6 in detail.

Residential Structural Design Guide 4-37
Chapter 4 - Design of Foundations
[ACI-530•2.2.5]
vv
Ff ≤
n
v
A2
V3
f =
F
v
= minimum of







+ bondrunningfor
A
N
45.0psi37
psi120
membersshearandaxialfor’f5.1
n
v
m
Axial Compression Capacity
The following equations from ACI-530•2.3 are used to design masonry
walls and columns for compressive loads only. They are based on the net cross-
sectional area of the masonry, including grouted and mortared areas.
[ACI-530•2.3]
Columns
a
PP ≤
() 99
r
h
where
r140
h
1FA65.0Af25.0P
2
sstnma
≤














−+′=
()99
r
h
where
h
r70
FA65.0Af25.0P
2
sstnma
>





+′=
naa,maximum
AFP =
n
A
I
r =
Walls
aa
Ff ≤
() 99
r
h
where
r140
h
1f25.0F
2
ma
≤














−′=
A
P
f
a
=
() 99
r
h
where
h
r70
f25.0F
2
ma
>





′=
12
t
A
I
r
n
≅=
3
2
m
2
e
)
r
e
577.01(
h
IETT
P −=
P < 1/4 P
e
E
m
= 900 F’
m

4-38 Residential Structural Design Guide
Chapter 4 - Design of Foundations
Combined Axial Compression and Flexural Capacity
The following equations from ACI-530 determine the relationship of the
combined effects of axial load and bending moment on a masonry wall.
[ACI-530•2.3]
1
F
f
F
f
b
b
a
a
≤+
n
a
A
P
f =
e
P25.0P ≤
() 99
r
h
for
r140
h
1f25.0F
2
ma
≤














−′=
() 99
r
h
for
h
r70
f25.0F
2
ma
>





′=
n
A
I
r =
S
M
f
b
=
mb
f33.0F ′=
3
2
m
2
e
r
e
577.01
h
IE
P 





−
pi
=
mm
f900E ′=
f
t
< F
t
F
t
= ACI-530 Table 2.2.3.2
S
M
A
P
f
n
t
+
−
=
Tension Capacity
ACI-530 provides allowable values for flexural tension transverse to the
plane of a masonry wall. Standard principles of engineering mechanics determine
the tension stress due to the bending moment caused by lateral (i.e., soil) loads
and offset by axial loads (i.e., dead loads).
[ACI-530•2.3]
f
t
< F
t
F
t
= ACI-530 Table 2.2.3.2
S
M
A
P
f
n
t
+=
Even though an unreinforced masonry wall may calculate as adequate, the
designer may consider adding a nominal amount of reinforcement to control
cracking (refer to Section 4.5.2.3 for a discussion on nominal reinforcement).
Walls determined inadequate to withstand combined axial load and
bending moment may gain greater capacity through increased wall thickness,
increased masonry compressive strength, or the addition of steel reinforcement.

Residential Structural Design Guide 4-39
Chapter 4 - Design of Foundations
Usually the most effective and economical solution for providing greater wall
capacity in residential construction is to increase wall thickness, although
reinforcement is also common. Section 4.5.2.2 discusses the design procedure for
a reinforced masonry wall.
4.5.2.2 Reinforced Masonry Design
When unreinforced concrete masonry wall construction does not satisfy all
design criteria (i.e., load, wall thickness limits, etc.), reinforced walls may be
designed by following the allowable stress design procedure or the strength-based
design procedure of ACI-530. The allowable stress design procedure outlined
below describes an approach by which walls are designed in accordance with
ACI-530•2.3. Although not discussed in detail herein, walls may also be designed
by following the strength-based design method specified in ACI-530.
For walls designed in accordance with ACI-530•2.3 using the allowable
stress design method, the fundamental assumptions, derivation of formulas, and
design procedures are similar to those for design for concrete except that the
material properties of masonry are substituted for those of concrete. Allowable
masonry stresses used in allowable stress design are expressed in terms of a
fraction of the specified compressive strength of the masonry at the age of 28
days, f’
m
. A typical fraction of the specified compressive strength is 0.25, which
equates to a conservative safety factor of 4. The following design checks
determine if a reinforced masonry wall is structurally adequate (refer to Example
4.10 for the design of a reinforced concrete masonry wall).
Shear Capacity
Shear stress is a result of lateral loads on the structure associated with
wind, earthquakes, or backfill forces. Lateral loads are both normal to the wall
surface (i.e., perpendicular or out of plane) and parallel to the wall surface (i.e.,
parallel or in plane). Both perpendicular and parallel shear should be checked,
however, perpendicular shear is rarely a controlling factor in the design of
masonry walls and parallel shear is not usually a controlling factor unless the
foundation is partially or fully above grade (i.e., walk-out basement) with a large
number of openings.
The equations below check perpendicular and parallel shear in conjunction
with Figure 4.7. Some building codes include a “j” coefficient in these equations.
The “j” coefficient defines the distance between the center of the compression
area and the center of the tensile steel area; however, it is often dismissed or
approximated as 0.9. If greater parallel shear capacity is required, it may be
obtained in a manner similar to that recommended in the previous section for
unreinforced masonry design. For parallel shear, the equations do not address
overturning and bending action that occurs in a direction parallel to the wall,
particularly for short segments of walls under significant parallel shear load. For
concrete foundation walls, this is generally not a concern. For above-grade wood-
frame walls, this is addressed in Chapter 6 in detail.

4-40 Residential Structural Design Guide
Chapter 4 - Design of Foundations
[ACI-530•7.5]
vv
Ff ≤
bd
V
f
v
=
psi50f0.1F
mv
≤′= for flexural members
1
Vd
M
wherewallsshearforpsi
Vd
M
4580f
Vd
M
4
3
1
F
mv
<





−≤′





−=
1
Vd
M
wherewallsshearforpsi35f0.1F
mv
≥≤′=
If the shear stress exceeds the above allowables for masonry only, the
designer must design shear reinforcing with the shear stress equation changes in
accordance with ACI-530•2.3.5. In residential construction, it is generally more
economical to increase the wall thickness or to grout additional cores instead of
using shear reinforcement. If shear reinforcement is desired, refer to ACI-530.
ACI-530 limits vertical reinforcement to a maximum spacing s of 48 inches;
however, a maximum of 96 inches on-center is suggested as adequate. Masonry
homes built with reinforcement at 96 inches on-center have performed well in
hurricane-prone areas such as southern Florida.
Flexural or axial stresses must be accounted for to ensure that a wall is
structurally sound. Axial loads increase compressive stresses and reduce tension
stresses and may be great enough to keep the masonry in an uncracked state under
a simultaneous bending load.
Axial Compression Capacity
The following equations from ACI-530•2.3 are used to determine if a
masonry wall can withstand conditions when compressive loads act only on walls
and columns (i.e., interior load-bearing wall or floor beam support pier). As with
concrete, compressive capacity is usually not an issue in supporting a typical
light-frame home. An exception may occur with the bearing points of long-
spanning beams. In such a case, the designer should check bearing capacity by
using ACI-530•2.1.7.

Residential Structural Design Guide 4-41
Chapter 4 - Design of Foundations
FIGURE 4.7
Variables Defined for Shear Calculations in Reinforced
Concrete Masonry Walls

4-42 Residential Structural Design Guide
Chapter 4 - Design of Foundations
[ACI-530•2.3]
Columns
a
PP ≤
() 99
r
h
where
r140
h
1FA65.0Af25.0P
2
sstnma
≤














−+′=
()99
r
h
where
h
r70
FA65.0Af25.0P
2
sstnma
>





+′=
naa,maximum
AFP =
e
A
I
r =
Walls
aa
Ff ≤
() 99
r
h
where
r140
h
1f25.0F
2
ma
≤














−′=
() 99
r
h
where
h
r70
f25.0F
2
ma
>





′=
e
A
I
r =
Calculation using the above equations is based on A
e
, which is the
effective cross-sectional area of the masonry, including grouted and mortared
areas substituted for A
n
.
Combined Axial Compression and Flexural Capacity
In accordance with ACI-530•2.3.2, the design tensile forces in the
reinforcement due to flexure shall not exceed 20,000 psi for Grade 40 or 50 steel,
24,000 psi for Grade 60 steel, or 30,000 psi for wire joint reinforcement. As stated,
most reinforcing steel in the U.S. market today is Grade 60. The following equations
pertain to walls that are subject to combined axial and flexure stresses.
[ACI-530•7.3]
mb
f33.0F ′=
b
a
a
b
F
F
f
1
S
M
f








−≤=
Columns
1
F
f
P
P
b
b
a
≤+
() 99
r
h
where
r140
h
1FA65.0Af25.0P
2
sstnma
≤














−+′=
()99
r
h
where
h
r70
FA65.0Af25.0P
2
sstnma
>





+′=

Residential Structural Design Guide 4-43
Chapter 4 - Design of Foundations
Walls
1
F
f
F
f
b
b
a
a
≤+
m
e
a
f33.0
A
P
f ′≤= due to flexure only or flexure in combination with axial load
() 99
r
h
for
r140
h
1f25.0F
2
ma
≤














−′=
() 99
r
h
for
h
r70
f25.0F
2
ma
>





′=
Walls determined inadequate to withstand combined axial load and bending
moment may gain greater capacity through increased wall thickness, increased
masonry compressive strength, or added steel reinforcement.
4.5.2.3 Minimum Masonry Wall Reinforcement
Unreinforced concrete masonry walls have proven serviceable in millions
of homes. Builders and designers may, however, wish to specify a nominal
amount of reinforcement even when such reinforcement is not required by
analysis. For example, it is not uncommon to specify horizontal reinforcement to
control shrinkage cracking and to improve the bond between intersecting walls.
When used, horizontal reinforcement is typically specified as a ladder or truss-
type wire reinforcement. It is commonly installed continuously in mortar joints at
vertical intervals of 24 inches (i.e., every third course of block).
For reinforced concrete masonry walls, ACI-530 stipulates minimum
reinforcement limits as shown below; however, the limits are somewhat arbitrary
and have no tangible basis as a minimum standard of care for residential design
and construction. The designer should exercise reasonable judgment based on
application conditions, experience in local practice, and local building code
provisions for prescriptive masonry foundation or above-grade wall design in
residential applications.
[ACI-530•2.3.5]
dF
M
A
s
required,s
=
bt0013.0A
v,min
=
bt0007.0A
min,h
=
4.5.2.4 Masonry Wall Lintels
Openings in masonry walls are constructed by using steel, precast
concrete, or reinforced masonry lintels. Wood headers are also used when they do
not support masonry construction above and when continuity at the top of the wall
(i.e., bond beam) is not required or is adequately provided within the system of
wood-framed construction above. Steel angles are the simplest shapes and are

4-44 Residential Structural Design Guide
Chapter 4 - Design of Foundations
suitable for openings of moderate width typically found in residential foundation
walls. The angle should have a horizontal leg of the same width as the thickness
of the concrete masonry that it supports. Openings may require vertical
reinforcing bars with a hooked end that is placed on each side of the opening to
restrain the lintel against uplift forces in high-hazard wind or earthquake regions.
Building codes typically require steel lintels exposed to the exterior to be a
minimum 1/4-inch thick. Figure 4.8 illustrates some lintels commonly used in
residential masonry construction.
FIGURE 4.8 Concrete Masonry Wall Lintel Types

Residential Structural Design Guide 4-45
Chapter 4 - Design of Foundations
Many prescriptive design tables are available for lintel design. For more
information on lintels, arches, and their design, refer to the NCMA’s TEK Notes;
refer to contact information in Chapter 1. Information on lintels and arches can
also be found in Masonry Design and Detailing (Beall, 1997).
4.5.3 Preservative-Treated Wood Foundation Walls
Preservative-treated wood foundations, commonly known as permanent
wood foundations (PWF), have been used in over 300,000 homes and other
structures throughout the United States. When properly installed, they provide
foundation walls at an affordable cost. In some cases, the manufacturer may offer
a 50-year material warranty, which exceeds the warranty offered for other
common foundation materials.
A PWF is a load-bearing, preservative-treated, wood-framed foundation
wall sheathed with preservative-treated plywood; it bears on a gravel spread
footing. PWF lumber and plywood used in foundations is pressure treated with
calcium chromium arsenate (CCA) to a minimum retention of 0.6 pcf. The walls
are supported laterally at the top by the floor system and at the bottom by a cast-
in-place concrete slab or pressure-treated lumber floor system or by backfill on
the inside of the wall. Proper connection details are essential, along with
provisions for drainage and moisture protection. All fasteners and hardware used
in a PWF should be stainless steel or hot-dipped galvanized. Figure 4.9 illustrates
a PWF.
PWFs may be designed in accordance with the basic provisions provided
in the International One- and Two-Family Dwelling Code (ICC, 1998). Those
provisions, in turn, are based on the Southern Forest Products Association’s
Permanent Wood Foundations Design and Construction Guide (SPC, 1998). The
PWF guide offers design flexibility and thorough technical guidance. Table 4.7
summarizes some basic rules of thumb for design. The steps for using the
prescriptive tables are outlined below.

4-46 Residential Structural Design Guide
Chapter 4 - Design of Foundations
FIGURE 4.9 Preservative-Treated Wood Foundation Walls

Residential Structural Design Guide 4-47
Chapter 4 - Design of Foundations
TABLE 4.7 Preservative-Treated Wood Foundation Framing
1
Maximum Unbalanced
Backfill Height (feet)
Nominal Stud Size
Stud Center-to-Center Spacing
(inches)
5 2x6 16
6 2x6 12
8 2x8 12
• Connect each stud to top plate with framing anchors when the backfill height is 6 feet or greater.
• Provide full-depth blocking in the outer joist space along the foundation wall when floor joists are oriented
parallel to the foundation wall.
• The bottom edge of the foundation studs should bear against a minimum of 2 inches of the perimeter
screed board or the basement floor to resist shear forces from the backfill.
Note:
1
Connection of studs to plates and plates to floor framing is critical to the performance of PWFs. The building code and the Permanent Wood
Foundation Design and Construction Guide (SPC, 1998) should be carefully consulted with respect to connections.
• Granular (i.e., gravel or crushed rock) footings are sized in accordance
with Section 4.4.1. Permanent wood foundations may also be placed
on poured concrete footings.
• Footing plate size is determined by the vertical load from the structure
on the foundation wall and the size of the permanent wood foundation
studs.
• The size and spacing of the wall framing is selected from tables for
buildings up to 36 feet wide that support one or two stories above
grade.
• APA-rated plywood is selected from tables based on unbalanced
backfill height and stud spacing. The plywood must be preservatively
treated and rated for below-ground application.
• Drainage systems are selected in accordance with foundation type
(e.g., basement or crawl space) and soil type. Foundation wall
moisture-proofing is also required (i.e., polyethylene sheeting).
For more information on preservative-treated wood foundations and their
specific design and construction, consult the Permanent Wood Foundations
Design and Construction Guide (SPC, 1998).
4.5.4 Insulating Concrete Form Foundation Walls
Insulating concrete forms (ICFs) have been used in the United States since
the 1970s. They provide durable and thermally efficient foundation and above-
grade walls at reasonable cost. Insulating concrete forms are constructed of rigid
foam plastic, composites of cement and plastic foam insulation or wood chips, or
other suitable insulating materials that have the ability to act as forms for cast-in-
place concrete walls. The forms are easily placed by hand and remain in place
after the concrete is cured to provide added insulation.
ICF systems are typically categorized with respect to the form of the ICF
unit. There are three types of ICF forms: hollow blocks, planks, and panels. The
shape of the concrete wall is best visualized with the form stripped away,

4-48 Residential Structural Design Guide
Chapter 4 - Design of Foundations
exposing the concrete to view. ICF categories based on the resulting nature of the
concrete wall are listed below.
• Flat. Solid concrete wall of uniform thickness.
• Post-and-beam. Concrete frame constructed of vertical and horizontal
concrete members with voids between the members created by the
form. The spacing of the vertical members may be as great as 8 feet.
• Screen-grid. Concrete wall composed of closely spaced vertical and
horizontal concrete members with voids between the members created
by the form. The wall resembles a thick screen made of concrete.
• Waffle-grid. Concrete wall composed of closely space vertical and
horizontal concrete members with thin concrete webs filling the space
between the members. The wall resembles a large waffle made of
concrete.
Foundations may be designed in accordance with the values provided
in the most recent national building codes’ prescriptive tables (ICC, 1998).
Manufacturers also usually provide design and construction information.
Insulating concrete form walls are designed by following a procedure similar
to that in Section 4.5.1; however, special consideration must be given to the
dimensions and shape of an ICF wall that is not a flat concrete wall. Refer to
Figure 4.10 for a typical ICF foundation wall detail.
FIGURE 4.10 Insulating Concrete Form Foundation Walls

Residential Structural Design Guide 4-49
Chapter 4 - Design of Foundations
For more design information, refer to the Structural Design of
Insulating Concrete Form Walls in Residential Construction (Lemay and
Vrankar, 1998). For a prescriptive construction approach, consult the
Prescriptive Method for Insulating Concrete Forms in Residential
Construction (HUD, 1998). These documents can be obtained from the
contacts listed in Chapter 1. Manufacturer data should also be consulted.
4.6 Slabs on Grade
The primary objectives of slab-on-grade design are
• to provide a floor surface with adequate capacity to support all
applied loads;
• to provide thickened footings for attachment of the above grade
structure and for transfer of the load to the earth where required;
and to provide a moisture barrier between the earth and the interior
of the building.
Many concrete slabs for homes, driveways, garages, and sidewalks are
built according to standard thickness recommendations and do not require a
specific design unless poor soil conditions, such as expansive clay soils, exist on
the site.
For typical loading and soil conditions, floor slabs, driveways, garage
floors, and residential sidewalks are built at a nominal 4 inches thick per ACI-
302•2.1. Where interior columns and load-bearing walls bear on the slab, the slab
is typically thickened and may be nominally reinforced (refer to Section 4.4 for
footing design procedures). Monolithic slabs may also have thickened edges that
provide a footing for structural loads from exterior load-bearing walls. The
thickened edges may or may not be reinforced in standard residential practice.
Slab-on-grade foundations are often placed on 2 to 3 inches of washed
gravel or sand and a 6 mil (0.006 inch) polyethylene vapor barrier. This
recommended practice prevents moisture in the soil from wicking through the
slab. The sand or gravel layer acts primarily as a capillary break to soil moisture
transport through the soil. If tied into the foundation drain system, the gravel layer
can also help provide drainage.
A slab on grade greater than 10 feet in any dimension will likely
experience cracking due to temperature and shrinkage effects that create internal
tensile stresses in the concrete. To prevent the cracks from becoming noticeable,
the designer usually specifies some reinforcement, such as welded wire fabric
(WWF) or a fiber-reinforced concrete mix. The location of cracking may be
controlled by placing construction joints in the slab at regular intervals or at
strategic locations hidden under partitions or under certain floor finishes (i.e.,
carpet).
In poor soils where reinforcement is required to increase the slab’s
flexural capacity, the designer should follow conventional reinforced concrete
design methods. The Portland Cement Association (PCA), Wire Reinforcement

4-50 Residential Structural Design Guide
Chapter 4 - Design of Foundations
Institute (WRI), and U.S. Army Corps of Engineers (COE) espouse three methods
for the design of plain or reinforced concrete slabs on grade.
Presented in chart or tabular format, the PCA method selects a slab
thickness in accordance with the applied loads and is based on the concept of one
equivalent wheel loading at the center of the slab. Structural reinforcement is
typically not required; however, a nominal amount of reinforcement is suggested
for crack control, shrinkage, and temperature effects.
The WRI method selects a slab thickness in accordance with a discrete-
element computer model for the slab. The WRI approach graphically accounts for
the relative stiffness between grade support and the concrete slab to determine
moments in the slab. The information is presented in the form of design
nomographs.
Presented in charts and tabular format, the COE method is based on
Westergaard’s formulae for edge stresses in a concrete slab and assumes that the
unloaded portions of the slab help support the slab portions under direct loading.
For further information on the design procedures for each design method
mentioned above and for unique loading conditions, refer to ACI-360, Design of
Slabs on Grade (ACI, 1998) or the Design and Construction of Post-Tensioned
Slabs on Ground (PTI, 1996) for expansive soil conditions.
4.7 Pile Foundations
Piles support buildings under a variety of special conditions that make
conventional foundation practices impractical or inadvisable. Such conditions
include
• weak soils or nonengineered fills that require the use of piles to
transfer foundation loads by skin friction or point bearing;
• inland floodplains and coastal flood hazard zones where buildings
must be elevated;
• steep or unstable slopes; and
• expansive soils where buildings must be isolated from soil expansion
in the “active” surface layer and anchored to stable soil below.
Piles are available in a variety of materials. Preservative-treated timber
piles are typically driven into place by a crane with a mechanical or drop hammer
(most common in weak soils and coastal construction). Concrete piles or piers are
typically cast in place in drilled holes, sometimes with “belled” bases (most
common in expansive soils). Steel H-piles or large-diameter pipes are typically
driven or vibrated into place with specialized heavy equipment (uncommon in
residential construction).
Timber piles are most commonly used in light-frame residential
construction. The minimum pile capacity is based on the required foundation
loading. Pile capacity is, however, difficult to predict; therefore, only rough
estimates of required pile lengths and sizes can be made before installation,
particularly when the designer relies only on skin friction to develop capacity in
deep, soft soils. For this reason, local successful practice is a primary factor in any
pile foundation design such that a pile foundation often can be specified by

Residential Structural Design Guide 4-51
Chapter 4 - Design of Foundations
experience with little design effort. In other cases, some amount of subsurface
exploration (i.e., standard pertrometer test) is advisable to assist in foundation
design or, alternatively, to indicate when one or more test piles may be required.
It is rare for pile depth to be greater than 8 or 10 feet except in extremely
soft soils, on steeply sloped sites with unstable soils, or in coastal hazard areas
(i.e., beachfront property) where significant scour is possible due to storm surge
velocity. Under these conditions, depths can easily exceed 10 feet. In coastal
high-hazard areas known as “V zones” on flood insurance rating maps (FIRMs),
the building must be elevated above the 100-year flood elevation, which is known
as the base flood elevation (BFE) and includes an allowance for wave height. As
shown in Figure 4.11, treated timber piles are typically used to elevate a structure.
FIGURE 4.11 Basic Coastal Foundation Construction
For additional guidance, the designer is referred to the Coastal
Construction Manual (FEMA, 1986) and Pile Buck (Pile Buck, 1990) but should
be prepared to make reasonable design modifications and judgments based on
personal experience with and knowledge of pile construction and local conditions.
National flood Insurance Program (NFIP) requirements should also be carefully
considered by the designer since they may affect the availability of insurance and
the premium amount. From a life-safety perspective, pile-supported buildings are

4-52 Residential Structural Design Guide
Chapter 4 - Design of Foundations
often evacuated during a major hurricane, but flood damage can be substantial if
the building is not properly elevated and detailed. In these conditions, the designer
must consider several factors, including flood loads, wind loads, scour, breakaway
wall and slab construction, corrosion, and other factors. The publications of the
Federal Emergency Management Agency (FEMA), Washington, DC, offer design
guidance. FEMA is also in the process of updating the Coastal Construction
Manual.
The habitable portion of buildings in coastal “A zones” (nonvelocity flow)
and inland floodplains must be elevated above the BFE, particularly if flood
insurance is to be obtained. However, piles are not necessarily the most
economical solution. Common solutions include fills to build up the site or the use
of crawl space foundations.
For driven timber piles, the capacity of a pile can be roughly estimated
from the known hammer weight, drop height, and blow count (blows per foot of
penetration) associated with the drop-hammer pile-driving process. Several pile-
driving formulas are available; while each formula follows a different format, all
share the basic relationship among pile capacity, blow count, penetration, hammer
drop height, and hammer weight. The following equation is the widely recognized
method first reported in Engineering News Record (ENR) and is adequate for
typical residential and light-frame commercial applications:
sF
hW
P
r
a
=
In the above equation, P
a
is the net allowable vertical load capacity, W
r
is
the hammer ram weight, h is the distance the hammer free falls, s is the pile
penetration (set) per blow at the end of driving, and F is the safety factory. The
units for s and h must be the same. The value of s may be taken as the inverse of
the blow count for the last foot of driving. Using the above equation, a “test” pile
may be evaluated to determine the required pile length to obtain adequate bearing.
Alternatively, the designer can specify a required minimum penetration
and required number of blows per foot to obtain sufficient bearing capacity by
friction. The pile size may be specified as a minimum tip diameter, a minimum
butt diameter, or both. The minimum pile butt diameter should not be less than 8
inches; 10- to 12-inch diameters are common. The larger pile diameters may be
necessary for unbraced conditions with long unsupported heights.
In hard material or densely compacted sand or hard clay, a typical pile
meets “refusal” when the blows per foot become excessive. In such a case, it may
be necessary to jet or predrill the pile to a specific depth to meet the minimum
embedment and then finish with several hammer blows to ensure that the required
capacity is met and the pile properly seated in firm soil.
Jetting is the process of using a water pump, hose, and long pipe to “jet”
the tip of the pile into hard-driving ground such as firm sand. Jetting may also be
used to adjust the pile vertically to maintain a reasonable tolerance with the
building layout dimension.
It is also important to connect or anchor the building properly to pile
foundations when severe uplift or lateral load conditions are expected. For
standard pile and concrete grade beam construction, the pile is usually extended
into the concrete “cap” a few inches or more. The connection requirements of the

Residential Structural Design Guide 4-53
Chapter 4 - Design of Foundations
National Design Specification for Wood Construction (NDS, 1997) should be
carefully followed for these “heavy duty” connections. Such connections are not
specifically addressed in Chapter 7, although much of the information is
applicable.
4.8 Frost Protection
The objective of frost protection in foundation design is to prevent damage
to the structure from frost action (i.e., heaving and thaw weakening) in frost-
susceptible soils.
4.8.1 Conventional Methods
In northern U.S. climates, builders and designers mitigate the effects of
frost heave by constructing homes with perimeter footings that extend below a
locally prescribed frost depth. Other construction methods include
• piles or caissons extending below the seasonal frost line;
• mat or reinforced structural slab foundations that resist differential
heave;
• nonfrost-susceptible fills and drainage; and
• adjustable foundation supports.
The local building department typically sets required frost depths. Often,
the depths are highly conservative in accordance with frost depths experienced in
applications not relevant to residential foundations. The local design frost depth
can vary significantly from that required by actual climate, soil, and application
conditions. One exception occurs in Alaska, where it is common to specify
different frost depths for “warm,” “cold,” and “interior” foundations. For homes
in the Anchorage, Alaska, area, the perimeter foundation is generally classified as
warm, with a required depth of 4 or 5 feet. Interior footings may be required to be
8 inches deep. On the other hand, “cold” foundations, including outside columns,
may be required to be as much as 10 feet deep. In the contiguous 48 states,
depths for footings range from a minimum 12 inches in the South to as much as 6
feet in some northern localities.
Based on the air-freezing index, Table 4.8 presents minimum “safe” frost
depths for residential foundations. Figure 4.12 depicts the air-freezing index, a
climate index closely associated with ground freezing depth. The most frost-
susceptible soils are silty soils or mixtures that contain a large fraction of silt-
sized particles. Generally, soils or fill materials with less than 6 percent fines (as
measured by a #200 sieve) are considered nonfrost-susceptible. Proper surface
water and foundation drainage are also important factors where frost heave is a
concern. The designer should recognize that many soils may not be frost-
susceptible in their natural state (i.e., sand, gravel, or other well-drained soils that
are typically low in moisture content). However, for those that are frost-
susceptible, the consequences can be significant and costly if not properly
considered in the foundation design.

4-54 Residential Structural Design Guide
Chapter 4 - Design of Foundations
TABLE 4.8 Minimum Frost Depths for Residential Footings
1,2
Air-Freezing Index (°F-Days) Footing Depth (inches)
250 or less 12
500 18
1,000 24
2,000 36
3,000 48
4,000 60
Notes:
1
Interpolation is permissible.
2
The values do not apply to mountainous terrain or to Alaska.
4.8.2 Frost-Protected Shallow Foundations
A frost-protected shallow foundation (FPSF) is a practical alternative to
deeper foundations in cold regions characterized by seasonal ground freezing and
the potential for frost heave. Figure 4.13 illustrates several FPSF applications.
FPSFs are best suited to slab-on-grade homes on relatively flat sites. The FPSF
method may, however, be used effectively with walkout basements by insulating
the foundation on the downhill side of the house, thus eliminating the need for a
stepped footing
An FPSF is constructed by using strategically placed vertical and
horizontal insulation to insulate the footings around the building, thereby allowing
foundation depths as shallow as 12 inches in very cold climates. The frost-
protected shallow foundation technology recognizes earth as a heat source that
repels frost. Heat input to the ground from buildings therefore contributes to the
thermal environment around the foundation.
The thickness of the insulation and the horizontal distance that the
insulation must extend away from the building depends primarily on the climate.
In less severe cold climates, horizontal insulation is not necessary. Other factors
such as soil thermal conductivity, soil moisture content, and the internal
temperature of a building are also important. Current design and construction
guidelines are based on reasonable “worst-case” conditions.
After more than 40 years of use in the Scandinavian countries, FPSFs are
now recognized in the prescriptive requirements of the International One- and
Two- Family Dwelling Code (ICC, 1998) and the 1995 edition. However, the code
places limits on the use of foam plastic below grade in areas of noticeably high
termite infestation probability. In those areas termite barriers or other details must
be incorporated into the design to block “hidden” pathways leading from the soil
into the structure between the foam insulation and the foundation wall. The
exception to the code limit occurs when termite-resistant materials (i.e., concrete,
steel, or preservative-treated wood) are specified for a home’s structural members.

Residential Structural Design Guide 4-55
Chapter 4 - Design of Foundations
FIGURE 4.12 Air-Freezing Index Map (100-Year Return Period)

4-56 Residential Structural Design Guide
Chapter 4 - Design of Foundations
The complete design procedure for FPSFs is detailed in Frost Protected
Shallow Foundations in Residential Construction, Second Edition (NAHB
Research Center, Inc., 1996). The first edition of this guide is available from the
U.S. Department of Housing and Urban Development. Either version provides
useful construction details and guidelines for determining the amount (thickness)
of insulation required for a given climate or application. Acceptable insulation
materials include expanded and extruded polystyrenes, although adjusted
insulation values are provided for below-ground use. The American Society of
Civil Engineers (ASCE) is currently developing a standard for FPSF design and
construction based on the resources mentioned above.
FIGURE 4.13 Frost-Protected Shallow Foundation Applications

Residential Structural Design Guide 4-57
Chapter 4 - Design of Foundations
4.8.3 Permafrost
Design of residential foundations on permafrost is beyond the scope of
this guide. The designer is cautioned that the thawing of permafrost due to a
building’s thermal effect on a site can quickly undermine a structure. It is critical
that the presence of permafrost is properly identified through subsoil exploration.
Several effective design approaches are available for building on permafrost.
Refer to Construction in Cold Regions: A Guide for Planners, Engineers,
Contractors, and Managers (McFadden and Bennett, 1991). Permafrost is not a
concern in the lower 48 states of the United States.

4-58 Residential Structural Design Guide
Chapter 4 - Design of Foundations
4.9 Design Examples
EXAMPLE 4.1 Plain Concrete Footing Design
Given Exterior continuous wall footing supporting an 8-inch-wide concrete foundation wall
carrying a 12-foot floor tributary width; the wall supports two floor levels each with the
same tributary width
Design Loads
Live load 0.75 [(12 ft)(40 psf) +(12 ft)(30 psf)] = 630 plf (Table 3.1)
Dead load (12 ft)(10 psf)(2 floors) = 240 plf (Table 3.2)
Wall dead load (8 ft)(0.66 ft)(150 pcf) = 800 plf (Table 3.3)
Footing dead load allowance = 200 plf
Presumptive soil bearing capacity = 1,500 psf (default)
f’
c
= 2,000 psi
Find The minimum size of the concrete footing required to support the loads
Solution
1. Determine the required soil bearing area
()()
ft25.1
psf1,500
ft1plf200plf800plf240plf630
bearingsoilePresumptiv
loadDesign
widthootingF =
+++
==
The required footing width is equal to
b = 1.25 ft = 15 in ≅ 16 in (standard width of excavation equipment)
2. Preliminary design (rule of thumb method)
Footing projection = 1/2 (16 in. - 8 in.) = 4 in
Required plain concrete footing thickness ≅ 4 in (i.e., no less than the
projection)
∴ use minimum 6-inch-thick footing
Footing weight = (1.33 ft)(0.5 ft)(150 pcf) = 100 lb < 200 lb allowance OK
3. Consider design options
• Use 6-inch x16-inch plain wall concrete footing
a20 Design plain concrete footing to check rule of thumb for illustrative purposes only

Residential Structural Design Guide 4-59
Chapter 4 - Design of Foundations
4. Design a plain concrete footing
(a) Determine soil pressure based on factored loads
()( )()( )
psf877,1
ft)(1ft)33.(1
plf6306.1plf200plf800plf2402.1
A
P
q
footing
u
s
=
+++
==
(b) Determine thickness of footing based on moment at the face of the wall
()
2s
u
Tb
8
q
M −=
l
()()
()lf/lbft105ft66.0ft33.1
8
ft1psf877,1
2
−=−=
6
tb
psi000,25S’f5M
2
cn
==φ
un
MM ≥φ
()()()(()
()








≥−
6
tin12
psi000,2565.0ft/in12lf/lbft105
2
t = 2.1 in
(c) Determine footing thickness based on one-way (beam) shear
tf
3
4
V
cc
l′φ=φ
in)(t)(122,000psi
3
4
0.65 





=
() ( )()tTb5.0qV
su
−−= l
()()( )tft66.0ft33.15.0ft1psf849,1 −−=
uc
VV ≥φ
()()( )()tft66.0ft33.15.0ft1psf1,877in)(t)(12psi2,000
3
4
0.65 −−=





t = 0.27 ft = 3.2 in
Therefore, shear in the footing governs the footing thickness

4-60 Residential Structural Design Guide
Chapter 4 - Design of Foundations
Conclusion
The calculations yield a footing thickness of 3.2 inches. In accordance with ACI-
318•22.4.8, two additional inches must be added, resulting in a footing thickness
of 5.2 inches. However, in accordance with ACI-318•22.7.4, plain concrete
footings may not have a thickness less than 8 inches. A 6-inch-thick plain concrete
footing has a history of adequate performance in residential construction and
exceeds the calculated thickness requirement. Therefore, use a 6-inch-thick by 16-
inch-wide wall footing
In high-hazard seismic areas, a nominal footing reinforcement should be
considered (i.e., one No. 4 bar longitudinally). However, longitudinal
reinforcement at the top and bottom of the foundation wall provides greater
strength against differential soil movement in a severe seismic event, particularly
on sites with soft soils.
It is also worthy to note that use of the ACI-318 load combinations in lieu of those
provided in Chapter 3 for strength design would have resulted in a calculated
footing thickness of 3.2 inches instead of 3.1 inches as governed by flexure. This
is a negligible difference for practical purposes.

Residential Structural Design Guide 4-61
Chapter 4 - Design of Foundations
EXAMPLE 4.2 Reinforced Footing Design
Given Interior footing supporting a steel pipe column (3.5 in x 3.5 in bearing) carrying a
12-ft x 12-ft floor tributary area
Service Loads
Live load (12 ft)(12 ft)(40 psf) = 5,760 lb
Dead load (12 ft)(12 ft)(10 psf) = 1,440 lb
Footing and column dead load = 300 lb (allowance)
Presumptive soil bearing capacity = 1,500 psf (default)
f’
c
= 2,500 psi, f
y
= 60,000 psi
Find The minimum size of the concrete footing required to support the loads.
Solution
1. Determine the required soil bearing area
()
2
ft5
psf1,500
lb 300lb1,440lb5,760
bearingsoilePresumptiv
loadService
reqdArea =
++
==
Assume a square footing
in26ft2.2ft5b
2
===
2. Preliminary design (rule of thumb method)
Footing projection = 1/2 (26 in - 3.5 in) = 11.25 in
∴ Required plain concrete footing thickness ≅ 12 in
Footing weight = (5 ft
2
)(1 ft)(150 pcf) = 750 lb > 300 lb allowance
∴ Recalculation yields a 28-in x 28-in footing.
3. Consider design options
• use 12-in x 28-in x28-in plain concrete footing (5 ft
3
of concrete per footing
$);
• reduce floor column spacing (more but smaller footings, perhaps smaller
floor beams, more labor)
• test soil bearing to see if higher bearing value is feasible (uncertain benefits,
but potentially large, i.e., one-half reduction in plain concrete footing size);
• design a plain concrete footing to determine if a thinner footing is feasible; or
a20 design thinner, reinforced concrete footing (trade-off among concrete, rebar,
and labor)

4-62 Residential Structural Design Guide
Chapter 4 - Design of Foundations
4. Design a reinforced concrete footing
Given Square footing, 28 in x 28 in
f’
c
= 2,500 psi concrete; 60,000 psi steel
Find Footing thickness and reinforcement
(a) Select trial footing thickness, rebar size, and placement
t=6 in
c=3 in
d
b
= 0.5 in (No. 4 rebar)
(b) Calculate the distance from extreme compression fiber to centroid of
reinforcement d
d = t-c-0.5d
b
= 6 in – 3 in - 0.5 (0.5 in)
= 2.75 in
(c) Determine soil pressure based on factored loads
()( )()( )
psf2,261
ft5
lb760,56.1lb300lb440,12.1
A
P
q
2
footing
u
s
=
++
==
(d) Check one-way (beam) shear in footing for trial footing thickness
bdf2V
cc
′φ=φ
lbs6,545in)in)(2.75(28psi2,500(2)0.85 ==
()=−−








= dTb5.0
b
P
V
u
u
() lbs835,3in75.2in5.3in285.0
in28
lbs304,11
=−−








=
uc
VV >>φ OK
(e) Check two-way (punching) shear in trial footing
dbf4V
occ
′φ=φ
()()lbs688,11in75.22.75in3.5in4psi2,500(4)0.85)( =+=
()
22
2
u
u
)dT(b
b
P
V +−








=
lbs741,10in)2.75in(3.5in)(28
in)(28
lbs304,11
22
2
=+−=
uc
VV >φ OK

Residential Structural Design Guide 4-63
Chapter 4 - Design of Foundations
(f) Determine reinforcement required for footing based on critical moment at edge of
column
() ( )()
2
su
Tl5.05.0bqM −=
() lbsft749,2
ftin12
in5.3
ftin12
in28
5.05.0
ft/in12
in28
)psf261,2(
2
−=
















−








=
()
psi173
)in75.2()in28()9.0(
)ft/in12(lbsft749,2
bd
M
R
22
u
n
=
−
=
φ
=








′
−








′
=ρ
c
n
y
c
f85.0
R2
1
f
f85.0
() ()( )
022.0
)psi500,2(85.0
psi1462
1
psi000,60
psi500,285.0
=








−








=
010.0)022.0(
in6
in75.2
t
d
)gross(
=








=ρ=ρ
0018.0
mingross
=ρ≥ρ OK
2
s
in77.0)in75.2()in28(010.0bdA ==ρ=
Use four No. 4 bars where A
s
= 4(0.2 in
2
) = 0.8 in
2
≥ 0.77 in
2
OK
Conclusion
Use minimum 28-in x 28-in x 6-in footing with four No. 4 bars or three No. 5 bars
each way in footing.
f’
c
= 2,500 psi minimum (concrete)
f
y
= 60,000 psi minimum (steel reinforcing bar)

4-64 Residential Structural Design Guide
Chapter 4 - Design of Foundations
EXAMPLE 4.3 Plain Concrete Foundation Wall Design
Given
Design loads
Snow load (S) = 280 plf
Live load (L) = 650 plf
Dead load (D) = 450 plf
Moment at top = 0
Concrete weight = 150 pcf
Backfill material = 45 pcf
f’
c
= 3,000 psi
Wall thickness = 8 in
Wall height = 8 ft
Unbalanced backfill height = 7 ft
Assume axial load is in middle one-third of wall
Find Verify that an 8-inch-thick plain concrete wall is adequate for the following load
combinations from Chapter 3 (Table 3.1)
• 1.2D + 1.6H
• 1.2D + 1.6H + 1.6L + 0.5 (L
r
+ S)
• 1.2D + 1.6H = 1.6 (L
r
+ S) + 0.5L
Only the first load combination will be evaluated since it can be shown to govern
the wall design.
Solution
1. Determine loads
Equivalent fluid density of backfill soil
Silty clay: w = 100 pcf, K
a
= 0.45 (see Section 3.5)
q = K
a
w = (0.45)(100 pcf) = 45 pcf
Total lateral earth load
plf103,1)ft7)(pcf45(
2
1
ql
2
1
H
22
===
ft33.2)ft7(
3
1
l
3
1
X
1
===
Maximum shear occurs at bottom of wall (see Figure A.1 of Appendix A)
()() plf781
)ft8(3
ft7
1ft7pcf45
2
1
L3
h
1qh
2
1
VV
22
1bottom
=








−=





−==

Residential Structural Design Guide 4-65
Chapter 4 - Design of Foundations
Maximum moment and its location
x =
q
V2
hh
12
−−
= ()
pcf45
)plf781(2
ft7ft7
2
−−
= 3.2 ft from base of wall or 4.8 ft from top of wall
M
max
(at x = 3.2 ft) = V
1
x -
2
1
qhx
2
+
6
1
qx
3
= (781 plf) (3.2 ft) -
2
1
(45 pcf)(7 ft)(3.2 ft)
2
+
6
1
(45 pcf)(3.2 ft)
3
= 1,132 ft-lb/ fl
2. Check shear capacity
(a) Factored shear load
V
u
= 1.6 V
bottom
= 1.6 (781 plf) = 1,250 plf
(b) Factored shear resistance
φ V
n
= bhf
3
4
c
′φ
= () plf557,4)in12)(in8(psi000,3
3
4
65.0 =





(c) Check φV
n
≥ V
u
4,557 plf >> 1,250 plf OK
Shear is definitely not a factor in this case. Future designs of a similar nature may be
based on this experience as “OK by inspection.”
3. Check combined bending and axial load capacity
(a) Factored loads
M
u
= 1.6 M
max
= 1.6 (1,132 ft-lb/lf) = 1,811

ft-lb/lf
P
u
= 1.2 D
D
structure
= 450 plf (given)
D
concrete@x
= () ()plf480ft23.3ft8
ft/in12
in8
plf150 =−








D = 450 plf + 480 plf = 930 plf
P
u
= 1.2 (930 plf) = 1,116 plf

4-66 Residential Structural Design Guide
Chapter 4 - Design of Foundations
(b) Determine M
n
, M
min
, P
u
M
n
= 0.85 f’
c
S
S=
2
bd
6
1
= ()() lf/in128in8in12
6
1
32
=





M
n
= 0.85 (3,000 psi)(128 in
3
/lf) = 326,400 in-lb/lf = 27,200 ft-lb/lf
M
min
= 0.1hP
u
= 0.1








lf/in12
in8
(1,112 plf) = 74 ft-lb/lf
M
u
> M
min
OK
g
2
cn
A
h32
L
1f6.0P














−′=

()
()( ) plf500,148in12in8
)in8(32
ft
in12
ft8
1)psi000,3(6.0
2
=


































−=
(c) Check combined bending and axial stress equations
Compression 1
M
M
P
P
n
u
n
u
≤
φ
+
φ
1
)lf/lbft200,27)(65.0(
lf/lbft811,1
)plf500,148)(65.0(
plf116,1
≤
−
−
+
0.11 ≤ 1 OK
Tension
c
g
uu
f5
A
P
S
M
′φ≤−
()
psi000,3)5()65.0(
)in12)(in8(
plf116,1
lf/in128
ft/in12lf/lbft811,1
3
≤−
−
158 ≤ 178 OK
∴ No reinforcement required

Residential Structural Design Guide 4-67
Chapter 4 - Design of Foundations
4. Check deflection at mid-span (see Figure A.1 in Appendix A)
ρ
max
≅








+−−
L144
h
48
h
960
L
128
hL
IE
qL
322
gc
3
=
















+−−








3
3322
3
3
ft
in728,1
)ft8(144
)ft7(
48
)ft7(
960
)ft8(
128
)ft8)(ft7(
12
)in8(in12
)psi019,122,3(
)ft8)(pcf45(
= 0.009 in/lf
ρ
all
= lf/in4.0
240
)ft/in12)(ft8(
240
L
==
ρ
max
<< ρ
all
OK
Conclusion
An 8-inch-thick plain concrete wall is adequate under the given conditions.
The above analysis was performed for a given wall thickness. The same equations can
be used to solve for the minimum wall thickness h that satisfies the requirements for
shear, combined bending and axial stress, and deflection. With this approach to the
problem, the minimum thickness would be 7.6 inches (controlled by tensile stress under
combined bending and axial load).
In the strength-based design approach, the safety margin is related to the use of load
and resistance factors. In this problem, the load factor was 1.6 (for a soil load, H) and
the resistance factor 0.65 (for tensile bending stress). In terms of a traditional safety
factor, an equivalent safety margin is found by 1.6/0.65 = 2.5. It is a fairly conservative
safety margin for residential structures and would allow for an equivalent soil fluid
density of as much as 113 pcf (45 pcf x 2.5) at the point the concrete tensile capacity
based on the minimum concrete compressive strength (as estimated by
c
’f5 ) is
realized. This capacity would exceed loads that might be expected should the soil
become saturated as would occur under severe flooding on a site that is not well
drained.
The use of reinforcement varies widely as an optional enhancement in residential
construction to control cracking and provide some nominal strength benefits. If
reinforcement is used as a matter of good practice, one No. 4 bar may be placed as
much as 8 feet on-center. One horizontal bar may also be placed horizontally at the top
of the wall and at mid-height.

4-68 Residential Structural Design Guide
Chapter 4 - Design of Foundations
EXAMPLE 4.4 Plain Concrete Wall Interaction Diagram
Given Construct an interaction diagram for the wall in Design Example 4.3
Wall height = 8 ft
Wall thickness = 8 in
f’
c
= 3,000 psi
Solution
1. Determine compression boundary
P
n
=
g
2
c
A
h32
L
1’f6.0














−
= plf500,148)in12()in8(
)in8(32
)lf/in12()ft8(
1)psi000,3(6.0
2
=
















−
M
n
= 0.85 f’
c
S
= ()( )
()()
6
in8in12
psi000,385.0
2
= 326,400 in-lb/lf = 27,200 ft-lb/lf
A
g
= (8 in)(12 in) = 96 in
2
1
M
M
P
P
n
u
n
u
≤
φ
+
φ
1
)lf/lbft200,27(65.0
M
)plf500,148(65.0
P
uu
≤
−
+
()
1
lf/lbft680,17
M
plf525,96
P
uu
≤
−
+
lf/lbft680,17
plf525,96
P
1M
u
u
−








−=
uu
P18316.0lf/lbft680,17M −−=
plf525,96
lf/lbft680,17
M
1P
u
u








−
−=
uu
M46.5plf525,96P −=
When P
u
= 0, M
u
= 17,680 ft-lb/lf
When M
u
= 0, P
u
= 96,525 plf (0, 96.5klf)
2. Determine tension boundary
c
g
uu
’f5
A
P
S
M
φ≤−
psi000,3)65.0(5
in96
P
in128
M
2
u
3
u
≤−
178
in96
P
in128
M
2
u
3
u
≤− psi








−= psi178
in128
M
in96P
3
u2
u
088,17M75.0P
uu
−= plf
When M
u
= 0; P
u
= -17,088plf = - 17.09 klf (-17.09,0)

Residential Structural Design Guide 4-69
Chapter 4 - Design of Foundations
3. Determine point of intersection of the tensile and compression boundaries
()
klf63.53
plf627,53
plf525,96
)ft/in12(lf/lbft200,2765.0
in96
in128
)in128(psi000,3)65.0(5)ft/in12()lf/lbft200,27()65.0(
Pn
Mn
A
S
S’f5Mn
P
2
3
3
g
c
u
=
=
−
+
−−
=
φ
φ
+
φ−φ
=
()
()
()
lf/kipft9.7lf/lbin282,94
plf525,96
)63.53(kip/lb000,1
1)lf/lbft200,27()ft/in12(65.0
P
Pkip/lb000,1
1MM
n
u
nu
−=−=








−−=








φ
−φ=
Conclusion
Shown below is the interaction diagram for an 8-foot-high, 8-inch-thick plain
concrete wall where the concrete compressive strength is 3,000 psi. The interaction
diagram uses the points determined in the above steps.
(0, 96.5) from step (1)
(-17.09, 0) from step (2)
(7.9, 53.63) from step (3)
Interaction Diagram

4-70 Residential Structural Design Guide
Chapter 4 - Design of Foundations
EXAMPLE 4.5 Moment Magnifier
Given
Service loads
Live load (L) = 1,000 plf
Dead load (D) = 750 plf
Moment at top, (M
top
)=0
M
u
= 2,434 ft-lb/lf
Concrete weight = 150 pcf
Backfill material = 45 pcf (equivalent fluid density)
f’
c
= 3,000 psi
One No. 6 bar at 12 inches on-center (A
s
=0.44 in
2
)
Nonsway frame
Wall thickness = 8 in
Wall height = 10 ft
Assume axial load is in middle one-third of wall
Find The moment magnifier for load combination U = 1.2D + 1.6L (Chapter 3, Table
3.1)
Solution
1. Determine total axial load on wall
P
u
= 1.2 D + 1.6L
1.2 (750 plf) + 1.6 (1,000 plf) = 2,500 plf
2. Determine approximate moment magnifier by using the table in Section 4.3.1.3,
assuming the axial load is 2,500 plf
P
u
2,000 lbs 4,000 lbs
7.5-in-thick wall 10 ft height 1.04 1.09
9.5-in-thick wall 10 ft height 1.00 1.04
For an 8-in-thick wall, 10-ft-high with approximately 3,000 plf factored axial load
acting on the wall, the magnifier through interpolation is
δ
ns
≅ 1.04
The objective has been met; however, the detailed calculations to determine the
moment magnifier are shown below for comparison purposes.
3. Calculate the moment magnifier
E
c
= psi019,122,3psi000,3000,57’f000,57
c
==
β
d
=
()( )
36.0
)plf000,1(6.1)plf750(2.1
plf7502.1
P
P
u
dead,u
=
+
=
ρ =
()
0046.0
)in12(in8
in44.0
A
A
2
g
s
=








= [one No. 6 at 12 inches; A
s
= 0.44
in
2
OK]
β = 0.9 + 0.5 β
d
2
–12ρ ≥ 1
= 0.9 + 0.5 (0.36)
2
-12 (0.0046) = 0.91 <1
=1 (governs)

Residential Structural Design Guide 4-71
Chapter 4 - Design of Foundations
M
2,min
=P
u
(0.6 + 0.03h)
= (2,500 plf)(0.6 + 0.03 (8 in)) = 2,100 in-lb/lf
M
u
= 2,434 ft-lb/lf ← Governs
e= in7.10ft89.0
))plf500,2(
lf/lbft434,2
P
M
u
2
==
−
=
EI =
β
≥
β
−
≥
β
gc
gc
gc
IE1.0
)
h
e
5.0(IE
IE4.0
EI =
()()
lf/inlb10x3.1
1
in8
in7.10
5.0
12
in8in12
)psi019,122,3(
29
3
−−=








−








EI
max
=
()()
lf/inlb10x4.6
1
12
in8in12
)psi019,122,3(4.0
28
3
−=








EI
min
=
()()
lf/inlb10x6.1
1
12
in8in12
)psi019,122,3(1.0
28
3
−=








(governs)
C
m
=1
P
c
= plf662,109
))ft/in12)(ft10(1(
)lf/inlb10x6.1(
)kl(
EI
2
282
2
u
2
=
−pi
=
pi
δ
ns
= 0.1
P75.0
P
1
C
c
u
m
≥






−
= 103.1
)plf662,109(75.0
plf500,2
1
1
≥=








−
δ
ns
=1.03
Conclusion
The moment magnifier by the approximation method is 1.04. It is slightly
conservative but saves time in calculation. Through calculation, a slight efficiency is
achieved and the calculated moment magnifier is 1.03.

4-72 Residential Structural Design Guide
Chapter 4 - Design of Foundations
EXAMPLE 4.6 Reinforced Concrete Foundation Wall Design
Given
Service loads
Live load (L) = 1000 plf
Dead load (D) = 750 plf
Moment at top = 0
Concrete weight = 150 pcf
Backfill material = 60 pcf (equivalent fluid density)
Wall thickness = 8 in
Wall height = 10 ft
Unbalanced backfill height = 8 ft
f’
c
=3,000 psi, f
y
=60,000 psi
Assume axial load is in middle one-third of wall
Find If one No. 5 bar at 24 inches on-center vertically is adequate for the load
combination, U = 1.2D + 1.6H + 1.6L (Chapter 3, Table 3.1) when rebar is placed
3 inches from the outer face of wall (d=5 in)
Solution
1. Determine loads
Total lateral earth load
plf920,1)ft8)(pcf60(
2
1
ql
2
1
H
22
===
ft67.2)ft8(
3
1
l
3
1
X ===
Maximum shear occurs at bottom of wall
∑M
top
=0
V
bottom
=
()()( )
plf408,1
ft10
ft67.2ft10plf920,1
L
xLH
=
−
=
−
Maximum moment and its location
X
max
=
q
qV2lqql
bottom
22
−−
=
()
pcf60
)plf408,1)(pcf60(2)ft8(pcf60)ft8()pcf60(
22
−−
X
max
= 3.87 ft from base of wall or 6.13 ft from top of wall
M
max
=
)x(V
6
qx
2
qlx
maxbottom
3
max
2
max
++
−
= ())ft87.3(plf408,1
6
)ft87.3()pcf60(
2
)ft87.3()ft8()pcf60(
32
++
−
= 2,434 ft-lb/lf

Residential Structural Design Guide 4-73
Chapter 4 - Design of Foundations
2. Check shear capacity assuming no shear reinforcement is required (V
s
=0)
(a) Factored shear load
V
u
= 1.6 V
bottom
= 1.6 (1,408 plf) = 2,253 plf
(b) Factored shear resistance
φV
n
= φ (V
c
+ V
s
)
= db’f)2(
wc
φ
= plf587,5)in5()in12(psi000,3)2()85.0( =
(c) Check φV
n
≥ V
u
5,587 plf >> 2,253 plf OK
Shear is definitely not a factor in this case. Future designs of a similar nature may be
based on this experience as “OK by inspection”
3. Determine slenderness
All four foundation walls are concrete with few openings; therefore, the system is a
nonsway frame. This is a standard assumption for residential concrete foundation
walls.
Slenderness
()
31.2
)in12(in8
)in8()in12(
12
1
A
I
r
3
g
g
=






==
r
kl
u
< 34
346.41
31.2
)in12()in8()1(
≥= ∴ Use moment magnifier method
4. Determine the magnified moment using the moment magnifier method
P
u
= 1.2D + 1.6L = 1.2 (750 plf) + 1.6 (1,000 plf) = 2,500

plf
Using the approximated moment magnifiers in Table 4.4, the moment magnifier from
the table for a 7.5-inch-thick wall, 10-feet-high is between 1.04 and 1.09. For a 9.5-
inch-thick wall, the values are between 1 and 1.04.
Through interpolation, δ = 1.04 for a 2,500 plf axial load.

4-74 Residential Structural Design Guide
Chapter 4 - Design of Foundations
5. Check pure bending
a= 304.0
)in12()psi000,3(85.0
)psi000,60()in155.0(
b’f85.0
fA
2
c
ys
==
φM
n
= φA
s
f
y
(d-
2
a
)
= 0.9 (0.155 in
2
)(60,000 psi)(5 in-
2
in304.0
)
= 40,577 in-lb/lf = 3,381 ft-lb/lf
φP
n
=0
M
u
= 2,434 ft-lb/lf from step (1)
δM
u
= 1.04 (2,434 ft-lb/lf) = 2,531 ft-lb/lf
By inspection of the interaction diagram in Example 4.6, one No. 5 at 24 inches on
center is OK since δM
u
P
u
is contained within the interaction curve. See Example 4.6 to
construct an interaction diagram.
6. Check deflection
ρ
max
=
()
gc
35335
IE
36
Lxql
L120
xql
L36
xql
120
lLxq








−++
+−
−
=
()
()( )()()()
()
()()()
()
()()()()
()
()()










3738;













−+
+
+−
−
12
in8in12
psi019,122,3
36
ft13.6ft10ft8pcf60
ft10120
ft13.6ft8pcf60
ft1036
ft13.6ft8pcf60
120
ft8ft10ft13.6pcf60
ft
in1728
3
35
335
3
3
= 0.025 in/lf
ρ
all
= lf/in5.0
240
)ft/in12)(ft10(
240
L
==
ρ
max
<< ρ
all
OK
Conclusion
An 8-inch-thick reinforced concrete wall with one vertical No. 5 bar at 24 inches on-
center is adequate for the given loading conditions.
This analysis was performed for a given wall thickness and reinforcement spacing.
The same equations can be used to solve for the minimum reinforcement that
satisfies the requirements for shear, combined bending and axial stress, and
deflection. This approach would be suitable for a computer spreadsheet design aid.
A packaged computer software program can also be purchased to perform this
function; however, certain limitations may prohibit the designer from using design
recommendations given in this guide.
The use of horizontal reinforcement varies widely as an optional enhancement. If
horizontal reinforcement is used as a matter of preferred practice to control potential
cracking, one No. 4 bar placed at the top of the wall and at mid-height is typically
sufficient.

Residential Structural Design Guide 4-75
Chapter 4 - Design of Foundations
EXAMPLE 4.7 Reinforced Concrete Interaction Diagram
Given Determine interaction diagram for the 8-inch-thick concrete foundation wall in Example
4.5
Wall height = 10 ft
Wall thickness = 8 in
f’
c
= 3,000 psi
f
y
= 60,000 psi
One No. 5 bar at 24 inches on center (A
s
= 0.155 in
2
/lf)
Solution
1. C
s
=A
s
f
y
= (0.155 in
2
/lf)(60,000 psi) = 9,300 plf
C
c
= 0.85 f’
c
(A
g
-A
s
)
= 0.85 (3,000 psi)((8 in)(12 in/lf) - 0.155 in
2
/lf) = 244,405 plf
φM
n
=0
φP
n
= φ (C
c
+ C
s
)
= 0.7 (9,300 plf + 244,405 plf) = 177,594 plf (0, 178)
φP
n,max
=0.8φP
n
= 0.8 (177,594 plf) = 142,080 plf (0, 142)
2. c = d = 5 in
a=βc = 0.85 (5 in) = 4.25 in
C
c
= 0.85 abf’
c
= 0.85 (4.25 in) (12 in)(3,000 psi) = 130,050

plf
φM
n
= φC
c
(d-0.5a) = 0.7 (130,050 plf)(5 –0.5(4.25 in) = 261,725 in-lb/lf = 21.8 ft-kip/lf
φP
n
= φCc = 0.7 (130,050 plf) = 91,035 plf (21.8, 91)
3. ε
c
= 0.003
ε
y
=
s
y
E
f
=
psi10x29
psi000,60
6
= 2.07x10
-3
= 0.002
c= d
5.0
yc
c








ε+ε
ε
= ()in5
)002.0(5.0003.0
003.0








+
= 3.72 in
a=βc = 0.85 (3.72 in) = 3.16 in
T
s
=A
s
(0.5 f
y
) = (0.155in
2
)(0.5)(60,000 psi) = 4,650 plf
C
c
= 0.85 abf'
c
= 0.85 (3.10 in)(12 in)(3,000 psi) = 96,696 plf
φM
n
= φC
c
(d-0.5a) = 0.7 (96,696 plf)(5in –0.5(3.16in)) = 231,490 in-lb/lf = 19.3 ft-kip/lf
φP
n
= φ (C
c
-T
s
) = 0.7 (96,696 plf - 4,650 plf) = 64,432 plf (19.3, 64)
4. ε
c
= 0.003
ε
y
=
s
y
E
f
=
psi10x29
psi000,60
6
= 2.07x10
-3
c= d
yc
c








ε+ε
ε
= )in5(
10x07.2003.0
003.0
3 







+
=2.96 in
a=βc = 0.85 (2.96 in) = 2.5 in
C
c
= 0.85 abf'
c
= 0.85 (2.5 in)(12 in)(3,000 psi) = 76,500 plf
T
s
=A
s
f
y
= (0.155in
2
)(40,000 psi) = 9,300 plf
φM
n
= φC
c
(d-0.5a) = 0.7 (76,500 plf)(5 in-0.5(2.5 in)) = 200,810 in-lb/lf =
16.7 ft-kip/lf
φP
n
= φ (C
c
-T
s
) = 0.7 (76,500 plf - 9,300 plf) = 47,040

plf (16.7, 47)

4-76 Residential Structural Design Guide
Chapter 4 - Design of Foundations
5.
a= in304.0
)in12()psi000,3(85.0
)psi000,60()in155.0(
b’f85.0
fA
2
c
ys
==
φM
n
= φA
s
f
y
(d - 0.5a)
= 0.9 (0.155 in
2
)(60,000 psi)(5 in - 0.5(0.304 in)) = 40,578

in-lb/lf = 3.4 ft-kip/lf
φP
n
= 0 (3.4, 0)
6. Plot the previously calculated points on a graph to determine the interaction diagram
boundary for one No. 5 bar at 24 inches on-center vertically in the given wall
PT 1: (0,142)
PT 2: (21.8,91)
PT 3: (19.3,64)
PT 4: (16.7,47)
PT 5: (3.4,0)
PT X: (2.5,2.5)
Conclusion
The point in question lies within the interaction diagram and the references axes;
therefore, one No. 5 bar at 24 inches on-center vertically is adequate for the given
loading conditions and wall geometry.
Interaction Diagram

Residential Structural Design Guide 4-77
Chapter 4 - Design of Foundations
EXAMPLE 4.8 Concrete Lintel
Given
f’
c
= 3,000 psi
f
y
= 60,000 psi
Dead load = 250 plf
Live load = 735 plf
Span = 6.5 ft
Lintel width = 8 in
Lintel depth = 12 in
Find Minimum reinforcement required
Solution
1. Determine reinforcement required for flexure
φM
n
≥ M
u
M
u
=
12
wl
2
=
12
)plf735(6.1)plf250(2.1 +
(6.5 ft)
2
= 5,197 ft-lb
φM
n
= φA
s
f
y
(d-0.5a)
d = 12-in depth - 1.5-in cover - 0.375-in stirrup = 10.125 in
a=
bf85.0
fA
c
ys
′
set M
u
= φM
n
to solve for A
s
M
u
= φA
s
f
y

















−
b’f85.0
fA
2
1
d
c
ys
62,364 in-lb = (0.9) A
s
(60,000 psi)
()()
















−
in12psi000,385.0
psi000,60A
5.0in125.10
s
0 = 546,750A
s
- 52,941 A
s
2
– 62,364
A
s,required
= 0.115 in
2
∴ Use one No. 4 bar (A
s
= 0.20 in
2
)
Check reinforcement ratio
0025.0
)in8)(in125.10(
in2.0
bd
A
2
s
===ρ
021.0
000,87psi000,60
000,87
psi000,60
)85.0)(psi000,3(85.0
000,87f
000,87
f
f85.0
yy
1c
b
=








+
=








+
β′
=ρ
016.0)021.0(75.075.0
bmax
==ρ=ρ
0012.0=
min
ρ
Since
minmax
ρ≥ρ≥ρ OK

4-78 Residential Structural Design Guide
Chapter 4 - Design of Foundations
2. Determine shear reinforcement
φV
n
≥ V
u
V
u
=
2
wl
=
2
)plf735(6.1)plf250(2.1 +
= (6.5 ft) = 4,797 lb
Span-to-depth ratio,
h
l
=
in12
)ft/in12()ft5.6(
= 6.5>5 ∴ Regular beam
φV
n
= φV
c
+ 0 = db’f2
wc
φ = ()() ()( )in125.10in8psi000,3285.0 = 7,542 lb
V
u
≤ lb797,4lb771,3
2
lb542,7
2
V
c
<==
φ
∴ Stirrups are required
Since φV
c >
V
u >
2
V
c
φ
only the minimum shear reinforcement must be provided.
A
v,min
=
y
w
f
sb50
=
psi000,60
)in8()50(
2
)in125.10(
=0.034 in
2
∴Use No. 3 bars
Shear reinforcement is not needed when
2
V
c
φ
> V
u
3,771 lb = 4,797lb - [1.2(250 plf)+1.6(735 plf)]x
x = 0.70ft
Supply No. 3 shear reinforcement spaced 5 in on-center for a distance 0.7 ft from the
supports.
3. Check deflection
Find x for transformed area
() )xd(nA
2
x
xh
s
−=
)xin125.10)(in2.0(
psi019,122,3
psi000,000,29
)x)(in8(5.0
22
−








=
8.18x86.1x40
2
−+=
x = 1.95 in
Calculate moment of inertia for cracked section and gross section
2
s
3
CR
)xd(nAhx
3
1
I −+=
4223
in144)in95.1in125.10)(in2.0)(29.9()in95.1)(in8(
3
1
=−+=
433
g
in152,1)in12)(in8(
12
1
bh
12
1
I ===
Calculate modulus of rupture
psi411psi000,35.7’f5.7f
cr
===

Residential Structural Design Guide 4-79
Chapter 4 - Design of Foundations
Calculate cracking moment
lf/ftkip6.6lf/lbin912,78
)in12)(5.0(
)in152,1)(psi411(
Y
If
M
4
t
g
r
cr
−=−===
Calculate effective moment of inertia
Since the cracking moment M
cr
is larger than the actual moment M
u
the section is not
cracked; thus, I
e
= I
g
.
Calculate deflection
ρ
allow
=
240
l
=
()( )
240
ft/in12ft6.5
= 0.33 in
ρ
actual
=
ec
4
IE384
wl5
ρ
i(LL)
=
()()
()()( )
in008.0
in1728/ftin152,1psi019,122,3384
ft5.6plf7355
334
4
=
ρ
i(DL+20%LL)
=
() ( )( )()
()( )
in006.0
in728,1/ftin152,1psi019,122,3384
ft5.6ft1ft66.0pcf150plf73520.0plf2505
334
4
=
++
)LL%20DL(i)LL(iLT +
∆λ+∆=∆
= 0.008 in + 2 (0.0055 in) = 0.02 in
ρ
LT
<< ρ
allow
OK
Conclusion
The minimum reinforcement bar required for an 8-inch x 12-inch concrete lintel
spanning 6.5 feet is one No. 4 bar.

4-80 Residential Structural Design Guide
Chapter 4 - Design of Foundations
EXAMPLE 4.9 Unreinforced Masonry Wall Design
Given
Live load = 1,300 plf
Dead load = 900 plf
Weight of wall = 52.5 psf
Moment at top = 0
Masonry weight = 120 pcf
Backfill material = 30 pcf
f’
m
= 1,900 psi
Face shell mortar bedding
Assume axial load is in middle one-third of wall
Find Verify if a 10-in-thick unreinforced masonry wall is adequate for the ACI-530
load combination
U = D+H
Solution
1. Determine loads
Equivalent fluid density of backfill soil (Chapter 3)
q
s
=K
a
w = (0.30)(100 pcf) = 30 pcf
Total lateral earth load
R=
2
1
q
s
l
2
=
2
1
(30 pcf)(4 ft)
2
= 240 plf
x= l
3
1
=
3
1
(4 ft) = 1.33 ft
Maximum shear occurs at bottom of wall
ΣM
top
=0
V
bottom
=
L6
ql
2
ql
32
− =
)ft8(6
)ft4(pcf30
2
)ft4(pcf30
32
− =200 plf
Maximum moment and its location
x
m
=
q
qV2lqql
bottom
22
−−
x
m
=
()
)pcf30(
)plf200()pcf30(2)ft4(pcf30)ft4(pcf30
22
−−
= 2.37 ft from base of wall
M
max
= − )x(V
6
qx
2
qlx
mbottom
3
mm
++
= )ft37.2(plf200
6
)ft37.2()pcf30(
2
)ft37.2)(ft4(pcf30
32
++−
= 204 ft-lb/lf

Residential Structural Design Guide 4-81
Chapter 4 - Design of Foundations
2. Check perpendicular shear
Vd
M
=
)in625.9(plf200
)ft/in12(lf/lbft204 −
= 1.27>1
F
v
=
()()







=
−+
+=+
==′
psi3.53
in33
ft37.2ft8psf5.52plf900
45.0psi37
A
N
45.0psi37
psi120
psi4.65psi900,15.1f5.1
2
n
v
m
F
v
= 53.3 psi
f
v
=
()()()
psi1.9
in12in375.1shellsface2
plf200
5.1
A
V
2
3
n
=








=








The shear is assumed to be resisted by 2 face shells since the wall is unreinforced
and uncracked.
f
v
< F
v
OK
3. Check axial compression
A
n
= ()b2l = (12 in)(2)(1.375 in) = 33 in
2
I=
12
1
bh
3
+ Ad
2
=














−+
2
3
2
in375.1
2
in625.9
)in375.1)(in12()in375.1)(in12(
12
1
2
= 567 in
4
r=
n
A
I
=
2
4
in33
in567
= 4.14 in
S=
c
I
=
)in625.9(
2
1
in567
4
= 118 in
3
r
h
=
in14.4
)ft/in12(ft8
= 23.2 < 99
F
a
= (0.25 f’
m
)














−
2
r140
h
1
= (0.25)(1,900 psi)
















−
2
)in14.4(140
)ft/in12(ft8
1
=
= 462 psi
P
max
=F
a
A
n
= (462 psi)(33 in
2
) = 15,246 plf
P = 900 plf (given for U=D+H)
900 plf < 15,246 plf OK

4-82 Residential Structural Design Guide
Chapter 4 - Design of Foundations
Check Euler buckling load
E
m
= 900f’
m
= 900 (1,900 psi) = 1.71 x 10
6
psi
e
k
= in57.3
in33
in118
A
S
2
3
n
== (kern eccentricity)
P
e
=
3
2
m
2
r
e
577.01
h
IE






−
pi
=
()()
()( )
3
22
462
in14.4
in57.3
577.01
ft/in12ft8
in567psi10x71.1
















−
pi
= 131,703 plf
P ≤ 0.25P
e
OK
Euler buckling loads are calculated by using actual eccentricities from gravity
loads without including effects of lateral loads.
4. Check combined axial compression and flexural capacity
M = 204

ft-lb/lf
P = 900 plf
virtual eccentricity e =
P
M
=
plf900
)ft/in12(lf/lbft204 −
= 2.72 in
kern eccentricity e
k
=
n
A
S
=
2
3
in33
in118
= 3.57 in ! GOVERNS
e < e
k
∴ Assume section is uncracked
P
e
=
3
2
m
2
r
e
577.01
h
IE






−
pi
=
3
2
42
14.4
57.3
577.01
))ft/in12(ft8(
)in567)(psi900,1)(plf900(














−
pi
P
e
= 131,703 plf
P < 0.25 (131,703 plf) = 32,926 plf OK
f
a
=
n
A
P
=
2
in33
plf900
= 27 psi
f
b
=
S
M
=
()() ()()
3
in118
ft/in12lf/lbft204
ft8
ft37.2
in57.3plf900 −+








= 29 psi
F
a
= 462 psi for h/r ≤ 99
F
b
= 0.33 f'
m
= 0.33 (1,900 psi) = 627 psi
1
F
f
F
f
b
b
a
a
≤+
110.0
psi627
psi29
psi462
psi27
≤=+ OK

Residential Structural Design Guide 4-83
Chapter 4 - Design of Foundations
5. Check tension capacity from Table 2.2.3.2 for normal to bed joints, hollow,
ungrouted (Type M or S mortar)
F
t
≤ 25 psi
f
t
= psi54.1
in118
lf/lbft400,3
in33
plf900
S
M
A
P
32
n
=
−
+−=+−
f
t
<F
t
OK
6. Minimum reinforcement
Horizontal reinforcement at 24 inches on-center vertically.
Conclusion
An unreinforced masonry wall is adequate for the ACI-530 load combination
evaluated; however, horizontal reinforcement at 24 inches on-center may be
optionally provided to control potential shrinkage cracking, particularly in long
walls (i.e., greater than 20 to 30 feet long).
If openings are present, use lintels and reinforcement as suggested in Sections
4.5.2.3 and 4.5.2.4.
Note that the calculations have already been completed and that the maximum
backfill height calculated for an 8-inch-thick unreinforced masonry wall using
hollow concrete masonry is about 5 feet with a safety factor of 4.

4-84 Residential Structural Design Guide
Chapter 4 - Design of Foundations
EXAMPLE 4.10 Reinforced Masonry Foundation Wall Design
Given
Live load = 1,300 plf
Dead load = 900 plf
Moment at top = 0
Masonry weight = 120 pcf
Wall weight = 52.5 psf
Backfill material = 45 pcf
f’
m
= 2,000 psi
Face shell mortar bedding
Type M or S mortar
Wall is partially grouted, one core is grouted at 24 inches on-center
Assume axial load is in middle one-third of wall
Find Verify if one vertical No. 5 bar at 24 inches on-center is adequate for a reinforced
concrete masonry foundation wall that is 8 feet high with 7 feet of unbalanced
backfill for the ACI-530 load combination
U=D+H
Solution
1. Determine loads
Equivalent fluid density of backfill soil (refer to Chapter 3)
q=K
a
W = (0.45)(100) = 45 pcf
Total lateral earth load
R=
2
1
ql
2
=
2
1
(45 pcf)(7 ft)
2
= 1,103 lb
X= c108
3
1
=
3
1
(7 ft) = 2.33 ft
Maximum shear occurs at bottom of wall
∑M
top
=0
V
bottom
=
L6
ql
2
ql
32
− =
)ft8(6
)ft7()pcf45(
2
)ft7(pcf45
32
−
= 781 plf
Maximum moment and its location
x
m
=
q
qV2lqql
bottom
22
−−
=
()
pcf45
)plf781()pcf45(2)ft7(pcf45)ft7()pcf45(
22
−−
= 3.2 ft from base of wall

Residential Structural Design Guide 4-85
Chapter 4 - Design of Foundations
M
max
= )x(V
6
qx
2
qlx
mbottom
3
m
2
m
++
= ())ft2.3(plf781
6
)ft2.3()pcf45(
2
)ft2.3)(ft7(pcf45
32
++
−
= 1,132 ft-lb/lf
2. Check perpendicular shear
Vd
M
=
() )in625.9(plf781
)ft/in12(lf/lbft132,1 −
= 1.8 > 1
F
v
=1
m
’f ≤ 50 psi
=1 psi000,2 = 44.7psi < 50 psi
F
v
= (44.7 psi)(2-ft grouted core spacing) = 89 psi
A
e
=A
CMU faceshells
+ A
core
= (24 in-8.375 in)(2)(1.375 in) + (1.125 in + 1.375 in + 5.875 in)(9.625 in)
= 124 in
2
f
v
=
e
A
V
bd
V
= =
()
2
in124
)spacingrebarft2()plf781(
= 13 psi
f
v
<F
v
OK
This assumes that both mortared face shells are in compression.
3. Check parallel shear
Foundation walls are constrained against lateral loads by the passive pressure of
the soil and soil-wall friction. Parallel shear on the foundation wall can be
neglected by design inspection.
4. Check axial compression
A
e
= 124 in
2
I=
12
1
bh
3
+ Ad
2
=
12
1
(8.375 in)(9.625 in - 2(1.375 in))
+2














−+





2
3
2
in375.1
2
in625.9
)in375.1()in24()in375.1()in24(
12
1
= 1,138 in
4
r=
e
A
I
=
in124
in138,1
4
= 3.03 in
r
h
=
in03.3
)ft/in12(ft8
= 32 < 99
∴F
a
=(0.25 f’
m
)














−
2
r140
h
1
=0.25 (2,000 psi)
()( )
()
















−
2
in03.3140
ft/in12ft8
1 = 474 psi
P
max
=F
a
A
e
= (474 psi)(124 in
2
)=58,776 lb
P = 900

lb
P<P
max
OK

4-86 Residential Structural Design Guide
Chapter 4 - Design of Foundations
5. Check combined axial compression and flexural capacity
M = 1,132 ft-lb/lf
P = 900 plf
virtual eccentricity = e =
P
M
=
plf900
)ft/in12(lf/lbft132,1 −
=15 in !Governs
kern eccentricity = e
k
=
e
A
S
=
()
2
4
in124
in625.95.0in138,1
=1.9 in
e>e
k
∴ Tension on section, assume cracked
f
a
=
e
A
P
=
2
in124
)ft2(plf900
= 14.5 psi
f
b
=
S
M
=
()
3
in5.236
ft/in12lf/lbft132,1 −
= 57 psi
f
b
>f
a
∴Assume section is cracked
F
a
= 0.25 f’
m

















−
2
)r140
h
1
= 0.25 (2,000 psi)














−
2
)in03.3(140
)ft/in12(ft8
1
= 474 psi
F
b
= 0.33 f’
m
= 0.33 (2,000 psi) = 660 psi
a
a
F
f
+
b
b
F
f
≤ 1
psi474
psi5.14
+
psi660
psi57
= 0.12 ≤ 1 OK
6. Minimum steel requirement
A
s,req’d
=
dF
M
s
=
)in625.9()5.0()psi000,24(
)ft/in12()lf/lbft132,1( −
= 0.12 in
2
/lf
Minimum vertical reinforcement
A
smin
= 0.0013 bt
= (0.0013 in
2
/lf)(12 in)(9.625 in) = 0.15 in
2
/lf ! Governs
No. 5 at 24 inches on-center (A
s
= 0.3 in
2
(12 in/24 in) = 0.155 in
2
)
A
s,actual
> A
s,required
OK

Residential Structural Design Guide 4-87
Chapter 4 - Design of Foundations
Minimum horizontal reinforcement
A
v,hor
= 0.0007 bt
= 0.0007 (12 in)(9.625 in) = 0.081 in
2
/lf
Use truss-type reinforcement at 24 inches on-center or one No. 5 bar at 48 inches on
center (A
s
= 0.08 in
2
/lf)
7. Check tension
M
t
=A
s
dF
s
= (0.155 in
2
)(0.5)(9.625 in)(24,000 psi)
= 17,903 in-lb/lf
M = (1,132 ft-lb/lf)(12 in/ft)
= 13,584 in-lb/lf
M<M
t
OK
Conclusion
One vertical No. 5 bar at 24 inches on-center is adequate for the given loading
combination. In addition, horizontal truss type reinforcement is recommended at 24
inches (i.e., every third course of block).
Load combination D+H controls design. Therefore, a check of D+L+H is not
shown.
Table 4.5 would allow a 10-inch-thick solid unit masonry wall without rebar in soil
with 30 pcf equivalent fluid density. This practice has succeeded in residential
construction except as reported in places with “heavy” clay soils. Therefore, a
design as shown in this example may be replaced by a design in accordance with the
applicable residential codes’ prescriptive requirements. The reasons for the apparent
inconsistency may be attributed to a conservative soil pressure assumption or a
conservative safety factor in ACI-530 relative to typical residential conditions.

4-88 Residential Structural Design Guide
Chapter 4 - Design of Foundations
4.10 References
ACI, Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete and Commentary, ACI
Standard 318-95, American Concrete Institute, Farmington Hills, MI,
1999.
ACI, Building Code Requirements for Masonry Structures, ACI Standard 530,
American Concrete Institute, Farmington Hills, MI, 1999.
ACI, Notes on ACI 318-95 Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete
with Design Applications, American Concrete Institute, Farmington Hills,
MI, 1996.
ACI, Practitioner’s Guide for Slabs on Ground, American Concrete Institute,
Farmington Hills, MI, 1998.
Amrhein, James E., Reinforced Masonry Engineering Handbook, Clay and
Concrete Masonry, Masonry Institute of America, CRC Press, New York,
NY, 1998.
ASTM, Standard Penetration Test and Split-Barrel Sampling of Soils (D1586-
99), American Society of Testing and Materials, West Conshohocken, PA,
1999.
ASTM, Standard Specification for Loadbearing Concrete Masonry Units (C90-
99), American Society for Testing and Materials, West Conshohocken,
PA, 1999.
ASTM, Standard Specification for Mortar for Unit Masonry (C270-99),
American Society for Testing and Materials, West Conshohocken, PA,
1999.
ASTM, Standard Specification for Nonloadbearing Concrete Masonry Units
(C129-99), American Society for Testing and Materials, West
Conshohocken, PA, 1999.
ASTM, Standard Specification for Portland Cement (C150-98), American
Society for Testing and Materials, West Conshohocken, PA, 1998.
ASTM, Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete
Specimens (C39-96), American Society for Testing and Materials, West
Conshohocken, PA, 1996.
ASTM, Standard Test Method for Slump of Hydraulic Cement Concrete (C143-
98), American Society for Testing and Materials, West Conshohocken,
PA, 1998.

Residential Structural Design Guide 4-89
Chapter 4 - Design of Foundations
Beall, Christine, Masonry Design and Detailing for Architects, Engineers, and
Contractors, Fourth Edition, McGraw-Hill, New York, NY, 1997.
Brandow, Gregg E., Hart, Gary C., and Virdee, Ajit, Design of Reinforced
Masonry Structures, Concrete Masonry Association of California and
Nevada, citrus Heights, CA, 1995.
Coduto, Donald P., Foundation Design Principles and Practice, Prentice Hall,
Englewood Cliffs, NJ, 1994.
FEMA, Coastal Construction Manual, Federal Emergency Management Agency,
Washington, DC, 1986.
HUD, Prescriptive Method for Insulating Concrete Forms in Residential
Construction, prepared by the NAHB Research Center, Inc., for the U.S.
Department of Housing and Urban Development and Portland Cement
Association, 1998.
HUD, Testing & Design of Lintels Using Insulating Concrete Forms, prepared for
the U.S. Department of Housing and Urban Development and the Portland
Cement Association by the NAHB Research Center, Inc., Upper
Marlboro, MD, 2000.
ICBO, Uniform Building Code (UBC), International Conference of Building
Officials (ICBO), Whittier, CA, 1997.
ICC, International One- and Two- Family Dwelling Code, 1998, International
Code Council, Inc., Falls Church, VA, 1998.
Lemay, L. and Vrankar, A., Structural Design of Insulating Concrete Form Walls
in Residential Construction, prepared by the NAHB Research Center, Inc.,
for the Portland Cement Association, Skokie, IL, 1998.
Masonry Standards Joint Committee, Building Code Requirements,
Specifications, and Commentary for Masonry Structures, ACI Standard
530-95, American Concrete Institute, American Society of Civil
Engineers, and the Masonry Society, 1999.
McFadden, Terry T. and Bennett, F. Lawrence, Construction in Cold Regions, A
Guide for Planners, Engineers, Contractors, and Managers, John Wiley
& Sons, Inc., New York, NY,1991.
NAHB Research Center, Inc., Design Guide for Frost-Protected Shallow
Foundations, second edition, NAHB Research Center, Inc., Upper
Marlboro, MD, 1996.
Naval Facilities Command, Foundations and Earth Structures Design Manual
7.02, U.S. Government Printing Office, Washington, DC, 1986.

4-90 Residential Structural Design Guide
Chapter 4 - Design of Foundations
Pile Buck, Inc., Coastal Construction, Pile Buck, Inc., Jupiter, FL, 1990.
PTI, Design and Construction of Post-tensioned Slabs on Ground, Post-Tension
Institute, Phoenix, AZ, 1996.
Roller, John, Design Criteria for Insulating Concrete Form Wall Systems
(RP116), prepared by the Construction Technology Lab for the Portland
Cement Association, Skokie, IL, 1996.
SPC, Permanent Wood Foundations Design and Construction Guide, Southern
Pine Council, Kenner, LA, 1998.
Spangler, Merlin G. and Handy, Richard L., Soil Engineering, fourth edition,
Harper Collins Publishers, Inc., 1982.

Residential Structural Design Guide 5-1
CHAPTER 5
Design of Wood
Framing
5.1 General
This chapter addresses elements of above-grade structural systems in
residential construction. As discussed in Chapter 1, the residential construction
material most commonly used above grade in the United States is light-frame
wood; therefore, this chapter focuses on structural design that specifies standard
dimension lumber and structural wood panels (i.e., plywood and oriented strand
board sheathing). Design of the lateral force resisting system (i.e., shearwalls and
diaphragms) must be approached from a system design perspective and is
addressed in Chapter 6. Connections are addressed in Chapter 7, and their
importance relative to the overall performance of wood-framed construction
cannot be overemphasized. The basic components and assemblies of a
conventional wood frame home are shown in Figure 5.1; the reader is referred to
Chapter 1 for more detailed references to house framing and related construction
details.
Many elements of a home work together as a system to resist lateral and
axial forces imposed on the above-grade structure and transfer them to the
foundation. The above-grade structure also helps resist lateral soil loads on
foundation walls through connection of floor systems to foundations. Therefore,
the issue of system performance is most pronounced in the above-grade
assemblies of light-frame homes. Within the context of simple engineering
approaches that are familiar to designers, system-based design principles are
addressed in this Chapter.
The design of the above-grade structure involves the following structural
systems and assemblies:
• floors;
• walls; and
• roofs.

5-2 Residential Structural Design Guide
Chapter 5 - Design of Wood Framing
FIGURE 5.1
Components and Assemblies of a Conventional Wood-
Framed Home
Each system can be complex to design as a whole; therefore, simple
analysis usually focuses on the individual elements that constitute the system. In
some cases, “system effects” may be considered in simplified form and applied to
the design of certain elements that constitute specifically defined systems.
Structural elements that make up a residential structural system include:
• bending members;
• columns;
• combined bending and axial loaded members;
• sheathing (i.e., diaphragm); and
• connections.

Residential Structural Design Guide 5-3
Chapter 5 - Design of Wood Framing
The principal method of design for wood-framed construction has
historically been allowable stress design (ASD). This chapter uses the most
current version of the ASD method (AF&PA, 1997), although the load resistance
factored design method (LRFD) is now available as an alternative (AF&PA,
1996a). The ASD method is detailed in the National Design Specification for
Wood Construction (NDS) and its supplement (NDS-S). The designer is
encouraged to obtain the NDS commentary to develop a better understanding of
the rationale and substantiation for the NDS (AF&PA, 1999).
This chapter looks at the NDS equations in general and includes design
examples that detail the appropriate use of the equations for specific structural
elements or systems in light, wood-framed construction. The discussion focuses
primarily on framing with traditional dimension lumber but gives some
consideration to common engineered wood products. Other wood framing
methods, such as post-and-beam construction, are not explicitly addressed in this
chapter, although much of the information is relevant. However, system
considerations and system factors presented in this chapter are only relevant to
light, wood-framed construction using dimension lumber.
Regardless of the type of structural element to analyze, the designer must
first determine nominal design loads. The loads acting on a framing member or
system are usually calculated in accordance with the applicable provisions of the
locally approved building code and engineering standards. The nominal design
loads and load combinations used in this chapter follow the recommendations in
Chapter 3 for residential design.
While prescriptive design tables (i.e., span tables) and similar design aids
commonly used in residential applications are not included herein, the designer
may save considerable effort by consulting such resources. Most local, state, or
national model building codes such as the One- and Two-Family Dwelling Code
(ICC, 1998) contain prescriptive design and construction provisions for
conventional residential construction. Similar prescriptive design aids and
efficient framing practices can be found in Cost-Effective Home Building: A
Design and Construction Handbook (NAHBRC, 1994). For high wind conditions,
prescriptive guidelines for design and construction may be found in the Wood
Frame Construction Manual for One- and Two-Family Dwellings (AFPA,
1996b). The designer is also encouraged to obtain design data on a variety of
proprietary engineered wood products that are suitable for many special design
needs in residential construction. However, these materials generally should not
be viewed as simple “one-to-one” substitutes for conventional wood framing and
any special design and construction requirements should be carefully considered
in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendation or applicable code
evaluation reports.
5.2 Material Properties
It is essential that a residential designer specifying wood materials
appreciate the natural characteristics of wood and their effect on the engineering
properties of lumber. A brief discussion of the properties of lumber and structural
wood panels follows.

5-4 Residential Structural Design Guide
Chapter 5 - Design of Wood Framing
5.2.1 Lumber
General
As with all materials, the designer must consider wood’s strengths and
weaknesses. A comprehensive source of technical information on wood
characteristics is the Wood Engineering Handbook, Second Edition (Forest
Products Laboratory, 1990). For the most part, the knowledge embodied in the
handbook is reflected in the provisions of the NDS and the NDS Supplement
(NDS-S) design data; however, many aspects of wood design require good
judgment.
Wood is a natural material that, as a structural material, demonstrates
unique and complex characteristics. Wood’s structural properties can be traced
back to the material’s natural composition. Foremost, wood is a
nonhomogeneous, non-isotropic material, and thus exhibits different structural
properties depending on the orientation of stresses relative to the grain of the
wood. The grain is produced by a tree’s annual growth rings, which determine the
properties of wood along three orientations: tangential, radial, and longitudinal.
Given that lumber is cut from logs in the longitudinal direction, the grain
is parallel to the length of a lumber member. Depending on where the lumber is
cut relative to the center of a log (i.e., tangential versus radial), properties vary
across the width and thickness of an individual member.
Wood Species
Structural lumber can be manufactured from a variety of wood species;
however, the various species used in a given locality are a function of the
economy, regional availability, and required strength properties. A wood species
is classified as either hardwood or softwood. Hardwoods are broad-leafed
deciduous trees while softwoods (i.e., conifers) are trees with needle-like leaves
and are generally evergreen.
Most structural lumber is manufactured from softwoods because of the
trees’ faster growth rate, availability, and workability (i.e., ease of cutting, nailing,
etc.). A wood species is further classified into groups or combinations as defined
in the NDS. Species within a group have similar properties and are subject to the
same grading rules. Douglas Fir-Larch, Southern Yellow Pine, Hem-Fir, and
Spruce-Pine-Fir are species groups that are widely used in residential applications
in the United States.
Lumber Sizes
Wood members are referred to by nominal sizes (e.g., 2x4); however, true
dimensions are somewhat less. The difference occurs during the dressing stage of
the lumber process, when each surface of the member is planed to its final dressed
dimension after shrinkage has occurred as a result of the drying or “seasoning”
process. Generally, there is a 1/4- to 3/4-inch difference between the nominal and
dressed sizes of “dry” sawn lumber (refer to NDS-S Table 1B for specific
dimensions). For example, a 2x4 is actually 1.5 inches by 3.5 inches, a 2x10 is 1.5

Residential Structural Design Guide 5-5
Chapter 5 - Design of Light-Wood Framing
inches by 9.25 inches, and a 1x4 is 3/4-inch by 3.5 inches. This guide uses
nominal member size, but it is important to note that the designer must apply the
actual dimensions of the lumber when analyzing structural performance or
detailing construction dimensions.
Based on the expected application, the tabulated values in the NDS are
classified by the species of wood as well as by the nominal size of a member.
Typical NDS classifications follow:
• Boards are less than 2 inches thick.
• Dimension lumber is a minimum of 2 inches wide and 2 to 4
inches thick.
• Beams and stringers are a minimum of 5 inches thick, with the
width at least 2 inches greater than the thickness dimension.
• Posts and timbers are a minimum of 5 inches thick, and the width
does not exceed the thickness by more than 2 inches.
• Decking is 2 to 4 inches thick and loaded in the weak axis of
bending for a roof, floor, or wall surface.
Most wood used in light-frame residential construction takes the form of
dimension lumber.
Lumber Grades
Lumber is graded in accordance with standardized grading rules that
consider the effect of natural growth characteristics and “defects,” such as knots
and angle of grain, on the member’s structural properties. Growth characteristics
reduce the overall strength of the member relative to a “perfect,” clear-grained
member without any natural defects. Most lumber is visually graded, although it
can also be machine stress-rated or machine evaluated.
Visually graded lumber is graded by an individual who examines the
wood member at the mill in accordance with an approved agency’s grading rules.
The grader separates wood members into the appropriate grade classes. Typical
visual grading classes in order of decreasing strength properties are Select
Structural, No. 1, No. 2, Stud, etc. Refer to the NDS Supplement (NDS-S) for
more information on grades of different species of lumber. The designer should
consult a lumber supplier or contractor regarding locally available lumber species
and grades.
Machine stress rated (MSR) and machine evaluated lumber (MEL) is
subjected to nondestructive testing of each piece. The wood member is then
marked with the appropriate grade stamp, which includes the allowable bending
stress (F
b
) and the modulus of elasticity (E). This grading method yields lumber
with more consistent structural properties than visual grading only.
While grading rules vary among grading agencies, the U.S. Department of
Commerce has set forth minimums for voluntary adoption by the recognized

5-6 Residential Structural Design Guide
Chapter 5 - Design of Wood Framing
lumber grading agencies. For more information regarding grading rules, refer to
American Softwood Lumber Voluntary Product Standard (USDOC PS-20), which
is maintained by the National Institute for Standards and Technology (NIST,
1994). NDS-S lists approved grading agencies and roles.
Moisture Content
Wood properties and dimensions change with moisture content (MC).
Living wood contains a considerable amount of free and bound water. Free water
is contained between the wood cells and is the first water to be driven off in the
drying process. Its loss affects neither volume nor structural properties. Bound
water is contained within the wood cells and accounts for most of the moisture
under 30 percent; its loss results in changes in both volume (i.e., shrinkage) and
structural properties. The strength of wood peaks at about 10 to 15 percent MC.
Given that wood generally has an MC of more than 30 percent when cut
and may dry to an equilibrium moisture content (EMC) of 8 to 10 percent in
protected environment, it should be sufficiently dried or seasoned before
installation. Proper drying and storage of lumber minimizes problems associated
with lumber shrinkage and warping. A minimum recommendation calls for using
“surface dry” lumber with a maximum 19 percent MC. In uses where shrinkage is
critical, specifications may call for “KD-15,” which is kiln-dried lumber with a
maximum moisture content of 15 percent. The tabulated design values in the NDS
are based on a moisture content of 19 percent for dimension lumber.
The designer should plan for the vertical movement that may occur in a
structure as a result of shrinkage. For more complicated structural details that call
for various types of materials and systems, the designer might have to account for
differential shrinkage by isolating members that will shrink from those that will
maintain dimensional stability. The designer should also detail the structure such
that shrinkage is as uniform as possible, thereby minimizing shrinkage effects on
finish surfaces. When practical, details that minimize the amount of wood
transferring loads perpendicular-to-grain are preferable.
Shrink and swell can be estimated in accordance with Section 5.3.2 for the
width and thickness of wood members (i.e., tangentially and radially with respect
to annual rings). Shrinkage in the longitudinal direction of a wood member (i.e.,
parallel to grain) is negligible.
Durability
Moisture is a primary factor affecting the durability of lumber. Fungi,
which feed on wood cells, require moisture, air, and favorable temperatures to
survive. When wood is subject to moisture levels above 20 percent and other
favorable conditions, decay begins to set in. Therefore, it is important to protect
wood materials from moisture, by:
• limiting end use (e.g., specifying interior applications or isolating
lumber from ground contact);
• using a weather barrier (e.g., siding, roofing, building wrap, flashing,
etc.);
• applying a protective coating (e.g., paint, water repellent, etc.);

Residential Structural Design Guide 5-7
Chapter 5 - Design of Light-Wood Framing
• installing roof overhangs and gutters; and
• specifying preservative-treated or naturally decay-resistant wood.
For homes, an exterior weather barrier (e.g., roofing and siding) protects
most structural wood. However, improper detailing can lead to moisture intrusion
and decay. Problems are commonly associated with improper or missing flashing
and undue reliance on caulking to prevent moisture intrusion. For additional
information and guidance on improving the durability of wood in buildings, refer
to Prevention and Control of Decay in Homes (HUD, 1978).
Wood members that are in ground contact should be preservative treated.
The most common lumber treatment is CCA (copper-chromium-arsenate), which
should be used for applications such as sill plates located near the ground or for
exterior decks. It is important to specify the correct level of treatment (0.4 pcf
retention for nonground-contact exterior exposure and 0.6 pcf for ground contact).
Termites and other wood-destroying insects (e.g., carpenter ants, boring
beetles, etc.) attack wood materials. Some practical solutions include: the
chemical treatment of soil; the installation of physical barriers (e.g., termite
shields); and the specification of treated lumber.
Termites are a special problem in warmer climates, although they also
plague many other areas of the United States. The most common termites are
“subterranean” termites that nest in the ground and enter wood that is near or in
contact with damp soil. They gain access to above-grade wood through cracks in
the foundation or through shelter tubes (i.e., mud tunnels) on the surface of
foundation walls. Since the presence of termites lends itself to be visual to
detection, wood-framed homes require periodic inspection for signs of termites.
5.2.2 Structural Wood Panels
Historically, boards were used for roof, floor, and wall sheathing; in the
last 30 years, however, structural wood panel products have come to dominate the
sheathing market. Structural wood panel products are more economical and
efficient and can be stronger than traditional board sheathing. Structural wood
panel products primarily include plywood and oriented strand board (OSB).
Plywood is manufactured from wood veneers glued together under high
temperature and pressure. Each veneer or ply is placed with its grain
perpendicular to the grain of the previous layer. The outer layers are placed with
their grain parallel to the longer dimension of the panel. Thus, plywood is
stronger in bending along the long direction and should be placed with the long
dimension spanning floor and roof framing members. The number of plies
typically ranges from 3 to 5. Oriented strand board is manufactured from thin
wood strands glued together under high temperature and pressure. The strands are
layered and oriented to produce strength properties similar to plywood; therefore,
the material is used for the same applications as plywood.
The designer should specify the grade and span rating of structural wood
panels to meet the required application and loading condition (i.e., roof, wall or
floor). The most common panel size is 4x8 feet panels, with thicknesses typically
ranging from 3/8-inch to more than 1 inch. Panels can be ordered in longer
lengths for special applications.

5-8 Residential Structural Design Guide
Chapter 5 - Design of Wood Framing
Plywood is performance-rated according to the provisions of USDOC PS-
1 for industrial and construction plywood (NIST, 1995). OSB products are
performance-rated according to the provisions of USDOC PS-2 (NIST, 1992).
However, these standards are voluntary and not all wood-based panel products are
rated accordingly. The APA–Engineered Wood Association’s (formerly American
Plywood Association) rating system for structural wood panel sheathing products
and those used by other structural panel trademarking organizations are based on
the U.S. Department of Commerce voluntary product standards.
The veneer grade of plywood is associated with the veneers used on the
exposed faces of a panel as follows:
GradeA: The highest-quality veneer grade, which is intended for cabinet
or furniture use.
Grade B: A high-quality veneer grade, which is intended for cabinet or
furniture use with all defects repaired.
Grade C: The minimum veneer grade, which is intended for exterior use.
Grade D: The lowest-quality veneer grade, which is intended for interior
use or where protected from exposure to weather.
The wood strands or veneer layers used in wood structural panels are
bonded with adhesives and they vary in moisture resistance. Therefore, wood
structural panels are also classified with respect to end-use exposure as follows:
• Exterior panels are designed for applications with permanent
exposure to the weather or moisture.
• Exposure 1 panels are designed for applications where temporary
exposure to the weather due to construction sequence may be
expected.
• Exposure 2 panels are designed for applications with a potential for
high humidity or wetting but are generally protected during
construction.
• Interior panels are designed for interior applications only.
Typical span ratings for structural wood panels specify either the
maximum allowable center-to-center spacing of supports (e.g., 24 inches on
center for roof, floor, or wall) or two numbers separated by a slash to designate
the allowable center-to-center spacing of roof and floor supports, respectively
(e.g., 48/24). Even though the second rating method does not specifically indicate
wall stud spacing, the panels may also be used for wall sheathing. The Design and
Construction Guide: Residential and Commercial provides a correlation between
roof/floor ratings and allowable wall support spacing (APA, 1998a). The Load-
Span Tables for APA Structural-Use Panels (APA, 1999) provided span ratings
for various standard and nonstandard loading conditions and deflection limits.
5.2.3 Lumber Design Values
The NDS-S provides tabulated design stress values for bending, tension
parallel to grain, shear parallel to grain, compression parallel and perpendicular to

Residential Structural Design Guide 5-9
Chapter 5 - Design of Light-Wood Framing
grain, and modulus of elasticity. In particular, the 1997 edition of the NDS
includes the most up-to-date design values based on test results from an eight-year
full-scale testing program that uses lumber samples from mills across the United
States and Canada.
Characteristic structural properties for use in allowable stress design
(ASTM D1990) and load and resistance factor design (ASTM D5457) are used to
establish design values (ASTM, 1998a; ASTM, 1998b). Test data collected in
accordance with the applicable standards determine a characteristic strength value
for each grade and species of lumber. The value is usually the mean (average) or
fifth percentile test value. The fifth percentile represents the value that 95 percent
of the sampled members exceeded. In ASD, characteristic structural values are
multiplied by the reduction factors in Table 5.1. The reduction factors are implicit
in the allowable values published in the NDS-S for standardized conditions. The
reduction factor normalizes the lumber properties to a standard set of conditions
related to load duration, moisture content, and other factors. It also includes a
safety adjustment if applicable to the particular limit state (i.e., ultimate capacity).
Therefore, for specific design conditions that differ from the standard basis,
design property values should be adjusted as described in Section 5.2.4.
The reduction factors in Table 5.1 are derived as follows as reported in
ASTM D2915 (ASTM, 1997):
• F
b
reduction factor = (10/16 load duration factor)(10/13 safety factor);
• F
t
reduction factor = (10/16 load duration factor)(10/13 safety factor);
• F
v
reduction factor = (10/16 load duration factor)(4/9 stress concentra-
tion factor) (8/9 safety factor);
• F
c
reduction factor = (2/3 load duration factor)(4/5 safety factor); and
• F
c⊥
reduction factor = (2/3 end position factor)
5.2.4 Adjustment Factors
The allowable values published in the NDS-S are determined for a
standard set of conditions. Yet, given the many variations in the characteristics of
wood that affect the material’s structural properties, several adjustment factors are
available to modify the published values. For efficient design, it is important to
use the appropriate adjustments for conditions that vary from those used to derive
the standard design values. Table 5.2 presents adjustment factors that apply to
different structural properties of wood. The following sections briefly discuss the
adjustment factors most commonly used in residential applications. For
information on other adjustment factors, refer to the NDS, NDS-S, and the NDS
commentary.

5-10 Residential Structural Design Guide
Chapter 5 - Design of Wood Framing
TABLE 5.1
Design Properties and Associated Reduction Factors for
ASD
Stress Property
Reduction
Factor
Basis of Estimated
Characteristic
Value from Test
Data
Limit State
ASTM
Designation
Extreme fiber stress in bending, F
b
1.2
1
Fifth percentile
Ultimate
capacity
D1990
Tension parallel to grain, F
t
1.2
1
Fifth percentile
Ultimate
capacity
D1990
Shear parallel to grain, F
v
1.4
1
Fifth percentile
Ultimate
capacity
D245
Compression parallel to grain, F
c
9.1
1
Fifth percentile
Ultimate
capacity
D1990
Compression perpendicular to grain, F
c⊥
5.1
1
Mean
0.04”
deflection
1
D245
Modulus of elasticity, E
0.1
1
Mean
Proportional
limit
2
D1990
Sources: ASTM, 1998a; ASTM, 1998c.
Notes:
1
The characteristic design value for F
c⊥
is controlled by a deformation limit state. In fact, the lumber will densify and carry an increasing load
as it is compressed.
2
The proportional limit of wood load-deformation behavior is not clearly defined because it is nonlinear. Therefore, designation of a
proportional limit is subject to variations in interpretation of test data.
TABLE 5.2 Adjustment Factor Applicability to Design Values for Wood
Adjustment Factor
2
Design Properties
1
C
D
C
r
C
H
C
F
C
P
C
L
C
M
C
fu
C
b
C
T
C
V
C
t
C
i
C
c
C
f
F
b
a20 a20 a20 a20 a20 a20a20a20a20a20a20
F
t
a20 a20 a20 a20a20
F
v
a20 a20 a20 a20a20
⊥c
F
a20
a20a20a20
F
c
a20 a20 a20 a20 a20a20
E
a20 a20a20a20
Source: Based on NDS•2.3 (AF&PA, 1997).
Notes:
1
Basic or unadjusted values for design properties of wood are found in NDS-S. See Table 5.1 for definitions of design properties.
2
Shaded cells represent factors most commonly used in residential applications; other factors may apply to special conditions.
Key to Adjustment Factors:
• C
D
, Load Duration Factor. Applies when loads are other than “normal” 10-year duration (see Section
5.2.4.1 and NDS•2.3.2).
• C
r
, Repetitive Member Factor. Applies to bending members in assemblies with multiple members spaced at
maximum 24 inches on center (see Section 5.2.4.2 and NDS•4.3.4).

Residential Structural Design Guide 5-11
Chapter 5 - Design of Light-Wood Framing
• C
H
, Horizontal Shear Factor. Applies to individual or multiple members with regard to horizontal, parallel-
to-grain splitting (see Section 5.2.4.3 and NDS-S).
• C
F
, Size Factor. Applies to member sizes/grades other than “standard” test specimens, but does not apply to
Southern Yellow Pine (see Section 5.2.4.4 and NDS-S).
• C
P
, Column Stability Factor. Applies to lateral support condition of compression members (see Section
5.2.4.5 and NDS•3.7.1).
• C
L
, Beam Stability Factor. Applies to bending members not subject to continuous lateral support on the
compression edge (see Section 5.2.4.6 and NDS•3.3.3).
• C
M
, Wet Service Factor. Applies where the moisture content is expected to exceed 19 percent for extended
periods (see NDS-S).
• C
fu
, Flat Use Factor. Applies where dimension lumber 2 to 4 inches thick is subject to a bending load in its
weak axis direction (see NDS-S).
• C
b
, Bearing Area Factor. Applies to members with bearing less than 6 inches and not nearer than 3 inches
from the members’ ends (see NDS•2.3.10).
• C
T
, Buckling Stiffness Factor. Applies only to maximum 2x4 dimension lumber in the top chord of wood
trusses that are subjected to combined flexure and axial compression (see NDS•4.4.3).
• C
V
, Volume Factor. Applies to glulam bending members loaded perpendicular to the wide face of the
laminations in strong axis bending (see NDS•5.3.2).
• C
t
, Temperature Factor. Applies where temperatures exceed 100
o
F for long periods; not normally required
when wood members are subjected to intermittent higher temperatures such as in roof structures (see
NDS•2.4.3 and NDS•Appendix C).
• C
i
, Incising Factor. Applies where structural sawn lumber is incised to increase penetration of preservatives
with small incisions cut parallel to the grain (see NDS•2.3.11).
• C
c
, Curvature Factor. Applies only to curved portions of glued laminated bending members (see
NDS•5.3.4).
• C
f
, Form Factor. Applies where bending members are either round or square with diagonal loading (see
NDS•2.3.8).
5.2.4.1 Load Duration Factor (C
D
)
Lumber strength is affected by the cumulative duration of maximum
variable loads experienced during the life of the structure. In other words, strength
is affected by both the load intensity and its duration (i.e., the load history).
Because of its natural composition, wood is better able to resist higher short-term
loads (i.e., transient live loads or impact loads) than long-term loads (i.e., dead
loads and sustained live loads). Under impact loading, wood can resist about
twice as much stress as the standard 10-year load duration (i.e., “normal
duration”) to which wood bending stress properties are normalized in the NDS.
When other loads with different duration characteristics are considered, it
is necessary to modify certain tabulated stresses by a load duration factor (C
D
) as
shown in Table 5.3. Values of the load duration factor, C
D
, for various load types

5-12 Residential Structural Design Guide
Chapter 5 - Design of Wood Framing
are based on the total accumulated time effects of a given type of load during the
useful life of a structure. C
D
increases with decreasing load duration.
Where more than one load type is specified in a design analysis, the load
duration factor associated with the shortest duration load is applied to the entire
combination of loads. For example, for the load combination, Dead Load + Snow
Load + Wind Load, the load duration factor, C
D
, is equal to 1.6.
TABLE 5.3 Recommended Load Duration Factors for ASD
Load Type Load Duration Recommended C
D
Value
Permanent (dead load) Lifetime 0.9
Normal Ten years 1.0
Occupancy (live load)
1
Ten years to seven days 1.0 to 1.25
Snow
2
One month to seven days 1.15 to 1.25
Temporary construction Seven days 1.25
Wind and seismic
3
Ten minutes to one minute 1.6 to 1.8
Impact One second 2.0
Source: Based on NDS•2.3.2 and NDS•Appendix B (AF&PA, 1997).
Notes:
1
The NDS uses a live load duration of ten years (C
D
= 1.0). The factor of 1.25 is consistent with the time effect factor for live load used
in the new wood LRFD provisions (AF&AP, 1996a).
2
The NDS uses a snow load duration of one month (C
D
= 1.15). The factor of 1.25 is consistent with the time effect factor for snow load
used in the new wood LRFD provisions (AF&PA, 1996a).
3
The NDS uses a wind and seismic load duration of ten minutes (C
D
= 1.6). The factor may be as high as 1.8 for earthquake loads which
generally have a duration of less than 1 minute with a much shorter duration for ground motions in the design level range.
5.2.4.2 Repetitive Member Factor (C
r
)
When three or more parallel dimension lumber members are spaced a
maximum of 24 inches on center and connected with structural sheathing, they
comprise a structural “system” with more bending capacity than the sum of the
single members acting individually. Therefore, most elements in a house structure
benefit from an adjustment for the system strength effects inherent in repetitive
members.
The tabulated design values given in the NDS are based on single
members; thus, an increase in allowable stress is permitted in order to account for
repetitive members. While the NDS recommends a repetitive member factor of
1.15 or a 15 percent increase in bending strength, system assembly tests have
demonstrated that the NDS repetitive member factor is conservative for certain
conditions. In fact, test results from several studies support the range of repetitive
member factors shown in Table 5.4 for certain design applications. As shown in
Table 5.2, the adjustment factor applies only to extreme fiber in bending, F
b
.
Later sections of Chapter 5 cover other system adjustments related to
concentrated loads, header framing assemblies, and deflection (stiffness)
considerations.

Residential Structural Design Guide 5-13
Chapter 5 - Design of Light-Wood Framing
TABLE 5.4
Recommended Repetitive Member Factors
for Dimension Lumber Used in Framing Systems
1,2
Application
Recommended C
r
Value
References
Two adjacent members sharing load
3
1.1 to 1.2
AF&PA,1996b
HUD, 1999
Three adjacent members sharing load
3
1.2 to 1.3 ASAE, 1997
Four or more adjacent members sharing load
3
1.3 to 1.4 ASAE, 1997
Three or more members spaced not more than 24 inches on
center with suitable surfacing to distribute loads to adjacent
members (i.e., decking, panels, boards, etc.)
4
1.15 NDS
Wall framing (studs) of three or more members spaced not more
than 24 inches on center with minimum 3/8-inch-thick wood
structural panel sheathing on one side and 1/2-inch thick gypsum
board on the other side
5
1.5–2x4 or smaller
1.35–2x6
1.25–2x8
1.2–2x10
AF&PA, 1996b
SBCCI, 1999
Polensek, 1975
Notes:
1
NDS recommends a C
r
value of 1.15 only as shown in the table. The other values in the table were obtained from various codes, standards,
and research reports as indicated.
2
Dimension lumber bending members are to be parallel in orientation to each other, continuous (i.e., not spliced), and of the same species,
grade, and size. The applicable sizes of dimension lumber range from 2x4 to 2x12.
3
C
r
values are given as a range and are applicable to built-up columns and beams formed of continuous members with the strong-axis of all
members oriented identically. In general, a larger value of C
r
should be used for dimension lumber materials that have a greater variability
in strength (i.e., the more variability in strength of individual members the greater the benefit realized in forming a built-up member relative
to the individual member strength). For example, a two-ply built-up member of No. 2 grade (visually graded) dimension lumber may
qualify for use of a C
r
value of 1.2 whereas a two-ply member of No. 1 dense or mechanically graded lumber may qualify for a C
r
value of
1.1. The individual members should be adequately attached to one another or the load introduced to the built-up member such that the
individual members act as a unit (i.e., all members deflect equally) in resisting the bending load. For built-up bending members with non-
continuous plys (i.e., splices), refer to ASAE EP 559 (ASAE, 1997). For built-up columns subject to weak axis bending load or buckling,
refer to ASAE EP 559 and NDS•15.3.
4
Refer to NDS•4.3.4 and the NDS Commentary for additional guidance on the use of the 1.15 repetitive member factor.
5
The C
r
values are based on wood structural panel attachment to wall framing using 8d common nails spaced at 12 inches on center. For
fasteners of a smaller diameter, multiply the C
r
values by the ratio of the nail diameter to that of an 8d common nail (0.131 inch diameter).
The reduction factor applied to C
r
need not be less than 0.75 and the resulting value of C
r
should not be adjusted to less than 1.15. Doubling
the nailing (i.e., decreasing the fastener spacing by one-half) can increase the C
r
value by 16 percent (Polensek, 1975).
With the exception of the 1.15 repetitive member factor, the NDS does not
currently recognize the values in Table 5.4. Therefore, the values in Table 5.4 are
provided for use by the designer as an “alternative” method based on various
sources of technical information including certain standards, code recognized
guidelines, and research studies. For more information on system effects, consult
the following sample of references:
“Structural Performance of Light-Frame Truss-Roof Assemblies” (Wolfe,
1996).
“Performance of Light-Frame Redundant Assemblies” (Wolfe, 1990).
“Reliability of Wood Systems Subjected to Stochastic Live Loads”
(Rosowsky and Ellingwood, 1992).
“System Effects in Wood Assemblies” (Douglas and Line, 1996).
Design Requirements and Bending Properties for Mechanically
Laminated Columns (EP 559) (ASAE, 1997).

5-14 Residential Structural Design Guide
Chapter 5 - Design of Wood Framing
Rational Design Procedure for Wood Stud Walls Under Bending and
Compression Loads (Polensek, 1975).
Stress and Deflection Reduction in 2x4 Studs Spaced 24 Inches On Center
Due to the Addition of Interior and Exterior Surfacings (NAHBRF, 1974).
Structural Reliability Analysis of Wood Load Sharing Systems
(Bonnicksen and Suddarth, 1965).
System Performance of Wood Header Assemblies (HUD, 1999).
Wall & Floor Systems: Design and Performance of Light-Frame
Structures (FPRS, 1983).
5.2.4.3 Horizontal Shear Factor (C
H
)
Given that lumber does not dry uniformly, it is subject to warping,
checking, and splitting, all of which reduce the strength of a member. The
horizontal stress values in the NDS-S conservatively account for any checks and
splits that may form during the seasoning process and, as in the worst-case values,
assume substantial horizontal splits in all wood members. Although a horizontal
split may occur in some members, all members in a repetitive member system
rarely experience such splits. Therefore, a C
H
of greater than 1.0 should typically
apply when repetitive framing or built-up members are used. For members with
no splits C
H
equals 2.0.
In addition, future allowable horizontal shear values will be increased by a
factor of 2 or more because of a recent change in the applicable standard
regarding assignment of strength properties. The change is a result of removing a
conservative adjustment to the test data whereby a 50 percent reduction for checks
and splits was applied in addition to a 4/9 stress concentration factor as described
in Section 5.2.3. As an interim solution, a shear adjustment factor, C
H
, of 2.0
should therefore apply to all designs that use horizontal shear values in 1997 and
earlier editions of the NDS. As shown in Table 5.2, the C
H
factor applies only to
the allowable horizontal shear stress, F
v
. As an interim consideration regarding
horizontal shear at notches and connections in members, a C
H
value of 1.5 is
recommended for use with provisions in NDS•3.4.4 and 3.4.5 for dimension
lumber only.
5.2.4.4 Size Factor (C
F
)
Tabulated design values in the NDS-S are based on testing conducted on
members of certain sizes. The specified depth for dimension lumber members
subjected to testing is 12 inches for No. 3 or better, 6 inches for stud-grade
members, and 4 inches for construction-, standard- or utility-grade members (i.e.,
C
F
=1.0).
The size of a member affects unit strength because of the member’s
relationship to the likelihood of naturally occurring defects in the material.

Residential Structural Design Guide 5-15
Chapter 5 - Design of Light-Wood Framing
Therefore, an adjustment to certain tabulated values is appropriate for sizes other
than those tested; however, the tabulated values for Southern Yellow Pine have
already been adjusted for size and do not require application of C
F
. Table 5.2
indicates the tabulated values that should be adjusted to account for size
differences. The adjustment applies when visually graded lumber is 2 to 4 inches
thick or when a minimum 5-inch-thick rectangular bending member exceeds 12
inches in depth. Refer to NDS-S for the appropriate size adjustment factor.
5.2.4.5 Column Stability Factor (C
P
)
Tabulated compression design values in the NDS-S are based on the
assumption that a compression member is continuously supported along its length
to prevent lateral displacement in both the weak and strong axes. When a
compression member is subject to continuous lateral support in at least two
orthogonal directions, Euler buckling cannot occur. However, many compression
members (e.g., interior columns or wall framing) do not have continuous lateral
support in two directions.
The column stability factor, C
P
adjusts the tabulated compression stresses
to account for the possibility of column buckling. For rectangular or non-
symmetric columns, C
p
must be determined for both the weak- and strong-axis
bracing conditions. C
p
is based on end-fixity, effective length of the member
between lateral braces, and the cross-sectional dimensions of the member that
affect the slenderness ratio used in calculating the critical buckling stress. Given
that the Euler buckling effect is associated only with axial loads, the C
P
factor
applies to the allowable compressive stress parallel to grain, F
c
, as shown in Table
5.2. Refer to the NDS for the equations used to calculate the column stability
factor.
5.2.4.6 Beam Stability Factor (C
L
)
The tabulated bending design values, F
b
, given in the NDS-S are
applicable to bending members that are either braced against lateral-torsional
buckling (i.e., twisting) or stable without bracing (i.e., depth is no greater than the
breadth of the member). Most bending members in residential construction are
laterally supported on the compression edge by some type of sheathing product.
The beam stability factor does, however, apply to conditions such as ceiling joists
supporting unfinished attic space. When a member does not meet the lateral
support requirements of NDS•3.3.3 or the stability requirements of NDS•4.4.1,
the designer should modify the tabulated bending design values by using the beam
stability factor, C
L
, to account for the possibility of lateral-torsional buckling. For
glued laminated timber bending members, the volume factor (C
V
) and beam
stability factor (C
L
) are not applied simultaneously; thus, the lesser of these
factors applies. Refer to the NDS•3.3.3 for the equations used to calculate C
L
.
5.3 Structural Evaluation
As with any structural design, the designer should perform several checks
with respect to various design factors. This section provides an overview of

5-16 Residential Structural Design Guide
Chapter 5 - Design of Wood Framing
checks specified in the NDS and specifies several design concerns that are not
addressed by the NDS. In general, the two categories of structural design concerns
are:
Structural Safety (strength) Structural Serviceability
• Bending and lateral stability
• Horizontal Shear
• Bearing
• Combined bending and axial
loading
• Compression and column
stability
• Tension
• Deflection due to bending
• Floor vibration
• Shrinkage
The remainder of this chapter applies these design checks to examples of
different structural systems and elements in a home. In addition, given that the
intent of this guide is to provide supplemental instruction for the use of the NDS
in the efficient design of wood-framed homes, the reader is referred to the NDS
for symbol definitions, as well as other guidance.
5.3.1 Structural Safety Checks
Bending (Flexural) Capacity
The following equations from the NDS determine if a member has
sufficient bending strength. Notches in bending members should be avoided, but
small notches are permissible; refer to NDS•3.2.3. Similarly, the diameter of
holes in bending members should not exceed one-third the member’s depth and
should be located along the center line of the member. Greater flexural capacity
may be obtained by increasing member depth, decreasing the clear span or
spacing of the member, or selecting a grade and species of lumber with a higher
allowable bending stress. Engineered wood products or alternative materials may
also be considered.
[NDS•3.3]
bb
Ff ′≤ basic design check for bending stress
bb
FF =′ x (applicable adjustment factors per Section 5.2.4)
S
M
I
Mc
f
b
==
6
bd
c
I
S
2
== section modulus of rectangular member
12
bd
I
3
= moment of inertia of rectangular member
d
2
1
c = distance from extreme fiber to neutral axis
extreme fiber bending stress due to bending moment from
transverse load

Residential Structural Design Guide 5-17
Chapter 5 - Design of Light-Wood Framing
Horizontal Shear
Because shear parallel to grain (i.e., horizontal shear) is induced by
bending action, it is also known as bending shear and is greatest at the neutral
axis. Bending shear is not transverse shear; lumber will always fail in other modes
before failing in transverse or cross-grain shear owing to the longitudinal
orientation of the wood fibers in structural members.
The horizontal shear force is calculated for solid sawn lumber by
including the component of all loads (uniform and concentrated) that act
perpendicular to the bearing surface of the solid member in accordance with
NDS•3.4.3. Loads within a distance, d, from the bearing point are not included in
the horizontal shear calculation; d is the depth of the member for solid rectangular
members. Transverse shear is not a required design check, although it is used to
determine the magnitude of horizontal shear by using basic concepts of
engineering mechanics as discussed below.
The following equations from NDS•3.4 for horizontal shear analysis are
limited to solid flexural members such as solid sawn lumber, glulam, or
mechanically laminated beams. Notches in beams can reduce shear capacity and
should be considered in accordance with NDS•3.4.4. Also, bolted connections
influence the shear capacity of a beam; refer to NDS•3.4.5. If required, greater
horizontal shear capacity may be obtained by increasing member depth or width,
decreasing the clear span or spacing of the member, or selecting another species
with a higher allowable shear capacity. The general equation for horizontal shear
stress is discussed in the NDS and in mechanics of materials text books. Because
dimension lumber is solid and rectangular, the simple equation for f
v
is most
commonly used.
[NDS•3.4]
vv
Ff ′≤ basic design check for horizontal shear
vv
FF =′ x (applicable adjustment factors per Section 5.2.4)
Ib
VQ
f
v
= horizontal shear stress (general equation)
A2
V3
f
v
= for maximum horizontal shear stress at the neutral axis of solid
rectangular members
Compression Perpendicular to Grain (Bearing)
For bending members bearing on wood or metal, a minimum bearing of
1.5 inches is typically recommended. For bending members bearing on masonry,
a minimum bearing of 3 inches is typically advised. The resulting bearing areas
may not, however, be adequate in the case of heavily loaded members. On the
other hand, they may be too conservative in the case of lightly loaded members.
The minimum bearing lengths are considered to represent good practice.
The following equations from the NDS are based on net bearing area.
Note that the provisions of the NDS acknowledge that the inner bearing edge
experiences added pressure as the member bends. As a practical matter, the added
pressure does not pose a problem because the compressive capacity, F’
c⊥
, of
wood increases as the material is compressed. Further, the design value is based

5-18 Residential Structural Design Guide
Chapter 5 - Design of Wood Framing
on a deformation limit, not on failure by crushing. Thus, the NDS recommends
the added pressure at bearing edges not be considered. The designer is also alerted
to the use of the bearing area factor, C
b
, which accounts for the ability of wood to
distribute large stresses originating from a small bearing area not located near the
end of a member. Examples include interior bearing supports and compressive
loads on washers in bolted connections.
[NDS•3.10]
⊥⊥
′≤
cc
Ff basic design check for compression perpendicular to grain
⊥⊥
=′
cc
FF x (applicable adjustment factors per Section 5.2.4)
b
c
A
P
f =
⊥
stress perpendicular to grain due to load, P, on net bearing area, A
b
.
The above equations pertain to bearing that is perpendicular to grain; for
bearing at an angle to grain, refer to NDS•3.10. The later condition would apply
to sloped bending members (i.e., rafters) notched at an angle for bearing. For
light-frame construction, bearing stress is rarely a limiting factor.
Combined Bending and Axial Loading
Depending on the application and the combination of loads considered,
some members such as wall studs and roof truss members, experience bending
stress in addition to axial loading. The designer should evaluate combined
bending and axial stresses as appropriate. If additional capacity is required, the
selection of a higher grade of lumber is not always an efficient solution for
overstressed compression members under combined axial and bending loads
because the design may be limited by stability rather than by a stress failure
mode. Efficiency issues will become evident when the designer calculates the
components of the combined stress interaction equations that are given below and
found in the NDS.
[NDS•3.9]
Combined bending and axial tension design check
1
F
f
F
f
*
b
b
t
t
≤+
′
1
F
ff
**
b
tb
≤
−
Combined bending and axial compression design check
1
F
f
F
f
1F
f
F
f
1F
f
F
f
2
bE
1b
2cE
c
2b
2b
1cE
c
1b
1b
2
c
c
≤














−






−′
+






−′
+








′
Compression and Column Stability
For framing members that support axial loads only (i.e., columns), the
designer must consider whether the framing member can withstand the axial
compressive forces on it without buckling or compressive failure. If additional

Residential Structural Design Guide 5-19
Chapter 5 - Design of Light-Wood Framing
compression strength is required, the designer should increase member size,
decrease framing member spacing, provide additional lateral support, or select a
different grade and species of lumber with higher allowable stresses. Improving
lateral support is usually the most efficient solution when stability controls the
design (disregarding any architectural limitations). The need for improved lateral
support will become evident when the designer performs the calculations
necessary to determine the stability factor, C
P
, in accordance with NDS•3.7.
When a column has continuous lateral support in two directions, buckling is not
an issue and C
p
= 1.0. If, however, the column is free to buckle in one or more
directions, C
p
must be evaluated for each direction of possible buckling. The
evaluation must also consider the spacing of intermediate bracing, if any, in each
direction.
[NDS•3.7]
cc
Ff ′≤ basic design check for compression parallel to grain
cc
FF =′ x (applicable adjustment factors from Section 5.2.4, including C
p
)
f
c
=
A
P
()
c
F
F
c2
FF1
c2
F
F
1
C
*
c
cE
2
*
ccE
*
c
cE
p
−








+
−








+
= column stability factor
2
e
cE
cE
d
EK
F






′
=
l
c
*
c
FF = x (same adjustment factors for F
’
c
except C
p
is not used)
Tension
Relatively few members in light-frame construction resist tension forces
only. One notable exception occurs in roof framing where cross-ties or bottom
chords in trusses primarily resist tension forces. Other examples include chord
and collector members in shear walls and horizontal diaphragms as discussed in
Chapter 6. Another possibility is a member subject to excessive uplift loads such
as those produced by extreme wind. In any event, connection design is usually the
limiting factor in designing the transfer of tension forces in light-frame
construction (refer to Chapter 7). Tension stresses in wood members are checked
by using the equations below in accordance with NDS•3.8.
[NDS•3.8]
tt
Ff ′≤ basic design check for tension parallel to grain
tt
FF =′ x (applicable adjustment factors per Section 5.2.4)
A
P
f
t
=
compressive stress parallel to grain due to axial load, P, acting on the
member’s cross-sectional area, A.
stress in tension parallel to gain due to axial tension load, P, acting on
the member’s cross-sectional area, A

5-20 Residential Structural Design Guide
Chapter 5 - Design of Wood Framing
The NDS does not provide explicit methods for evaluating cross-grain
tension forces and generally recommends the avoidance of cross-grain tension in
lumber even though the material is capable of resisting limited cross-grain
stresses. Design values for cross-grain tension may be approximated by using
one-third of the unadjusted horizontal shear stress value, F
v
. One application of
cross-grain tension in design is in the transfer of moderate uplift loads from wind
through the band or rim joist of a floor to the construction below. If additional
cross-grain tension strength is required, the designer should increase member size
or consider alternative construction details that reduce cross-grain tension forces.
When excessive tension stress perpendicular to grain cannot be avoided, the use
of mechanical reinforcement or design detailing to reduce the cross-grain tension
forces is considered good practice (particularly in high-hazard seismic regions) to
ensure that brittle failures do not occur.
5.3.2 Structural Serviceability
Deflection Due to Bending
The NDS does not specifically limit deflection but rather defers to
designer judgment or building code specifications. Nonetheless, with many
interior and exterior finishes susceptible to damage by large deflections,
reasonable deflection limits based on design loads are recommended herein for
the design of specific elements.
The calculation of member deflection is based on the section properties of
the beam from NDS-S and the member’s modulus of elasticity with applicable
adjustments. Generally, a deflection check using the equations below is based on
the estimated maximum deflection under a specified loading condition. Given that
wood exhibits time- and load-magnitude-dependent permanent deflection (creep),
the total long-term deflection can be estimated in terms of two components of the
load related to short- and long-term deflection using recommendations provided
in NDS•3.5.
[NDS•3.5]
)600to120(
allowestimate
l
=∆≤∆ (see Table 5.5 for value of denominator)






≅∆
EI
spanandload
f
estimate
(see beam equations in Appendix A)
If a deflection check proves unacceptable, the designer may increase
member depth, decrease the clear span or spacing of the member, or select a grade
and species of wood with a higher modulus of elasticity (the least effective
option). Typical denominator values used in the deflection equation range from
120 to 600 depending on application and designer judgment. Table 5.5 provides
recommended deflection limits. Certainly, if a modest adjustment to a deflection
limit results in a more efficient design, the designer should exercise discretion
with respect to a possible negative consequence such as vibration or long-term
creep. For lateral bending loads on walls, a serviceability load for a deflection
check may be considered as a fraction of the nominal design wind load for

Residential Structural Design Guide 5-21
Chapter 5 - Design of Light-Wood Framing
exterior walls. A reasonable serviceability wind load criteria may be taken as
0.75W or 75 percent of the nominal design wind load (Galambos and Ellingwood,
1986).
TABLE 5.5 Recommended Allowable Deflection Limits
1
Element or Condition
Deflection Limit,
all
∆
2 Load Condition
Rafters without attached ceiling finish l/180 L
r
or S
Rafters with attached ceiling finishes and trusses l/240 L
r
or S
Ceiling joists with attached finishes l/240 L
attic
Roof girders and beams l/240 L
r
or S
Walls l/180 W or E
Headers l/240 (L
r
or S) or L
Floors
3
l/360 L
Floor girders and beams
4
l/360 L
Notes:
1
Values may be adjusted according to designer discretion with respect to potential increases or decreases in serviceability. In some cases,
a modification may require local approval of a code variance. Some deflection checks may be different or not required depending on the
local code requirements. The load condition includes the live or transient load only, not dead load.
2
c108 is the clear span in units of inches for deflection calculations.
3
Floor vibration may be controlled by using c108/360 for spans up to 15 feet and a 1/2-inch limit for spans greater than 15 feet. Wood I-joist
manufacturers typically recommend c108/480 as a deflection limit to provide enhanced floor performance and to control nuisance vibrations.
4
Floor vibration may be controlled for combined girder and joist spans of greater than 20 feet by use of a c108/480 to c108/600 deflection limit
for the girder.
Given that system effects influence the stiffness of assemblies in a manner
similar to that of bending capacity (see Section 5.2.4.2), the system deflection
factors of Table 5.6 are recommended. The estimated deflection based on an
analysis of an element (e.g., stud or joist) is multiplied by the deflection factors to
account for system effect. Typical deflection checks on floors under uniform
loading can be easily overestimated by 20 percent or more. In areas where
partitions add to the rigidity of the supporting floor, deflection can be
overestimated by more than 50 percent (Hurst, 1965). When concentrated loads
are considered on typical light-frame floors with wood structural panel
subflooring, deflections can be overestimated by a factor of 2.5 to 3 due to the
neglect of the load distribution to adjacent framing members and partial
composite action (Tucker and Fridley, 1999). Similar results have been found for
sheathed wall assemblies (NAHBRF, 1974). When adhesives attach wood
structural panels to wood framing, even greater reductions in deflection are
realized due to increased composite action (Gillespie et al., 1978; Pellicane and
Anthony, 1996). However, if a simple deflection limit such as l/360 is construed
to control floor vibration in addition to the serviceability of finishes, the use of
system deflection factors of Table 5.6 is not recommended for floor system
design. In this case, a more accurate estimate of actual deflection may result in a
floor with increased tendency to vibrate or bounce.

5-22 Residential Structural Design Guide
Chapter 5 - Design of Wood Framing
TABLE 5.6 System Deflection Adjustment Factors
1
Framing System Multiply single member deflection estimate by:
Light-wood-frame floor system with minimum 2x8
joists, minimum 3/4-inch-thick sheathing,
2
and standard
fastening
0.85–Uniform load
0.4–Concentrated load
Light-wood-frame floor system as above, but with glued
and nailed sheathing
0.75–Uniform load
0.35–Concentrated load
Light-wood-frame wall system with 2x4 or 2x6 studs
with minimum 3/8-inch-thick sheathing on one side and
1 /2-inch-thick gypsum board on the other; both facings
applied with standard fastening
3
0.7–2x4
0.8–2x6
Notes:
1
System deflection factors are not recommended when evaluating floor member deflection limits of Table 5.5 with the implied purpose of
controlling floor vibration.
2
Two sheathing layers may be used to make up a minimum thickness of 3/4-inch.
3
The factors may be adjusted according to fastener diameter in accordance with footnote 5 of Table 5.4. If fastening is doubled (i.e., spacing
halved), the factors may be divided by 1.4 (Polensek, 1975).
Floor Vibration
The NDS does not specifically address floor vibration because it is a
serviceability rather than a safety issue. In addition, what is considered an
“acceptable” amount of floor vibration is highly subjective. Accordingly, reliable
design information on controlling floor vibration to meet a specific level of
“acceptance” is not readily available; therefore, some rules of thumb are provided
below for the designer wishing to limit vibration beyond that implied by the
traditional use of an l/360 deflection limit (FHA, 1958; Woeste and Dolan, 1998).
• For floor joist spans less than 15 feet, a deflection limit of l/360
considering design live loads only may be used, where l is the clear
span of the joist in inches.
• For floor joist clear spans greater than 15 feet, the maximum deflection
should be limited to 0.5 inches.
• For wood I-joists, the manufacturer’s tables that limit deflection to
l/480 should be used for spans greater than 15 feet, where l is the clear
span of the member in inches.
• When calculating deflection based on the above rules of thumb, the
designer should use a 40 psf live load for all rooms whether or not they
are considered sleeping rooms.
• As an additional recommendation, glue and mechanically fasten the
floor sheathing to the floor joists to enhance the floor system’s
strength and stiffness.
Floor deflections are typically limited to l/360 in the span tables published
in current building codes using a standard deflection check without consideration
of system effects. For clear spans greater than 15 feet, this deflection limit has
caused nuisance vibrations that are unacceptable to some building occupants or
owners. Floor vibration is also aggravated when the floor is supported on a
bending member (e.g., girder) rather than on a rigid bearing wall. It may be

Residential Structural Design Guide 5-23
Chapter 5 - Design of Light-Wood Framing
desirable to design such girders with a smaller deflection limit to control floor
vibration, particularly when girder and floor spans have more than a 20-foot total
combined span (i.e., span of girder plus span of supported floor joist).
For metal-plate-connected wood trusses, strong-backs are effective in
reducing floor vibration when they are installed through the trusses near the center
of the span. A strong-back is a continuous bracing member, typically a 2x6,
fastened edgewise to the base of the vertical web of each truss with 2-16d nails.
For longer spans, strong-backs may be spaced at approximately 8-foot intervals
across the span. Details for strong-backs may be found in the Metal Plate
Connected Wood Truss Handbook (WTCA, 1997). Alternatively, a more stringent
deflection criteria may be used for the floor truss design.
Shrinkage
The amount of wood shrinkage in a structure depends on the moisture
content (MC) of the lumber at the time of installation relative to the equilibrium
moisture content (EMC) that the wood will ultimately attain in use. It is also
dependent on the detailing of the structure such as the amount of lumber
supporting loads in a perpendicular-to-grain orientation (i.e., sill, sole, top plates,
and joists). MC at installation is a function of the specified drying method, jobsite
storage practices, and climate conditions during construction. Relatively dry
lumber (15 percent or less) minimizes shrinkage problems affecting finish
materials and prevents loosening or stressing of connections. A less favorable but
acceptable alternative is to detail the structure such that shrinkage is uniform,
dispersed, or otherwise designed to minimize problems. This alternative is the
“defacto” choice in simple residential buildings.
Shrink and swell across the width or thickness of lumber can be estimated
by the equation below from ASTM D1990 for typical softwood structural lumber
(ASTM, 1998a). Shrinkage in the longitudinal direction of the member is
practically negligible.
[ASTM D1990•App. X.1]












−
−
−
−
=
100
M2.0a
1
100
M2.0a
1
dd
1
2
12
d
1
= member width or thickness at moisture content M
1
d
2
= member width or thickness at moisture content M
2
)dimensionwidthfor(0.6a =
)dimensionthicknessfor(1.5a =

5-24 Residential Structural Design Guide
Chapter 5 - Design of Wood Framing
5.4 Floor Framing
The objectives of floor system design are
• to support occupancy live loads and building dead loads
adequately;
• to resist lateral forces resulting from wind and seismic loads and to
transmit the forces to supporting shear walls through diaphragm
action;
• to provide a suitable subsurface for floor finishes;
• to avoid owner complaints (e.g., excessive vibration, noise, etc.);
• to serve as a thermal barrier over unconditioned areas (e.g., crawl
spaces); and
• to provide a one- to two-hour fire rating between dwelling units in
multifamily buildings (refer to local building codes).
5.4.1 General
A wood floor is a horizontal structural system composed primarily of the
following members:
• joists;
• girders; and
• sheathing.
Wood floor systems have traditionally been built of solid sawn lumber for
floor joists and girders, although parallel chord wood trusses and wood I-joists are
seeing increasing use, and offer advantages for dimensional consistency, and
spans. Floor joists are horizontal, repetitive framing members that support the
floor sheathing and transfer the live and dead floor loads to the walls, girders, or
columns below. Girders are horizontal members that support floor joists not
otherwise supported by interior or exterior load-bearing walls. Floor sheathing is a
horizontal structural element, usually plywood or oriented strand board panels,
that directly supports floor loads and distributes the loads to the framing system
below. Floor sheathing also provides lateral support to the floor joists. As a
structural system, the floor provides resistance to lateral building loads resulting
from wind and seismic forces and thus constitutes a “horizontal diaphragm” (refer
to Chapter 6). Refer to Figure 5.2 for an illustration of floor system structural
elements and to Cost-Effective Home Building: A Design and Construction
Handbook for efficient design ideas and concepts (NAHBRC, 1994).

Residential Structural Design Guide 5-25
Chapter 5 - Design of Light-Wood Framing
FIGURE 5.2 Structural Elements of the Floor System
The design approach discussed herein addresses solid sawn lumber floor
systems in accordance with the procedures specified in the National Design
Specification for Wood Construction (NDS), with appropriate modifications as
noted. For more information regarding wood I-joists, trusses, and other materials,
consult the manufacturer’s specifications and applicable code evaluation reports.
Section 5.3 discusses the general design equations and design checks for
the NDS. The present section provides detailed design examples that apply the
equations in Section 5.3, while tailoring them to the design of the elements in a
floor system. The next sections make reference to the span of a member. The
NDS defines span as the clear span of the member plus one-half the required
bearing at each end of the member. This guide simply defines span as the clear
span between bearing points.
When designing any structural element, the designer must first determine
the loads acting on the element. Load combinations used in the analysis of floor

5-26 Residential Structural Design Guide
Chapter 5 - Design of Wood Framing
members in this guide are taken from Table 3.1 of Chapter 3. Given that only the
dead loads of the floor system and live loads of occupancy are present in a typical
floor system, the controlling design load combination for a simply-supported floor
joist is D+L. For joists with more complicated loading, such as cantilevered joists
supporting roof framing, the following load combinations may be considered in
accordance with Chapter 3:
D + L
D + L + 0.3 (L
r
or S)
D + (L
r
or S) + 0.3L
5.4.2 Floor Joist Design
Readily available tables in residential building codes provide maximum
allowable spans for different species, grades, sizes, and spacings of lumber joists.
Some efficient concepts for floor joist design are also provided in Cost Effective
Home Building: A Design and Construction Handbook (NAHB, 1994). Therefore,
it is usually not necessary to design conventional floor joists for residential
construction. To obtain greater economy or performance, however, designers may
wish to create their own span tables or spreadsheets for future use in accordance
with the methods shown in this section.
Keep in mind that the grade and species of lumber is often a regional
choice governed by economics and availability; some of the most common
species of lumber for floor joists are Hem-Fir, Spruce-Pine-Fir, Douglas-Fir, and
Southern Yellow Pine. Bear in mind, too, that the most common sizes for floor
joists are 2x8 and 2x10, although 2x12s are also frequently used. The following
examples are located in Section 5.7 and illustrate the design of typical floor joists
in accordance with the principles discussed earlier:
• simple span joist (Examples 5.1 and 5.2); and
• cantilevered joist (Example 5.3).
For different joist applications, such as a continuous multiple span, the
designer should use the appropriate beam equations (refer to Appendix A) to
estimate the stresses induced by the loads and reactions. Other materials such as
wood I-joists and parallel chord floor trusses are also commonly used in light-
frame residential and commercial construction; refer to the manufacturer’s data
for span tables for wood I-joists and other engineered wood products. For
additional information on wood floor trusses that can be ordered to specification
with engineering certification (i.e., stamped shop drawings), refer to Section 5.6.3
on roof trusses. Cold-formed steel floor joists or trusses may also be considered.
Figure 5.3 illustrates some conventional and alternative floor joist members.

Residential Structural Design Guide 5-27
Chapter 5 - Design of Light-Wood Framing
FIGURE 5.3 Conventional and Alternative Floor Framing Members
Notes:
1
Trusses are also available with trimmable ends.
2
Cold-formed steel is also used to make floor trusses.
For typical floor systems supporting a concentrated load at or near center
span, load distribution to adjacent joists can substantially reduce the bending

stresses or moment experienced by the loaded joist. A currently available design
methodology may be beneficial for certain applications such as wood-framed
garage floors that support heavy concentrated wheel loads (Tucker and Fridley,
1999). Under such conditions, the maximum bending moment experienced by any
single joist is reduced by more than 60 percent. A similar reduction in the shear
loading (and end reaction) of the loaded joist also results, with exception for
“moving” concentrated loads that may be located near the end of the joist, thus
creating a large transverse shear load with a small bending moment. The above-
mentioned design methodology for a single, concentrated load applied near mid-
span of a repetitive member floor system is essentially equivalent to using a C
r
factor of 1.5 or more (see Section 5.2.4.2). The system deflection adjustment
factors in Table 5.6 are applicable as indicated for concentrated loads.
Bridging or cross-braces were formerly thought to provide both necessary
lateral-torsional bracing of dimension lumber floor joists and stiffer floor systems.

5-28 Residential Structural Design Guide
Chapter 5 - Design of Wood Framing
However, full-scale testing of 10 different floor systems as well as additional
testing in completed homes has conclusively demonstrated that bridging or cross-
bracing provides negligible benefit to either the load-carrying capacity or stiffness
of typical residential floors with dimension lumber framing (sizes of 2x6 through
2x12) and wood structural panel subflooring (NAHB, 1961). These same findings
are not proven to apply to other types of floor joists (i.e., I-joists, steel joists, etc.)
or for dimension lumber joists greater than 12 inches in depth. According to the
study, bridging may be considered necessary for 2x10 and 2x12 dimension
lumber joists with clear spans exceeding about 16 feet and 18 feet, respectively
(based on a 50 psf total design load and L/360 deflection limit). To the contrary,
the beam stability provisions of NDS•4.4.1 conservatively require bridging to be
spaced at intervals not exceeding 8 feet along the span of 2x10 and 2x12 joists.
5.4.3 Girder Design
The decision to use one girder over another is a function of cost,
availability, span and loading conditions, clearance or head-room requirements,
and ease of construction. Refer to the Figure 5.4 for illustrations of girder types.
Girders in residential construction are usually one of the following types:
• built-up dimension lumber;
• steel I-beam;
• engineered wood beam;
• site-fabricated beam;
• wood I-joist; or
• metal plate connected wood truss.
Built-up beams are constructed by nailing together of two or more plys of
dimension lumber. Since load sharing occurs between the plys (i.e., lumber
members), the built-up girder is able to resist higher loads than a single member
of the same overall dimensions. The built-up member can resist higher loads only
if butt joints are located at or near supports and are staggered in alternate plys.
Each ply may be face nailed to the previous ply with 10d nails staggered at 12
inches on center top to bottom. The design method and equations are the same as
those in Section 5.4.2 for floor joists; however, the adjustment factors applying to
design values and loading conditions are somewhat different. The designer needs
to keep the following in mind:
• Although floor girders are not typically thought of as “repetitive”
members, a repetitive member factor is applicable if the floor girder is
built-up from two or more members (three or more according to the
NDS).
• The beam stability factor, C
L
, is determined in accordance with
NDS•3.3.3; however, for girders supporting floor framing, lateral
support is considered to be continuous and C
L
= 1.
Example 5.4 illustrates the design of a built-up floor girder.

Residential Structural Design Guide 5-29
Chapter 5 - Design of Light-Wood Framing
FIGURE 5.4 Examples of Beams and Girders

5-30 Residential Structural Design Guide
Chapter 5 - Design of Wood Framing
Steel I beams are often used in residential construction because of their
greater spanning capability. Compared with wood members, they span longer
distances with a shallower depth. A 2x4 or 2x6 is usually attached to the top
surface with bolts to provide a fastening surface for floor joists and other
structural members. Although steel beam shapes are commonly referred to as I-
beams, a typical 8-inch-deep W-shaped beam is commonly considered a house
beam. Alternatively, built-up cold-formed steel beams (i.e., back-to-back C-
shapes) may be used to construct I-shaped girders. Refer to the Steel Construction
Manual (AISC, 1989) and the American Iron and Steel Institute’s publication RG-
936 for the design of and span tables for residential applications of hot-rolled steel
sections (AISI, 1993). Structural steel floor beam span tables are also found in the
Beam Series (NAHBRC, 1981). The Prescriptive Method for Cold-Formed Steel
in Residential Construction should be consulted for the design of built-up cold-
formed steel sections as headers and girders (NAHBRC, 1998).
Engineered wood beams include I-joists, wood trusses (i.e., girder trusses)
glue-laminated lumber, laminated veneer lumber, parallel strand lumber, etc. This
guide does not address the design of engineered wood girders because product
manufacturers typically provide span tables or engineered designs that are
considered proprietary. Consult the manufacturer for design guidelines or
completed span tables. The NDS does, however, provide a methodology for the
design of glue-laminated beams (NDS•5).
Site-fabricated beams include plywood box beams, plywood I-beams, and
flitch plate beams. Plywood box beams are fabricated from continuous dimension
lumber flanges (typically 2x4s or 2x6s) sandwiched between two plywood webs;
stiffeners are placed at concentrated loads, end bearing points, plywood joints,
and maximum 24-inch intervals. Plywood I-beams are similar to box beams
except that the plywood web is sandwiched between dimension lumber wood
flanges (typically 2x4s or 2x6s), and stiffeners are placed at maximum 24-inch
intervals. Flitch plate beams are fabricated from a steel plate sandwiched between
two pieces of dimension lumber to form a composite section. Thus, a thinner
member is possible in comparison to a built-up wood girder of similar strength.
The steel plate is typically 1/4 to 1/2 inches thick and about 1/4-inch less in depth
than the dimension lumber. The sandwich construction is usually assembled with
through-bolts staggered at about 12 inches on center. Flitch plate beams derive
their strength and stiffness from the composite section of steel plate and
dimension lumber. The lumber also provides a medium for fastening other
materials using nails or screws.
Span tables for plywood I-beams, plywood box beams, steel-wood I-
beams, and flitch plate beams are provided in NAHB's Beam Series publications
(NAHBRC, 1981). Refer to the APA’s Product Design Specification (PDS) and
Supplement for the design method used for plywood box beams (APA, 1998b).
The International One- and Two-Family Dwelling Code (ICC, 1998), formerly
the CABO One- and Two-Family Dwelling Code, provides a simple prescriptive
table for plywood box beam headers.

Residential Structural Design Guide 5-31
Chapter 5 - Design of Light-Wood Framing
5.4.4 Subfloor Design
Typical subfloor sheathing is nominal 5/8- or 3/4-inch-thick 4x8 panels of
plywood or oriented strand board (OSB) with tongue-and-groove edges at
unsupported joints perpendicular to the floor framing. Sheathing products are
generally categorized as wood structural panels and are specified in accordance
with the prescriptive span rating tables published in a building code or are made
available by the manufacturer. Example 5.5 uses the Design and Construction
Guide: Residential and Commercial (APA, 1998a) to specify sheathing. The
prescriptive tables provide maximum spans (joist spacing) based on sheathing
thickness and span rating. It is important to note that the basis for the prescriptive
tables is the standard beam calculation. If loads exceed the limits of the
prescriptive tables, the designer may be required to perform calculations;
however, such calculations are rarely necessary. In addition, the APA offers a
plywood floor guide for residential garages that assists in specifying plywood
subflooring suitable for heavy concentrated loads from vehicle tire loading (APA,
1980).
The APA also recommends a fastener schedule for connecting sheathing
to floor joists. Generally, nails are placed a minimum of 6 inches on center at
edges and 12 inches on center along intermediate supports. Refer to Table 5.7 for
recommended nail sizes based on sheathing thickness. Nail sizes vary with nail
type (e.g., sinkers, box nails, and common nails), and various nail types have
different characteristics that affect structural properties (refer to Chapter 7). For
information on other types of fasteners, consult the manufacturer. In some cases,
shear loads in the floor diaphragm resulting from lateral loads (i.e., wind and
earthquake) may require a more stringent fastening schedule; refer to Chapter 6
for a discussion on fastening schedules for lateral load design. Regardless of
fastener type, gluing the floor sheathing to the joists increases floor stiffness and
strength.
TABLE 5.7 Fastening Floor Sheathing to Structural Members
1
Thickness Size and Type of Fastener
Plywood and wood structural panels, subfloor sheathing to framing
1/2-inch and less 6d nail
19/32- to 1-inch 8d nail
1-1/8- to 1-1/4-inch 10d nail or 8d deformed shank nail
Plywood and wood structural panels, combination subfloor/underlayment to framing
3/4-inch and less 8d nail or 6d deformed shank nail
7/8- to -inch 8d nail
1-1/8- to 1-1/4-inch 10d nail or 8d deformed shank nail
Notes:
1
Codes generally require common or box nails; if pneumatic nails are used, as is common, refer to NER-272 (NES, 1997) or the nail
manufacturer’s data. Screws are also commonly substituted for nails. For more detail on fasteners and connections, refer to Chapter 7.
While not as common today, boards may also be used as a subfloor (i.e.,
board sheathing). Floor sheathing boards are typically 1x6 or 1x8 material laid
flatwise and diagonally (or perpendicular) on the floor joists. They may be
designed using the NDS or local accepted practice.

5-32 Residential Structural Design Guide
Chapter 5 - Design of Wood Framing
5.5 Wall Framing
The objectives of wall system design are
• to resist snow, live, and dead loads and wind and seismic forces;
• to provide an adequate subsurface for wall finishes and to provide
openings for doors and windows;
• to serve as a thermal and weather barrier;
• to provide space and access for electrical and mechanical
equipment, where required; and
• to provide a one- to two-hour fire barrier if the wall separates
individual dwelling units in attached or multifamily buildings.
5.5.1 General
A wall is a vertical structural system that supports gravity loads from the
roof and floors above and transfers the loads to the foundation below. It also
resists lateral loads resulting from wind and earthquakes. A typical wood-framed
wall is composed of the following elements as shown in Figure 5.5:
• studs, including wall, cripple, jack, and king studs;
• top and bottom (sole) plates;
• headers;
• sheathing; and
• diagonal let-in braces, if used.
Residential wall systems have traditionally been constructed of dimension
lumber, usually 2x4s or 2x6s, although engineered wood studs and cold-formed
steel studs are now seeing increased use. Wall studs are vertical, repetitive
framing members spaced at regular intervals to support the wall sheathing. They
span the full height of each story and support the building loads above. King and
jack studs (also known as jamb studs) frame openings and support loads from a
header. Cripple studs are placed above or below a wall opening and are not full
height. Built-up wall studs that are assembled on the jobsite may be used within
the wall to support concentrated loads. Top and bottom plates are horizontal
members to which studs are fastened. The top and bottom plates are then fastened
to the floor or roof above and either to the floor below or directly to the
foundation. Headers are beams that transfer the loads above an opening to jack
studs at each side of the opening.

Residential Structural Design Guide 5-33
Chapter 5 - Design of Light-Wood Framing
FIGURE 5.5 Structural Elements of the Wall System
Structural wall sheathing, such as plywood or oriented strand board,
distributes lateral loads to the wall framing and provides lateral support to both
the wall studs (i.e., buckling resistance) and the entire building (i.e., racking
resistance). Interior wall finishes also provide significant support to the wall studs
and the structure. In low-wind and low-hazard seismic areas, metal ‘T’ braces or
wood let-in braces may be used in place of wall sheathing to provide resistance to

5-34 Residential Structural Design Guide
Chapter 5 - Design of Wood Framing
lateral (i.e., racking) loads. About 50 percent of new homes constructed each year
now use wood structural panel braces, and many of those homes are fully-
sheathed with wood structural panels. These bracing methods are substantially
stronger than the let-in brace approach; refer to Chapter 6 for greater detail on the
design of wall bracing. Wood let-in braces are typically 1x4 wood members that
are “let-in” or notched into the studs and nailed diagonally across wall sections at
corners and specified intervals. Their use is generally through application of
conventional construction provisions found in most building codes for residential
construction in combination with interior and exterior claddings.
The design procedure discussed herein addresses dimension lumber wall
systems according to the National Design Specification for Wood Construction
(NDS). Where appropriate, modifications to the NDS have been incorporated and
are noted. Standard design equations and design checks for the NDS procedure
were presented earlier in this chapter. The detailed design examples in this section
illustrate the application of the equations by tailoring them to the design of the
elements that make up residential wall systems.
Wall systems are designed to withstand dead and live gravity loads acting
parallel to the wall stud length, as well as lateral loads–primarily wind and
earthquake loads–acting perpendicular to the face of the wall. Wind also induces
uplift loads on the roof; when the wind load is sufficient to offset dead loads,
walls and internal connections must be designed to resist tension or uplift forces.
The outcome of the design of wall elements depends on the degree to which the
designer uses the “system strength” inherent in the construction. To the extent
possible, guidance on system design in this section uses the NDS and the
recommendations in Sections 5.2 and 5.3.
When designing wall elements, the designer needs to consider the load
combinations discussed in Chapter 3, particularly the following ASD
combinations of dead, live, snow, and wind loads:
• D + L + 0.3 (L
r
or S)
• D + (L
r
or S) + 0.3 L
• D + W
• D + 0.7E + 0.5L + 0.2S
A wall system may support a roof only or a roof and one or more stories
above. The roof may or may not include an attic storage live load. A 10 psf attic
live load used for the design of ceiling joists is intended primarily to provide safe
access to the attic, not storage. The controlling load combination for a wall that
supports only a roof is the second load combination listed above. If the attic is not
intended for storage, the value for L should be 0. The controlling load
combination for a wall that supports a floor, wall, and a roof should be either the
first or second load combination depending on the relative magnitude of floor and
roof snow loads.
The third load combination provides a check for the out-of-plane bending
condition due to lateral wind loads on the wall. For tall wood-frame walls that
support heavy claddings such as brick veneer, the designer should also consider
out-of-plane bending loads resulting from an earthquake load combination,
although the other load combinations above usually control the design. The third

Residential Structural Design Guide 5-35
Chapter 5 - Design of Light-Wood Framing
and fourth load combinations are essentially combined bending and axial loads
that may govern stud design as opposed to axial load only in the first two load
combinations. Chapter 6 addresses the design of walls for in-plane shear or
racking forces resulting from lateral building loads caused by wind or
earthquakes.
In many cases, certain design load combinations or load components can
be dismissed or eliminated through practical consideration and inspection. They
are a matter of designer judgment, experience, and knowledge of the critical
design conditions.
5.5.2 Load-Bearing Walls
Exterior load-bearing walls support both axial and lateral loads. For
interior load-bearing walls, only gravity loads are considered. A serviceability
check using a lateral load of 5 psf is sometimes applied independently to interior
walls but should not normally control the design of load-bearing framing. This
section focuses on the axial and lateral load-bearing capacity of exterior and
interior walls.
Exterior walls are not necessarily load-bearing walls. Load-bearing walls
support gravity loads from either the roof, ceiling, or floor joists or the beams
above. A gable-end wall is typically considered to be a nonload-bearing wall in
that roof and floor framing generally runs parallel to the gable end; however, it
must support lateral wind and seismic loads and even small dead and live loads.
Exterior load-bearing walls must be designed for axial loads as well as for lateral
loads from wind or seismic forces. They must also act as shear walls to resist
racking loads from lateral wind or seismic forces on the overall building (refer to
Chapter 6). Example 5.6 demonstrates the design of an exterior bearing wall.
When calculating the column stability factor for a stud wall, note that
column capacity is determined by using the slenderness ratio about the strong axis
of the stud (l
e
/d)
x
in accordance with NDS•3.7.1. The reason for using the strong
axis slenderness ratio is that lateral support is provided to the stud by the wall
sheathing and finish materials in the stud’s weak-axis bending or buckling
direction. When determining the column stability factor, C
p
, for a wall system
rather than for a single column in accordance with NDS•3.7.1, the designer must
exercise judgment with respect to the calculation of the effective length, l
e
, and
the depth or thickness of the wall system, d. A buckling coefficient, K
e
, of about
0.8 is reasonable (see Appendix G of NDS) and is supported in the research
literature on this topic for sheathed wall assemblies and studs with square-cut
ends (i.e., not a pinned joint).
In cases where continuous support is not present (e.g., during
construction), the designer may want to consider stability for both axes.
Unsupported studs generally fail due to weak-axis buckling under a significantly
lower load than would otherwise be possible with continuous lateral support in the
weak-axis buckling direction.
Interior walls may be either load-bearing or nonload-bearing. Nonload-
bearing interior walls are often called partitions (see Section 5.5.3). In either case,
interior walls should be solidly fastened to the floor and ceiling framing and to the
exterior wall framing where they abutt. It may be necessary to install extra studs,

5-36 Residential Structural Design Guide
Chapter 5 - Design of Wood Framing
blocking, or nailers in the outside walls to provide for attachment of interior
walls. The framing must also be arranged to provide a nailing surface for
wallcovering materials at inside corners. For efficient construction details and
concepts related to wall framing, refer to Cost Effective Home Building: A Design
and Construction Handbook (NAHB, 1994).
Interior load-bearing walls typically support the floor or ceiling joists
above when the clear span from exterior wall to exterior wall is greater than the
spanning capability of the floor or ceiling joists. Interior walls, unlike exterior
walls, seldom experience large transverse (i.e., out of plane) lateral loads;
however, some building codes require interior walls to be designed for a
minimum lateral load, such as 5 psf, for serviceability. If the interior wall is
required only to resist axial loads, the designer may follow the design procedure
demonstrated in Example 5.6 for the axial-load-only case. Generally, axial load
design provides more-than-adequate resistance to a nominal lateral load.
If local code requirements do require wall studs to be designed to
withstand a minimum lateral load, the designer should design load-bearing walls
in accordance with the previous section on exterior load bearing walls. (Note that
the load duration factor, C
D
, of 1.6 is used for exterior load bearing walls when
wind or earthquake loads are considered, whereas a load duration factor of 1.0 to
1.25 may be used for interior load-bearing walls and exterior walls analyzed for
live and snow loads; refer to Section 5.2.4.1.)
5.5.3 NonLoad-Bearing Partitions
Interior partitions are not intended to support structural loads. Standard
2x4 or 2x3 wood stud interior partition walls are well proven in practice and do
not require analysis. Openings within partitions do not require headers or
trimmers and are commonly framed with single studs and horizontal members of
the same size as the studs. Particularly in the case of closets, or other “tight”
spaces, builders may frame certain partitions with smaller lumber, such as 2x2
studs or 2x4 studs turned flatwise to save space.
Where a minimum 5 psf lateral load check for serviceability is required in
a nonload-bearing partition, the stud may be designed as a bending member or
system similar to a simply supported floor joist, except that the only load is a 5
psf load uniformly distributed. The design approach and system factors in
Sections 5.2 and 5.3 apply as appropriate.
5.5.4 Headers
Load-bearing headers are horizontal members that carry loads from a wall,
ceiling, or floor or roof above and transfer the combined load to jack and king
studs on each side of a window or door opening. The span of the header may be
taken as the width of the rough opening measured between the jack studs
supporting the ends of the header. Headers are usually built up from two nominal
2-inch-thick members.
Load-bearing header design and fabrication is similar to that for girders
(see Section 5.4.3). This guide considers headers consisting of double members to
be repetitive members; therefore, a repetitive member factor, C
r
, of 1.1 to 1.2

Residential Structural Design Guide 5-37
Chapter 5 - Design of Light-Wood Framing
should apply (refer to Table 5.4), along with a live load deflection limit of l/240
(refer to Table 5.6). Large openings or especially heavy loads may require
stronger members such as engineered wood beams, hot-rolled steel, or flitch plate
beams. Refer to Cost-Effective Home Building: A Design and Construction
Handbook for economical framing solutions to reduce header loads and sizes
(NAHB, 1994).
Headers are generally designed to support all loads from above; however,
typical residential construction calls for a double top plate above the header.
When an upper story is supported, a floor band joist and sole plate of the wall
above are also spanning the wall opening below. These elements are all part of the
resisting system. Recent header testing determined whether an adjustment factor
(i.e., system factor or repetitive member factor) is justified in designing a header
(HUD, 1999). The results showed that a repetitive member factor is valid for
headers constructed of only two members as shown in Table 5.4 and that
additional system effects produce large increases in capacity when the header is
overlaid by a double top plate, band joist and sole plate as shown in Example 5.7.
Consequently, an overall system factor of 1.8 was found to be a simple,
conservative design solution. That system factor is applicable to the adjusted
bending stress value, F
b
’, of the header member only. While this example covers
only a very specific condition, it exemplifies the magnitude of potential system
effect in similar conditions. In this case, the system effect is associated with load
sharing and partial composite action. The above adjustment factor is not currently
recognized in the NDS.
Refer to Table 5.8 for recommended allowable bending stress adjustment
factors for use in the specific header design conditions related to the discussion
above. For other conditions, refer to Table 5.4. Example 5.7 demonstrates the
design approach for a typical header condition.
TABLE 5.8
Recommended System Adjustment Factors
for Header Design
Header Type and Application
1
Recommended C
r
Value
2
2x10 double header of No. 2 Spruce-Pine-Fir 1.30
3
Above header with double top plate, 2x10 floor band joist,
and sole plate of wall located directly above.
4
1.8
Notes:
1
For other applications and lumber sizes or grades, refer to the C
r
factors in Table 5.4 of Section 5.2.4.2.
2
Apply C
r
in lieu of Section 5.1.3 (Table 5.4) to determine adjusted allowable bending stress, F
b
’.
3
Use C
r
= 1.35 when the header is overlaid by a minimum 2x4 double top plate without splices.
4
Refer to Example 5.7 for an illustration of the header system.
Headers are not required in nonload-bearing walls. Openings can be
framed with single studs and a horizontal header block of the same size. It is
common practice to use a double 2x4 or triple 2x4 header for larger openings in
nonload-bearing walls. In the interest of added rigidity and fastening surface,
however, some builders use additional jamb studs for openings in nonload-
bearing walls, but such studs are not required.

5-38 Residential Structural Design Guide
Chapter 5 - Design of Wood Framing
5.5.5 Columns
Columns are vertical members placed where an axial force is applied
parallel to the longitudinal axis. Columns may fail by either crushing or buckling.
Longer columns have a higher tendency than shorter columns to fail due to
buckling. The load at which the column buckles (Euler buckling load) is directly
related to the ratio of the column’s unsupported length to its depth (slenderness
factor). The equations provided in Section 5.3 are based on the NDS•3.7.1
provisions regarding the compression and stability of an axial compression
member (i.e., column) and thus account for the slenderness factor.
Figure 5.6 illustrates three ways to construct columns using lumber.
Simple columns are columns fabricated from a single piece of sawn lumber;
spaced columns are fabricated from two or more individual members with their
longitudinal axes parallel and separated with blocking at their ends and mid-
point(s); built-up columns are solid columns fabricated from several individual
members fastened together. Spaced columns as described in the NDS are not
normally used in residential buildings and are not addressed here (refer to
NDS•15.2 for the design of spaced columns).
Steel jack posts are also commonly used in residential construction;
however, jack post manufacturers typically provide a rated capacity so that no
design is required except the specification of the design load requirements and the
selection of a suitable jack post that meets or exceeds the required loading.
Typical 8-foot tall steel jack posts are made of pipe and have adjustable bases for
floor leveling. The rated (design) capacity generally ranges from 10,000 to 20,000
lbs depending on the steel pipe diameter and wall thickness.
Simple columns are fabricated from one piece of sawn lumber. In
residential construction, simple columns such as a 4x4 are common. The
equations in Section 5.3 are used to design simple columns as demonstrated in
Example 5.8.
Built-up columns are fabricated from several wood members fastened
together with nails or bolts. They are commonly used in residential construction
because smaller members can be easily fastened together at the jobsite to form a
larger column with adequate capacity.
The nails or bolts used to connect the plys (i.e., the separate members) of a
built-up column do not rigidly transfer shear loads; therefore, the bending load
capacity of a built-up column is less than a single column of the same species,
grade, and cross-sectional area when bending direction is perpendicular to the
laminations (i.e., all members bending in their individual weak-axis direction).
The coefficient, K
f
, accounts for the capacity reduction in bending load in nailed
or bolted built-up columns. It applies, however, only to the weak-axis buckling or
bending direction of the individual members and therefore should not be used to
determine C
p
for column buckling in the strong-axis direction of the individual
members. (Refer to NDS•15.3 for nailing and bolting requirements for built-up
columns.)
The above consideration is not an issue when the built-up column is
sufficiently braced in the weak-axis direction (i.e., embedded in a sheathed wall
assembly). In this typical condition, the built-up column is actually stronger than a
solid sawn member of equivalent size and grade because of the repetitive member

Residential Structural Design Guide 5-39
Chapter 5 - Design of Light-Wood Framing
effect on bending capacity (see Table 5.4). However, when the members in the
built-up column are staggered or spliced, the column bending strength is reduced.
While the NDS•15.3 provisions apply only to built-up columns with all members
extending the full height of the column, design methods for spliced columns are
available (ASAE, 1997).
FIGURE 5.6 Wood Column Types
5.6 Roofs
The objectives of roof framing design are
• to support building dead and snow loads and to resist wind and
seismic forces;
• to resist roof construction and maintenance loads;
• to provide a thermal and weather barrier;
• to provide support for interior ceiling finishes; and
• to provide attic space and access for electrical and mechanical
equipment or storage.
5.6.1 General
A roof in residential construction is typically a sloped structural system
that supports gravity and lateral loads and transfers the loads to the walls below.
Generally, the four options for wood roof construction are
• roof trusses;
• rafters and cross-ties;
• rafters with ridge beams (i.e. cathedral ceiling); and
• timber framing.

5-40 Residential Structural Design Guide
Chapter 5 - Design of Wood Framing
By far the most common types of residential roof construction use light-
frame trusses, rafters, or a mix of these depending on roof layout. Figure 5.7
depicts conventional roof construction and roof framing elements. Rafters are
repetitive framing members that support the roof sheathing and typically span
from the exterior walls to a nonstructural ridge board (i.e., reaction plate). Rafter
pairs may also be joined at the ridge with a gusset, thereby eliminating the need
for a ridge board. Rafters may also be braced at or near mid-span using
intermittent 2x vertical braces and a 2x runner crossing the bottom edges of the
rafters. Ceiling joists are repetitive framing members that support ceiling and attic
loads and transfer the loads to the walls and beams below. They are not normally
designed to span between exterior walls and therefore require an intermediate
bearing wall. Overhangs, where used, are framed extensions of the roof that
extend beyond the exterior wall of the home, typically by 1 to 2 feet. Overhangs
protect walls and windows from direct sun and rain and therefore offer durability
and energy efficiency benefits.
Ceiling joists are typically connected to rafter pairs to resist outward thrust
generated by loading on the roof. Where ceiling joists or cross-ties are eliminated
to create a cathedral ceiling, a structural ridge beam must be used to support the
roof at the ridge and to prevent outward thrust of the bearing walls. Ceiling joists
and roof rafters are bending members that are designed similarly; therefore, this
chapter groups them under one section.
FIGURE 5.7 Structural Elements of a Conventional Roof System

Residential Structural Design Guide 5-41
Chapter 5 - Design of Light-Wood Framing
Roof trusses are preengineered components. They are fabricated from 2-
inch-thick dimension lumber connected with metal truss plates. They are
generally more efficient than stick framing and are usually designed to span from
exterior wall to exterior wall with no intermediate support. In more complex
portions of roof systems, it is still common to use rafter framing techniques.
Roof sheathing is a thin structural element, usually plywood or oriented
strand board, that supports roof loads and distributes lateral and axial loads to the
roof framing system. Roof sheathing also provides lateral support to the roof
framing members and serves as a membrane or diaphragm to resist and distribute
lateral building loads from wind or earthquakes (refer to Chapter 6).
Roof systems are designed to withstand dead, live, snow, and wind uplift
loads; in addition, they are designed to withstand lateral loads, such as wind and
earthquake loads, transverse to the roof system. The design procedure discussed
herein addresses dimension lumber roof systems designed according to the NDS.
Where appropriate, the procedure incorporates modifications of the NDS. Section
5.3 summarizes the general design equations and design checks based on the
NDS. Refer to Chapter 6 for the design of roofs with respect to lateral loads on
the overall structure; refer to Chapter 7 for guidance on the design of connections.
When designing roof elements or components, the designer needs to
consider the following load combinations from Chapter 3 (Table 3.1):
• D + (L
r
or S)
• 0.6 D + W
u
• D + W
The following sections refer to the span of the member. The NDS defines
span as the clear span of the member plus one-half the required bearing at each
end of the member. For simplicity, the clear span between bearing points is used
herein.
Finally, roofs exhibit system behavior that is in many respects similar to
floor framing (see Section 5.4); however, sloped roofs also exhibit unique system
behavior. For example, the sheathing membrane or diaphragm on a sloped roof
acts as a folded plate that helps resist gravity loads. The effect of the folded plate
becomes more pronounced as roof pitch becomes steeper. Such a system effect is
usually not considered in design but explains why light wood-framed roof
systems may resist loads several times greater than their design capacity. Recent
research on trussed roof assemblies with wood structural panel sheathing points to
a system capacity increase factor of 1.1 to 1.5 relative to the design of an
individual truss (Wolfe and LaBissoniere, 1991; Wolfe, 1996; Mtenga, 1998).
Thus, a conservative system factor of 1.15 is recommended in this document for
chord bending stresses and a factor of 1.1 for chord tension and compression
stresses.
5.6.2 Conventional Roof Framing
This section addresses the design of conventional roof rafters, ceiling
joists (cross-ties), ridge beams, and hip and valley rafters. The design procedure
for a rafter and ceiling joist system is similar to that of a truss, except that the

5-42 Residential Structural Design Guide
Chapter 5 - Design of Wood Framing
assembly of components and connections is site-built. It is common practice to
use a standard pin-joint analysis to determine axial forces in the members and
shear forces at their connections. The ceiling joists and rafters are then usually
sized according to their individual applied bending loads taking into account that
the axial load effects on the members themselves can be dismissed by judgment
based on the large system effects in sheathed roof construction. Frequently,
intermediate rafter braces that are similar to truss web members are also used.
Standard construction details and span tables for rafters and ceiling joists can be
found in the International One- and Two-Family Dwelling Code (ICC, 1998).
These tables generally provide allowable horizontal rafter span with disregard to
any difference that roof slope may have on axial and bending loads experienced in
the rafters. This approach is generally considered as standard practice. Example
5.9 demonstrates two design approaches for a simply-supported, sloped rafter as
illustrated in Figure 5.8.
Structural ridge beams are designed to support roof rafters at the ridge
when there are no ceiling joists or cross-ties to resist the outward thrust of rafters
that would otherwise occur. A repetitive member factor, C
r
, is applicable if the
ridge beam is composed of two or more members (see Table 5.4). It should also
be noted that any additional roof system benefit, such as the folded plate action of
the roof sheathing diaphragm, goes ignored in its structural contribution to the
ridge beam, particularly for steep-sloped roofs. Example 5.10 demonstrates the
design approach for ridge beams.
Roofs with hips and valleys are constructed with rafters framed into a hip
or valley rafter as appropriate and, in practice, are typically one to two sizes larger
than the rafters they support, e.g., 2x8 or 2x10 hip for 2x6 rafters. While hip and
valley rafters experience a unique tributary load pattern or area, they are generally
designed much like ridge beams. The folded plate effect of the roof sheathing
diaphragm provides support to a hip or valley rafter in a manner similar to that
discussed for ridge beams. However, beneficial system effect generally goes
ignored because of the lack of definitive technical guidance. Nonetheless, the use
of design judgment should not be ruled out. Example 5.11 demonstrates the
design of a hip rafter.
5.6.3 Roof Trusses
Roof trusses incorporate rafters (top chords) and ceiling joists (bottom
chords) into a structural frame fabricated from 2-inch-thick dimension lumber,
usually 2x4s or 2x6s. A combination of web members are positioned between the
top and bottom chords, usually in triangular arrangements that form a rigid
framework. Many different truss configurations are possible, including open
trusses for attic rooms and cathedral or scissor trusses with sloped top and bottom
chords. The wood truss members are connected by metal truss plates punched
with barbs (i.e., teeth) that are pressed into the truss members. Roof trusses are
able to span the entire width of a home without interior support walls, allowing
complete freedom in partitioning interior living space. The Metal Plate Connected
Wood Truss Handbook contains span tables for typical truss designs (WTCA,
1997).

Residential Structural Design Guide 5-43
Chapter 5 - Design of Light-Wood Framing
FIGURE 5.8 Design Methods and Assumptions for a Sloped Roof Rafter
Roof truss manufacturers normally provide the required engineering
design based on the loading conditions specified by the building designer. The
building designer is responsible for providing the following items to the truss
manufacturer for design:
• design loads;
• truss profile;
• support locations; and
• any special requirements.
The building designer should also provide for permanent bracing of the
truss system at locations designated by the truss designer. In general, such bracing

5-44 Residential Structural Design Guide
Chapter 5 - Design of Wood Framing
may involve vertical cross-bracing, runners on the bottom chord, and bracing of
certain web members. In typical light-frame residential roof construction,
properly attached roof sheathing provides adequate overall bracing of the roof
truss system and ceiling finishes normally provide lateral support to the bottom
chord of the truss. The only exception is long web members that may experience
buckling from excessive compressive loads. Gable endwall bracing is discussed
separately in Section 5.6.6 as it pertains to the role of the roof system in
supporting the walls against lateral loads, particularly those produced by wind.
For more information and details on permanent bracing of trusses, refer to
Commentary for Permanent Bracing of Metal Plate Connected Wood Trusses
(WTCA, 1999). Temporary bracing during construction is usually the
responsibility of the contractor and is important for worker safety. For additional
guidance on temporary bracing, consult the Metal Plate Connected Wood Truss
Handbook pages 14-1 through 15-12 and Appendix L (WTCA, 1997). For
additional guidance on roles and responsibilities, refer to Standard Practice for
Metal Plate Connected Wood Truss Design Responsibilities (WTCA, 1995).
The National Design Standard for Metal Plate Connected Wood Truss
Construction (ANSI/TPI 1-95) governs the design of trusses. Available from the
Truss Plate Institute (TPI, 1995a and b), ANSI/TPI 1-95 includes the structural
design procedure as well as requirements for truss installation and bracing and
standards for the manufacture of metal plate connectors. A computer program,
PPSA, is also available for a detailed finite element analysis (Triche and
Suddarth, 1993). Truss plate manufacturers and truss fabricators generally have
proprietary computerized design software based on ANSI/TPI 1-95, with
modifications tailored to their particular truss-plate characteristics.
The designer should note that cracking and separation of ceiling finishes
may occur at joints between the walls and ceiling of roofs. In the unfavorable
condition of high attic humidity, the top chord of a truss may expand while the
lower roof members, typically buried under attic insulation, may not be similarly
affected. Thus, a truss may bow upward slightly. Other factors that commonly
cause interior finish cracking are not in any way associated with the roof truss,
including shrinkage of floor framing members, foundation settlement, or heavy
loading of a long-span floor resulting in excessive deflection that may “pull” a
partition wall downward from its attachment at the ceiling. To reduce the
potential for cracking of ceiling finishes at partition wall intersections, 2x wood
blocking should be installed at the top of partition wall plates as a backer for the
ceiling finish material (i.e., gypsum board). Ceiling drywall should not be
fastened to the blocking or to the truss bottom chord within 16 to 24 inches of the
partition. Proprietary clips are available for use in place of wood blocking and
resilient metal “hat” channels may also be used to attach the ceiling finish to the
roof framing. Details that show how to minimize partition-ceiling separation
problems can be found on the WTCA website at (www.woodtruss.com) or by
contacting WTCA to obtain a “Partition Separation” brochure.
Trusses are also frequently used for floor construction to obtain long spans
and to allow for the placement of mechanical systems (i.e., ductwork and sanitary
drains) in the floor cavity. In addition, trusses have been used to provide a
complete house frame (NAHBRC, 1982). One efficient use of a roof truss is as a
structural truss for the gable end above a garage opening to effectively eliminate
the need for a garage door header. For other efficient framing design concepts and

Residential Structural Design Guide 5-45
Chapter 5 - Design of Light-Wood Framing
ideas, refer to Cost Effective Home Building: A Design and Construction
Handbook (NAHBRC, 1994).
5.6.4 Roof Sheathing
Roof sheathing thickness is typically governed by the spacing of roof
framing members and live or snow loads. Sheathing is normally in accordance
with prescriptive sheathing span rating tables published in a building code or
made available by manufacturers. If the limit of the prescriptive tables is
exceeded, the designer may need to perform calculations; however, such
calculations are rarely necessary in residential construction. The process of
selecting rated roof sheathing is similar to that for floor sheathing in Example 5.5.
The fasteners used to attach sheathing to roof rafters are primarily nails.
The most popular nail types are sinker, box, and common, of which all have
different characteristics that affect structural properties (refer to Chapter 7).
Proprietary power-driven fasteners (i.e., pneumatic nails and staples) are also used
extensively. The building codes and APA tables recommend a fastener schedule
for connecting sheathing to roof rafters. Generally, nails are placed at a minimum
6 inches on center at edges and 12 inches on center at intermediate supports. A 6-
inch fastener spacing should also be used at the gable-end framing to help brace
the gable-end. Nail size is typically 8d, particularly since thinner power driven
nails are most commonly used. Roof sheathing is commonly 7/16- to 5/8-inch-
thick on residential roofs. Note that in some cases shear loads in the roof
diaphragm resulting from lateral loads (i.e., wind and earthquake) may require a
more stringent fastening schedule; refer to Chapter 6 for a discussion of fastening
schedules for lateral load design. More importantly, large suction pressures on
roof sheathing in high wind areas (see Chapter 3) will require a larger fastener
and/or closer spacing. In hurricane-prone regions, it is common to require an 8d
deformed shank nail with a 6 inch on center spacing at all framing connections.
At the gable end truss or rafter, a 4 inch spacing is common.
5.6.5 Roof Overhangs
Overhangs are projections of the roof system beyond the exterior wall line
at either the eave or the rake (the sloped gable end). Overhangs protect walls from
rain and shade windows from direct sun. When a roof is framed with wood
trusses, an eave overhang is typically constructed by extending the top chord
beyond the exterior wall. When a roof is framed with rafters, the eave overhang is
constructed by using rafters that extend beyond the exterior wall. The rafters are
cut with a “bird-mouth” to conform to the bearing support. Gable end overhangs
are usually framed by using a ladder panel that cantilevers over the gable end for
either stick-framed or truss roofs. Refer to Figure 5.9 for illustrations of various
overhang constructions.
A study completed in 1978 by the Southern Forest Experiment Station for
the U.S. Department of Housing and Urban Development found that the
protection afforded by overhangs extends the life of the wall below, particularly if
the wall is constructed of wood materials (HUD, 1978). Entitled the Prevention
and Control of Decay in Homes, the report correlates the climate index of a

5-46 Residential Structural Design Guide
Chapter 5 - Design of Wood Framing
geographic area with a suggested overhang width and recommends highly
conservative widths. As a reasonable guideline (given that in many cases no
overhang is provided), protective overhang widths should be 12 to 24 inches in
moist, humid climates and more if practicable. A reasonable rule-of-thumb to
apply is to provide a minimum of 12 inches of overhang width for each story of
protected wall below. However, overhang width can significantly increase wind
uplift loads on a roof, particularly in high wind regions. The detailing of overhang
framing connections (particularly at the rake overhang on a gable end) is a critical
consideration in hurricane-prone regions. Often, standard metal clips or straps
provide adequate connection. The need for special rake overhang design detailing
depends on the length of the overhang, the design wind load condition, and the
framing technique that supports the overhang (i.e., 2x outriggers versus
cantilevered roof sheathing supporting ladder overhang framing).
5.6.6 Gable-End Wall Bracing
Roof framing provides lateral support to the top of the walls where trusses
and rafters are attached to the wall top plate. Likewise, floor framing provides
lateral support to the top and bottom of walls, including the top of foundation
walls. At a gable end, however, the top of the wall is not directly connected to
roof framing members; instead, it is attached to the bottom of a gable-end truss
and lateral support at the top of the wall is provided by the ceiling diaphragm. In
higher-wind regions, the joint may become a “hinge” if the ceiling diaphragm
becomes overloaded. Accordingly, it is common practice to brace the top of the
end wall (or bottom of the gable end roof framing) with 2x4 or 2x6 framing
members that slope upward to the roof diaphragm to attach to a blocking or a
ridge “beam” as shown in Figure 5.9. Alternatively, braces may be laid flatwise
on ceiling joists or truss bottom chords and angled to the walls that are
perpendicular to the gable-end wall. Given that braces must transfer inward and
outward forces resulting from positive wind pressure or suction on the gable-end
wall, they are commonly attached to the top of the gable-end wall with straps to
transfer tension forces that may develop in hurricanes and other extreme wind
conditions. The need for and special detailing of gable-end wall braces depends
on the height and area of the gable end (i.e., tributary area) and the design wind
load. The gable endwall can also be braced by the use of a wood structural panel
attached to the gable end framing and the ceiling framing members.
As an alternative to the above strategy, the gable-end wall may be framed
with continuous studs that extend to the roof sheathing at the gable end (i.e.,
balloon-framed). If the gable-end wall encloses a two-story room–such as a room
with a cathedral ceiling, it is especially important that the studs extend to the roof
sheathing; otherwise, a hinge may develop in the wall and cause cracking of wall
finishes (even in a moderate wind) and could easily precipitate failure of the wall
in an extreme wind. Depending on wall height, stud size, stud spacing, and the
design wind load condition, taller, full-height studs may need to be increased in
size to meet deflection or bending capacity requirements. Some designer
judgment should be exercised in this framing application with respect to the
application of deflection criteria. The system deflection adjustment factors of

Residential Structural Design Guide 5-47
Chapter 5 - Design of Light-Wood Framing
FIGURE 5.9 Typical Roof Overhang Construction

5-48 Residential Structural Design Guide
Chapter 5 - Design of Wood Framing
Table 5.6 may assist in dealing with the need to meet a reasonable serviceability
limit for deflection (see Section 5.3.2).
Finally, as an alternative that avoids the gable-end wall bracing problem, a
hip roof may be used. The hip shape is inherently more resistant to wind damage
in hurricane-prone wind environments (see Chapter 1) and braces the end walls
against lateral wind loads by direct attachment to rafters.
5.7 Design Examples
In this section, a number of design examples illustrate the design of
various elements discussed in this chapter. The examples are intended to also
provide practical advice. Therefore, the examples are embellished with numerous
notes and recommendations to improve the practicality and function of various
possible design solutions. They are also intended to promote the designer’s
creativity in arriving at the best possible solution for a particular application

Residential Structural Design Guide 5-49
Chapter 5 - Design of Light-Wood Framing
EXAMPLE 5.1 Typical Simple Span Floor Joist Design
Given
Live load (L) = 30 psf (bedroom area)
Dead load (D) = 10 psf
Trial joist spacing = 16 on center
Trial joist size = 2x8
Trial joist species and grade = Hem-Fir, No. 1 (S-dry, 19% MC)
Find Maximum span for specified joist member.
Solution
1. Determine tabulated design values by using NDS-S (Tables 4A and 1B)
F
b
= 975 psi I
xx
= 47.63 in
4
F
v
= 75 psi S
xx
= 13.14 in
3
F
c⊥
= 405 psi b = 1.5 in
E = 1,500,000 psi d = 7.25 in
2. Lumber property adjustments and adjusted design values (Section 5.2.4 and
NDS•2.3)
C
D
= 1.0 (Section 5.2.4.1)
C
r
= 1.15(Table 5.4)
C
F
= 1.2 (NDS-S Table 4A adjustment factors)
C
H
= 2.0 (Section 5.2.4.3)
C
L
= 1.0 (NDS•3.3.3, continuous lateral support)
C
b
= 1.0 (NDS•2.3.10)
F
b
’= F
b
C
r
C
F
C
D
C
L
= 975 (1.15)(1.2)(1.0)(1.0) = 1,345 psi
F
v
’= F
v
C
H
C
D
= 75 (2)(1.0) = 150 psi
F
c⊥
’= F
c⊥
C
b
= 405 (1.0) = 405 psi
E’ = E = 1,500,000 psi
3. Calculate the applied load
W = (joist spacing)(D+L) = (16 in)(1 ft/12 in)(40 psf) = 53.3 plf
4. Determine maximum clear span based on bending capacity
M
max
=
8
w
2
l
=
8
)()plf3.53(
2
l
=6.66
2
c108
f
b
=
S
M
=
3
2
in14.13
)
ft
in
12()66.6( l
=6.08
2
c108
f
b
≤ F
b
’
6.08 l
2
≤ 1,345 psi
l
2
= 221
l = 14.9 ft = 14 ft-11 in (maximum clear span due to bending stress)

5-50 Residential Structural Design Guide
Chapter 5 - Design of Wood Framing
5. Determine maximum clear span based on horizontal shear capacity
V
max
=
2
wl
=
2
)()plf3.53( l
= 26.7 c108
f
v
=
A2
V3
=








)in25.7()in5.1(
7.26
2
3 l
= 3.7 c108
f
v
≤ F
v
’
3.7l ≤ 150 psi
l = 40.5 ft =40 ft-6 in (maximum clear span due to horizontal shear
stress)
6. Determine maximum clear span based on bearing capacity
Bearing length = (3.5-in top plate width) - (1.5-in rim joist width) = 2 in
f
c⊥
=
b
A
w
2
1
c108
=
)in5.1()in2(
)()plf3.53(
2
1
l
=8.9c108
f
c⊥
<F
c⊥
’
8.9l ≤ 405 psi
l = 45.5 ft = 45 ft-6 in (maximum clear span due to bearing stress)
7. Consider maximum clear span based on deflection criteria (Section 5.3.2)
ρ
max
=
EI384
w5
4
l
=
()
)in63.47()psi000,500,1(384
)ft/in728,1()plf40(5
4
334*
l
= 1.26 x 10
-5
l
4
*
applied live load of 30 psf only
ρ
all
=
360
l
(12 in/ft) = 0.033 c108
ρ
max
≤ρ
all
1.26 x 10
-5
c108
4
≤ 0.033 c108
c108
3
= 2,619
c108 = 13.8 ft = 13 ft-10 in (recommended clear span limit due to
deflection criteria)
8. Consider floor vibration (Section 5.3.2)
The serviceability deflection check was based on the design floor live load for
bedroom areas of 30 psf. The vibration control recommended in Section 5.3.2
recommends using a 40 psf design floor live load with the l/360 deflection limit.
Given that the span will not be greater than 15 feet, it is not necessary to use the
absolute deflection limit of 0.5 inch.
w = (16 in)(1 ft/12 in)(40 psf) = 53.3 plf
ρ
all
= )ft/in12()
360
(
l
= 0.033 c108
ρ
max
=
EI384
w5
4
l
=
)in63.47()psi10x5.1(384
)ft/in728,1()()plf3.53(5
46
334*
l
= 1.7 x 10
-5
c108
4
*
applied live load of 40 psf only
ρ
max
≤ρ
all
1.7 x 10
-5
c108
4
≤ 0.033 c108
l
3
= 1,941
l = 12.5 ft = 12 ft-6 in (recommended clear span limit due to vibration)

Residential Structural Design Guide 5-51
Chapter 5 - Design of Light-Wood Framing
Conclusion
The serviceability limit states used for deflection and floor vibration limit the
maximum span. The deflection limited span is 13 ft-10 in and the vibration limited
span is 12 ft-6 in. Span selection based on deflection or vibration is an issue of
designer judgment. The maximum span limited by the structural safety checks was
14 ft-11 in due to bending. Therefore, the serviceability limit will provide a notable
safety margin above that required. Thus, No. 2 grade lumber should be considered
for economy in that it will have only a small effect on the serviceability limits.
Conversely, if floor stiffness is not an expected issue with the owner or occupant,
the span may be increased beyond the serviceability limits if needed to “make it
work.” Many serviceable homes have been built with 2x8 floor joists spanning as
much as 15 feet; however, if occupants have a low tolerance for floor vibration, a
lesser span should be considered.
For instructional reasons, shrinkage across the depth of the floor joist or floor
system may be estimated as follows based on the equations in Section 5.3.2:
d
1
= 7.25 in M
1
= 19% maximum (S-dry lumber)
d
2
=? M
2
= 10% (estimated equilibrium MC)
d
2
=d
1












−
−
−
−
100
M2.0a
1
100
M2.0a
1
1
2
= 7.25 in












−
−
−
−
100
)19(2.0031.6
1
100
)10(2.0031.6
1
= 7.1 in
Shrinkage ≅ 7.25 ft-7.08 in = 0.15 in (almost 3/16 in)
In a typical wood-framed house, shrinkage should not be a problem,
provided that it is uniform throughout the floor system. In multistory
platform frame construction, the same amount of shrinkage across each
floor can add up to become a problem, and mechanical systems and
structural details should allow for such movement. Kiln-dried lumber may
be specified to limit shrinkage and building movement after construction.

5-52 Residential Structural Design Guide
Chapter 5 - Design of Wood Framing
EXAMPLE 5.2 Simple Span Floor Joist Design (Optimize Lumber)
Given
Live load (L) = 40 psf
Dead load (D) = 10 psf
Clear span = 14 ft-2 in
Joist size = 2x10
Find Optimum lumber species and grade
Solution
1. Calculate the applied load
W = (joist spacing)(D+L) = (2 ft)(40 psf +10 psf) = 100 plf
2. Determine bending stress
M
max
=
8
w
2
l
=
8
)ft17.14()plf100(
2
= 2,510 ft-lb
F
b
=
S
M
=
3
in39.21
)ft/in12()lbft510,2( −
= 1,408 psi
3. Determine horizontal shear stress
V
max
=
2
wl
=
2
)ft17.14()plf100(
= 709 lb
f
v
=
A2
V3
=
)in25.9()in5.1(2
)lb709(3
= 77 psi
4. Determine bearing stress:
R
1
=R
2
=V
max
= 709 lb
f
c⊥
=
b
A
R
=
)in5.1()in2(
lb709
= 236 psi
Wall and roof loads, if any, are carried through rim/band joist
5. Determine minimum modulus of elasticity due to selected deflection criteria
ρ
max
=
EI384
w5
4
l
=
)in93.98(E384
)ft/in728,1()ft17.14(*)plf80(5
4
334
= 733,540/E
*includes live load of 40 psf only
ρ
all
≤
360
l
ρ
max
≤ρ
all
E
540,733
=
360
)ft/in12()ft17.14(
E
min
= 1.55 x 10
6
psi

Residential Structural Design Guide 5-53
Chapter 5 - Design of Light-Wood Framing
6. Determine minimum modulus of elasticity due to vibration
The span required is not greater than 15 feet and the l/360 deflection check uses a
40 psf floor live load. Therefore, the deflection check is assumed to provide
adequate vibration control.
7. Determine minimum required unadjusted properties by using NDS tabulated
lumber data
Bending f
b
≤ F
b
’
F
b
’=F
b
C
r
C
F
C
D
F
bmin
=
DFr
b
CCC
f
=
)0.1()1.1()15.1(
psi408,1
= 1,113 psi
Horizontal shear f
v
≤ F
v
’
F
v
’=F
v
C
H
C
D
F
vmin
=
DH
v
CC
f
=
)0.1()2(
psi77
= 39 psi
Bearing f
c⊥
≤ F
c⊥
’ (assume minimum 2-in bearing)
F
c⊥
=F
c⊥
C
b
F
c⊥min
=
)0.1(
f
c⊥
= 236 psi
Minimum unadjusted tabulated properties required
F
b
= 1,113 psi F
c⊥
= 236 psi
F
v
= 39 psi E = 1.55x10
6
psi
8. Select optimum lumber grade considering local availability and price by using
NDS-S Table 4A or 4B data
Minimum No. 2 grade lumber is recommended for floor joists because of factors
related to lumber quality such as potential warping and straightness that may
affect constructability and create call-backs.
Considering 2x10 Douglas Fir-Larch, the grade below (No. 1 and Btr) was
selected to meet the required properties.
F
b
= 1,200 psi > 1,113 psi OK
F
v
= 95 psi > 39 psi OK
F
c⊥
= 625 psi > 236 psi OK
E = 1.8x10
6
psi > 1.55x10
6
psi OK

5-54 Residential Structural Design Guide
Chapter 5 - Design of Wood Framing
Conclusion
Many other species and grades should be considered depending on local availability
and cost. Also, the No. 1 and higher grades are generally considered as “premium”
lumber. A more economical design may be possible by using a closer joist spacing
to allow for a lower grade (i.e, 19.2 inches on center or 16 inches on center). Also, a
lower grade 2x12 should be considered or, perhaps, engineered wood I-joists.

Residential Structural Design Guide 5-55
Chapter 5 - Design of Light-Wood Framing
EXAMPLE 5.3 Cantilevered Floor Joist
Given
Joist spacing = 16 in on center
Joist size = 2x10
Bearing length = 3-1/2 in
Species = Douglas Fir-Larch, No.1 Grade
Loads on cantilever joist (see Chapter 3)
Floor live load (L) = 40 psf
Floor dead load (D) = 10 psf
Loads for concentrated load at end of cantilever (see Chapter 3)
Roof snow load (S) = 11 psf (15 psf ground snow load and 7:12 roof
pitch)
Roof dead load (D) = 12 psf
Wall dead load (D) = 8 psf
Roof span = 28 ft (clear span plus 1 ft overhang)
Wall height = 8 ft
Cantilever Joist Load Diagram
Find Determine the maximum cantilever span for the specified floor joist based
on these load combinations (Chapter 3, Table 3.1):
D + L + 0.3 (S or L
r
)
D + (S or L
r
) + 0.3L
The analysis does not consider wind uplift that may control connections in
high-wind areas, but not necessarily the cantilever joist selection.
Deflection at the end of the cantilever should be based on a limit appropriate
to the given application. The application differs from a normal concern with
mid-span deflection; experience indicates that deflection limits can be safely
and serviceably relaxed in the present application. A deflection limit of
l/120 inches at the end of cantilever is recommended, particularly when the
partial composite action of the sheathing is neglected in determining the
moment of inertia, I, for the deflection analysis.

5-56 Residential Structural Design Guide
Chapter 5 - Design of Wood Framing
Solution
1. Determine tabulated design values for species and grade from the NDS-S
F
b
= 1000 psi S = 21.39 in
3
F
v
= 95 psi I = 98.93 in
4
F
c⊥
= 625 psi b = 1.5 in
E = 1.7x10
6
psi d = 9.25 in
2. Determine lumber property adjustments (see Section 5.2.4)
C
r
=1.15 C
F
=1.1
C
H
=2.0 C
D
= 1.25 (includes snow)
C
b
*
=1.1 C
L
= 1.0 (continuous lateral support)
**
*
Joist bearing not at end of member (see NDS•2.3.10)
**
The bottom (compression edge) of the cantilever is assuemd to be laterally
braced with wood structural panel sheathing or equivalent. If not, the value of
CL is dependent on the slenderness ratio (see NDS•3.3.3).
F
b
’ = F
b
C
r
C
F
C
D
C
L
= (1000 psi)(1.15)(1.1)(1.25)(1.0) = 1,581 psi
F
v
’ = F
v
C
H
C
D
= (95)(2)(1.25) = 238 psi
F
c⊥
’ = F
c⊥
C
b
= 625 (1.11) = 694 psi
E’ = E = 1.7x10
6
psi
3. Determine design loads on cantilever joist
The following load combinations (based on Chapter 3, Table 3.1) will be investigated
for several load cases that may govern different safety or serviceability checks
Case I: D+S - Cantilever Deflection Check
P = wall and roof load (lb) at end of cantilever = f (D+S)
w = uniform load (plf) on joist = f (D only)
Case II: D+L - Deflection at Interior Span
P=f (D only)
w=f (D+L)
Case III: D+S+0.3L or D+L+0.3S - Bending and Horizontal Shear at Exterior
Bearing Support
a. P = f (D+S)
w=f (D + 0.3L)
b. P = f (D+0.3S)
w=f (D+L)
The following values of P and W are determined by using the nominal design loads,
roof span, wall height, and joist spacing given above
Case I Case II Case IIIa Case IIIb
P = 544 lb 325 lb 544 lb 390 lb
W = 13.3 plf 66.5 plf 29.3 plf 66.5 lb

Residential Structural Design Guide 5-57
Chapter 5 - Design of Light-Wood Framing
Inspection of these loading conditions confirms that Case I controls deflection at the
end of the cantilever, Case II controls deflection in the interior span, and either Case
IIIa or IIIb controls the structural safety checks (i.e., bending, horizontal shear, and
bearing).
Since the cantilever span, X, is unknown at this point, it is not possible to determine
structural actions in the joist (i.e., shear and moment) by using traditional engineering
mechanics and free-body diagrams. However, the beam equations could be solved
and a solution for X iterated for all required structural safety and serviceability checks
(by computer). Therefore, a trial value for X is determined in the next step. If an off-
the-shelf computer program is used, verify its method of evaluating the above load
cases.
4.
Determine a trial cantilever span based on a deflection limit of l/120 and load Case I.
Use a 2 ft-10 in cantilever span (calculations not shown - see beam equations in
Appendix A).
5. Determine the maximum bending moment and shear for the three load cases
governing the structural safety design checks by using the trail cantilever span:
The following is determined by using free-body diagrams and shear and moment
diagrams (or beam equations, see Appendix A)
Case II Case IIIa Case IIIb
R
1
1,008 lb 938 lb 1,088 lb
R
2
301 lb 40 lb 286 lb
V
max
* 511 lb 626 lb 576 lb
M
max
1,170 ft-lb 1,638 ft-lb 1,352 lb
*
NDS•3.4.3 allows loads within a distance of the member depth, d, from the bearing
support to be ignored in the calculation of shear V when checking horizontal shear
stress. However, this portion of the load must be included in an analysis of the
bending moment. It would reduce the value of V
max
as calculated above by using
beam equations by approximately 100 pounds in Case II and Case IIIb and about 44
pounds in Case IIIa by eliminating the uniform load, w, within a distance, d, from
the exterior bearing support.
6. Determine design bending moment capacity of the given joist and verify adequacy
F
b
’
≥ f
b
=
S
M
all
M
all
=F
b
’S = (1,581 psi)(21.4 in
3
)(1 ft/12 in)
= 2,819 ft-lb
M
all
>M
max
= 1,638 ft-lb OK
7. Determine design shear capacity of the given joist and verify adequacy:
F
v
=
A2
V3
all
and F
v
≥ F
v
’
V
all
=
3
’AF2
v
=
3
)psi238()in25.9)(in5.1(2
= 2,202 lbs
V
all
>V
max
= 626 lbs OK

5-58 Residential Structural Design Guide
Chapter 5 - Design of Wood Framing
8. Check bearing stress
f
c⊥
=
b
max
A
R
=
)in5.3)(in5.1(
lb088,1
= 207 psi
F
c⊥
’ = 694 psi > 207 psi OK
Conclusion
A cantilever span of 2 ft-10 in (2.8 feet) is structurally adequate. The span is
controlled by the selected deflection limit (i.e., serviceability) which illustrates the
significance of using judgment when establishing and evaluating serviceability
criteria. Allowance for a 2-foot cantilever is a common field practice in standard
simple span joist tables for conventional residential construction. A check regarding
interior span deflection of the joist using load Case II may be appropriate if floor
vibration is a concern. However, unacceptable vibration is unlikely given that the
span is only 12 feet. Also, Douglas-Fir, Larch, No. 1 Grade, is considered premium
framing lumber and No. 2 Grade member should be evaluated, particularly if only a
2-foot cantilever is required.

Residential Structural Design Guide 5-59
Chapter 5 - Design of Light-Wood Framing
EXAMPLE 5.4 Built-Up Floor Girder Design
Given
Loads
Floor live load = 40 psf
Floor dead load = 10 psf
Required girder span (support column spacing) = 14 ft
Joist span (both sides of girder) = 12 ft
Species = Southern Pine, No. 1
Maximum girder depth = 12
Find Minimum number of 2x10s or 2x12s required for the built-up girder.
Solution
1. Calculate the design load
W = (Trib. floor joist span)(D + L) = (12 ft)(40 psf + 10 psf) = 600 plf
2. Determine tabulated design values (NDS-S Table 4B)
F
b
= 1250 psi F
C⊥
= 565 psi
F
v
= 90 psi E = 1.7x10
6
psi
3. Lumber property adjustments (Section 5.2.4):
C
r
= 1.2 (Table 5.4) C
D
=1.0
C
F
=1.0 C
b
=1.0
C
H
=2.0 C
L
=1.0
(compression flange laterally braced by connection of floor joists to top or side of
girder)
F
b
’=F
b
C
D
C
r
C
F
C
L
= 1,250 psi (1.0)(1.2)(1)(1) = 1,500 psi
F
V
’=F
l
C
D
C
H
= 90 psi (1.25)(2.0) = 225 psi
F
c⊥
’=F
c⊥
C
b
= 565 psi (1) = 565 psi
E’ = E = 1.7x10
6
psi
4. Determine number of members required due to bending
M
max
=
8
w
2
l
=
8
)ft14()plf600(
2
= 14,700 ft-lb
f
b
=
S
M
=
S
)ft/in12()lbft700,14( −
=
S
400,176
f
b
≤ F
b
’
S
400,176
≤ 1,500 psi
S
x
= 118 in
3
Using Table 1B in NDS-S
5 2x10s S = 5(21.39) = 107 < 118 (marginal, but 5 too thick)
4 2x12s S = 4 (31.64) = 127 > 118 (OK)

5-60 Residential Structural Design Guide
Chapter 5 - Design of Wood Framing
5. Determine number of members required due to horizontal shear
V
max
=
2
wl
=
2
)ft14(plf600
= 4,200 lb
f
v
=
A2
V3
= 





A
4200
2
3
=
A
lb300,6
f
v
≤ F
v
’
A
lb300,6
≤ 225 psi
A = 28 in
2
2 2x12s A = 33.8 > 28 OK
2 2x10s A = 27.8 ≈ 28 OK
6. Determine required bearing length using 4 2x12s
R
1
=R
2
=V
max
= 4,200 lb
f
c⊥
=
b
A
R
=
))(in6(
lb200,4
b
l
=
b
700
l
f
c1
≤ F
c⊥
’
b
700
l
≤ 565 psi
l
b
= 1.24 in (OK)
7. Determine member size due to deflection
ρ
max
=
EI384
w5
4
l
=
EI384
)ft/in728,1()ft14(*)plf480(5
334
=
EI
10x15.4
8
*includes 40 psf live load only
ρ
all
≤
360
l
=
360
)ft/in12(ft14
= 0.47 in
ρ
max
≤ρ
all
EI
10x15.4
8
= 0.47 in
EI = 8.8 x 10
8
(1.7 x 10
6
)(I) = 8.8 x 10
8
I = 519 in
4
3 2x12s I = 534 > 519 okay

Residential Structural Design Guide 5-61
Chapter 5 - Design of Light-Wood Framing
8. Check girder for floor system vibration control (see Section 5.3.2)
Girder span, l
1
= 14 ft
Joist span, l
2
= 12 ft
l
TOTAL
= 26 ft > 20 ft
Therefore, check girder using
480
l
or
600
l
to stiffen floor system
Try
480
l
ρ
max
=
EI
10x15.4
8
(as before)
ρ
all
=
480
l
=
480
)ft/in12(ft14
= 0.35 in
ρ
max
≤ρ
all
EI
10x15.4
8
= 0.35 in
EI = 1.2 x 10
9
I=
6
9
10x7.1
10x2.1
= 706 in
4
Using Table 1B in NDS, use
4 2x12s I = 4 (178 in
4
) = 712 in
4
> 706 in
4
OK
Conclusion
The bending stress limits the floor girder design to 4 2x12’s (No. 1, SYP). The
use of 4 2x12s also provides a “stiff” girder with respect to floor vibration (i.e.,
deflection limit of
480
l
. As a practical alternative, a steel “floor beam” (e.g., W-
shape) or an engineered wood beam may also be used, particularly if “clearance”
is a concern.

5-62 Residential Structural Design Guide
Chapter 5 - Design of Wood Framing
EXAMPLE 5.5 Subfloor Sheathing Design
Given
Joist spacing = 16 in on center
Floor live load = 40 psf
Use APA rated subflooring
Find The required sheathing span rating and thickness with the face grain perpendicular
to the joist span.
Determine size and spacing of fasteners.
Solution
Determine sheathing grade and span rating and thickness by using the APA’s
Design and Construction Guide for Residential and Commercial (APA, 1998).
From Table 7 in the APA guide, use 7/16-inch-thick (24/16 rating) sheathing or
15/32-inch- to 1/2-inch-thick (32/16 rating) sheathing. The first number in the
rating applies to the maximum spacing of framing members for roof applications;
the second to floor applications. It is fairly common to up size the sheathing to the
next thickness, e.g., 3/4-inch, to provide a stiffer floor surface. Such a decision
often depends on the type of floor finish to be used or the desired “feel” of the
floor. Similar ratings are also available from other structural panel trademarking
organizations and also comply with the PS-2 standard. It is important to ensure
that the sheathing is installed with the long dimension (i.e., face grain)
perpendicular to the floor framing; otherwise, the rating does not apply. For wall
applications, panel orientation is not an issue.
Use 6d common nails for 7/16-inch-thick sheathing or 8d common nails for
thicknesses up to 1 inch (see Table 5.7). Nails should be spaced at 6 inches on
center along supported panel edges and 12 inches on center along intermediate
supports.
Conclusion
Sheathing design involves matching the proper sheathing rating with the floor
framing spacing and live load condition. The process is generally a “cook book”
method that follows tables in manufacturer’s literature or the applicable building
code. Board sheathing and decking are other possible subfloor options that may be
designed by using the NDS. Prescriptive tables for these options are also generally
available in wood industry publications or in the applicable residential building
code.

Residential Structural Design Guide 5-63
Chapter 5 - Design of Light-Wood Framing
EXAMPLE 5.6 Exterior Bearing Wall Design
Given
Stud size and spacing = 2x4 at 24 in on center
Wall height = 8 ft
Species and grade = Spruce-Pine-Fir, Stud Grade
Exterior surface = 7/16-in-thick OSB
Interior surface = 1/2-in-thick, gypsum wall board
Wind load (100 mph, gust) = 16 psf (see Chapter 3, Example 3.2)
Find Vertical load capacity of stud wall system for bending (wind) and axial
compression (dead load) and for axial compression only (i.e., dead, live, and snow
loads); refer to Chapter 3, Table 3.1, for applicable load combinations.
Wall Loading Diagram
Solution
1. Determine tabulated design values for the stud by using the NDS-S (Table A4)
F
b
= 675 psi F
c⊥
= 425 psi
F
t
= 350 psi F
c
= 725 psi
F
v
= 70 psi E = 1.2x10
6
psi
2. Determine lumber property adjustments (see Section 5.2.4)
C
D
= 1.6 (wind load combination)
= 1.25 (gravity/snow load combination)
C
r
= 1.5 (sheathed wall assembly, Table 5.4)
C
L
= 1.0 (continuous lateral bracing)
C
F
= 1.05 for F
c
= 1.1 for F
t
= 1.1 for F
b
3. Calculate adjusted tensile capacity
Not applicable to this design. Tension capacity is OK by inspection.

5-64 Residential Structural Design Guide
Chapter 5 - Design of Wood Framing
4. Calculate adjusted bending capacity
F
b
’=F
b
C
D
C
L
C
F
C
r
= (675)(1.6)(1.0)(1.1)(1.5) = 1,782 psi
5. Calculate adjusted compressive capacity (NDS•3.7)
F
c
*
=F
c
C
D
C
F
= (725 psi)(1.6)(1.05) = 1,218 psi
E’ = E = 1.2x10
6
psi
K
cE
= 0.3 visually graded lumber
c = 0.8 sawn lumber
F
cE
=
2
e
cE
d
l
’EK






=
2
6
in5.3
)ft/in12(ft8
)psi10x2.1(3.0






= 479 psi
C
p
=
c2
*
F
F
1
c
cE






+
–
c
*F
F
c2
F
F
1
c
cE
2
*
c
cE
−






















+
(column stability
factor)
=
)8.0(2
218,1
479
1 





+
–
8.0
218,1
479
)8.0(2
218,1
479
1
2
−
















+
=0.35
F
c
'=F
c
C
D
C
F
C
P
= (725 psi)(1.6)(1.05)(0.35) = 426 psi
Axial load only case
Calculations are same as above except use C
D
= 1.25
F
c
* = 952 psi
C
p
=0.44
F
c
'=F
c
C
D
C
F
C
P
= 725 psi (1.25)(1.05)(0.44) = 419 psi
6. Calculate combined bending and axial compression capacity for wind and gravity
load (dead only) by using the combined stress interaction (CSI) equation
(NDS•3.9.2):
f
b
=
S
M
=
S
w
8
1
2
l
=
[]
3
2
in06.3
)in12/ft1()
ft
in
12)(ft8()psf16)(in24(
8
1
= 1,004 psi
2
c
c
’F
f








+






−
1cE
c
b
b
F
f
1’F
f
≤ 1.0 (CSI equation for bending in strong axis of stud
only)
2
c
426
f








+






−
479
f
1782,1
004,1
c
= 1.0 (solve CSI equation for f
c
)

Residential Structural Design Guide 5-65
Chapter 5 - Design of Light-Wood Framing
f
c, max
= 163 psi/stud
P=f
c
A = (163 psi/stud)(1.5 in)(3.5 in) = 856 lb/stud
w = (856 lb/stud)








ft2
stud1
= 428 plf (uniform dead load at top of wall)
Therefore, the maximum axial (dead) load capacity is 428 plf with the wind load
case (i.e., D+W).
7. Determine maximum axial gravity load without bending load
This analysis applies to the D + L+ 0.3(S or L
r
) and D + (S or L
r
) + 0.3L load
combinations (see Table 3.1, Chapter 3).
Using F
c
’ determined in Step 5 (axial load only case), determine the stud capacity
acting as a column with continuous lateral support in the weak-axis buckling
direction.
F
c
≤ F
c
’
A
P
≤ 419 psi
P
max
= (419 psi)(1.5 in)(3.5 in) = 2,200 lbs/stud
Maximum axial load capacity (without simultaneous bending load) is 2,200
lbs/stud or 1,100 lbs/lf of wall.
8. Check bearing capacity of wall plate
Not a capacity limit state. (F
c⊥
is based on deformation limit state, not actual
bearing capacity.) OK by inspection.

5-66 Residential Structural Design Guide
Chapter 5 - Design of Wood Framing
Conclusion
The axial and bending load capacity of the example wall is ample for most
residential design conditions. Thus, in most cases, use of the prescriptive stud tables
found in residential building codes may save time. Only in very tall walls (i.e.,
greater than 10 feet) or more heavily loaded walls than typical will a special analysis
as shown here be necessary, even in higher-wind conditions. It is likely that the
controlling factor will be a serviceability limit state (i.e., wall deflection) rather than
strength, as shown in several of the floor design examples. In such cases, the wall
system deflection adjustment factors of Table 5.6 should be considered.
Note:
The axial compression capacity determined above is conservative because the
actual EI of the wall system is not considered in the determination of C
p
for
stability. No method is currently available to include system effects in the analysis
of C
p
; however, a K
e
factor of 0.8 may be used as a reasonable assumption to
determine the effective buckling length, l
e
, which is then used to determine C
p
(see
NDS•3.7.1).
Testing has demonstrated that sheathed walls like the one in this example can carry
ultimate axial loads of more than 5,000 plf (NAHB/RF, 1974; other unpublished
data).

Residential Structural Design Guide 5-67
Chapter 5 - Design of Light-Wood Framing
EXAMPLE 5.7 Header System Design
Given
Two-story house
Required header span = 6.3 ft (rough opening)
Species and grade = Spruce-Pine-Fir (south), No. 2
Loads on first-story header
w
floor
= 600 plf (includes floor dead and live loads)
w
wall
= 360 plf (includes dead, live, and snow loads supported by wall
above header)*
w
total
= 960 plf (includes dead, live, and snow loads)*
*Combined loads are determined in accordance with Table 3.1 of Chapter 3.
Find Determine header size (2x8 or 2x10) by considering system effect of all horizontal
members spanning the opening.
Header System
Solution
1. Determine tabulated design values by using the NDS-S (Table 4A)
F
b
= 775 psi
F
v
= 70 psi
F
c⊥
= 335 psi
E = 1.1x10
6
psi
2. Determine lumber property adjustments (Section 5.2.4)
C
r
= 1.3 (2x10 double header per Table 5.8)
= 1.2 (2x8 double header per Table 5.4)
C
D
= 1.25 (snow load)
C
F
= 1.1 (2x10)
= 1.2 (2x8)
C
H
=2.0
C
b
=1.0
C
L
= 1.0 laterally supported

5-68 Residential Structural Design Guide
Chapter 5 - Design of Wood Framing
F
b
’=F
b
C
D
C
r
C
F
C
L
= (775 psi)(1.25)(1.3)(1.1)(1.0) = 1,385 psi [2x10]
= (775 psi)(1.25)(1.2)(1.1)(1.0) = 1,279 psi [2x8]
F
v
’=F
v
C
D
C
H
= (70 psi)(1.25)(2) = 175 psi
F
c⊥
’= F
c⊥
C
b
= (335psi)(1) = 335 psi
E’ = E = 1.1x10
6
psi
With double top plate, F
b
can be increased by 5 percent (Table 5.8)
F
b
’=F
b
’ (1.05) = 1,385 psi (1.05) = 1,454 psi [2x10]
F
b
’= F
b
’ (1.05) = 1,279 psi (1.05) = 1,343 psi [2x8]
3. Determine header size due to bending for floor load only
M
max
=
8
w
2
l
=
8
)ft5.6()plf600(
2
= 3,169 ft-lb
f
b
=
S
M
max
≤ F
b
’
1,454 psi =
S
)ft/in12(lbft169,3 −
S = 26.2 in
3
S for 2 2x10 = 2(21.39 in
3
) = 42.78 in
3
> 26.2 in
3
(OK)
Try 2 2x8s
1,343 psi =
S
)ft/in12(lbft169,3 −
S = 28.3 in
3
S for 2 2x8 = 2 (13.14) = 26.3 in
3
< 28.3 in
3
(close, but no good)
4. Determine member size due to bending for combined floor and supported wall
loads by using the 1.8 system factor from Table 5.8, but not explicitly calculating
the load sharing with the band joist above.
F
b
’=F
b
(C
D
)(C
r
)(C
F
)(C
L
) = 775 psi (1.25)(1.8)(1.1)(1.0) = 1,918 psi
M
max
=
8
w
2
l
=
8
)ft5.6()plf600plf360(
2
+
= 5,070 ft-lb
f
b
=
S
M
≤ F
b
’
1,918 psi =
S
)ft/in12(lbft070,5 −
S = 31.7 in
3
S for 2-2x10 = 42.78 in
3
> 31.7 in
3
(OK)
5. Check horizontal shear
V
max
=
2
wl
=
2
)5.6()plf600(
= 1,950 lb
f
v
=
A2
V3
=
)in25.9)(in5.1)(2(2
)lb950,1(3
= 106 psi
f
v
≤ F
v
’
106 psi < 175 psi (OK)

Residential Structural Design Guide 5-69
Chapter 5 - Design of Light-Wood Framing
6. Check for adequate bearing
R
1
=R
2
=V
max
= 1,950 lb
f
c⊥
=
b
A
R
=
))(in5.1()2(
lb950,1
b
l
=
b
650
l
f
c⊥
≤ F
c⊥
’
b
650
l
= 335
l
b
= 1.9 in OK for bearing, use 2-2x4 jack studs (l
b
= 3 in)
7. Check deflection
ρ
max
=
EI384
w5
4
l
=
)])2)(in9.98[()psi10x1.1(384
)ft/in728,1()ft5.6()plf600(5
46
334
= 0.11 in
ρ
all
= L/240
240
)ft/in12()ft5.6(
= 0.325 in
ρ
max
< ρ
all
Conclusion
Using a system-based header design approach, a 2-2x10 header of No. 2 Spruce-
Pine-Fir is found to be adequate for the 6 ft-3 in span opening. The loading
condition is common to the first story of a typical two-story residential building.
Using a stronger species or grade of lumber would allow the use of a 2-2x8 header.
Depending on the application and potential savings, it may be more cost-effective
to use the header tables found in a typical residential building code. For cost-
effective ideas and concepts that allow for reduced header loads and sizes, refer to
Cost Effective Home Building: A Design and Construction Handbook (NAHBRC,
1994). The document also contains convenient header span tables. For headers that
are not part of a floor-band joist system, the design approach of this example is still
relevant and similar to that used for floor girders. However, the 1.8 system factor
used here would not apply, and the double top plate factor would apply only as
appropriate.

5-70 Residential Structural Design Guide
Chapter 5 - Design of Wood Framing
EXAMPLE 5.8 Column Design
Given
Basement column supporting a floor girder
Spruce-Pine-Fir, No. 2 Grade
Axial design load is 4,800 lbs (D + L)
Column height is 7.3 ft (unsupported)
Find Adequacy of a 4x4 solid column
Solution
1. Determine tabulated design values by using the NDS-S (Table 4A)
F
c
= 1,150 psi
E = 1.4x10
6
psi
2. Lumber property adjustments (Section 5.2.4):
C
D
=1.0
C
F
= 1.15 for F
c
3. Calculate adjusted compressive capacity (NDS•3.7):
Trial 4x4
F
c
*=F
c
C
D
C
F
= 1,150 psi (1.0)(1.15) = 1,323 psi
E’ = E = 1.4x10
6
psi
K
cE
= 0.3 for visually graded
c = 0.8 for sawn lumber
F
cE
=
2
e
cE
d
’EK





l
=
2
6
in5.3
)ft/in12(ft3.7
)psi10x4.1(3.0






= 670 psi
C
p
=
c2
*
F
F
1
c
cE






+
–
c
*
Fc
F
c2
*
F
F
1 cE
2
c
cE
−


















+
=
)8.0(2
323,1
670
1 





+
–
8.0
323,1
670
)8.0(2
323,1
670
1
2
−
















+
= 0.44
F
c
'=F
c
C
D
C
F
C
p
= (1,150 psi)(1.0)(1.15)(0.44) = 582 psi
P
all
=F'
c
A = (582 psi)(3.5 in)(3.5 in) = 7,129 lb > 4,800 lb
OK

Residential Structural Design Guide 5-71
Chapter 5 - Design of Light-Wood Framing
Conclusion
A 4x4 column is adequate for the 4,800-pound axial design load and the stated height
and support conditions. In fact, a greater column spacing could be used. Note that the
analysis was performed with a solid sawn column of rectangular dimension. If a
nonrectangular column is used, buckling must be analyzed in the weak-axis direction in
consideration of the distance between lateral supports, if any, in that direction. If a
built-up column is used, it is NOT treated the same way as a solid column. Even if the
dimensions are nearly the same, the built-up column is more susceptible to buckling
due to slippage between adjacent members as flexure occurs in response to buckling
(only if unbraced in the weak-axis direction of the built-up members). Slippage depends
on how well the built-up members are fastened together, which is accounted for by the
use of an additional adjustment (reduction) factor applied to the C
p
equation (see
Section 5.5.5 and NDS•15.3).

5-72 Residential Structural Design Guide
Chapter 5 - Design of Wood Framing
EXAMPLE 5.9 Simply Supported Sloped Rafter Design
Given
Two-story home
Rafter spacing 16 in on center
Rafter horizontal span is 12 ft (actual sloped span is 14.4 ft)
8:12 roof slope
Design loads (see Chapter 3):
Dead load = 10 psf
Roof snow load = 20 psf (20 psf ground snow)
Wind load (90 mph, gust) = 12.7 psf (outward, uplift)
= 7.4 psf (inward)
Roof live load = 10 psf
Find Minimum rafter size using No. 2 Douglas-Fir-Larch (refer to Figure 5.7 for load
diagram).
Solution
1. Evaluate load combinations applicable to rafter design (see Chapter 3, Table 3.1):
The load combinations to consider and initial assessment based on the magnitude
of the given design loads follows
D + (L
r
or S) Controls rafter design in inward-bending direction
(compression side of rafter laterally supported); L
r
can be
ignored since the snow load magnitude is greater.
0.6D + W
u
May control rafter design in outward-bending direction since
the compression side now has no lateral bracing unless
specified; also important to rafter connections at the bearing
wall and ridge beam.
D + W Not controlling by inspection; gravity load D + S controls in
the inward-bending direction.
2. Determine relevant lumber property values (NDS-S, Table 4A).
F
b
= 900 psi
F
v
= 95 psi
E = 1.6 x 10
6
psi

Residential Structural Design Guide 5-73
Chapter 5 - Design of Light-Wood Framing
3. Determine relevant adjustments to property values assuming a 2x8 will be used
(Section 5.2.4):
C
D
= 1.6 (wind load combinations)
= 1.25 (snow load combination)
C
r
= 1.15 (2x8, 24 inches on center)
C
H
=2.0
C
F
= 1.2 (2x8)
C
L
= 1.0 (inward bending, D + S, laterally braced on compression edge)
= 0.32 (outward bending, 0.6 D + W, laterally unbraced on
compression edge)
*
*
Determined in accordance with NDS•3.3.3
l
e
= 1.63 l
u
+ 3d
= 1.63 (14.4 ft) + 3 (7.25 in)(1 in/12ft)
= 25.3 ft
R
B
=
2
e
b
dl
=
2
)in5.1(
)in25.7)(ft/in12)(ft5.25(
= 31 < 50 (OK)
K
bE
= 0.439 (visually graded lumber)
F
bE
=
2
B
bE
R
’EK
=
2
6
)31(
)psi10x6.1(439.0
= 730 psi
F
b
*= F
b
C
D
C
r
C
F
= 900 psi (1.6)(1.15)(1.2) = 1,987 psi
C
L
=
9.1
*)F/F(1
bbE
+
-
95.0
*F/F
9.1
*)F/F(1
bbE
2
bbE
−





 +
C
L
= 0.36 (2x8)
4. Determine rafter transverse bending load, shear, and moment for the wind uplift
load case (using Method A of Figure 5.8).
The wind load acts transverse (i.e., perpendicular) to the rafter; however, the snow
load acts in the direction of gravity and must be resolved to its transverse
component. Generally, the axial component of the gravity load along the rafter
(which varies unknowingly depending on end connectivity) is ignored and has
negligible impact considering the roof system effects that are also ignored. Also,
given the limited overhang length, this too will have a negligible impact on the
design of the rafter itself. Thus, the rafter can be reasonably analyzed as a sloped,
simply supported bending member. In analyzing wind uplift connection forces at
the outside bearing of the rafter, the designer should consider the additional uplift
created by the small overhang, though for the stated condition it would amount
only to about 20 pounds additional uplift load.
The net uniform uplift load perpendicular to the rafter is determined as follows:
w
D, transverse
=w
D
(cos θ)
= (10 psf)(1.33 ft)(cos 33.7°)
= 11 plf
w
w, transverse
= (12.7 psf)(1.33 ft) = 17 plf (uplift)
w
total, transverse
= 17 plf-11 plf = 6 plf (net uplift)
Shear, V
max
=
2
wl
=
2
)ft4.14)(plf6(
= 44 lbs
Moment, M
max
=1/8 wl
2
= 1/8 (6 plf)(14.4 ft)
2
= 156 ft-lb

Residential Structural Design Guide 5-75
Chapter 5 - Design of Light-Wood Framing
9. Check deflection criteria for gravity load condition (Section 5.2.2)
ρ
all
=
180
l
=
180
)ft/in12)(ft4.14(
= 1.0 in
ρ
max
=
EI384
w5
4
l
=
)in6.47)(psi10x6.1(384
)ft4.14)(plf36(5
46
4
(1,728 in
3
/ft
3
)
= 0.4 in
ρ
max
<< ρ
all
(OK, usually not a mandatory roof check)
Conclusion
A 2x8, No. 2 Douglas-Fir-Larch rafter spaced at 16 inches on center was shown to
have ample capacity and stiffness for the given design conditions. In fact, using a
19.2 inch on center spacing (i.e., five joists per every 8 feet) would also work with
a more efficient use of lumber. It is also possible that a 2x6 could result in a
reasonable rafter design for this application. For other concepts in value-added
framing design, consult Cost Effective Home Building: A Design and
Construction Handbook (NAHBRC, 1994). The document also contains
prescriptive span tables for roof framing design.

5-76 Residential Structural Design Guide
Chapter 5 - Design of Wood Framing
EXAMPLE 5.10 Ridge Beam Design
Given
One-story building
Ridge beam span = 13 ft
Roof slope = 6:12
Rafter horizontal span = 12 ft
Loading (Chapter 3)
Dead = 15 psf
Snow = 20 psf
Wind (110 mph, gust) = 6.3 psf (inward)
= 14.2 psf (outward, uplift)
Live = 10 psf
Find Optimum size and grade of lumber to use for a solid (single-member) ridge beam.
Solution
1. Evaluate load combinations applicable to the ridge beam design (see Chapter 3,
Table 3.1)
D + (L
r
or S) Controls ridge beam design in the inward-bending direction
(compression side of beam laterally supported by top bearing
rafters); L
r
can be ignored because the roof snow load is
greater.
0.6 D + W
u
May control ridge beam design in outward-bending direction
because the bottom (compression side) is laterally
unsupported (i.e., exposed ridge beam for cathedral ceiling);
also important to ridge beam connection to supporting
columns. However, a ridge beam supporting rafters that are
tied-down to resist wind uplift cannot experience significant
uplift without significant upward movement of the rafters at
the wall connection, and deformation of the entire sloped roof
diaphragm (depending on roof slope).
D + W Not controlling because snow load is greater in the inward
direction; also, positive pressure is possible only on the
sloped windward roof surface while the leeward roof surface
is always under negative (suction) pressure for wind
perpendicular to the ridge; the case of wind parallel to the
ridge results in uplift across both sides of the roof, which is
addressed in the 0.6 D + W
u
load combination and the roof
uplift coefficients in Chapter 3 and based on this worst case
wind direction.

Residential Structural Design Guide 5-77
Chapter 5 - Design of Light-Wood Framing
2. Determine the ridge beam bending load, shear, and moment for the wind uplift
load case
In accordance with a procedure similar to Step 4 of Example 5.9, the
following ridge beam loads are determined:
Rafter sloped span = horizontal span/cos θ
= 12 ft/cos 26.6°
= 13.4 ft
Load on ridge beam
w
dead
= (rafter sloped span)(15 psf)
[1/2 rafter span on each side]
= (13.4 ft)(15 psf)
= 201 plf
0.6 w
dead
= 121 plf
w
wind
= (13.4 ft)(14.2 psf) cos 26.6°
= 170 plf
w
total
= 170 plf - 121 plf = 49 plf (outward or upward)
Shear, V
max
=1/2 wl = 1/2 (49 plf)(13 ft)
= 319 lb
Moment, M
max
=1/8 wl
2
= 1/8 (49 plf)(13ft)
2
= 1,035 ft-lb
Note: If the rafters are adequately tied-down to resist uplift from wind, the
ridge beam cannot deform upward without deforming the entire sloped roof
diaphragm and the rafter-to-wall connections. Therefore, the above loads
should be considered with reasonable judgment. It is more important,
however, to ensure that the structure is appropriately tied together to act as a
unit.
3. Determine the ridge beam loading, shear, and moment for the D + S gravity load case
D + S = 15 psf + 20 psf = 35 psf
(pressures are additive because both are gravity loads)
load on ridge beam
W
D+S
= (13.4 ft)(35 psf) = 469 plf
Shear, V
max
= 1/2 (469 plf)(13 ft) = 3,049 lb
Moment, M
max
= 1/8 (469 plf)(13 ft)
2
= 9,908 ft-lb
4. Determine the optimum ridge beam size and grade based on the above bending loads
and lateral support conditions.
Note. The remainder of the problem is essentially identical to Example 5.9 with respect
to determining the strength of the wood member. However, a trial member size and
grade are needed to determine the lumber stresses as well as the lumber property
adjustment values. Thus, the process of optimizing a lumber species, size, and grade
selection from the multitude of choices is iterative and time consuming by hand
calculation. Several computerized wood design products on the market can perform the
task. However, the computerized design procedures may not allow for flexibility in
design approach or assumptions if the designer is attempting to use recommendations
similar to those given in this guide. For this reason, many designers prefer to create
their own analysis spreadsheets as a customized personal design aid. The remainder of
this problem is left to the reader for experimentation.

5-78 Residential Structural Design Guide
Chapter 5 - Design of Wood Framing
EXAMPLE 5.11 Hip Rafter Design
Given
One-story building
Hip rafter and roof plan as shown below
Rafters are 2x8 No. 2 Hem-Fir at 16 in on center
Loading (see Chapter 3)
Dead = 10 psf
Snow = 10 psf
Wind (90 mph, gust) = 4 psf (inward)
= 10 psf (uplift)
Live (roof) = 15 psf
Roof Plan, Hip Rafter Framing, and Tributary Load Area
Find 1. Hip rafter design approach for rafter-ceiling joist roof framing.
2. Hip rafter design approach for cathedral ceiling framing (no cross-ties; ridge
beam and hip rafter supported by end-bearing supports).
Solution
1. Evaluate load combinations applicable to the hip rafter design (see Chapter 3,
Table 3.1)
By inspection, the D + L
r
load combination governs the design. While the wind
uplift is sufficient to create a small upward bending load above the counteracting
dead load of 0.6 D, it does not exceed the gravity loading condition in effect. Since
the compression edge of the hip rafter is laterally braced in both directions of
strong-axis bending (i.e., jack rafters frame into the side and sheathing provides
additional support to the top), the 0.6 D + W
u
condition can be dismissed by
inspection. Likewise, the D + W inward-bending load is considerably smaller than
the gravity load condition. However, wind uplift should be considered in the
design of the hip rafter connections; refer to Chapter 7.

Residential Structural Design Guide 5-79
Chapter 5 - Design of Light-Wood Framing
2. Design the hip rafter for a rafter-ceiling joist roof construction (conventional
practice).
Use a double 2x10 No. 2 Hem-fir hip rafter (i.e., hip rafter is one-size larger than
rafters - rule of thumb). The double 2x10 may be lap-spliced and braced at or near
mid-span; otherwise, a single 2x10 could be used to span continuously. The lap
splice should be about 4 feet in length and both members face-nailed together with
2-10d common nails at 16 inches on center. Design is by inspection and common
practice.
Note: The standard practice above applies only when the jack rafters are tied to
the ceiling joists to resist outward thrust at the wall resulting from truss action of
the framing system. The roof sheathing is integral to the structural capacity of the
system; therefore, heavy loads on the roof before roof sheathing installation should
be avoided, as is common. For lower roof slopes, a structural analysis (see next
step) may be warranted because the folded-plate action of the roof sheathing is
somewhat diminished at lower slopes. Also, it is important to consider connection
of the hip rafter at the ridge. Usually, a standard connection using toe-nails is
used, but in high wind or snow load conditions a connector or strapping should be
considered.
3. Design the hip rafter by assuming a cathedral ceiling with bearing at the exterior
wall corner and at a column at the ridge beam intersection
a. Assume the rafter is simply supported and ignore the negligible effect of
loads on the small overhang with respect to rafter design.
b. Simplify the diamond-shaped tributary load area (see figure above) by
assuming a roughly “equivalent” uniform rectangular load area as follows:
Tributary width ≈ 4 ft
w
D+S
= (10 psf + 15 psf)(4 ft) = 100 plf
c. Determine the horizontal span of the hip rafter based on roof geometry:
Horizontal hip span =
22
)ft11()ft14( + = 17.8 ft
d. Based on horizontal span (Method B, Figure 5.8), determine shear and
bending moment:
Shear, V
max
=1/2 wl = 1/2 (100 plf)(17.8 ft) = 890 lb
Moment, M
max
=1/8 wl
2
= 1/8 (100 plf)(17.8 ft)
2
= 3,960 ft-lb
f. Determine required section modulus assuming use of 2x12 No. 2 Hem-Fir
f
b
=
S
M
=
S
lbft960,3 −
(12 in/ft) =
S
lbin520,47 −
F
b
’=F
b
C
D
C
r
C
F
C
L
(F
b
from NDS-S, Table 4A)
F
b
’ = 850 psi (1.25)(1.0)(1.0)(1.0) = 1,063 psi
f
b
≤ F
b
’
D’REQ
S
lbin520,47 −
= 1,063 psi
S
REQ’D
= 44.7 in
3
S
2x12
= 31.6 in
3

5-80 Residential Structural Design Guide
Chapter 5 - Design of Wood Framing
Therefore, 2-2x12s are required because of bending.
Try 2-2x10s,
F
b
’ = (850 psi)(1.25)(1.2)(1.1)(1.0) = 1,403 psi
D’REQ
S
lbin520,47 −
= 1,403 psi
S
REQ’D
= 34 in
3
S
2x10
= 21.39 in
3
Therefore, 2-2x10s are acceptable (2x21.39 in
3
= 42.8 in
3
).
g. Check horizontal shear:
f
v
=
A2
V3
=
)in25.9)(in5.1)(2(2
)lb890(3
= 48.1 psi
f
v
<< F
v
’
OK by inspection
h. Consider deflection:
Deflection is OK by inspection. No method exists to accurately estimate
deflection of a hip rafter that is subject to significant system stiffness
because of the folded-plate action of the roof sheathing diaphragm.
Conclusion
Use 2-2x10 (No. 2 Hem-Fir) for the hip rafters for the cathedral ceiling condition
(not considering sloped roof sheathing system effects). However, a cathedral
ceiling with a hip roof is not a common occurrence. For traditional rafter-ceiling
joist roof construction, a hip rafter one or two sizes larger than the rafters can be
used, particularly if it is braced at or near mid-span. With a ceiling joist or cross-
ties, the ridge member and hip rafter member need only serve as plates or boards
that provide a connection interface, not a beam, for the rafters.

Residential Structural Design Guide 5-81
Chapter 5 - Design of Light-Wood Framing
5.8 References
AF&PA, Commentary on the National Design Specification for Wood
Construction, American Forest and Paper Association, Washington, DC,
1999.
AF&PA, Load and Resistance Factor Design (LRFD) Manual for Engineered
Wood Construction, American Forest and Paper Association, Washington,
DC, 1996a.
AF&PA, National Design Specification for Wood Construction and Supplement,
American Forest and Paper Association, Washington, DC, 1997.
AF&PA, Wood Frame Construction Manual–SBC High Wind Edition, American
Forest and Paper Association, Washington, DC, 1996b.
AISC, Manual of Steel Construction Allowable Stress Design, Ninth Edition,
American Institute of Steel Construction, Chicago, IL, 1989.
AISI, Residential Steel Beam and Column Load/Span Tables, Publication RG-
936, American Iron and Steel Institute, Washington, DC, June 1993.
APA, Design and Construction Guide: Residential and Commercial, APA–The
Engineered Wood Association, Tacoma, WA, 1998a.
APA, Load-Span Tables for APA Structural-Use Panels, APA–The Engineered
Wood Association, Tacoma, WA, January 1999.
APA, Plywood Floors for Residential Garages, Report 139, APA–The
Engineered Wood Association, Tacoma, WA, 1980.
APA, Product Design Specification (PDS), American Plywood Association APA–
Engineered Wood Association, Tacoma, WA, 1998b.
ASAE, Design Requirements and Bending Properties for Mechanically
Laminated Columns (EP 559), American Society of Agricultural
Engineers, St. Joseph, MI, 1997.
ASTM, Standard Practice for Evaluating Allowable Properties for Grades of
Structural Lumber (D2915-94), American Society of Testing and
Materials, West Conshohocken, PA, 1997.
ASTM, Standard Practice for Establishing Allowable Properties for Visually-
Graded Dimension Lumber from In-Grade Tests of Full-Size Specimens
(D1990-97), American Society of Testing and Materials, West
Conshohocken, PA, 1998a.

5-82 Residential Structural Design Guide
Chapter 5 - Design of Wood Framing
ASTM, Standard Practice for Establishing Structural Grades and Related
Allowable Properties for Visually Graded Lumber (D245-98), American
Society of Testing and Materials, West Conshohocken, PA, 1998c.
ASTM, Standard Specification for Computing the Reference Resistance of Wood-
Based Materials and Structural Connections for Load and Resistance
Factor Design (D5457-93), American Society of Testing and Materials,
West Conshohocken, PA, 1998b.
Bonnicksen, L.W. and Suddarth, S.K., Structural Reliability Analysis of Wood
Load Sharing Systems, Paper No. 82, American Society of Testing and
Materials, Fifth National Meeting, Philadelphia, Pennsylvania, 1965.
Douglas, B.K. and Line, P., “System Effects in Wood Assemblies,” Proceedings
of the International Wood Engineering Conference, New Orleans, LA,
1996.
FHA, Minimum Property Standards for One and Two Living Units, FHA No. 300,
Federal Housing Administration, Washington, DC, November 1, 1958.
Forest Products Laboratory, Wood Engineering Handbook, Second Edition,
Prentice Hall, Englewood Cliffs, NJ, 1990.
FPRS, Wall & Floor Systems: Design and Performance of Light Frame
Structures, Proceedings 7317, Forest Products Research Society, Madison,
WI, 1983.
Galambos, T.V. and Ellingwood, B., “Serviceability Limit States: Deflection,”
Journal of Light Engineering, Vol. 112, No. 1, American Society of Civil
Engineers, Reston, VA, January 1986.
Gillespie, R.H., Countryman, D., and Blomquist, R.F., Adhesives in Building
Construction (Chapter 3: Structural Design Considerations), Agriculture
Handbook No. 516, U.S. Department of Agriculture, Washington, DC,
1978.
HUD, Prevention and Control of Decay in Homes, prepared by the Southern
Forest Experiment Station for the U.S. Department of Housing and Urban
Development, Washington, DC, 1978.
HUD, System Performance of Wood Header Assemblies, prepared by the NAHB
Research Center, Inc., for the U.S. Department of Housing and Urban
Development, Washington, DC, 1999.
Hurst, H.T., The Wood-Frame House as a Structural Unit, National Forest
Products Association, Washington, DC, 1965.

Residential Structural Design Guide 5-83
Chapter 5 - Design of Light-Wood Framing
ICC, International One- and Two-Family Dwelling Code (formerly the CABO
One- and Two-Family Dwelling Code), International Code Council, Inc.,
Falls Church, VA, 1998.
Mtenga, P.V., “Impact of Using a System Factor in the Design of Light-Frame
Roof Assemblies,” Forest Products Journal, Vol. 48 No. 5, 27-34, 1998.
NAHB, Bridging in Residential Floor Construction, LR-6, National Association
of Home Builders, Washington, DC, 1961.
NAHB, Cost Effective Home Building: A Design and Construction Handbook,
prepared by the NAHB Research Center, Inc., for the National Association
of Home Builders, Home Builder Press, Washington, DC, 1994.
NAHBRC, NAHB Beam Series, prepared by the NAHB Research Center, Inc., for
the National Association of Home Builders, NAHB, Washington, DC,
1981.
NAHBRC, Prescriptive Method for Residential Cold-Formed Steel Framing,
Third Edition, NAHB Research Center, Inc., Upper Marlboro, MD, 1998.
NAHBRC, Truss-Framed Construction, NAHB Research Center, Inc., Upper
Marlboro, MD, 1982.
NAHBRF, Stress and Deflection Reduction in 2x4 Studs Spaced 24 Inches on
Center Due to the Addition of Interior and Exterior Surfacings, NAHB
Research Foundation, Rockville, MD, July 1974.
NES, Pneumatic or Mechanically Driven Staples, Nails, P-Nails, and Allied
Fasteners for Use in All Types of Building Construction, Report No. NER-
272, National Evaluation Service, Inc., Falls Church, VA, 1997.
NIST, American Softwood Lumber Voluntary Product Standard (USDOC PS-20)
National Institute of Standards and Technology, Gaithersburg, MD, 1994.
NIST, Voluntary Performance Standard for Wood-Based Structural-Use Panels
(USDOC PS-2), National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST),
Gaithersburg, MD, 1992.
NIST, Voluntary Product Standard for Construction and Industrial Plywood
(USDOC PS-1), National Institute of Standards and Technology,
Gaithersburg, MD, 1995.
Pellicane, P.J. and Anthony, R.W., “Effect of Adhesives on the Deflection
Behavior of Light-Frame Wood Floors,” Proceedings of the International
Wood Engineering Conference, Vol. 3, Omnipress, Madison, WI, 1996.

5-84 Residential Structural Design Guide
Chapter 5 - Design of Wood Framing
Polensek, A., Rational Design Procedure for Wood Stud Walls under Bending
and Compression Loads, Forest Research Laboratory, Oregon State
University, September 1975.
Rosowsky, D. and Ellingwood, B., “Reliability of Wood Systems Subjected to
Stochastic Live Loads”, Wood and Fiber Science, Society of Wood
Science and Technology, Madison, WI, 1992.
SBCCI, Standard Building Code, Southern Building Code Congress International,
Birmingham, AL, 1999.
TPI, Commentary and Appendices to the National Design Standard for Metal
Plate Connected Wood Truss Construction (TPI-1), Truss Plate Institute,
Madison, WI, 1995b.
TPI, National Design Standard for Metal Plate Connected Wood Truss
Construction (TPI-1), Truss Plate Institute, Madison, WI, 1995a.
Triche, M.H. and Suddarth, S.K., Purdue Plane Structures Analyzer 4, Purdue
Research Foundation, West Lafayette, IN, 1993.
Tucker, B.J. and Fridley, K.J., “Concentrated Load Design Procedures for Wood-
Joist Floor Systems,” Journal of Structural Engineering, Vol. 125, No. 7,
July 1999.
Woeste, L.F. and Dolan, J.D., “Beyond Code: Preventing Floor Vibration,”
Journal of Light Construction, November 1998, 69-71.
Wolfe, R.W., “Performance of Light-Frame Redundant Assemblies,” Proceedings
of 1990 International Timber Engineering Conference, Vol. 1, 124-131,
1990.
Wolfe, R.W., “Structural Performance of Light-Frame Truss-Roof Assemblies,”
Proceedings of the International Wood Engineering Conference, Vol. 3,
Omnipress, Madison, WI, 1996.
Wolfe, R.W. and LaBissoniere, T., Structural Performance of Light-Frame Roof
Assemblies, II. Conventional Truss Assemblies, FPL-RP-499, USDA
Forest Products Laboratory, Madison, WI, 1991.
WTCA, Metal Plate Connected Wood Truss Handbook, prepared by E. Callahan
for the Wood Truss Council of America, Madison, WI, 1997.
WTCA, Standard Practice for Metal Plate Connected Wood Truss Design
Responsibilities (WTCA 1-95), Wood Truss Council of America,
Madison, WI, 1995.
WTCA, Commentary for Permanent Bracing of Metal Plate Connected Wood
Trusses, Wood Truss Council of America, Madison, WI, 1999.

Residential Structural Design Guide 6-1
CHAPTER 6
Lateral Resistance to
Wind and Earthquake
6.1 General
The objectives in designing a building’s lateral resistance to wind and
earthquake forces are
• to provide a system of shear walls, diaphragms, and
interconnections to transfer lateral loads and overturning forces to
the foundation;
• to prevent building collapse in extreme wind and seismic events;
and
• to provide adequate stiffness to the structure for service loads
experienced in moderate wind and seismic events.
In light-frame construction, the lateral force-resisting system (LFRS)
comprises shear walls, diaphragms, and their interconnections to form a whole-
building system that may behave differently than the sum of its individual parts.
In fact, shear walls and diaphragms are themselves subassemblies of many parts
and connections. Thus, designing an efficient LFRS system is perhaps the greatest
challenge in the structural design of light-frame buildings. In part, the challenge
results from the lack of any single design methodology or theory that provides
reasonable predictions of complex, large-scale system behavior in conventionally
built or engineered light-frame buildings.
Designer judgment is a crucial factor that comes into play when the
designer selects how the building is to be analyzed and to what extent the analysis
should be assumed to be a correct representation of the true design problem.
Designer judgment is essential in the early stages of design because the analytic
methods and assumptions used to evaluate the lateral resistance of light-frame
buildings are not in themselves correct representations of the problem. They are

6-2 Residential Structural Design Guide
Chapter 6 –Lateral Resistance to Wind and Earthquakes
analogies that are sometimes reasonable but at other times depart significantly
from reason and actual system testing or field experience.
This chapter focuses on methods for evaluating the lateral resistance of
individual subassemblies of the LFRS (i.e., shear walls and diaphragms) and the
response of the whole building to lateral loads (i.e., load distribution). Traditional
design approaches as well as innovative methods, such as the perforated shear
wall design method, are integrated into the designer's “tool box.” While the code-
approved methods have generally “worked,” there is considerable opportunity for
improvement and optimization. Therefore, the information and design examples
presented in this chapter provide a useful guide and resource that supplement
existing building code provisions. More important, the chapter is aimed at
fostering a better understanding of the role of analysis versus judgment and
promoting more efficient design in the form of alternative methods.
The lateral design of light-frame buildings is not a simple endeavor that
provides “exact” solutions. By the very nature of the LFRS, the real behavior of
light-frame buildings is highly dependent on the performance of building systems,
including the interactions of structural and nonstructural components. For
example, the nonstructural components in conventional housing (i.e., sidings,
interior finishes, interior partition walls, and even windows and trim) can account
for more than 50 percent of a building’s lateral resistance. Yet, the contribution of
these components is not considered as part of the “designed” LFRS for lack of
appropriate design tools and building code provisions that may prohibit such
considerations. In addition, the need for simplified design methods inevitably
leads to a trade-off–analytical simplicity for design efficiency.
In seismic design, factors that translate into better performance may not
always be obvious. The designer should become accustomed to thinking in terms
of the relative stiffness of components that make up the whole building.
Important, too, is an understanding of the inelastic (nonlinear), nonrigid body
behavior of wood-framed systems that affect the optimization of strength,
stiffness, dampening, and ductility. In this context, the concept that more strength
is better is insupportable without considering the impact on other important
factors. Many factors relate to a structural system’s deformation capability and
ability to absorb and safely dissipate energy from abusive cyclic motion in a
seismic event. The intricate interrelationship of these several factors is difficult to
predict with available seismic design approaches.
For example, the basis for the seismic response modifier R is a subjective
representation of the behavior of a given structure or structural system in a
seismic event (refer to Chapter 3). In a sense, it bears evidence of the inclusion of
“fudge factors” in engineering science for reason of necessity (not of preference)
in attempting to mimic reality. It is not necessarily surprising, then, that the
amount of wall bracing in conventional homes shows no apparent correlation with
the damage levels experienced in seismic events (HUD, 1999). Similarly, the
near-field damage to conventional homes in the Northridge Earthquake did not
correlate with the magnitude of response spectral ground accelerations in the short
period range (HUD, 1999). The short-period spectral response acceleration, it will
be recalled, is the primary ground motion parameter used in the design of most
low-rise and light-frame buildings (refer to Chapter 3).
The apparent lack of correlation between design theory and actual
outcome points to the tremendous uncertainty in existing seismic design methods

Residential Structural Design Guide 6-3
Chapter 6 –Lateral Resistance to Wind and Earthquakes
for light-frame structures. In essence, a designer’s compliance with accepted
seismic design provisions may not necessarily be a good indication of actual
performance in a major seismic event. This statement may be somewhat
unsettling but is worthy of mention. For wind design, the problem is not as severe
in that the lateral load can be more easily treated as a static load, with system
response primarily a matter of determining lateral capacity without complicating
inertial effects, at least for small light-frame buildings.
In conclusion, the designer should have a reasonable knowledge of the
underpinnings of current LFRS design approaches (including their uncertainties
and limitations). However, many designers do not have the opportunity to become
familiar with the experience gained from testing whole buildings or assemblies.
Design provisions are generally based on an “element-based” approach to
engineering and usually provide little guidance on the performance of the various
elements as assembled in a real building. Therefore, the next section presents a
brief overview of several whole-house lateral load tests.
6.2 Overview of Whole-Building Tests
A growing number of full-scale tests of houses have been conducted to
gain insight into actual system strength and structural behavior. Several
researchers have recently summarized the body of research; the highlights follow
(Thurston, 1994; NIST, 1998).
One whole-house test program investigated the lateral stiffness and natural
frequency of a production-built home (Yokel, Hsi, and Somes, 1973). The study
applied a design load simulating a uniform wind pressure of 25 psf to a
conventionally built home: a two-story, split-foyer dwelling with a fairly typical
floor plan. The maximum deflection of the building was only 0.04 inches and the
residual deflection about 0.003 inches. The natural frequency and dampening of
the building were 9 hz (0.11 s natural period) and 6 percent, respectively. The
testing was nondestructive such that the investigation yielded no information on
“postyielding” behavior; however, the performance was good for the nominal
lateral design loads under consideration.
Another whole-house test applied transverse loads without uplift to a
wood-framed house. Failure did not occur until the lateral load reached the
“equivalent” of a 220 mph wind event without inclusion of uplift loads (Tuomi
and McCutcheon, 1974). The house was fully sheathed with 3/8-inch plywood
panels, and the number of openings was somewhat fewer than would be expected
for a typical home (at least on the street-facing side). The failure took the form of
slippage at the floor connection to the foundation sill plate (i.e., there was only
one 16d toenail at the end of each joist, and the band joist was not connected to
the sill). The connection was somewhat less than what is now required in the
United States for conventional residential construction (ICC, 1998). The racking
stiffness of the walls nearly doubled from that experienced before the addition of
the roof framing. In addition, the simple 2x4 wood trusses were able to carry a
gravity load of 135 psf–more than three times the design load of 40 psf. However,
it is important to note that combined uplift and lateral load, as would be expected
in high-wind conditions, was not tested. Further, the test house was relatively
small and “boxy” in comparison to modern homes.

6-4 Residential Structural Design Guide
Chapter 6 –Lateral Resistance to Wind and Earthquakes
Many whole-house tests have been conducted in Australia. In one series of
whole-house tests, destructive testing has shown that conventional residential
construction (only slightly different from that in the United States) was able to
withstand 2.4 times its intended design wind load (corresponding to a 115 mph
wind speed) without failure of the structure (Reardon and Henderson, 1996). The
test house had typical openings for a garage, doors, and windows, and no special
wind-resistant detailing. The tests applied a simultaneous roof uplift load of 1.2
times the total lateral load. The drift in the two-story section was 3 mm at the
maximum applied load while the drift in the open one-story section (i.e., no
interior walls) was 3 mm at the design load and 20 mm at the maximum applied
load.
Again in Australia, a house with fiber cement exterior cladding and
plasterboard interior finishes was tested to 4.75 times its “design” lateral load
capacity (Boughton and Reardon, 1984). The walls were restrained with tie rods
to resist wind uplift loads as required in Australia’s typhoon-prone regions. The
roof and ceiling diaphragm was found to be stiff; in fact, the diaphragm rigidly
distributed the lateral loads to the walls. The tests suggested that the house had
sufficient capacity to resist a design wind speed of 65 m/s (145 mph).
Yet another Australian test of a whole house found that the addition of
interior ceiling finishes reduced the deflection (i.e., drift) of one wall line by 75
percent (Reardon, 1988; Reardon, 1989). When cornice trim was added to cover
or dress the wall-ceiling joint, the deflection of the same wall was reduced by
another 60 percent (roughly 16 percent of the original deflection). The tests were
conducted at relatively low load levels to determine the impact of various
nonstructural components on load distribution and stiffness.
Recently, several whole-building and assembly tests in the United States
have been conducted to develop and validate sophisticated finite-element
computer models (Kasal, Leichti, and Itani, 1994). Despite some advances in
developing computer models as research tools, the formulation of a simplified
methodology for application by designers lags behind. Moreover, the computer
models tend to be time-intensive to operate and require detailed input for material
and connection parameters that would not normally be available to typical
designers. Given the complexity of system behavior, the models are often not
generally applicable and require “recalibration” whenever new systems or
materials are specified.
In England, researchers have taken a somewhat different approach by
moving directly from empirical system data to a simplified design methodology,
at least for shear walls (Griffiths and Wickens, 1996). This approach applies
various “system factors” to basic shear wall design values to obtain a value for a
specific application. System factors account for material effects in various wall
assemblies, wall configuration effects (i.e., number of openings in the wall), and
interaction effects with the whole building. One factor even accounts for the fact
that shear loads on wood-framed shear walls in a full brick-veneered building are
reduced by as much as 45 percent for wind loads, assuming, of course, that the
brick veneer is properly installed and detailed to resist wind pressures.
More recently, whole-building tests have been conducted in Japan (and to
a lesser degree in the United States) by using large-scale shake tables to study the
inertial response of whole, light-frame buildings (Yasumura, 1999). The tests
have demonstrated whole-building stiffness of about twice that experienced by

Residential Structural Design Guide 6-5
Chapter 6 –Lateral Resistance to Wind and Earthquakes
walls tested independently. The results are reasonably consistent with those
reported above. Apparently, many whole-building tests have been conducted in
Japan, but the associated reports are available only in Japanese (Thurston, 1994).
The growing body of whole-building test data will likely improve the
understanding of the actual performance of light-frame structures in seismic
events to the extent that the test programs are able to replicate actual conditions.
Actual performance must also be inferred from anecdotal experience or,
preferably, from experimentally designed studies of buildings experiencing major
seismic or wind events (refer to Chapter 1).
6.3 LFRS Design Steps and Terminology
The lateral force resisting system (LFRS) of a home is the “whole house”
including practically all structural and non-structural components. To enable a
rational and tenable design analysis, however, the complex structural system of a
light-frame house is usually subjected to many simplifying assumptions; refer to
Chapter 2. The steps required for thoroughly designing a building’s LFRS are
outlined below in typical order of consideration:
1. Determine a building’s architectural design, including layout of walls
and floors (usually pre-determined).
2. Calculate the lateral loads on the structure resulting from wind and/or
seismic conditions (refer to Chapter 3).
3. Distribute shear loads to the LFRS (wall, floor, and roof systems)
based on one of the design approaches described later in this chapter
(refer to Section 6.4.1).
4. Determine shear wall and diaphragm assembly requirements for the
various LFRS components (sheathing thickness, fastening schedule,
etc.) to resist the stresses resulting from the applied lateral forces (refer
to Section 6.5).
5. Design the hold-down restraints required to resist overturning forces
generated by lateral loads applied to the vertical components of the
LFRS (i.e., shear walls).
6. Determine interconnection requirements to transfer shear between the
LFRS components (i.e., roof, walls, floors, and foundation).
7. Evaluate chords and collectors (or drag struts) for adequate capacity
and for situations requiring special detailing such as splices.
It should be noted that, depending on the method of distributing shear
loads (refer to Section 6.4.1), Step 3 may be considered a preliminary design step.
If, in fact, loads are distributed according to stiffness in Step 3, then the LFRS
must already be defined; therefore, the above sequence can become iterative
between Steps 3 and 4. A designer need not feel compelled to go to such a level
of complexity (i.e., using a stiffness-based force distribution) in designing a
simple home, but the decision becomes less intuitive with increasing plan
complexity.
The above list of design steps introduced several terms that are defined
below.

6-6 Residential Structural Design Guide
Chapter 6 –Lateral Resistance to Wind and Earthquakes
Horizontal diaphragms are assemblies such as the roof and floors that act
as “deep beams” by collecting and transferring lateral forces to the shear walls,
which are the vertical components of the LFRS. The diaphragm is analogous to a
horizontal, simply supported beam laid flatwise; a shear wall is analogous to a
vertical, fixed-end, cantilevered beam. Chapter 2 discussed the function of the
LFRS and the lateral load path. The reader is referred to that chapter for a
conceptual overview of the LFRS and to Chapter 3 for methodologies to calculate
lateral loads resulting from wind and earthquake forces.
Chords are the members (or a system of members) that form a “flange” to
resist the tension and compression forces generated by the “beam” action of a
diaphragm or shear wall. As shown in Figure 6.1, the chord members in shear
walls and diaphragms are different members, but they serve the same purpose in
the beam analogy. A collector or drag strut, which is usually a system of
members in light-frame buildings, “collects” and transfers loads by tension or
compression to the shear resisting segments of a wall line (see Figure 6.2a).
In typical light-frame homes, special design of chord members for floor
diaphragms may involve some modest detailing of splices at the diaphragm
boundary (i.e., joints in the band joists). If adequate connection is made between
the band joist and the wall top plate, then the diaphragm sheathing, band joists,
and wall framing function as a “composite” chord in resisting the chord forces.
Thus, the diaphragm chord is usually integral with the collectors or drag struts in
shear walls. Given that the collectors on shear walls often perform a dual role as a
chord on a floor or roof diaphragm boundary, the designer needs only to verify
that the two systems are reasonably interconnected along their boundary, thus
ensuring composite action as well as direct shear transfer (i.e., slip resistance)
from the diaphragm to the wall. As shown in Figure 6.2b, the failure plane of a
typical “composite” collector or diaphragm chord can involve many members and
their interconnections.
For shear walls in typical light-frame buildings, tension and compression
forces on shear wall chords are usually considered. In particular, the connection of
hold-downs to shear wall chords should be carefully evaluated with respect to the
transfer of tension forces to the structure below. Tension forces result from the
overturning action (i.e., overturning moment) caused by the lateral shear load on
the shear wall. In some cases, the chord may be required to be a thicker member
to allow for an adequate hold-down connection or to withstand the tension and
compression forces presumed by the beam analogy. Fortunately, most chords in
light-frame shear walls are located at the ends of walls or adjacent to openings
where multiple studs are already required for reasons of constructability and
gravity load resistance (see cross-section “B” in Figure 6.1).

Residential Structural Design Guide 6-7
Chapter 6 –Lateral Resistance to Wind and Earthquakes
FIGURE 6.1
Chords in Shear Walls and Horizontal Diaphragms Using
the “Deep Beam” Analogy

6-8 Residential Structural Design Guide
Chapter 6 –Lateral Resistance to Wind and Earthquakes
FIGURE 6.2
Shear Wall Collector and the Composite Failure Plane
(Failure plane also applies to diaphragm chords)

Residential Structural Design Guide 6-9
Chapter 6 –Lateral Resistance to Wind and Earthquakes
Hold-down restraints are devices used to restrain the whole building and
individual shear wall segments from the overturning that results from the
leveraging (i.e., overturning moment) created by lateral forces. The current
engineering approach calls for restraints that are typically metal connectors (i.e.,
straps or brackets) that attach to and anchor the chords (i.e., end studs) of shear
wall segments (see Figure 6.3a). In many typical residential applications,
however, overturning forces may be resisted by the dead load and the contribution
of many component connections (see Figure 6.3b). Unfortunately (but in reality),
this consideration may require a more intensive analytic effort and greater degree
of designer presumption because overturning forces may disperse through many
“load paths” in a nonlinear fashion. Consequently, the analysis of overturning
becomes much more complicated; the designer cannot simply assume a single
load path through a single hold-down connector. Indeed, analytic knowledge of
overturning has not matured sufficiently to offer an exact performance-based
solution, even though experience suggests that the resistance provided by
conventional framing has proven adequate to prevent collapse in all but the most
extreme conditions or mis-applications (see Chapter 1 and Section 6.2).
Framing and fastenings at wall corner regions are a major factor in
explaining the actual behavior of conventionally built homes, yet there is no
currently recognized way to account for this effect from a performance-based
design perspective. Several studies have investigated corner framing effects in
restraining shear walls without the use of hold-down brackets. In one such study,
cyclic and monotonic tests of typical 12-foot-long wood-framed shear walls with
2- and 4-foot corner returns have demonstrated that overturning forces can be
resisted by reasonably detailed corners (i.e., sheathing fastened to a common
corner stud), with the reduction in shear capacity only about 10 percent from that
realized in tests of walls with hold-downs instead of corner returns (Dolan and
Heine, 1997c). The corner framing approach can also improve ductility (Dolan
and Heine, 1997c) and is confirmed by testing in other countries (Thurston,
1994). In fact, shear wall test methods in New Zealand use a simple three-nail
connection to provide hold-down restraint (roughly equivalent to three 16d
common nails in a single shear wood-to-wood connection with approximately a
1,200- to 1,500-pound ultimate capacity). The three-nail connection resulted from
an evaluation of the restraining effect of corners and the selection of a minimum
value from typical construction. The findings of the tests reported above do not
consider the beneficial contribution of the dead load in helping to restrain a corner
from uplift as a result of overturning action.
The discussion to this point has given some focus to conventional
residential construction practices for wall bracing that have worked effectively in
typical design conditions. This observation is a point of contention, however,
because conventional construction lacks the succinct loads paths that may be
assumed when following an accepted engineering method. Therefore,
conventional residential construction does not lend itself readily to current
engineering conventions of analyzing a lateral force resisting system in light-
frame construction. As a result, it is difficult to define appropriate limitations to
the use of conventional construction practices based purely on existing
conventions of engineering analysis.

6-10 Residential Structural Design Guide
Chapter 6 –Lateral Resistance to Wind and Earthquakes
FIGURE 6.3
Two Types of Hold-Down Restraint and
Basic Analytic Concepts

Residential Structural Design Guide 6-11
Chapter 6 –Lateral Resistance to Wind and Earthquakes
6.4 The Current LFRS Design Practice
This section provides a brief overview of the current design practices for
analyzing the LFRS of light-frame buildings. It highlights the advantages and
disadvantages of the various approaches but, in the absence of a coherent body of
evidence, makes no attempt to identify which approach, if any, may be considered
superior. Where experience from whole-building tests and actual building
performance in real events permits, the discussion provides a critique of current
design practices that, for lack of better methods, relies somewhat on an intuitive
sense for the difference between the structure as it is analyzed and the structure as
it may actually perform. The intent is not to downplay the importance of
engineering analysis; rather, the designer should understand the implications of
the current analytic methods and their inherent assumptions and then put them
into practice in a suitable manner.
6.4.1 Lateral Force Distribution Methods
The design of the LFRS of light-frame buildings generally follows one of
three methods described below. Each differs in its approach to distributing whole-
building lateral forces through the horizontal diaphragms to the shear walls. Each
varies in the level of calculation, precision, and dependence on designer
judgment. While different solutions can be obtained for the same design by using
the different methods, one approach is not necessarily preferred to another. All
may be used for the distribution of seismic and wind loads to the shear walls in a
building. However, some of the most recent building codes may place limitations
or preferences on certain methods.
Tributary Area Approach (Flexible Diaphragm)
The tributary area approach is perhaps the most popular method used to
distribute lateral building loads. Tributary areas based on building geometry are
assigned to various components of the LFRS to determine the wind or seismic
loads on building components (i.e., shear walls and diaphragms). The method
assumes that a diaphragm is relatively flexible in comparison to the shear walls
(i.e., a “flexible diaphragm”) such that it distributes forces according to tributary
areas rather than according to the stiffness of the supporting shear walls. This
hypothetical condition is analogous to conventional beam theory, which assumes
rigid supports as illustrated in Figure 6.4 for a continuous horizontal diaphragm
(i.e., floor) with three supports (i.e., shear walls).

6-12 Residential Structural Design Guide
Chapter 6 –Lateral Resistance to Wind and Earthquakes
FIGURE 6.4
Lateral Force Distribution by a “Flexible” Diaphragm
(tributary area approach)
In seismic design, tributary areas are associated with uniform area weights
(i.e., dead loads) assigned to the building systems (i.e., roof, walls, and floors)
that generate the inertial seismic load when the building is subject to lateral
ground motion (refer to Chapter 3 on earthquake loads). In wind design, the
tributary areas are associated with the lateral component of the wind load acting
on the exterior surfaces of the building (refer to Chapter 3 on wind loads).

Residential Structural Design Guide 6-13
Chapter 6 –Lateral Resistance to Wind and Earthquakes
The flexibility of a diaphragm depends on its construction as well as on its
aspect ratio (length:width). Long, narrow diaphragms, for example, are more
flexible in bending along the their long dimension than short, wide diaphragms. In
other words, rectangular diaphragms are relatively stiff in one loading direction
and relatively flexible in the other. Similarly, long shear walls with few openings
are stiffer than walls comprised of only narrow shear wall segments. While
analytic methods are available to calculate the stiffness of shear wall segments
and diaphragms (refer to Section 6.5), the actual stiffness of these systems is
extremely difficult to predict accurately (refer to Section 6.2). It should be noted
that if the diaphragm is considered infinitely rigid relative to the shear walls and
the shear walls have roughly equivalent stiffness, the three shear wall reactions
will be roughly equivalent (i.e., R
1
= R
2
= R
3
= 1/3[w][l]). If this assumption were
more accurate, the interior shear wall would be overdesigned and the exterior
shear walls underdesigned with use of the tributary area method. In many cases,
the correct answer is probably somewhere between the apparent over- and under-
design conditions.
The tributary area approach is reasonable when the layout of the shear
walls is generally symmetrical with respect to even spacing and similar strength
and stiffness characteristics. It is particularly appropriate in concept for simple
buildings with diaphragms supported by two exterior shear wall lines (with
similar strength and stiffness characteristics) along both major building axes.
More generally, the major advantages of the tributary area LFRS design method
are its simplicity and applicability to simple building configurations. In more
complex applications, the designer should consider possible imbalances in shear
wall stiffness and strength that may cause or rely on torsional response to
maintain stability under lateral load (see relative stiffness design approach).
Total Shear Approach (“Eyeball” Method)
Considered the second most popular and simplest of the three LFRS
design methods, the total shear approach uses the total story shear to determine a
total amount of shear wall length required on a given story level for each
orthogonal direction of loading. The amount of shear wall is then “evenly”
distributed in the story according to designer judgment. While the total shear
approach requires the least amount of computational effort among the three
methods, it demands good “eyeball” judgment as to the distribution of the shear
wall elements in order to address or avoid potential loading or stiffness
imbalances. In seismic design, loading imbalances may be created when a
building’s mass distribution is not uniform. In wind design, loading imbalances
result when the surface area of the building is not uniform (i.e., taller walls or
steeper roof sections experience greater lateral wind load). In both cases,
imbalances are created when the center of resistance is offset from either the
center of mass (seismic design) or the resultant force center of the exterior surface
pressures (wind design). Thus, the reliability of the total shear approach is highly
dependent on the designer’s judgment and intuition regarding load distribution
and structural response. If used indiscriminately without consideration of the
above factors, the total shear approach to LFRS design can result in poor
performance in severe seismic or wind events. However, for small structures such

6-14 Residential Structural Design Guide
Chapter 6 –Lateral Resistance to Wind and Earthquakes
as homes, the method has produced reasonable designs, especially in view of the
overall uncertainty in seismic and wind load analysis.
Relative Stiffness Design Approach (Rigid Diaphragm)
The relative stiffness approach was first contemplated for house design in
the 1940s and was accompanied by an extensive testing program to create a
database of racking stiffnesses for a multitude of interior and exterior wall
constructions used in residential construction at that time (NBS, 1948). If the
horizontal diaphragm is considered stiff relative to the shear walls, then the lateral
forces on the building are distributed to the shear wall lines according to their
relative stiffness. A stiff diaphragm may then rotate some degree to distribute
loads to all walls in the building, not just to walls parallel to an assumed loading
direction. Thus, the relative stiffness approach considers torsional load
distribution as well as distribution of the direct shear loads. When torsional force
distribution needs to be considered, whether to demonstrate lateral stability of an
“unevenly” braced building or to satisfy a building code requirement, the relative
stiffness design approach is the only available option.
Although the approach is conceptually correct and comparatively more
rigorous than the other two methods, its limitations with respect to reasonably
determining the real stiffness of shear wall lines (composed of several restrained
and unrestrained segments and nonstructural components) and diaphragms (also
affected by nonstructural components and the building plan configuration) render
its analogy to actual structural behavior uncertain. Ultimately, it is only as good as
the assumptions regarding the stiffness or shear walls and diaphragms relative to
the actual stiffness of a complete building system. As evidenced in the previously
mentioned whole-building tests and in other authoritative design texts on the
subject (Ambrose and Vergun, 1987), difficulties in accurately predicting the
stiffness of shear walls and diaphragms in actual buildings are significant.
Moreover, unlike the other methods, the relative stiffness design approach is
iterative in that the distribution of loads to the shear walls requires a preliminary
design so that relative stiffness may be estimated. One or more adjustments and
recalculations may be needed before reaching a satisfactory final design.
However, it is instructional to consider analytically the effects of stiffness
in the distribution of lateral forces in an LFRS, even if based on somewhat
idealized assumptions regarding relative stiffness (i.e., diaphragm is rigid over the
entire expanse of shear walls). The approach is a reasonable tool when the
torsional load distribution should be considered in evaluating or demonstrating the
stability of a building, particularly a building that is likely to undergo significant
torsional response in a seismic event. Indeed, torsional imbalances exist in just
about any building and may be responsible for the relatively good performance of
some light-frame homes when one side (i.e., the street-facing side of the building)
is weaker (i.e., less stiff and less strong) than the other three sides of the building.
This condition is common owing to the aesthetic desire and functional need for
more openings on the front side of a building. However, a torsional response in
the case of underdesign (i.e., “weak” or “soft” story) can wreak havoc on a
building and constitute a serious threat to life.

Residential Structural Design Guide 6-15
Chapter 6 –Lateral Resistance to Wind and Earthquakes
6.4.2 Shear Wall Design Approaches
Once the whole-building lateral loads have been distributed and assigned
to the floor and roof diaphragms and various designated shear walls, each of these
subassemblies must be designed to resist the assigned shear loads. As discussed,
the whole-building shear loads are distributed to various shear walls ultimately in
accordance with the principle of relative stiffness (whether handled by judgment,
analytic assumptions per a selected design method, or both). Similarly, the
distribution of the assigned shear load to the various shear wall segments within a
given shear wall line is based on the same principle, but at a different scale. The
scale is the subassembly (or shear wall) as opposed to the whole building.
The methods for designing and distributing the forces within a shear wall
line differ as described below. As with the three different approaches described
for the distribution of lateral building loads, the shear wall design methods place
different levels of emphasis on analytic rigor and judgment. Ultimately, the
configuration of the building (i.e., are the walls inherently broken into individual
segments by large openings or many offsets in plan dimensions?) and the required
demand (i.e., shear load) should drive the choice of a shear wall design approach
and the resulting construction detailing. Thus, the choice of which design method
to use is a matter of designer judgment and required performance. In turn, the
design method itself imposes detailing requirements on the final construction in
compliance with the analysis assumptions. Accordingly, the above decisions
affect the efficiency of the design effort and the complexity of the resulting
construction details.
Segmented Shear Wall (SSW) Design Approach
The segmented shear wall design approach, well recognized as a standard
design practice, is the most widely used method of shear wall design. It considers
the shear resisting segments of a given shear wall line as separate “elements,”
with each segment restrained against overturning by the use of hold-down
connectors at its ends. Each segment is a fully sheathed portion of the wall
without any openings for windows or doors. The design shear capacity of each
segment is determined by multiplying the length of the segment (sometimes
called segment width) by tabulated unit shear design values that are available in
the building codes and newer design standards. In its simplest form, the approach
analyzes each shear wall segment for static equilibrium in a manner analogous to
a cantilevered beam with a fixed end (refer to Figures 6.1 and 6.3a). In a wall with
multiple designated shear wall segments, the typical approach to determining an
adequate total length of all shear wall segments is to divide the design shear load
demand on the wall by the unit shear design value of the wall construction. The
effect of stiffness on the actual shear force distribution to the various segments is
simply handled by complying with code-required maximum shear wall segment
aspect ratios (i.e., segment height divided by segment width). Although an inexact
and circuitous method of handling the problem of shear force distribution in a
shear wall line, the SSW approach has been in successful practice for many years,
partly due to the use of conservative unit shear design values.

6-16 Residential Structural Design Guide
Chapter 6 –Lateral Resistance to Wind and Earthquakes
When stiffness is considered, the stiffness of a shear wall segment is
assumed to be linearly related to its length (or its total design shear strength).
However, the linear relationship is not realistic outside certain limits. For
example, stiffness begins to decrease with notable nonlinearly once a shear wall
segment decreases below a 4-foot length on an 8-foot-high wall (i.e., aspect ratio
of 2 or greater). This does not mean that wall segments shorter than 4 feet in
width cannot be used but rather that the effect of relative stiffness in distributing
the load needs to be considered. The SSW approach is also less favorable when
the wall as a system rather than individual segments (i.e., including sheathed areas
above and below openings) may be used to economize on design while meeting
required performance (see perforated shear wall design approach below).
As shown in Figure 6.3, it is common either to neglect the contribution of
dead load or assume that the dead load on the wall is uniformly distributed as
would be the case under gravity loading only. In fact, unless the wall is restrained
with an infinitely rigid hold-down device (an impossibility), the uniform dead
load distribution will be altered as the wall rotates and deflects upward during the
application of shear force (see Figure 6.3b). As a result, depending on the rigidity
of the framing system above, the dead load will tend to concentrate more toward
the “high points” in the wall line, as the various segments begin to rotate and
uplift at their leading edges. Thus, the dead load may be somewhat more effective
in offsetting the overturning moment on a shear wall segment than is suggested by
the uniform dead load assumption. Unfortunately, this phenomenon involves
nonrigid body, nonlinear behavior for which there are no simplified methods of
analysis. Therefore, this effect is generally not considered, particularly for walls
with specified restraining devices (i.e., hold-downs) that are, by default, generally
assumed to be completely rigid–an assumption that is known by testing not to
hold true to varying degrees depending on the type of device and its installation.
Basic Perforated Shear Wall (PSW) Design Approach
The basic perforated shear wall (PSW) design method is gaining
popularity among designers and even earning code recognition. The method,
however, is not without controversy in terms of appropriate limits and guidance
on use. A perforated shear wall is a wall that is fully sheathed with wood
structural panels (i.e., oriented strand board or plywood) and that has openings or
“perforations” for windows and doors. The ends of the walls−rather than each
individual segment as in the segmented shear wall method−are restrained against
overturning. As for the intermediate segments of the wall, they are restrained by
conventional or designed framing connections such as those at the base of the
wall that transfer the shear force resisted by the wall to the construction below.
The capacity of a PSW is determined as the ratio of the strength of a wall with
openings to the strength of a wall of the same length without openings. The ratio
is calculated by using two empirical equations given in Section 6.5. Figure 6.5
illustrates a perforated shear wall.

Residential Structural Design Guide 6-17
Chapter 6 –Lateral Resistance to Wind and Earthquakes
FIGURE 6.5 Illustration of a Basic Perforated Shear Wall
The PSW design method requires the least amount of special construction
detailing and analysis among the current shear wall design methods. It has been
validated in several recent studies in the United States but dates back more than
20 years to research first conducted in Japan (Dolan and Heine, 1997a and b;
Dolan and Johnson, 1996a and 1996b; NAHBRC, 1997; NAHBRC, 1998;
NAHBRC, 1999; Sugiyama and Matsumoto, 1994; Ni et al., 1998). While it
produces the simplest form of an engineered shear wall solution, other methods
such as the segmented shear wall design method–all other factors equal–can yield
a stronger wall. Conversely, a PSW design with increased sheathing fastening can
outperform an SSW with more hold-downs but weaker sheathing fastening. The
point is, that for many applications, the PSW method often provides an adequate
and more efficient design. Therefore, the PSW method should be considered an
option to the SSW method as appropriate.
Enhancements to the PSW Approach
Several options in the form of structural optimizations (i.e., “getting the
most from the least”) can enhance the PSW method. One option uses multiple
metal straps or ties to restrain each stud, thereby providing a highly redundant and
simple method of overturning restraint. Unfortunately, this promising

6-18 Residential Structural Design Guide
Chapter 6 –Lateral Resistance to Wind and Earthquakes
enhancement has been demonstrated in only one known proof test of the concept
(NAHBRC, 1999). It can, however, improve shear wall stiffness and increase
capacity beyond that achieved with either the basic PSW method or SSW design
approach. Another option, subjected to limited study by the NAHB Research
Center, calls for perforated shear walls with metal truss plates at key framing
joints (NAHBRC, 1998). To a degree similar to that in the first option, this
enhancement increases shear capacity and stiffness without the use of any special
hold-downs or restraining devices other than conventional framing connections at
the base of the wall (i.e., nails or anchor bolts). Neither of the above options
applied dead loads to the tested walls, such application would have improved
performance. Unfortunately, the results do not lend themselves to easy duplication
by analysis and must be used at their face value as empirical evidence to justify
practical design improvements for conditions limited by the tests. Analytic
methods are under development to facilitate use of optimization concepts in shear
wall design and construction.
In a mechanics-based form of the PSW, analytic assumptions using free-
body diagrams and principles of statics can conservatively estimate restraining
forces that transfer shear around openings in shear walls based on the assumption
that wood-framed shear walls behave as rigid bodies with elastic behavior. As
compared to several tests of the perforated shear wall method discussed above,
the mechanics-based approach leads to a conservative solution requiring strapping
around window openings. In a condition outside the limits for application of the
PSW method, a mechanics-based design approach for shear transfer around
openings provides a reasonable alternative to traditional SSW design and the
newer empirically based PSW design. The added detailing merely takes the form
of horizontal strapping and blocking at the top and bottom corners of window
openings to transfer the calculated forces derived from free-body diagrams
representing the shear wall segments and sheathed areas above and below
openings. For more detail, the reader should consult other sources of information
on this approach (Diekmann, 1986; ICBO, 1997; ICC, 1999).
6.4.3 Basic Diaphragm Design Approach
As described in Chapter 2 and earlier in this section, horizontal
diaphragms are designed by using the analogy of a deep beam laid flatwise. Thus,
the shear forces in the diaphragm are calculated as for a beam under a uniform
load (refer to Figure 6.4). As is similar to the case of shear walls, the design shear
capacity of a horizontal diaphragm is determined by multiplying the diaphragm
depth (i.e., depth of the analogous deep beam) by the tabulated unit shear design
values found in building codes. The chord forces (in the “flange” of the analogous
deep beam) are calculated as a tension force and compression force on opposite
sides of the diaphragm. The two forces form a force couple (i.e., moment) that
resists the bending action of the diaphragm (refer to Figure 6.1).
To simplify the calculation, it is common practice to assume that the chord
forces are resisted by a single chord member serving as the “flange” of the deep
beam (i.e., a band joist). At the same time, bending forces internal to the
diaphragm are assumed to be resisted entirely by the boundary member or band
joist rather than by other members and connections within the diaphragm. In

Residential Structural Design Guide 6-19
Chapter 6 –Lateral Resistance to Wind and Earthquakes
addition, other parts of the diaphragm boundary (i.e., walls) that also resist the
bending tension and compressive forces are not considered. Certainly, a vast
majority of residential roof diaphragms that are not considered “engineered” by
current diaphragm design standards have exhibited ample capacity in major
design events. Thus, the beam analogy used to develop an analytic model for the
design of wood-framed horizontal diaphragms has room for improvement that has
yet to be explored from an analytic standpoint.
As with shear walls, openings in the diaphragm affect the diaphragm’s
capacity. However, no empirical design approach accounts for the effect of
openings in a horizontal diaphragm as for shear walls (i.e., the PSW method).
Therefore, if openings are present, the effective depth of the diaphragm in
resisting shear forces must either discount the depth of the opening or be designed
for shear transfer around the opening. If it is necessary to transfer shear forces
around a large opening in a diaphragm, it is common to perform a mechanics-
based analysis of the shear transfer around the opening. The analysis is similar to
the previously described method that uses free-body diagrams for the design of
shear walls. The reader is referred to other sources for further study of diaphragm
design (Ambrose and Vergun, 1987; APA, 1997; Diekmann, 1986).
6.5 Design Guidelines
6.5.1 General Approach
This section outlines methods for designing shear walls (Section 6.5.2)
and diaphragms (Section 6.5.3). The two methods of shear wall design are the
segmented shear wall (SSW) method and the perforated shear wall (PSW)
method. The selection of a method depends on shear loading demand, wall
configuration, and the desired simplicity of the final construction. Regardless of
design method and resulting LFRS, the first consideration is the amount of lateral
load to be resisted by the arrangement of shear walls and diaphragms in a given
building. The design loads and basic load combinations in Chapter 3, Table 3.1,
are as follows:
• 0.6D + (W or 0.7E) ASD
• 0.9D + (1.5W or 1.0E) LRFD
Earthquake load and wind load are considered separately, with shear walls
designed in accordance with more stringent loading conditions.
Lateral building loads should be distributed to the shear walls on a given
story by using one of the following methods as deemed appropriate by the
designer:
• tributary area approach;
• total shear approach; or
• relative stiffness approach.

6-20 Residential Structural Design Guide
Chapter 6 –Lateral Resistance to Wind and Earthquakes
These methods were described earlier (see Section 6.4). In the case of the
tributary area method, the loads can be immediately assigned to the various shear
wall lines based on tributary building areas (exterior surface area for wind loads
and building plan area for seismic loads) for the two orthogonal directions of
loading (assuming rectangular-shaped buildings and relatively uniform mass
distribution for seismic design). In the case of the total shear approach, the load is
considered as a “lump sum” for each story for both orthogonal directions of
loading. The shear wall construction and total amount of shear wall for each
direction of loading and each shear wall line are then determined in accordance
with this section to meet the required load as determined by either the tributary
area or total shear approach. The designer must be reasonably confident that the
distribution of the shear walls and their resistance is reasonably “balanced” with
respect to building geometry and the center of the total resultant shear load on
each story. As mentioned, both the tributary and total shear approaches have
produced many serviceable designs for typical residential buildings, provided that
the designer exercises sound judgment.
In the case of the relative stiffness method, the assignment of loads must
be based on an assumed relationship describing the relative stiffness of various
shear wall lines. Generally, the stiffness of a wood-framed shear wall is assumed
to be directly related to the length of the shear wall segments and the unit shear
value of the wall construction. For the perforated shear wall method, the relative
stiffness of various perforated shear wall lines may be assumed to be directly
related to the design strength of the various perforated shear wall lines. Using the
principle of moments and a representation of wall racking stiffness, the designer
can then identify the center of shear resistance for each story and determine each
story’s torsional load (due to the offset of the load center from the center of
resistance). Finally, the designer superimposes direct shear loads and torsional
shear loads to determine the estimated shear loads on each of the shear wall lines.
It is common practice (and required by some building codes) for the
torsional load distribution to be used only to add to the direct shear load on one
side of the building but not to subtract from the direct shear load on the other side,
even though the restriction is not conceptually accurate. Moreover, most seismic
design codes require evaluations of the lateral resistance to seismic loads with
“artificial” or “accidental” offsets of the estimated center of mass of the building
(i.e., imposition of an “accidental” torsional load imbalance). These provisions,
when required, are intended to conservatively address uncertainties in the design
process that may otherwise go undetected in any given analysis (i.e., building
mass is assumed uniform when it actually is not). As an alternative, uncertainties
may be more easily accommodated by increasing the shear load by an equivalent
amount in effect (i.e., say 10 percent). Indeed, the seismic shear load using the
simplified method (see Equation 3.8-1 in Chapter 3) includes a factor that
increases the design load by 20 percent and may be considered adequate to
address uncertainties in torsional load distribution. However, the simple “20
percent” approach to addressing accidental torsion loads is not explicitly
permitted in any current building code. But, for housing, where many
redundancies also exist, the “20 percent” rule seems to be a reasonable substitute
for a more “exact” analysis of accidental torsion. Of course, it is not a substitute
for evaluating and designing for torsion that is expected to occur.

Residential Structural Design Guide 6-21
Chapter 6 –Lateral Resistance to Wind and Earthquakes
Design Example 6.5 of Section 6.6 elaborates on and demonstrates the use
of the methods of load distribution described above. The reader is encouraged to
study and critique them. The example contains many concepts and insights that
cannot be otherwise conveyed without the benefit of a “real” problem.
6.5.2 Shear Wall Design
6.5.2.1 Shear Wall Design Values (F
s
)
This section provides unfactored (ultimate) unit shear values for wood-
framed shear wall constructions that use wood structural panels. Other wall
constructions and framing methods are included as an additional resource. The
unit shear values given here differ from those in the current codes in that they are
based explicitly on the ultimate shear capacity as determined through testing.
Therefore, the designer is referred to the applicable building code for “code-
approved” unit shear values. This guide uses ultimate unit shear capacities as its
basis to give the designer an explicit measure of the actual capacity and safety
margin (i.e., reserve strength) used in design and to provide for a more consistent
safety margin across various shear wall construction options. Accordingly, it is
imperative that the values used in this guide are appropriately adjusted in
accordance with Sections 6.5.2.2 and 6.5.2.3 to ensure an acceptable safety
margin.
Wood Structural Panels (WSP)
Table 6.1 provides unit shear values for walls sheathed with wood
structural panels. It should be noted again that these values are estimates of the
ultimate unit shear capacity values as determined from several sources (Tissell,
1993; FEMA, 1997; NAHBRC, 1998; NAHBRC, 1999; others). The design unit
shear values in today’s building codes have inconsistent safety margins that
typically range from 2.5 to 4 after all applicable adjustments (Tissell, 1993; Soltis,
Wolfe, and Tuomi, 1983). Therefore, the actual capacity of a shear wall is not
explicitly known to the designer using the codes’ allowable unit shear values.
Nonetheless, one alleged benefit of using the code-approved design unit shear
values is that the values are believed to address drift implicitly by way of a
generally conservative safety margin. Even so, shear wall drift is usually not
analyzed in residential construction for reasons stated previously.
The values in Table 6.1 and today’s building codes are based primarily on
monotonic tests (i.e., tests that use single-direction loading). Recently, the effect
of cyclic loading on wood-framed shear wall capacity has generated considerable
controversy. However, cyclic testing is apparently not necessary when
determining design values for seismic loading of wood-framed shear walls with
structural wood panel sheathing. Depending on the cyclic test protocol, the
resulting unit shear values can be above or below those obtained from traditional
monotonic shear wall test methods (ASTM, 1998a; ASTM, 1998b). In fact,
realistic cyclic testing protocols and their associated interpretations were found to
be largely in agreement with the results obtained from monotonic testing
(Karacabeyli and Ceccotti, 1998). The differences are generally in the range of 10

6-22 Residential Structural Design Guide
Chapter 6 –Lateral Resistance to Wind and Earthquakes
percent (plus or minus) and thus seem moot given that the seismic response
modifier (see Chapter 3) is based on expert opinion (ATC, 1995) and that the
actual performance of light-frame homes does not appear to correlate with
important parameters in existing seismic design methods (HUD, 1999), among
other factors that currently contribute to design uncertainty.
TABLE 6.1
Unfactored (Ultimate) Shear Resistance (plf) for Wood
Structural Panel Shear Walls with Framing of Douglas-Fir,
Larch, or Southern Pine
1,2
Panels Applied Direct to Framing
Nail Spacing at Panel Edges
(inches)
Panel Grade Nominal Panel
Thickness
(inches)
Minimum Nail
Penetration in
Framing
(inches)
(APA, 1998)
Nail Size
(common or
galvanized
box)
6432
3
5/16 1-1/4 6d 821 1,122 1,256 1,333
3/8
4
1-3/8 8d 833 1,200 1,362 1,711
Structural I 7/16
4
1-3/8 8d 905 1,356 1,497 1,767
15/32 1-3/8 8d 977 1,539 1,722 1,800
15/32 1-1/2 10d
5
1,256 1,701 1,963 2,222
Notes:
1
Values are average ultimate unit shear capacity for walls sheathed with Structural I wood structural panels and should be multiplied by a
safety factor (ASD) or resistance factor (LRFD) in accordance with Sections 6.5.2.2 and 6.5.2.3. Additional adjustments to the table
values should be made in accordance with those sections. For other rated panels (not Structural I), the table values should be multiplied
by 0.85.
2
All panel edges should be backed with 2-inch nominal or wider framing. Panels may be installed either horizontally or vertically. Space
nails at 6 inches on center along intermediate framing members for 3/8-inch panels installed with the strong axis parallel to studs spaced
24 inches on-center and 12 inches on-center for other conditions and panel thicknesses.
3
Framing at adjoining panel edges should be 3-inch nominal or wider and nails should be staggered where nails are spaced 2 inches on-
center. A double thickness of nominal 2-inch framing is a suitable substitute.
4
The values for 3/8- and 7/16-inch panels applied directly to framing may be increased to the values shown for 15/32-inch panels,
provided that studs are spaced a maximum of 16 inches on-center or the panel is applied with its strong axis across the studs.
5
Framing at adjoining panel edges should be 3-inch nominal or wider and nails should be staggered where 10d nails penetrating framing
by more than 1-5/8 inches are spaced 3 inches or less on-center. A double thickness of 2-inch nominal framing is a suitable substitute.
The unit shear values in Table 6.1 are based on nailed sheathing
connections. The use of elastomeric glue to attach wood structural panel
sheathing to wood framing members increases the shear capacity of a shear wall
by as much as 50 percent or more (White and Dolan, 1993). Similarly, studies
using elastomeric construction adhesive manufactured by 3M Corporation have
investigated seismic performance (i.e., cyclic loading) and confirm a stiffness
increase of about 65 percent and a shear capacity increase of about 45 to 70
percent over sheathing fastened with nails only (Filiatrault and Foschi, 1991).
Rigid adhesives may create even greater strength and stiffness increases. The
use of adhesives is beneficial in resisting shear loads from wind. Glued shear
wall panels are not recommended for use in high-hazard seismic areas because
of the brittle failure mode experienced in the wood framing material (i.e.,
splitting), though at a significantly increased shear load. Gluing shear wall
panels is also not recommended by panel manufacturers because of concern
with panel buckling that may occur as a result of the interaction of rigid
restraints with moisture/temperature expansion and contraction of the panels.

Residential Structural Design Guide 6-23
Chapter 6 –Lateral Resistance to Wind and Earthquakes
However, construction adhesives are routinely used in floor diaphragm
construction to increase the bending stiffness and strength of floors; in-plane
(diaphragm) shear is probably affected by an amount similar to that reported
above for shear walls.
For unit shear values of wood structural panels applied to cold-formed
steel framing, the following references are suggested: Uniform Building Code
(ICBO,1997); Standard Building Code (SBCCI, 1999); and Shear Wall Values
for Light Weight Steel Framing (AISI, 1996). The unit shear values for cold-
formed steel-framed walls in the previous references are consistent with the
values used in Table 6.1, including the recommended safety factor or resistance
factor. Table 6.2 presents some typical unit shear values for cold-formed steel-
framed walls with wood structural panel sheathing fastened with #8 screws.
Values for power-driven, knurled pins (similar to deformed shank nails) should be
obtained from the manufacturer and the applicable code evaluation reports (NES,
Inc., 1997).
TABLE 6.2
Unfactored (Ultimate) Unit Shear Resistance (plf) for Walls
with Cold-Formed Steel Framing and Wood Structural
Panels
1,2
Screw Spacing at Panel Edges (inches)
4
Panel Grade
Panel Type and
Nominal Thickness
(inches)
Minimum
Screw Size
3
64 3 2
7/16 OSB #8 700 915 1,275 1,625
Structural I
15/32 plywood #8 780 990 1,465 1,700
Notes:
1
Values are average ultimate unit shear capacity and should be multiplied by a safety factor (ASD) or resistance factor (LRFD) in
accordance with Sections 6.5.2.2 and 6.5.2.3.
2
Values apply to 18 gauge (43 mil) and 20 gage (33 mil) steel C-shaped studs with a 1-5/8-inch flange width and 3-1/2- to 5-1/2-inch depth.
Studs spaced a maximum of 24 inches on center.
3
The #8 screws should have a head diameter of no less than 0.29 inches and the screw threads should penetrate the framing so that the
threads are fully engaged in the steel.
4
The spacing of screws in framing members located in the interior of the panels should be no more than 12 inches on-center.
Portland Cement Stucco (PCS)
Ultimate unit shear values for conventional PCS wall construction range
from 490 to 1,580 plf based on the ASTM E 72 test protocol and 12 tests
conducted by various testing laboratories (Testing Engineers, Inc., 1971; Testing
Engineers, Inc., 1970; ICBO, 1969). In general, nailing the metal lath or wire
mesh resulted in ultimate unit shear values less than 750 plf, whereas stapling
resulted in ultimate unit shear values greater than 750 plf. An ultimate design
value of 500 plf is recommended unless specific details of PCS construction are
known. A safety factor of 2 provides a conservative allowable design value of
about 250 plf. It must be realized that the actual capacity can be as much as five
times 250 plf depending on the method of construction, particularly the means of
fastening the stucco lath material. Current code-approved allowable design values
are typically about 180 plf (SBCCI, 1999; ICBO, 1997). One code requires the
values to be further reduced by 50 percent in higher-hazard seismic design areas
(ICBO, 1997), although the reduction factor may not necessarily improve
performance with respect to the cracking of the stucco finish in seismic events

6-24 Residential Structural Design Guide
Chapter 6 –Lateral Resistance to Wind and Earthquakes
(HUD, 1999); refer to Chapter 1 and the discussion in Chapter 3 on displacement
compatibility under seismic load. It may be more appropriate to use a lower
seismic response modifier R than to increase the safety margin in a manner that is
not explicit to the designer. In fact, an R factor for PCS wood-framed walls is not
explicitly provided in building codes (perhaps an R of 4.5 for “other” wood-
framed walls is used) and should probably be in the range of 3 to 4 (without
additional increases in the safety factor) since some ductility is provided by the
metal lath and its connection to wood framing.
The above values pertain to PCS that is 7/8-inch thick with nail or staple
fasteners spaced 6 inches on-center for attaching the metal wire mesh or lath to all
framing members. Nails are typically 11 gauge by 1-1/2 inches in length and
staples typically have 3/4-inch leg and 7/8-inch crown dimensions. The above unit
shear values also apply to stud spacings no greater than 24 inches on-center.
Finally, the aspect ratio of stucco wall segments included in a design shear
analysis should not be greater than 2 (height/width) according to current building
code practice.
Gypsum Wall Board (GWB)
Ultimate capacities in testing 1/2-inch-thick gypsum wall board range
from 140 to 300 plf depending on the fastening schedule (Wolfe, 1983; Patton-
Mallory, Gutkowski, Soltis, 1984; NAHBRF, date unknown). Allowable or
design unit shear values for gypsum wall board sheathing range from 75 to 150
plf in current building codes depending on the construction and fastener spacing.
At least one building code requires the values to be reduced by 50 percent in high-
hazard seismic design areas (ICBO, 1997). Gypsum wall board is certainly not
recommended as the primary seismic bracing for walls, although it does
contribute to the structural resistance of buildings in all seismic and wind
conditions. It should also be recognized that fastening of interior gypsum board
varies in practice and is generally not an ‘inspected” system. Table 6.3 provides
estimated ultimate unit shear values for gypsum wall board sheathing.
TABLE 6.3
Unfactored (Ultimate) Unit Shear Values (plf) for 1/2-Inch-
Thick Gypsum Wall Board Sheathing
1,2
Fastener Spacing at Pane Edges (inches)
GWB
Thickness
Blocking
Condition
3
Spacing of
Framing
(inches)
12 8 7 6 4
Blocked 16 120 210 250 260 300
16 80 170 200 220 2501/2 inch
Unblocked
24 40 120 150 180 220
Notes:
1
The values represent average ultimate unit shear capacity and should be multiplied by a safety factor (ASD) or resistance factor (LRFD) in
accordance with Sections 6.5.2.2 and 6.5.2.3.
2
Fasteners should be minimum 1 1/2-inch drywall nails (i.e., 4d cooler) or 1-1/4-inch drywall screws (i.e., #6 size with bugle head) or
equivalent with spacing of fasteners and framing members as shown.
3
“Blocked” refers to panels with all edges fastened to framing members; “unblocked” refers to the condition where the panels are placed
horizontally with horizontal joints between panels not fastened to blocking or vertically with the top and bottom edges fastened only at stud
locations.

Residential Structural Design Guide 6-25
Chapter 6 –Lateral Resistance to Wind and Earthquakes
1x4 Wood Let-in Braces and Metal T-braces
Table 6.4 provides values for typical ultimate shear capacities of 1x4
wood let-in braces and metal T-braces. Though not found in current building
codes, the values are based on available test data (Wolfe, 1983; NAHBRF, date
unknown). Wood let-in braces and metal T-braces are common in conventional
residential construction and add to the shear capacity of walls. They are always
used in combination with other wall finish materials that also contribute to a
wall’s shear capacity. The braces are typically attached to the top and bottom
plates of walls and at each intermediate stud intersection with two 8d common
nails. They are not recommended for the primary lateral resistance of structures in
high-hazard seismic or wind design areas. In particular, values of the seismic
response modifier R for walls braced in this manner have not been clearly defined
for the sake of standardized seismic design guidance.
TABLE 6.4
Unfactored (Ultimate) Shear Resistance (lbs) for 1x4 Wood
Let-ins and Metal T-Braces
1,2
Type of Diagonal Brace Ultimate Horizontal Shear Capacity (per brace)
3
1x4 wood let-in brace (8-foot wall height)
4
600 lbs (tension and compression)
Metal T-brace
5
1,400 lbs (tension only)
Notes:
1
Values are average ultimate unit shear capacity and should be multiplied by a safety factor (ASD) or resistance factor (LRFD) in
accordance with Sections 6.5.2.2 and 6.5.2.3.
2
Values are based on minimum Spruce-Pine-Fir lumber (specific gravity, G = 0.42).
3
Capacities are based on tests of wall segments that are restrained against overturning.
4
Installed with two 8d common nails at each stud and plate intersection. Angle of brace should be between 45 and 60 degrees to horizontal.
5
Installed per manufacturer recommendations and the applicable code evaluation report. Design values may vary depending on
manufacturer recommendations, installation requirements, and product attributes.
Other Shear-Resisting Wall Facings
Just about any wall facing, finish, or siding material contributes to a wall’s
shear resistance qualities. While the total contribution of nonstructural materials
to a typical residential building’s lateral resistance is often substantial (i.e., nearly
50 percent if interior partition walls are included), current design codes in the
United States prohibit considerations of the role of facing, finish, or siding. Some
suggestions call for a simple and conservative 10 percent increase (known as the
“whole-building interaction factor”) to the calculated shear resistance of the shear
walls or a similar adjustment to account for the added resistance and whole-
building effects not typically considered in design (Griffiths and Wickens, 1996).
Some other types of wall sheathing materials that provide shear resistance
include particle board and fiber board. Ultimate unit shear values for fiber board
range from 120 plf (6d nail at 6 inches on panel edges with 3/8-inch panel
thickness) to 520 plf (10d nail at 2 inches on panel edges with 5/8-inch panel
thickness). The designer should consult the relevant building code or
manufacturer data for additional information on fiber board and other materials’
shear resistance qualities. In one study that conducted tests on various wall
assemblies for HUD, fiber board was not recommended for primary shear
resistance in high-hazard seismic or wind design areas for the stated reasons of
potential durability and cyclic loading concerns (NAHBRF, date unknown).

6-26 Residential Structural Design Guide
Chapter 6 –Lateral Resistance to Wind and Earthquakes
Combining Wall Bracing Materials
When wall bracing materials (i.e., sheathing) of the same type are used on
opposite faces of a wall, the shear values may be considered additive. In high-
hazard seismic design conditions, dissimilar materials are generally assumed to be
nonadditive. In wind-loading conditions, dissimilar materials may be considered
additive for wood structural panels (exterior) with gypsum wall board (interior).
Even though let-in brace or metal T-brace (exterior) with gypsum wall board
(interior) and fiber board (exterior) with gypsum wall board (interior) are also
additive, they are not explicitly recognized as such in current building codes.
When the shear capacity for walls with different facings is determined in
accordance with Sections 6.5.2.2 and 6.5.2.3, the designer must take care to apply
the appropriate adjustment factors to determine the wall construction’s total
design racking strength. Most of the adjustment factors in the following sections
apply only to wood structural panel sheathing. Therefore, the adjustments in the
next section should be made as appropriate before determining combined shear
resistance.
6.5.2.2 Shear Wall Design Capacity
The unfactored and unadjusted ultimate unit shear resistance values of
wall assemblies should first be determined in accordance with the guidance
provided in the previous section for rated facings or structural sheathing materials
used on each side of the wall. This section provides methods for determining and
adjusting the design unit shear resistance and the shear capacity of a shear wall by
using either the perforated shear wall (PSW) approach or segmented shear wall
(SSW) approach discussed in Section 6.4.2. The design approaches and other
important considerations are illustrated in the design examples of Section 6.6.
Perforated Shear Wall Design Approach
The following equations provide the design shear capacity of a perforated
shear wall:
]
1
[)(’ φor
SF
xCCFF
nsspss
= (units plf) Eq. 6.5-1a
][)’( LxCCFF
dlopspsw
= (units lb) Eq. 6.5-1b
where,
F
psw
= the design shear capacity (lb) of the perforated shear wall
F
s
= the unfactored (ultimate) and unadjusted unit shear capacity (plf)
for each facing of the wall construction; the C
sp
and C
ns
adjustment factors apply only to the wood structural panel
sheathing F
s
values in accordance with Section 6.5.2.1
F’
s
= the factored and adjusted design unit shear capacity (plf) for the
wall construction

Residential Structural Design Guide 6-27
Chapter 6 –Lateral Resistance to Wind and Earthquakes
C = the adjustment factors in accordance with Section 6.5.2.3 as
applicable
L = the length of the perforated shear wall, which is defined as the
distance between the restrained ends of the wall line
1/SF = the safety factor adjustment for use with ASD
φ = the resistance factor adjustment for use with LRFD
The PSW method (Equations 6.5-1a and b) has the following limits on its
use:
• The value of F
s
for the wall construction should not exceed 1,500
plf in accordance with Section 6.5.1.2. The wall must be fully
sheathed with wood structural panels on at least one side. Unit
shear values of sheathing materials may be combined in
accordance with Section 6.5.2.1.
• Full-height wall segments within a perforated shear wall should
not exceed an aspect ratio of 4 (height/width) unless that portion of
the wall is treated as an opening. (Some codes limit the aspect ratio
to 2 or 3.5, but recent testing mentioned earlier has demonstrated
otherwise.) The first wall segment on either end of a perforated
shear wall must not exceed the aspect ratio limitation.
• The ends of the perforated shear wall must be restrained with hold-
down devices sized in accordance with Section 6.5.2.4. Hold-down
forces that are transferred from the wall above are additive to the
hold-down forces in the wall below. Alternatively, each wall stud
may be restrained by using a strap sized to resist an uplift force
equivalent to the design unit shear resistance F’
s
of the wall,
provided that the sheathing area ratio r for the wall is not less than
0.5 (see equations for C
op
and r in Section 6.5.2.3).
• Top plates must be continuous with a minimum connection
capacity at splices with lap joints of 1,000 lb, or as required by the
design condition, whichever is greater.
• Bottom plate connections to transfer shear to the construction
below (i.e., resist slip) should be designed in accordance with
Section 6.5.2.5 and should result in a connection at least equivalent
to one 1/2-inch anchor bolt at 6 feet on center or two 16d
pneumatic nails 0.131-inch diameter at 24 inches on center for wall
constructions with F
s
C
sp
C
ns
not exceeding 800 plf (ultimate
capacity of interior and exterior sheathing). Such connections have
been shown to provide an ultimate shear slip capacity of more than
800 plf in typical shear wall framing systems (NAHBRC, 1999);
refer to Section 7.3.6 of Chapter 7. For wall constructions with
ultimate shear capacities F
s
C
sp
C
ns
exceeding 800 plf, the base
connection must be designed to resist the unit shear load and also
provide a design uplift resistance equivalent to the design unit
shear load.
• Net wind uplift forces from the roof and other tension forces as a
result of structural actions above the wall are transferred through

6-28 Residential Structural Design Guide
Chapter 6 –Lateral Resistance to Wind and Earthquakes
the wall by using an independent load path. Wind uplift may be
resisted with the strapping option above, provided that the straps
are sized to transfer the additional load.
Segmented Shear Wall Design Approach
The following equations are used to determine the adjusted and factored
shear capacity of a shear wall segment:
]or
SF
1
[CCCF’F
arnsspss
φ=
Eq. 6.5-2a
]L[x’FF
ssssw
= Eq. 6.5-2b
where,
F
ssw
= the design shear capacity (lb) of a single shear wall segment
F
s
= the unfactored (ultimate) and unadjusted unit shear resistance (plf)
for the wall construction in accordance with Section 6.5.2.1 for
each facing of the wall construction; the C
sp
and C
ns
adjustment
factors apply only to wood structural panel sheathing F
s
values
F’
s
= the factored (design) and adjusted unit shear resistance (plf) for
the total wall construction
C = the adjustment factors in accordance with Section 6.5.2.3
L
s
= the length of a shear wall segment (total width of the sheathing
panel(s) in the segment)
1/SF = the safety factor adjustment for use with ASD
φ = the resistance factor adjustment for use with LRFD
The segmented shear wall design method (Equations 6.5-2a and b)
imposes the following limits:
• The aspect ratio of wall segments should not exceed 4 (height/width)
as determined by the sheathing dimensions on the wall segment.
(Absent an adjustment for the aspect ratio, current codes may restrict
the segment aspect ratio to a maximum of 2 or 3.5.)
• The ends of the wall segment should be restrained in accordance with
Section 6.5.2.4. Hold-down forces that are transferred from shear wall
segments in the wall above are additive to the hold-down forces in the
wall below.
• Shear transfer at the base of the wall should be determined in
accordance with Section 6.5.2.5.
• Net wind uplift forces from the roof and other tension forces as a result
of structural actions above are transferred through the wall by using an
independent load path.
For walls with multiple shear wall segments, the design shear resistance
for the individual segments may be added to determine the total design shear
resistance for the segmented shear wall line. Alternatively, the combined shear

Residential Structural Design Guide 6-29
Chapter 6 –Lateral Resistance to Wind and Earthquakes
capacity at given amounts of drift may be determined by using the load-
deformation equations in Section 6.5.2.6.
6.5.2.3 Shear Capacity Adjustment Factors
Safety and Resistance Factors (SF and φ)
Table 6.5 recommends values for safety and resistance factors for shear
wall design in residential construction. A safety factor of 2.5 is widely recognized
for shear wall design, although the range varies substantially in current code-
approved unit shear design values for wood-framed walls (i.e., the range is 2 to
more than 4). In addition, a safety factor of 2 is commonly used for wind design.
The 1.5 safety factor for ancillary buildings is commensurate with lower risk but
may not be a recognized practice in current building codes. A safety factor of 2
has been historically applied or recommended for residential dwelling design
(HUD, 1967; MPS, 1958; HUD, 1999). It is also more conservative than safety
factor adjustments typically used in the design of other properties with wood
members and other materials.
TABLE 6.5
Minimum Recommended Safety and Resistance Factors for
Residential Shear Wall Design
Type of Construction Safety Factor (ASD) Resistance Factor (LRFD)
Detached garages and ancillary buildings not for human
habitation
1.5 1.0
Seismic 2.5 0.55Single-family houses, townhouses, and
multifamily low-rise buildings (apartments)
Wind 2.0 0.7
Species Adjustment Factor (C
sp
)
The ultimate unit shear values for wood structural panels in Table 6.1
apply to lumber species with a specific gravity (density), G, greater than or equal
to 0.5. Table 6.6 presents specific gravity values for common species of lumber
used for wall framing. For G < 0.5, the following value of C
sp
should be used to
adjust values in Table 6.1 only (APA, 1998):
()[]0.1G5.01C
sp
≤−−= Eq. 6.5-3
TABLE 6.6
Specific Gravity Values (Average) for Common Species of
Framing Lumber
Lumber Species Specific Gravity, G
Southern Yellow Pine (SYP) 0.55
Douglas Fir-Larch (DF-L) 0.50
Hem-Fir (HF) 0.43
Spruce-Pine-Fir (SPF) 0.42

6-30 Residential Structural Design Guide
Chapter 6 –Lateral Resistance to Wind and Earthquakes
Nail Size Adjustment Factor (C
ns
)
The ultimate unit shear capacities in Table 6.1 are based on the use of
common nails. For other nail types and corresponding nominal sizes, the C
ns
adjustment factors in Table 6.7 should be used to adjust the values in Table 6.1.
Nails should penetrate framing members a minimum of 10D, where D is the
diameter of the nail.
TABLE 6.7 Values of C
ns
for Various Nail Sizes and Types
1
Nail Type
Pneumatic
(by diameter in inches)
Nominal
Nail Size
(penny
weight)
Nail Length
(inches) Common
2
Box
3
0.092 0.113 0.131 0.148
6d 1-7/8 to 2 1.0 0.8 0.9 1.0 N/A
4
N/A
4
8d 2-3/8 to 2-1/2 1.0 0.8 0.5 0.75 1.0 N/A
4
10d 3 1.0 0.8 N/A
4
N/A
4
0.8 1.0
Notes:
1
The values of C
ns
are based on ratios of the single shear nail values in NER-272 (NES, Inc., 1997) and the NDS (AF&PA, 1997) and are
applicable only to wood structural panel sheathing on wood-framed walls in accordance with Table 6.1.
2
Common nail diameters are as follows: 6d (0.113 inch), 8d (0.131 inch), and 10d (0.148 inch).
3
Box nail diameters are as follows: 6d (0.099 inch), 8d (0.113 inch), and 10d (0.128 inch).
4
Diameter not applicable to nominal nail size. Nail size, diameter, and length should be verified with the manufacturer.
Opening Adjustment Factor (C
op
)
The following equation for C
op
applies only to the perforated shear wall
method in accordance with Equation 6.5-1b of Section 6.5.2.2:
C
op
= r/(3-2r) Eq. 6.5-4
where,
r = 1/(1 + α/β) = sheathing area ratio (dimensionless)
α = ΣA
o
/ (H x L) = ratio of area of all openings ΣA
o
to total wall area,
H x L (dimensionless)
β = ΣL
i
/ L = ratio of length of wall with full-height sheathing ΣL
i
to
the total wall length L of the perforated shear wall (dimensionless)
Dead Load Adjustment Factor (C
dl
)
The C
dl
factor applies to the perforated shear wall method only (Equation
6.5-1b). The presence of a dead load on a perforated shear has the effect of
increasing shear capacity (Ni et al., 1998). The increase is 15 percent for a
uniform dead load of 300 plf or more applied to the top of the wall framing. The
dead load should be decreased by wind uplift and factored in accordance with the
lateral design load combinations of Chapter 3. The C
dl
adjustment factor is
determined as follows and should not exceed 1.15:

Residential Structural Design Guide 6-31
Chapter 6 –Lateral Resistance to Wind and Earthquakes
15.1
300
w
15.01C
D
dl
≤








+= Eq 6.5-5
where,
w
D
= the net uniform dead load supported at the top of the perforated shear
wall (plf) with consideration of wind uplift and factoring in
accordance with load combinations of Chapter 3.
Aspect Ratio Adjustment Factor (C
ar
)
The following C
ar
adjustment factor applies only to the segmented shear
wall design method for adjusting the shear resistance of interior and exterior
sheathing in accordance with Equation 6.5-2a of Section 6.5.2.2:
)a(5.0
1
C
ar
= for 2.0 ≤ a ≤ 4.0 Eq 6.5-6
C
ar
= 1.0 for a < 2.0
where,
a is the aspect ratio (height/width) of the sheathed shear wall segment.
6.5.2.4 Overturning Restraint
Section 6.3 and Figure 6.3 address overturning restraint of shear walls in
conceptual terms. In practice, the two generally recognized approaches to
providing overturning restraint call for
• the evaluation of equilibrium of forces on a restrained shear wall
segment using principles of engineering mechanics; or
• the evaluation of unrestrained shear walls considering nonuniform
dead load distribution at the top of the wall with restraint provided by
various connections (i.e., sheathing, wall bottom plate, corner framing,
etc.).
The first method applies to restrained shear wall segments in both the
perforated and segmented shear wall methods. The first segment on each end of a
perforated shear wall is restrained in one direction of loading. Therefore, the
overturning forces on that segment are analyzed in the same manner as for a
segmented shear wall. The second method listed above is a valid and conceptually
realistic method of analyzing the restraint of typical residential wall constructions,
but it has not yet fully matured. Further, the method’s load path (i.e., distribution
of uplift forces to various connections with inelastic properties) is perhaps beyond
the practical limits of a designer’s intuition. Rather than presume a methodology
based on limited testing (see Section 6.3), this guide does not suggest guidelines
for the second approach. However, the second method is worth consideration by a
designer when attempting to understand the performance of conventional,

6-32 Residential Structural Design Guide
Chapter 6 –Lateral Resistance to Wind and Earthquakes
“nonengineered” residential construction. Mechanics-based methods to assist in
the more complicated design approach are under development.
Using basic mechanics as shown in Figure 6.6, the following equation for
the chord tension and compression forces are determined by summing moments
about the bottom compression or tension side of a restrained shear wall segment:
0M
C
=∑
0)d)(d)(w()d(D)x(T)h)(d(’F
2
1
D
2
1
Ws
=−−−
()t)d)(w(Dh’F
x
d
T
D
2
1
W
2
1
s
+−−





= Eq. 6.5-7a
0M
T
=∑
()c)d)(w(Dh’F
x
d
C
D
2
1
W
2
1
s
+++





= Eq. 6.5-7b
where,
T = the tension force on the hold-down device (lb)
d = the width of the restrained shear wall segment (ft); for segments
greater than 4 ft in width, use d = 4 ft.
x = the distance between the hold-down device and the compression
edge of the restrained shear wall segment (ft); for segments greater
than 4 ft in width, use x = 4 ft plus or minus the bracket offset
dimension, if any
F’
s
= the design unit shear capacity (plf) determined in accordance with
Equation 6.5-2a of Section 6.5.2.2 (for both the PSW and SSW
methods)
h = the height of the wall (ft)
D
w
= the dead load of the shear wall segment (lb); dead load must be
factored and wind uplift considered in accordance with the load
combinations of Chapter 3.
w
D
= the uniform dead load supported by the shear wall segment (plf);
dead load must be factored and wind uplift considered in
accordance with the load combinations of Chapter 3.
t = the tension load transferred through a hold-down device, if any,
restraining a wall above (lb); if there is no tension load, t = 0
c = the compression load transferred from wall segments above, if any
(lb); this load may be distributed by horizontal structural elements
above the wall (i.e., not a concentrated load); if there is not
compression load, c = 0.
The 4-foot-width limit for d and x is imposed on the analysis of
overturning forces as presented above because longer shear wall lengths mean
that the contribution of the additional dead load cannot be rigidly transferred

Residential Structural Design Guide 6-33
Chapter 6 –Lateral Resistance to Wind and Earthquakes
through deep bending action of the wall to have a full effect on the uplift forces
occurring at the end of the segment, particularly when it is rigidly restrained from
uplifting. This effect also depends on the stiffness of the construction above the
wall that “delivers” and distributes the load at the top of the wall. The
assumptions necessary to include the restraining effects of dead load is no trivial
matter and, for that reason, it is common practice to not include any beneficial
effect of dead load in the overturning force analysis of individual shear wall
segments.
FIGURE 6.6
Evaluation of Overturning Forces on a Restrained Shear
Wall Segment
For a more simplified analysis of overturning forces, the effect of dead
load may be neglected and the chord forces determined as follows using the
symbols defined as before:
h’F
x
d
CT
s






== Eq. 6.5-7c
Any tension or compression force transferred from shear wall overturning
forces originating above the wall under consideration must be added to the result
of Equation 6.5-7c as appropriate. It is also assumed that any net wind uplift
force is resisted by a separate load path (i.e., wind uplift straps are used in
addition to overturning or hold-down devices).

6-34 Residential Structural Design Guide
Chapter 6 –Lateral Resistance to Wind and Earthquakes
For walls not rigidly restrained, the initiation of overturning uplift at the
end stud (i.e., chord) shifts an increasing amount of the dead load supported by
the wall toward the leading edge. Thus, walls restrained with more flexible hold-
down devices or without such devices benefit from increased amounts of
offsetting dead load as well as from the ability of wood framing and connections
to disperse some of the forces that concentrate in the region of a rigid hold-down
device. However, if the bottom plate is rigidly anchored, flexibility in the hold-
down device can impose undesirable cross-grain bending forces on the plate due
to uplift forces transferred through the sheathing fasteners to the edge of the
bottom plate. Further, the sheathing nails in the region of the bottom plate anchor
experience greater load and may initiate failure of the wall through an
“unzipping” effect.
The proper detailing to balance localized stiffness effects for more even
force transfer is obviously a matter of designer judgment. It is mentioned here to
emphasize the importance of detailing in wood-framed construction. In particular,
wood framing has the innate ability to distribute loads, although weaknesses can
develop from seemingly insignificant details. The concern noted above has been
attributed to actual problems (i.e., bottom plate splitting) only in severe seismic
events and in relatively heavily loaded shear walls. For this reason, it is now
common to require larger washers on bottom plate anchor bolts, such as a 2- to 3-
inch-square by 1/4-inch-thick plate washer, to prevent the development of cross-
grain tension forces in bottom plates in high-hazard seismic regions. The
development of high cross-grain tension stresses poses less concern when nails
are used to fasten the bottom plate and are located in pairs or staggered on both
sides of the wood plate. Thus, the two connection options above represent
different approaches. The first, using the plate washers, maintains a rigid
connection throughout the wall to prevent cross grain tension in the bottom plate.
The second, using nails, is a more “flexible” connection that prevents
concentrated cross-grain bending forces from developing. With sufficient capacity
provided, the nailing approach may yield a more “ductile” system. Unfortunately,
these intricate detailing issues are not accommodated in the single seismic
response modifier used for wood-framed shear walls or the provisions of any
existing code. These aspects of design are not easily “quantified” and are
considered matters of qualitative engineering judgment.
Finally, it is important to recognize that the hold-down must be attached to
a vertical wall framing member (i.e., a stud) that receives the wood structural
panel edge nailing. If not, the hold-down will not be fully effective (i.e., the
overturning forces must be “delivered” to the hold-down through the sheathing
panel edge nailing). In addition, the method of deriving hold-down capacity
ratings may vary from bracket to bracket and manufacturer to manufacturer. For
some brackets, the rated capacity may be based on tests of the bracket itself that
do not represent its use in an assembly (i.e., as attached to a wood member).
Many hold-down brackets transfer tension through an eccentric load path that
creates an end moment on the vertical framing member to which it is attached.
Therefore, there may be several design considerations in specifying an
appropriate hold-down device that go beyond simply selecting a device with a
sufficient rated capacity from manufacturer literature. In response to these issues,
some local codes may require certain reductions to or verification of rated hold-
down capacities.

Residential Structural Design Guide 6-35
Chapter 6 –Lateral Resistance to Wind and Earthquakes
6.5.2.5 Shear Transfer (Sliding)
The sliding shear at the base of a shear wall is equivalent to the shear load
input to the wall. To ensure that the sliding shear force transfer is balanced with
the shear capacity of the wall, the connections at the base of the wall are usually
designed to transfer the design unit shear capacity F’
s
of the shear wall. Generally,
the connections used to resist sliding shear include anchor bolts (fastening to
concrete) and nails (fastening to wood framing). Metal plate connectors may also
be used (consult manufacturer literature). In what is a conservative decision,
frictional resistance and “pinching” effects usually go ignored. However, if
friction is considered, a friction coefficient of 0.3 may be multiplied by the dead
load normal to the slippage plane to determine a nominal resistance provided by
friction.
As a modification to the above rule, if the bottom plate is continuous in a
perforated shear wall, the sliding shear resistance is the capacity of the perforated
shear wall F
psw
. If the bottom plate is not continuous, then the sliding shear should
be designed to resist the design unit shear capacity of the wall construction F’
s
as
discussed above. Similarly, if the restrained shear wall segments in a segmented
shear wall line are connected to a continuous bottom plate extending between
shear wall segments, then the sliding shear can be distributed along the entire
length of the bottom plate. For example, if two 4-foot shear wall segments are
located in a wall 12 feet long with a continuous bottom plate, then the unit sliding
shear resistance required at the bottom plate anchorage is (8 ft)(F’
s
)/(12 ft) or
2/3(F’
s
). This is similar to the mechanism by which a unit shear load is transferred
from a horizontal diaphragm to the wall top plate and then into the shear wall
segments through a collector (i.e., top plate). Chapter 7 addresses design of the
above types of shear connections.
6.5.2.6 Shear Wall Stiffness and Drift
The methods for predicting shear wall stiffness or drift in this section are
based on idealized conditions representative solely of the testing conditions to
which the equations are related. The conditions do not account for the many
factors that may decrease the actual drift of a shear wall in its final construction.
As mentioned, shear wall drift is generally overestimated in comparison with
actual behavior in a completed structure (see Section 6.2 on whole-building tests).
The degree of overprediction may reach a factor of 2 at design load conditions. At
capacity, the error may not be as large because some nonstructural components
may be past their yield point.
At the same time, drift analysis may not consider the factors that also
increase drift, such as deformation characteristics of the hold-down hardware (for
hardware that is less stiff than that typically used in testing), lumber shrinkage
(i.e., causing time-delayed slack in joints), lumber compression under heavy shear
wall compression chord load, and construction tolerances. Therefore, the results
of a drift analysis should be considered as a guide to engineering judgment, not an
exact prediction of drift.

6-36 Residential Structural Design Guide
Chapter 6 –Lateral Resistance to Wind and Earthquakes
The load-drift equations in this section may be solved to yield shear wall
resistance for a given amount of shear wall drift. In this manner, a series of shear
wall segments or even perforated shear walls embedded within a given wall line
may be combined to determine an overall load-drift relationship for the entire wall
line. The load-drift relationships are based on the nonlinear behavior of wood-
framed shear walls and provide a reasonably accurate means of determining the
behavior of walls of various configurations. The relationship may also be used for
determining the relative stiffness of shear wall lines in conjunction with the
relative stiffness method of distributing lateral building loads and for considering
torsional behavior of a building with a nonsymmetrical shear wall layout in
stiffness and in geometry. The approach is fairly straightforward and is left to the
reader for experimentation.
Perforated Shear Wall Load-Drift Relationship
The load-drift equation below is based on several perforated shear wall
tests already discussed in this chapter. It provides a nonlinear load-drift
relationship up to the ultimate capacity of the perforated shear wall as determined
in Section 6.5.2.2. When considering shear wall load-drift behavior in an actual
building, the reader is reminded of the aforementioned accuracy issues; however,
accuracy relative to the test data is reasonable (i.e., plus or minus 1/2-inch at
capacity).




























=∆
8
h
F
V
r
1
G
5.0
8.1
8.2
ULT,PSW
d
(inches) Eq. 6.5-8
where,
∆ = the shear wall drift (in) at shear load demand, V
d
(lb)
G = the specific gravity of framing lumber (see Table 6.6)
r = the sheathing area ratio (see Section 6.5.2.3, C
op
)
V
d
= the shear load demand (lb) on the perforated shear wall; the
value of V
d
is set at any unit shear demand less than or equal to
F
psw,ult
while the value of V
d
should be set to the design shear
load when checking drift at design load conditions
F
psw,ult
= the unfactored (ultimate) shear capacity (lb) for the perforated
shear wall (i.e., F
psw
x SF or F
psw
/φ for ASD and LRFD,
respectively)
h = the height of wall (ft)
Segmented Shear Wall Load-Drift Relationship
APA Semiempirical Load-Drift Equation
Several codes and industry design guidelines specify a deflection equation
for shear walls that includes a multipart estimate of various factors’ contribution
to shear wall deflection (ICBO, 1997; ICC, 1999, APA, 1997). The approach
relies on a mix of mechanics-based principles and empirical modifications. The
principles and modifications are not repeated here because the APA method of

Residential Structural Design Guide 6-37
Chapter 6 –Lateral Resistance to Wind and Earthquakes
drift prediction is considered no more reliable than that presented next. In
addition, the equation is complex relative to the ability to predict drift accurately.
It also requires adjustment factors, such as a nail-slip factor, that can only be
determined by testing.
Empirical, Nonlinear Load-Drift Equation
Drift in a wood structural panel shear wall segment may be approximated
in accordance with the following equation:




















=∆
8
h
F
V
a
G
5.0
2.2
8.2
ULT,SSW
d4
(in) Eq. 6.5-9
where,
∆ = the shear wall drift (in) at load V
d
(lb)
G = the specific gravity of framing lumber
a = the shear wall segment aspect ratio (height/width) for aspect
ratios from 4 to 1; a value of 1 shall be used for shear wall
segments with width (length) greater than height
V
d
= the shear load demand (lb) on the wall; the value of V
d
is set at
any unit shear demand less than or equal to F
ssw,ult
while the
value of V
d
should be set to the design load when checking drift
at design load conditions
F
ssw,ult
= the unfactored (ultimate) shear capacity (lb) of the shear wall
segment (i.e., F
ssw
x SF or F
ssw
/φ for ASD and LRFD,
respectively)
h = the height of wall (ft)
The above equation is based on several tests of shear wall segments with
aspect ratios ranging from 4:1 to 1:5.
6.5.2.7 Portal Frames
In situations with little space to include sufficient shear walls to meet
required loading conditions, the designer must turn to alternatives. An example is
a garage opening supporting a two-story home on a narrow lot such that other
wall openings for windows and an entrance door leaves little room for shear
walls. One option is to consider torsion and the distribution of lateral loads in
accordance with the relative stiffness method. Another possibility is the use of a
portal frame.
Portal frames may be simple, specialized framing details that can be
assembled on site. They use fastening details, metal connector hardware, and
sheathing to form a wooden moment frame and, in many cases, perform
adequately. Various configurations of portal frames have undergone testing and
provide data and details on which the designer can base a design (NAHBRC,
1998; APA, 1994). The ultimate shear capacity of portal frames ranges from
2,400 to more than 6,000 pounds depending on the complexity and strength of the
construction details. A simple detail involves extending a garage header so that it

6-38 Residential Structural Design Guide
Chapter 6 –Lateral Resistance to Wind and Earthquakes
is end-nailed to a full-height corner stud, strapping the header to the jamb studs at
the portal opening, attaching sheathing with a standard nailing schedule, and
anchoring the portal frame with typical perforated shear wall requirements. The
system has an ultimate shear capacity of about 3,400 pounds that, with a safety
factor of 2 to 2.5, provides a simple solution for many portal frame applications
for residential construction in high-hazard seismic or wind regions. Several
manufacturers offer preengineered portal frame and shear wall elements that can
be ordered to custom requirements or standard conditions.
6.5.3 Diaphragm Design
6.5.3.1 Diaphragm Design Values
Depending on the location and number of supporting shear wall lines, the
shear and moments on a diaphragm are determined by using the analogy of a
simply supported or continuous span beam. The designer uses the shear load on
the diaphragm per unit width of the diaphragm (i.e., floor or roof) to select a
combination of sheathing and fastening from a table of allowable horizontal
diaphragm unit shear values found in U.S. building codes. Similar to those for
shear walls, unit shear values for diaphragms vary according to sheathing
thickness and nailing schedules, among other factors. Table 6.8 presents several
of the more common floor and roof constructions used in residential construction
as well as their allowable diaphragm resistance values. The values include a
safety factor for ASD and therefore require no additional factoring. The aspect
ratio of a diaphragm should be no greater than 4 (length/width) in accordance
with current building code limits. In addition, the sheathing attachment in floor
diaphragms is often supplemented with glue or construction adhesive. The
increase in unit shear capacity of vertical diaphragms (i.e. shear walls) was
discussed in Section 6.5.2.1 in association with Table 6.1. A similar increase to
the unit shear capacity of floor diaphragms can be expected, not to mention
increased stiffness when the floor sheathing is glued and nailed.
TABLE 6.8
Horizontal Diaphragm ASD Shear Values (plf) for
Unblocked Roof and Floor Construction Using Douglas Fir
or Southern Pine Framing
1,2,3,4
Panel Type and Application Nominal Panel Thickness
(inches)
Common Nail
Size
Design Shear Value (plf)
5/16 6d 165
3/8 8d 185Structural I (Roof)
15/32 10d 285
7/16 8d 230
15/32 8d 240
APA Sturd-I-Floor (Floor) and
Rated Sheathing
19/32 10d 285
Notes:
1
Minimum framing member thickness is 1-1/2 inches.
2
Nails spaced at 6 inches on-center at supported panel edges and at the perimeter of the diaphragm. Nails spaced at 12 inches on-center on
other framing members spaced a maximum of 24 inches on-center.
3
“Unblocked” means that sheathing joints perpendicular to framing members are not fastened to blocking.
4
Apply C
sp
and C
ns
adjustment factors to table values as appropriate (see Section 6.5.2.3 for adjustment factor values).

Residential Structural Design Guide 6-39
Chapter 6 –Lateral Resistance to Wind and Earthquakes
6.5.3.2 Diaphragm Design
As noted, diaphragms are designed in accordance with simple beam
equations. To determine the shear load on a simply supported diaphragm (i.e.,
diaphragm supported by shear walls at each side), the designer uses the following
equation to calculate the unit shear force to be resisted by the diaphragm
sheathing:
wlV
2
1
max
=
Eq. 6.5-10a
d
V
v
max
max
=
Eq. 6.5-10b
where,
V
max
= the maximum shear load on the diaphragm (plf)
w = the tributary uniform load (plf) applied to the diaphragm resulting
from seismic or wind loading
l = the length of the diaphragm perpendicular to the direction of the load
(ft)
v
max
= the unit shear across the diaphragm in the direction of the load (plf)
d = the depth or width of the diaphragm in the direction of the load (ft)
The following equations are used to determine the theoretical chord
tension and compression forces on a simply supported diaphragm as described
above:
2
8
1
max
wlM = Eq. 6.5-11a
d
M
CT
max
maxmax
== Eq. 6.5-11b
where,
M
max
= the bending moment on the diaphragm (ft-lb)
w = the tributary uniform load (plf) applied to the diaphragm resulting
from seismic or wind loading
l = the length of the diaphragm perpendicular to the direction of the load
(ft)
T
max
= the maximum chord tension force (lb)
C
max
= the maximum chord compression force (lb)
d = the depth or width of the diaphragm in the direction of the load (ft)
If the diaphragm is not simply supported at its ends, the designer uses
appropriate beam equations (see Appendix A) in a manner similar to that above to
determine the shear and moment on the diaphragm. The calculations to determine
the unit shear in the diaphragm and the tension and compression in the chords are

6-40 Residential Structural Design Guide
Chapter 6 –Lateral Resistance to Wind and Earthquakes
also similar to those given above. It should be noted that the maximum chord
forces occur at the location of the maximum moment. For a simply supported
diaphragm, the maximum chord forces occur at mid-span between the perimeter
shear walls. Thus, chord requirements may vary depending on location and
magnitude of the bending moment on the diaphragm. Similarly, shear forces on a
simply supported diaphragm are highest near the perimeter shear walls (i.e.,
reactions). Therefore, nailing requirements for diaphragms may be adjusted
depending on the variation of the shear force in interior regions of the diaphragm.
Generally, these variations are not critical in small residential structures such that
fastening schedules can remain constant throughout the entire diaphragm. If there
are openings in the horizontal diaphragm, the width of the opening dimension is
usually discounted from the width d of the diaphragm when determining the unit
shear load on the diaphragm.
6.5.3.3 Shear Transfer (Sliding)
The shear forces in the diaphragm must be adequately transferred to the
supporting shear walls. For typical residential roof diaphragms, conventional roof
framing connections are often sufficient to transfer the small sliding shear forces
to the shear walls (unless heavy roof coverings are used in high-hazard seismic
areas or steep roof slopes are used in high-hazard wind regions). The transfer of
shear forces from floor diaphragms to shear walls may also be handled by
conventional nailed connections between the floor boundary member (i.e., a band
joist or end joist that is attached to the floor diaphragm sheathing) and the wall
framing below. In heavily loaded conditions, metal shear plates may supplement
the connections. The simple rule to follow for these connections is that the shear
force in from the diaphragm must equal the shear force out to the supporting wall.
Floors supported on a foundation wall are usually connected to a wood sill plate
bolted to the foundation wall; however, the floor joist and/or the band joist may
be directly connected to the foundation wall. Chapter 7 addresses the design of
these shear connections.
6.5.3.4 Diaphragm Stiffness
Diaphragm stiffness may be calculated by using semi-empirical methods
based on principles of mechanics. The equations are found in most modern
building codes and industry guidelines (APA, 1997; ICBO, 1997; ICC, 1999). For
typical residential construction, however, the calculation of diaphragm deflection
is almost never necessary and rarely performed. Therefore, the equations and their
empirical adjustment factors are not repeated here. Nonetheless, the designer who
attempts diaphragm deflection or stiffness calculations is cautioned regarding the
same accuracy concerns mentioned for shear wall drift calculations. The stiffness
of floor and roof diaphragms is highly dependent on the final construction,
including interior finishes (see Section 6.2 on whole-building tests).

Residential Structural Design Guide 6-41
Chapter 6 –Lateral Resistance to Wind and Earthquakes
6.6 Design Examples
EXAMPLE 6.1 Segmented Shear Wall Design
Given
The segmented shear wall line, as shown in the figure below, has the following
dimensions:
h = 8 ft
L
1
= 3 ft
L
2
= 2 ft
L
3
= 8 ft
Wall construction:
• Exterior sheathing is 7/16-inch-thick OSB with 8d pneumatic nails (0.113
inch diameter by 2 3/8 inches long) spaced 6 inches on center on panel
edges and 12 inches on center in panel field
• Interior sheathing is 1/2-inch-thick gypsum wall board with #6 screws at
12 inches on center
• Framing lumber is Spruce-Pine-Fir, Stud grade (specific gravity, G =
0.42); studs are spaced at 16 inches on center.
Loading condition (assumed for illustration)
Wind shear load on wall line = 3,000 lb
Seismic shear load on wall line = 1,000 lb

6-42 Residential Structural Design Guide
Chapter 6 –Lateral Resistance to Wind and Earthquakes
Find 1. Design capacity of the segmented shear wall line for wind and seismic shear
resistance.
2. Base shear connection requirements.
3. Chord tension and compression forces.
4. Load-drift behavior of the segmented shear wall line and estimated drift at
design load conditions.
Solution
1. Determine the factored and adjusted (design) shear capacities for the wall
segments and the total wall line (Section 6.5.2).
F
s,ext
= 905 plf OSB sheathing (Table 6.1)
F
s,int
= 80 plf GWB sheathing (Table 6.3)
The design shear capacity of the wall construction is determined as follows for
each segment (Sections 6.5.2.1 and 6.5.2.2):
F’
s
= F’
s,ext
+ F’
s,int
F’
s
= F
s,ext
C
sp
C
ns
C
ar
[1/SF] + F
s,int
C
ar
[1/SF]
C
sp
= [1-(0.5-0.42)] = 0.92 (Section 6.5.2.3)
C
ns
= 0.75 (Table 6.7)
SF = 2.0 (wind) or 2.5 (seismic) (Table 6.5)
Segment 1
a = h/L
1
= (8 ft)/(3 ft) = 2.67 (segment aspect ratio)
C
ar
= 1/sqrt(0.5(a)) = 0.87 (Section 6.5.2.3)
For wind design
F’
s,1,wind
= (905 plf)(0.92)(0.75)(0.87)(1/2.0) + (80 plf)(0.87)(1/2.0)
= 272 plf + 35 plf = 307 plf
F
ssw,1,wind
= F’
s
(L
1
) = (307 plf)(3 ft) = 921 lb
For seismic design
F’
s,1,seismic
= (905 plf)(0.92)(0.75)(0.87)(1/2.5) + 0 = 218 plf
F
ssw,1,seismic
= (218 plf)(3 ft) = 654 lb
Segment 2
a = h/L
2
= (8 ft)/(2 ft) = 4
C
ar
= 1/sqrt(0.5(a)) = 0.71
For wind design
F’
s,2,wind
= (905 plf)(0.92)(0.75)(0.71)(1/2.0) + (80 plf)(0.71)(1/2.0)
= 222 plf + 28 plf = 250 plf
F
ssw,2,wind
= (250 plf)(2 ft) = 500 lb
For seismic design
F’
s,2,seismic
= (905 plf)(0.92)(0.75)(0.71)(1/2.5) + 0 = 178 plf
F
ssw,2,seismic
= (178 plf)(2 ft) = 356 lb

Residential Structural Design Guide 6-43
Chapter 6 –Lateral Resistance to Wind and Earthquakes
Segment 3
a = h/L
3
= (8 ft)/(8 ft) = 1
C
ar
= 1.0 (for a < 2)
For wind design
F’
s,3,wind
= (905 plf)(0.92)(0.75)(1.0)(1/2.0) + (80 plf)(1.0)(1/2.0)
= 312 plf + 40 plf = 352 plf
F
ssw,3,wind
= (352 plf)(8 ft) = 2,816 lb
For seismic design
F’
s,3,seismic
= (905 plf)(0.92)(0.75)(1.0)(1/2.5) + 0 = 250 plf
F
ssw,3,seismic
= (250 plf)(8 ft) = 2,000 lb
Total for wall line
F
ssw,total,wind
= 921 lb + 500 lb + 2,816 lb = 4,237 lb
F
ssw,total,seismic
= 654 lb + 356 lb + 2,000 lb = 3,010 lb
2. Determine base shear connection requirements to transfer shear load to the foundation
or floor construction below the wall
The wall bottom plate to the left of the door opening is considered to be continuous and
therefore acts as a distributor of the shear load resisted by Segments 1 and 2. The
uniform shear connection load on the bottom plate to the left of the opening is
determined as follows:
Bottom plate length = 3 ft + 3 ft + 2 ft = 8 ft
Base shear resistance required (wind) = (F
ssw,1,wind
+ F
ssw,2,wind
)/(plate length)
= (921 lb + 500 lb)/(8 ft) = 178 plf
Base shear resistance required (seismic) = (F
ssw,1,seismic
+ F
ssw,2,seismic
)/(plate length)
= (654 lb + 356 lb)/(8 ft) = 127 plf
For the wall bottom plate to the right of the door opening, the base shear connection is
equivalent to F’
s,3,wind
= 352 plf or F’
s,3,seismic
= 250 plf for wind and seismic design
respectively.
Normally, this connection is achieved by use of nailed or bolted bottom plate
fastenings. Refer to Chapter 7 and Section 7.3.6 for information on designing these
connections.

6-44 Residential Structural Design Guide
Chapter 6 –Lateral Resistance to Wind and Earthquakes
Notes:
1. While the above example shows that variable bottom plate connections may be
specified based on differing shear transfer requirements for portions of the wall, it
is acceptable practice to use a constant (i.e., worst-case) base shear connection to
simplify construction. However, this can result in excessive fastening requirements
for certain loading conditions and shear wall configurations.
2. For the assumed wind loading of 3,000 lb, the wall has excess design capacity (i.e.,
4,237 lb). The design wind load may be distributed to the shear wall segments in
proportion to their design capacity (as shown in the next step for hold-down
design) to reduce the shear connection loads accordingly. For seismic design, this
should not be done and the base shear connection design should be based on the
design capacity of the shear walls to ensure that a “balanced design” is achieved
(i.e., the base connection capacity meets or exceeds that of the shear wall). This
approach is necessary in seismic design because the actual shear force realized in
the connections may be substantially higher than anticipated by the design seismic
load calculated using an R factor in accordance with Equation 3.8-1 of Chapter 3.
Refer also to the discussion on R factors and overstrength in Section 3.8.4 of
Chapter 3. It should be realized that the GWB interior finish design shear capacity
was not included in determining the design shear wall capacity for seismic loading.
While this is representative of current building code practice, it can create a
situation where the actual shear wall capacity and connection forces experienced
are higher than those used for design purposes. This condition (i.e.,
underestimating of the design shear wall capacity) should also be considered in
providing sufficiently strong overturning connections (i.e., hold-downs) as covered
in the next step.
3. Determine the chord tension and compression (i.e., overturning) forces in the shear wall
segments (Section 6.5.2.4)
Basic equation for overturning (Equation 6.5-7c)
T = C = (d/x)(F’
s
)(h)
Segment 1
h = 8 ft
d = 3 ft
x = d – (width of end studs + offset to center of hold-down anchor bolt)*
= 3 ft – (4.5 in + 1.5 in)(1ft/12 in) = 2.5 ft
*If an anchor strap is used, the offset dimension may be reduced from that determined
above assuming a side-mounted hold-down bracket. Also, depending on the number of
studs at the end of the wall segment and the type of bracket used, the offset dimension
will vary and must be verified by the designer.
F’
s,1,wind
= 307 plf
F’
s,1,seismic
= 218 plf
T = C = (3 ft / 2.5 ft)(307 plf)(8 ft) = 2,947 lb (wind)
T = C = (3 ft / 2.5 ft)(218 plf)(8 ft) = 2,093 lb (seismic)

Residential Structural Design Guide 6-45
Chapter 6 –Lateral Resistance to Wind and Earthquakes
Segment 2
h = 8 ft
d = 2 ft
x = 2 ft – 0.5 ft = 1.5 ft
F’
s,2,wind
= 250 plf
F’
s,2,seismic
= 178 plf
T = C = (2 ft / 1.5 ft)(250 plf)(8 ft) = 2,667 lb (wind)
T = C = (2 ft / 1.5 ft)(178 plf)(8 ft) = 1,899 lb (seismic)
Segment 3
h = 8 ft
d = 8 ft
x = 8 ft – 0.5 ft = 7.5 ft
F’
s,2,wind
= 352 plf
F’
s,2,seismic
= 250 plf
T = C = (8 ft / 7.5 ft)(352 plf)(8 ft) = 3,004 lb (wind)
T = C = (8 ft / 7.5 ft)(250 plf)(8 ft) = 2,133 lb (seismic)
Notes:
1. In each of the above cases, the seismic tension and compression forces on the shear
wall chords are less than that determined for the wind loading condition. This
occurrence is the result of using a larger safety factor to determine the shear wall
design capacity and the practice of not including the interior sheathing (GWB)
design shear capacity for seismic design. Thus, the chord forces based on the
seismic shear wall design capacity may be under-designed unless a sufficient safety
factor is used in the manufacturer’s rated hold-down capacity to compensate. In
other words, the ultimate capacity of the hold-down connector should be greater
than the overturning force that could be created based on the ultimate shear
capacity of the wall, including the contribution of the interior GWB finish. This
condition should be verified by the designer since the current code practice may
not provide explicit guidance on the issue of balanced design on the basis of system
capacity (i.e., connector capacity relative to shear wall capacity). This issue is
primarily a concern with seismic design because of the higher safety factor used to
determine design shear wall capacity and the code practice not to include the
contributing shear capacity of the interior finish.
2. The compression chord force should be recognized as not being a point load at the
top of the stud(s) comprising the compression chord. Rather, the compression
chord force is accumulated through the sheathing and begins at the top of the wall
with a value of zero and increases to C (as determined above) at the base of the
compression chord. Therefore, this condition will affect how the compression
chord is modeled from the standpoint of determining its capacity as a column using
the column equations in the NDS.
3. The design of base shear connections and overturning forces assume that the wind
uplift forces at the base of the wall are offset by 0.6 times the dead load (ASD) at
that point in the load path or that an additional load path for uplift is provided by
metal strapping or other means.
4. As mentioned in Step 2 for the design of base shear connections, the wind load on
the designated shear wall segments may be distributed according to the design
capacity of each segment in proportion to that of the total shear wall line. This
method is particularly useful when the design shear capacity of the wall line is
substantially higher than the shear demand required by the wind load as is
applicable to this hypothetical example. Alternatively, a shear wall segment may
be eliminated from the analysis by not specifying restraining devices for the
segment (i.e., hold-down brackets). If the former approach is taken, the wind load
is distributed as follows:

6-46 Residential Structural Design Guide
Chapter 6 –Lateral Resistance to Wind and Earthquakes
Fraction of design wind load to Segment 1:
F
ssw,1,wind
/F
ssw,total,wind
= (921 lb)/(4,237 lb) = 0.22
Fraction of wind load to Segment 2:
F
ssw,2,wind
/F
ssw,total,wind
= (500 lb)/(4,237 lb) = 0.12
Fraction of wind load to Segment 3:
F
ssw,3,wind
/F
ssw,total,wind
= (2,816 lb)/(4,237 lb) = 0.66
Thus, the unit shear load on each shear wall segment due to the design wind shear of
3,000 lb on the total wall line is determined as follows:
Segment 1: 0.22(3,000 lb)/(3 ft) = 220 plf
Segment 2: 0.12(3,000 lb)/(2 ft) = 180 plf
Segment 3: 0.66(3,000 lb)/(8 ft) = 248 plf
Now, the overturning forces (chord forces) determined above and the base shear
connection requirements determined in Step 2 may be recalculated by substituting the
above values, which are based on the design wind loading. This approach only applies
to the wind loading condition when the design wind loading on the wall line is less than
the design capacity of the wall line. As mentioned, it may be more efficient to
eliminate a designed shear wall segment to bring the total design shear capacity more in
line with the design wind shear load on the wall. Alternatively, a lower capacity shear
wall construction may be specified to better match the loading condition (i.e., use a
thinner wood structural sheathing panel, etc.). This decision will depend on the
conditions experienced in other walls of the building such that a single wall
construction type may be used throughout for all exterior walls (i.e., simplified
construction).
4. Determine the load-drift behavior of the wall line.
Only the load-drift behavior for wind design is shown below. For seismic design, a
simple substitution of the design shear capacities of the wall segments and the safety
factor for seismic design (as determined previously) may be used to determine a load-
drift relationship for use in seismic design.
The basic equation for load-drift estimation of a shear wall segment is as follows:




















=∆
8
h
F
V
a
G
5.0
2.2
8.2
ULT,SSW
d4
(Equation 6.5-9)
h = 8 ft
G = 0.42 (Spruce-Pine-Fir)
Aspect ratios for the wall segments
a
1
= 2.67
a
2
= 4.0
a
3
= 1.0
F
ssw,ult,1,wind
=F
ssw,1,wind
(SF) = (921 lb)(2.0) = 1,842 lb
F
ssw,ult,2,wind
=F
ssw,2,wind
(SF) = (500 lb)(2.0) = 1,000 lb
F
ssw,ult,3,wind
=F
ssw,3,wind
(SF) = (2,816 lb)(2.0) = 5,632 lb

Residential Structural Design Guide 6-47
Chapter 6 –Lateral Resistance to Wind and Earthquakes
Therefore, the total ultimate capacity of the wall for wind loading is
F
ssw,ult,wall,wind
= 1,842 lb + 1,000 lb + 5,632 lb = 8,474 lb
Substituting the above values into the basic load-drift equation above, the following
load-drift equations are determined for each segment:
Segment 1: ∆
1
= 2.41x10
-9
(V
d,1,wind
)
2.8
(inches)
Segment 2: ∆
2
= 1.45x10
-8
(V
d,2,wind
)
2.8
(inches)
Segment 1: ∆
3
= 2.41x10
-10
(V
d,3,wind
)
2.8
(inches)
Realizing that each segment must deflect equally (or nearly so) as the wall line deflects,
the above deflections may be set equivalent to the total wall line drift as follows:
∆
wall
= ∆
1
= ∆
2
= ∆
3
Further, the above equations may be solved for V
d
as follows:
Segment 1: V
d,1,wind
= 1,196 (∆
wall
)
0.36
Segment 2: V
d,2,wind
= 630 (∆
wall
)
0.36
Segment 3: V
d,3,wind
= 1,997 (∆
wall
)
0.36
The sum of the above equations must equal the wind shear load (demand) on the wall at
any given drift of the wall as follows:
V
d,wall,wind
= V
d,1,wind
+ V
d,2,wind
+ V
d,3,wind
= 3,823 (∆
wall
)
0.36
Solving for ∆
wall
, the following final equation is obtained for the purpose of estimating
drift and any given wind shear load from zero to F
ssw,ult,wall,wind
:
∆
wall
= 9.32x10
-11
(V
d,wall,wind
)
2.8
For the design wind load on the wall of 3,000 lb as assumed in this example, the wall
drift is determined as follows:
∆
wall
= 9.32x10
-11
(3,000)
2.8
= 0.51 inches
Note: This analysis, as with most other methods of determining drift, may overlook
many factors in the as-built construction that serve to increase or decrease drift. As
discussed in Section 6.2, whole building tests seem to confirm that drift is generally
over-predicted.
Conclusion
In this example, the determination of the design shear capacity of a segmented shear
wall was presented for seismic design and wind design applications. Issues related to
connection design for base shear transfer and overturning forces (chord tension and
compression) were also discussed and calculations were made to estimate these forces
using a conventional design approach. In particular, issues related to capacity-based
design and “balanced design” of connections were discussed. Finally, a method to
determine the load-drift behavior of a segmented shear wall line was presented. The
final design may vary based on designer decisions and judgments (as well as local code
requirements) related to the considerations and calculations as given in this example.

6-48 Residential Structural Design Guide
Chapter 6 –Lateral Resistance to Wind and Earthquakes
EXAMPLE 6.2 Perforated Shear Wall Design
Given
The perforated shear wall, as shown in the figure below, is essentially the same
wall used in Example 6.1. The following dimensions are used:
h = 8 ft
L
1
= 3 ft
L
2
= 2 ft
L
3
= 8 ft
L = 19 ft
A
1
= 3.2 ft x 5.2 ft = 16.6 sf (rough window opening area)
A
2
= 3.2 ft x 6.8 ft = 21.8 sf (rough door opening area)
Wall construction:
• Exterior sheathing is 7/16-inch-thick OSB with 8d pneumatic nails
(0.113 inch diameter by 2 3/8 inches long) spaced 6 inches on center on
panel edges and 12 inches on center in panel field
• Interior sheathing is 1/2-inch-thick gypsum wall board with #6 screws
at 12 inches on center
• Framing lumber is Spruce-Pine-Fir, Stud grade (specific gravity, G =
0.42); studs are spaced at 16 inches on center.
Loading condition (assumed for illustration):
Wind shear load on wall line = 3,000 lb
Seismic shear load on wall line = 1,000 lb

Residential Structural Design Guide 6-49
Chapter 6 –Lateral Resistance to Wind and Earthquakes
Find 1. Design capacity of the perforated shear wall line for wind and seismic shear
resistance.
2. Base shear connection requirements.
3. Chord tension and compression forces.
4. Load-drift behavior of the perforated shear wall line and estimated drift at
design load conditions.
Solution
1. Determine the factored and adjusted (design) shear capacity for the perforated
shear wall line.
F’
s
= F
s
C
sp
C
ns
[1/SF] (Eq. 6.5-1a)
C
sp
= [1-(0.5-0.42)] = 0.92 (Section 6.5.2.3)
C
ns
= 0.75 (Table 6.7)
SF = 2.0 (wind design) or 2.5 (seismic design) (Table 6.5)
F
s
= F
s,ext
+ F
s,int
(Section 6.5.2.1)
F
s,ext
= 905 plf (Table 6.1)
F
s,int
= 80 plf (Table 6.3)
For wind design
F
s,wind
= 905 plf + 80 plf = 985 plf
F’
s,wind
= (985 plf)(0.92)(0.75)(1/2.0) = 340 plf
For seismic design
F
s,seismic
= 905 plf + 0 plf = 905 plf
F’
s,seismic
= (905 plf)(0.92)(0.75)(1/2.5) = 250 plf
The design capacity of the perforated shear wall is now determined as follows:
F
psw
= F’
s
C
op
C
dl
L (Eq. 6.5-1b)
where,
C
op
= r/(3-2r)
r = 1/(1+α/β)
α = ΣA
o
/(h x L) = (A
1
+ A
2
)/(h x L)
= (16.6 sf + 21.8 sf)/(8 ft)(19 ft) = 0.25
β = ΣL
i
/L = (L
1
+ L
2
+ L
3
)/L
= (3 ft + 2 ft + 8 ft)/(19 ft) = 0.68
r = 1/(1+0.25/0.68) = 0.73
C
op
= 0.73/(3-2(0.73)) = 0.47
C
dl
= 1 + 0.15(w
D
/300) ≤ 1.15
Assume for the sake of this example that the roof dead load supported at the top of
the wall is 225 plf and that the design wind uplift force on the top of the wall is
0.6(225 plf) – 400 plf = -265 plf (net design uplift). Thus, for wind design in this
case, no dead load can be considered on the wall and the C
dl
factor does not apply
for calculation of the perforated shear wall resistance to wind loads. It does apply
to seismic design, as follows:

6-50 Residential Structural Design Guide
Chapter 6 –Lateral Resistance to Wind and Earthquakes
w
D
= 0.6*(225 plf) = 135 plf
*The 0.6 factor comes from the load combinations 0.6D + (W or 0.7E) or 0.6D – W
u
as
given in Chapter 3.
C
dl
= 1 + 0.15(135/300) = 1.07
For wind design,
F
psw,wind
= (340 plf)(0.47)(1.0)(19 ft) = 3,036 lb
For seismic design,
F
psw,seismic
= (250 plf)(0.47)(1.07)(19 ft) = 2,389 lb
Note: In Example 6.1 using the segmented shear wall approach, the design shear
capacity of the wall line was estimated as 4,237 lb (wind) and 3,010 lb (seismic) when
all of the segments were restrained against overturning by use of hold-down devices.
However, given that the design shear load on the wall is 3,000 lb (wind) and 1,000 lb
(seismic), the perforated shear wall design capacity as determined above is adequate,
although somewhat less than that of the segmented shear wall. Therefore, hold-downs
are only required at the wall ends (see Step 3).
2. Determine the base shear connection requirement for the perforated shear wall.
If the wall had a continuous bottom plate that serves as a distributor of the shear forces
resisted by various portions of the wall, the base shear connection could be based on the
perforated shear wall’s design capacity as determined in Step 1 as follows:
For wind design,
Uniform base shear = (3,036 lb)/19 ft = 160 plf
For seismic design,
Uniform base shear = (2,389 lb)/19 ft = 126 plf
However, the wall bottom plate is not continuous in this example and, therefore, the
base shears experienced by the portions of the wall to the left and right of the door
opening are different as was the case in the segmented shear wall design approach of
Example 6.1. As a conservative solution, the base shear connection could be designed
to resist the design unit shear capacity of the wall construction, F’
s,wind
= 340 plf or
F’
s,seismic
= 250 plf. Newer codes that recognize the perforated shear method may require
this more conservative approach to be used when the bottom plate is not continuous
such that it serves as a distributor (i.e., similar in function to a shear wall collector
except shear transfer is out of the wall instead of into the wall). Of course, the bottom
plate must be continuous and any splices must be adequately detailed in a fashion
similar to collectors (see Example 6.3).

Residential Structural Design Guide 6-51
Chapter 6 –Lateral Resistance to Wind and Earthquakes
As an alternative, the portion of the wall to the left of the door opening can be treated as
a separate perforated shear wall for the left-to-right loading condition. In doing so, the
design shear capacity of the left portion of the wall may be determined to be 1,224 lb
and the base shear connection required is (1,224 lb)/8ft = 153 plf, much less than the
340 lb required in the wind load condition. The right side of the wall is solid sheathed
and, for the right-to-left loading condition, the base shear is equivalent to the design
shear capacity of the wall or 340 plf. These calculations can also be performed using
the seismic design values for the perforated shear wall. This approach is based on the
behavior of a perforated shear wall where the leading edge and the immediately
adjacent shear wall segments are fully restrained as in the segmented shear wall
approach for one direction of loading. Thus, these segments will realize their full unit
shear capacity for one direction of loading. Any interior segments will contribute, but at
a reduced amount do to the reduced restraint condition. This behavior is represented in
the adjustment provided by the C
op
factor which is the basis of the perforated shear wall
method. Unfortunately, the exact distribution of the uplift forces and shear forces within
the wall are not known. It is for this reason that they are assigned conservative values
for design purposes. Also, to accommodate potential uplift forces on the bottom plate in
the regions of interior perforated shear wall segments, the base shear connections are
required to resist an uplift load equivalent to the design unit shear capacity of the wall
construction. In the case of this example, the base shear connection would need to resist
a shear load of 340 plf (for the wind design condition) and an uplift force of 340 plf
(even if under a zero wind uplift load).
Testing has shown that for walls constructed similar to the one illustrated in this
example, a bottom plate connection of 2 16d pneumatic nails (0.131 inch diameter by 3
inches long) at 16 inches on center or 5/8-inch-diameter anchor bolts at 6 feet on center
provides suitable shear and uplift resistance – at least equivalent to the capacity of the
shear wall construction under conditions of no dead load or wind uplift (NAHBRC,
1999). For other conditions, this connection must be designed following the procedures
given in Chapter 7 using the conservative assumptions as stated above.
As an alternative base connection that eliminates the need for hold-down brackets at the
ends of the perforated shear wall, straps can be fastened to the individual studs to resist
the required uplift force of 340 plf as applicable to this example. If the studs are spaced
16 inches on center, the design capacity of the strap must be (340 plf)(1.33 ft/stud) =
452 lb per stud. If an uplift load due to wind uplift on the roof must also be transferred
through these straps, the strap design capacity must be increased accordingly. In this
example, the net wind uplift at the top of the wall was assumed to be 265 plf. At the
base of the wall, the uplift is 265 plf – 0.6(8 ft)(8 psf) = 227 plf. Thus, the total design
uplift restraint must provide 340 plf + 227 plf = 567 plf. On a per stud basis (16 inch
on center framing), the design load is 1.33 ft/stud x 567 plf = 754 lb/stud. This value
must be increased for studs adjacent to wall openings where the wind uplift force in
increased. This can be achieved by using multiple straps or by specifying a larger strap
in these locations. Of course, the above combination of uplift loads assumes that the
design wind uplift load on the roof occurs simultaneously with the design shear load on
the wall. However, this condition is not usually representative of actual conditions
depending on wind orientation, building configuration, and the shear wall location
relative to the uplift load paths.
3. Determine the chord tension and compression forces
The chord tension and compression forces are determined following the same method
as used in Example 6.1 for the segmented shear wall design method, but only for the
first wall segment in the perforated shear wall line (i.e. the restrained segment).
Therefore, the tension forces at the end of the wall are identical to those calculated in
Example 6.1 as shown below:

6-52 Residential Structural Design Guide
Chapter 6 –Lateral Resistance to Wind and Earthquakes
Left end of the wall (Segment 1 in Example 6.1):
T = 2,947 lb (wind design)
T = 2,093 lb (seismic design)
Right end of the wall (Segment 3 in Example 6.1):
T = 3,004 lb (wind design)
T = 2,133 lb (seismic design)
Note: One tension bracket (hold-down) is required at each the end of the perforated
shear wall line and not on the interior segments. Also, refer to the notes in Example 6.1
regarding “balanced design” of overturning connections and base shear connections,
particularly when designing for seismic loads.
4. Determine the load-drift behavior of the perforated shear wall line.
The basic equation for load-drift estimation of a perforated shear wall line is as follows
(Section 6.5.2.6):




























=∆
8
h
F
V
r
1
G
5.0
8.1
8.2
ULT,PSW
d
(Eq. 6.5-8)
h = 8 ft
G = 0.42(specific gravity for Spruce-Pine-Fir)
r = 0.73 (sheathing area ratio determined in Step 1)
F
psw,ult,wind
= (F
psw,wind
)(SF) = (3,036 lb)(2.0) = 6,072 lb
F
psw,ult,seismic
= (F
psw,seismic
)(SF) = (2,389 lb)(2.5) = 5,973 lb
Substituting in the above equation,
∆
wind
= 6.4x10
-11
(V
d,wind
)
2.8
∆
seismic
= 6.7x10
-11
(V
d,seismic
)
2.8
For the design wind load of 3,000 lb and the design seismic load of 1,000 lb (assumed
for the purpose of this example), the drift is estimated as follows:
∆
wind
= 6.4x10
-11
(3,000)
2.8
= 0.35 inches
∆
seismic
= 6.7x10
-11
(1,000)
2.8
= 0.02 inches
Note: The reader is reminded of the uncertainties in determining drift as discussed in
Example 6.1 and also in Chapter 6. For seismic design, some codes may require the
design seismic drift to be amplified (multiplied by) a factor of 4 to account for the
potential actual forces that may be experienced relative to the design forces that are
determined using an R factor; refer to Chapter 3 for additional discussion. Thus, the
amplified drift may be determined as 4 x 0.02 inches = 0.08 inches. However, if the
seismic shear load is magnified (i.e., 4 x 1,000 lb = 4,000 lb) to account for a possible
actual seismic load (not modified for the seismic response of the shear wall system), the
seismic drift calculated in the above equation becomes 0.8 inches which is an order of
magnitude greater. The load adjustment is equivalent to the use of an R of 1.5 instead of
6 in Equation 3.8-1 of Chapter 3. However, this latter approach of magnifying the load

Residential Structural Design Guide 6-53
Chapter 6 –Lateral Resistance to Wind and Earthquakes
is not currently required in the existing building codes for drift determination. As
mentioned, drift is not usually considered in residential design. Finally, the above
equations may be used to determine a load-drift curve for a perforated shear wall for
values of V
d
ranging from 0 to F
psw,ult
. While the curve represents the non-linear
behavior of a perforated shear wall, it should only be considered as a representation,
and not an exact solution.
Conclusion
In this example, the determination of the design shear capacity of a perforated shear
wall was presented for seismic design and wind design applications. Issues related to
connection design for base shear transfer and overturning forces (chord tension) were
also discussed and calculations (or conservative assumptions) were made to estimate
these forces. In particular, issues related to capacity-based design and “balanced
design” of connections were discussed. Finally, a method to determine the load-drift
behavior of a perforated shear wall line was presented. The final design may vary based
on designer decisions and judgments (as well as local code requirements) related to the
considerations and calculations as given in this example.

6-54 Residential Structural Design Guide
Chapter 6 –Lateral Resistance to Wind and Earthquakes
EXAMPLE 6.3 Shear Wall Collector Design
Given
The example shear wall, assumed loading conditions, and dimensions are shown
in the figure below.
Find The maximum collector tension force
Solution
1. The collector force diagram is shown below based on the shear wall and loading
conditions in the figure above.

Residential Structural Design Guide 6-55
Chapter 6 –Lateral Resistance to Wind and Earthquakes
The first point at the interior end of the left shear wall segment is determined as
follows:
200 plf (3 ft) – 333 plf (3 ft) = - 400 lb (compression force)
The second point at the interior end of the right shear wall segment is determined as
follows:
- 400 lb + 200 plf (9 ft) = 1,400 lb (tension force)
The collector load at the right-most end of the wall returns to zero as follows:
1,400 lb – 375 plf (8 ft) + 200 plf (8 ft) = 0 lb
Conclusion
The maximum theoretical collector tension force is 1,400 lb at the interior edge of the
8-foot shear wall segment. The analysis does not consider the contribution of the
“unrestrained” wall portions that are not designated shear wall segments and that would
serve to reduce the amount of tension (or compression) force developed in the collector.
In addition, the load path assumed in the collector does not consider the system of
connections and components that may share load with the collector (i.e., wall sheathing
and connections, floor or roof construction above and their connections, etc.).
Therefore, the collector load determined by assuming the top plate acts as an
independent element can be considered very conservative depending on the wall-
floor/roof construction conditions. Regardless, it is typical practice to design the
collector (and any splices in the collector) to resist a tension force as calculated in this
example. The maximum compressive force in the example collector is determined by
reversing the loading direction and is equal in magnitude to the maximum tension force.
Compressive forces are rarely a concern when at least a double top plate is used as a
collector, particularly when the collector is braced against lateral buckling by
attachment to other construction (as would be generally necessary to deliver the load to
the collector from somewhere else in the building).

6-56 Residential Structural Design Guide
Chapter 6 –Lateral Resistance to Wind and Earthquakes
EXAMPLE 6.4 Horizontal (Floor) Diaphragm Design
Given
The example floor diaphragm and its loading and support conditions are shown
in the figure below. The relevant dimensions and loads are as follows:
d = 24 ft
l = 48 ft
w = 200 plf (from wind or seismic lateral load)*
*Related to the diaphragm’s tributary load area; see Chapter 3 and discussions in
Chapter 6.
The shear walls are equally spaced and it is assumed that the diaphragm is
flexible (i.e. experiences beam action) and that the shear wall supports are rigid.
This assumption is not correct because the diaphragm may act as a “deep beam”
and distribute loads to the shear wall by “arching” action rather than bending
action. Also, the shear walls cannot be considered to be perfectly rigid or to
exhibit equivalent stiffness except when designed exactly the same with the
same interconnection stiffness and base support stiffness. Regardless, the
assumptions made in this example are representative of typical practice.

Residential Structural Design Guide 6-57
Chapter 6 –Lateral Resistance to Wind and Earthquakes
Find 1. The maximum design unit shear force in the diaphragm (assuming simple beam
action) and the required diaphragm construction.
2. The maximum design moment in the diaphragm (assuming simple beam action)
and the associated chord forces.
Solution
1. The maximum shear force in the diaphragm occurs at the center shear wall
support. Using the beam equations in Appendix A for a 2-span beam, the
maximum shear force is determined as follows:
lb000,3
2
ft48
)plf200(
8
5
2
l
w
8
5
V
max
=





=





=
The maximum design unit shear in the diaphragm is determined as follows:
plf125
ft24
lb000,3
d
V
v
max
max
===
From Table 6.8, the lightest unblocked diaphragm provides adequate resistance.
Unblocked means that the panel edges perpendicular to the framing (i.e., joists or
rafters) are not attached to blocking. The perimeter, however, is attached to a
continuous member to resist chord forces. For typical residential floor
construction a 3/4-inch-thick subfloor may be used which would provide at least
240 plf of design shear capacity. In typical roof construction, a minimum 7/16-
inch-thick sheathing is used which would provide about 230 plf of design shear
capacity. However, residential roof construction does not usually provide the
edge conditions (i.e., continuous band joist of 2x lumber) associated with the
diaphragm values in Table 6.8. Regardless, roof diaphragm performance has
rarely (if ever) been a problem in light-frame residential construction and these
values are often used to approximate roof diaphragm design values.
Note: The shear forces at other regions of the diaphragm and at the locations of
the end shear wall supports can be determined in a similar manner using the beam

equations in Appendix A. These shear forces are equivalent to the connection
forces that must transfer shear between the diaphragm and the shear walls at the
ends of the diaphragm. However, for the center shear wall, the reaction
(connection) force is twice the unit shear force in the diaphragm at that location
(see beam equations in Appendix A). Therefore, the connection between the
center shear wall and the diaphragm in this example must resist a design shear
load of 2 x 125 plf = 250 plf. However, this load is very dependent on the
assumption of a “flexible” diaphragm and “rigid” shear walls.

6-58 Residential Structural Design Guide
Chapter 6 –Lateral Resistance to Wind and Earthquakes
2. The maximum moment in the diaphragm also occurs at the center shear wall support.
Using the beam equations in Appendix A, it is determined as follows:
lbft400,14
2
ft48
)plf200(
8
1
2
l
w
8
1
M
22
max
−=





=





=
The maximum chord tension and compression forces are at the same location and are
determined as follows based on the principle of a force couple that is equivalent to the
moment:
lb600
ft24
lbft400,14
d
M
CT
max
=
−
===
Therefore, the chord members (i.e., band joist and associated wall or foundation
framing that is attached to the chord) and splices must be able to resist 600 lb of tension
or compression force. Generally, these forces are adequately resisted by the framing
systems bounding the diaphragm. However, the adequacy of the chords should be
verified by the designer based on experience and analysis as above.
Conclusion
In this example, the basic procedure and principles for horizontal diaphragm design
were presented. Assumptions required to conduct a diaphragm analysis based on
conventional beam theory were also discussed.

Residential Structural Design Guide 6-59
Chapter 6 –Lateral Resistance to Wind and Earthquakes
EXAMPLE 6.5 Horizontal Shear Load Distribution Methods
Given
General
In this example, the first floor plan of a typical two-story house with an attached
garage (see Figure below) is used to demonstrate the three methods of
distributing shear loads discussed in Chapter 6, Section 6.4.2. The first story
height is 8 ft (i.e., 8 ft ceiling height). Only the load in the North-South (N-S)
direction is considered in the example. In a complete design, the load in the
East-West (E-W) direction would also need to be considered.

6-60 Residential Structural Design Guide
Chapter 6 –Lateral Resistance to Wind and Earthquakes
Lateral Load Conditions
The following design N-S lateral loads are determined for the story under
consideration using the methods described in Chapter 3 for wind and seismic
loads. A fairly high wind load and seismic load condition is assumed for the
purpose of the example.
Design N-S Wind Lateral Load (120 mph gust, exposure B)
House: 17,411 lb total story shear
Garage: 3,928 lb total story shear
Total: 21,339 lb
Design N-S Seismic Lateral Load (mapped S
s
= 1.5g)
House: 7,493 lb total story shear (tributary weight is 37,464 lb)
Garage: 1,490 lb total story shear (tributary weight is 7,452 lb)
Total: 8,983 lb
Designation of Shear Walls in N-S Direction
Initially, there are four N-S lines designated in the first story for shear wall
construction. The wall lines are A, B, D, and E. If needed, an interior wall line
may also be designated and designed as a shear wall (see wall line C in the figure
above).
The available length of full-height wall segments in each N-S shear wall line is
estimated as follows from the floor plan:
Wall Line A: 2 ft + 2 ft = 4 ft (garage return walls)
Wall Line B: 1.33 ft* + 11 ft + 9 ft = 20 ft (garage/house shared wall)
Wall Line D: 14 ft = 14 ft (den exterior wall)
Wall Line E: 2 ft + 3 ft + 2 ft = 7 ft (living room exterior wall)
Total: = 45 ft
*The narrow 1.33 ft segment is not included in the analysis due to the segment’s
aspect ratio of 8 ft/1.33 ft = 6, which is greater than the maximum allowable of 4.
Some current building codes may restrict the segment aspect ratio to a maximum
of 2 or 3.5 depending on the code and the edition in local use. In such a case,
many of the useable shear wall segments would be eliminated (i.e., all of the 2 ft
segments). Thus, the garage opening wall would require larger segments, a
portal frame (see Section 6.5.2.7), or transfer of the garage shear load to the
house by torsion (i.e., treat the garage as a cantilever projecting from the house
under a uniform lateral load).

Residential Structural Design Guide 6-61
Chapter 6 –Lateral Resistance to Wind and Earthquakes
Find 1. Using the “total shear method” of horizontal shear load distribution, determine
the total length of shear wall required and the required shear wall construction
in the N-S direction.
2. Using the “tributary area method” of horizontal shear load distribution,
determine the shear resistance and wall construction required in each N-S
shear wall line.
3. Using the “relative stiffness method” of horizontal shear load distribution,
determine the shear loads on the N-S shear wall lines.
Solution
1. Using the total shear approach, determine the unit shear capacity required based
on the given amount of available shear wall segments in each N-S wall line and
the total N-S shear load.
In this part of the example, it is assumed that the wall lines will be designed as
segmented shear wall lines. From the given information, the total length of N-S
shear wall available is 45 ft. It is typical practice in this method to not include
segments with aspect ratios greater than 2 since stiffness effects on the narrow
segments are not explicitly considered. This would eliminate the 2 ft segments
and the total available length of shear wall would be 45 ft – 8 ft = 37 ft in the N-S
direction.
The required design unit shear capacity of the shear wall construction and ultimate
capacity is determined as follows for the N-S lateral design loads:
Wind N-S
F’
s,wind
= (21,339 lb)/37 ft = 576 plf
F
s, wind
= (F’
s,wind
)(SF) = (576 plf)(2.0) = 1,152 plf
Thus, the unfactored (ultimate) and unadjusted unit shear capacity for the shear
walls must meet or exceed 1,152 plf. Assuming that standard 1/2-thick GWB
finish is used on the interior wall surfaces (80 plf minimum from Table 6.3), the
required ultimate capacity of the exterior sheathing is determined as follows:
F
s,wind
= F
s,ext
+ F
s,int
F
s,ext
= 1,152 plf – 80 plf = 1,072 plf
From Table 6.1, any of the wall constructions that use a 4 inch nail spacing at the
panel perimeter exceed this requirement. By specifying and 3/8-thick Structural I
wood structural panel with 8d common nails spaced at 4 inches on center on the
panel edges (12 inches on center in the panel field), the design of the wall
construction is complete and hold-down connections and base shear connections
must be designed. If a different nail is used or a framing lumber species with G <
0.5, then the values in Table 6.1 must be multiplied by the C
ns
and C
sp
factors. For
example, assume the following framing lumber and nails are used in the shear
wall construction:
lumber species: Spruce-Pine-Fir (G=0.42) C
sp
= 0.92
nail type: 8d pneumatic, 0.113-inch-diameter C
ns
= 0.75

6-62 Residential Structural Design Guide
Chapter 6 –Lateral Resistance to Wind and Earthquakes
Thus, values in Table 6.1 would need to be multiplied by (0.92)(0.75) = 0.69. This
adjustment requires a 15/32-inch-thick sheathing with the 8d nails (i.e., 1,539 plf x 0.69
= 1,062 plf which is close enough to the required 1,072 plf for practical design
purposes). Alternatively, a 7/16-inch thick wood structural panel sheathing could be
used in accordance with footnote 5 of Table 6.1; however, the horizontal joint between
panels would need to be blocked. In extreme lateral load conditions, it may be
necessary (and more efficient) to consider a “double sheathed” wall construction (i.e.,
structural wood panels on both sides of the wall framing) or to consider the addition of
an interior shear wall line (i.e., design the interior walls along wall line C as shear
walls).
Seismic N-S
F’
s,seismic
= (8,983 lb)/37 ft = 243 plf
F
s, seismic
= (F’
s,seismic
)(SF) = (243 plf)(2.5) = 608 plf
Thus, the unfactored (ultimate) and unadjusted unit shear capacity for the wall line must
meet or exceed 608 plf. Since seismic codes do not permit the consideration of a 1/2-
thick GWB interior finish, the required ultimate capacity of the exterior sheathing is
determined as follows:
F
s,seismic
= F
s,ext
= 608 plf
From Table 6.1, any of the wood structural panel wall constructions that use a 6 inch
nail spacing at the panel perimeter exceed this requirement. By specifying 3/8-inch-
thick Structural I wood structural panels with 8d common nails spaced at 6 inches on
center on the panel edges (12 inches on center in the panel field), the design of the wall
construction is complete and hold-down connections and base shear connections must
be designed. If a different nail is used or a framing lumber species with G < 0.5, then
the values in Table 6.1 must be multiplied by the C
ns
and C
sp
factors as demonstrated
above for the N-S wind load case.
The base shear connections may be designed in this method by considering the total
length of continuous bottom plate in the N-S shear wall lines. As estimated from the
plan, this length is approximately 56 feet. Thus, the base connection design shear load
(parallel to the grain of the bottom plate) is determined as follows:
Base wind design shear load = (21,339 lb)/(56 ft) = 381 plf
Base seismic design shear load = (8,983 lb)/(56 ft) = 160 plf
The base shear connections may be designed and specified following the methods
discussed in Chapter 7 – Connections. A typical 5/8-inch-diameter anchor bolt spaced
at 6 feet on center or standard bottom plate nailing may be able to resist as much as 800
plf (ultimate shear capacity) which would provided a “balanced” design capacity of 400
plf or 320 plf for wind and seismic design with safety factors of 2.0 and 2.5,
respectively. Thus, a conventional wall bottom plate connection may be adequate for
the above condition; refer to Chapter 7 for connection design information and the
discussion in Section 7.3.6 for more details on tested bottom plate connections.
If the roof uplift load is not completely offset by 0.6 times the dead load at the base of
the first story wall, then strapping to transfer the net uplift from the base of the wall to
the foundation or construction below must be provided.
The hold-down connections for the each shear wall segment in the designated shear
wall lines are designed in the manner shown in Example 6.1. Any overturning forces
originating from shear walls on the second story must also be included as described in
Section 6.4.2.4.

Residential Structural Design Guide 6-63
Chapter 6 –Lateral Resistance to Wind and Earthquakes
Notes:
1. The contribution of the interior walls to the lateral resistance is neglected in the
above analysis for wind and seismic loading. As discussed in Chapter 6, these
walls can contribute significantly to the lateral resistance of a home and serve to
reduce the designated shear wall loads and connection loads through alternate,
“non-designed” load paths. In this example, there is approximately 40 ft of interior
partition walls in the N-S direction that each have a minimum length of about 8 ft
or more (small segments not included). Assuming a design unit shear value of 80
plf / 2 = 40 plf (safety factor of 2), the design lateral resistance may be at least 40 ft
x 40 plf = 1,600 lb. While this is not a large amount, it should factor into the
design consideration, particularly when a lateral design solution is considered to be
marginal based on an analysis that does not consider interior partition walls.
2. Given the lower wind shear load in the E-W direction, the identical seismic story
shear load in the E-W direction, and the greater available length of shear wall in the
E-W direction, an adequate amount of lateral resistance should be no problem for
shear walls in the E-W direction. It is probable that some of the available E-W
shear wall segments may not even be required to be designed and detailed as shear
wall segments. Also, with hold-down brackets at the ends of the N-S walls that are
detailed to anchor a common corner stud (to which the corner sheathing panels on
each wall are fastened with the required panel edge fastening), the E-W walls are
essentially perforated shear wall lines and may be treated as such in evaluating the
design shear capacity of the E-W wall lines.
3. The distribution of the house shear wall elements appears to be reasonably “even”
in this example. However, the garage opening wall could be considered a problem
if sufficient connection of the garage to the house is not provided to prevent the
garage from rotating separately from the house under the N-S wind or seismic load.
Thus, the garage walls and garage roof diaphragm should be adequately attached to
the house so that the garage and house act as a structural unit. This process will be
detailed in the next part of this example.
2. Determine the design shear load on each wall line based on the tributary area method.
Following the tributary area method of horizontal force distribution, the loads on the
garage and the house are treated separately. The garage lateral load is assumed to act
through the center of the garage and the house load is assumed to act through the center
of the house. The extension of the living room on the right side of the plan is only one
story and is considered negligible in its impact to the location of the real force center;
although, this may be considered differently by the designer. Therefore, the lateral force
(load) center on the garage is considered to act in the N-S direction at a location one-
half the distance between wall lines A and B (see the given floor plan diagram).
Similarly, the N-S force center on the house may be considered to act half-way between
wall lines B and D (or perhaps a foot or less farther to the right to compensate for the
living room “bump-out”). Now, the N-S lateral design loads are assigned to wall lines
A, B, and D/E as follows:
Wall Line A
Wind design shear load = 1/2 garage shear load = 0.5(3,928 lb) = 1,964 lb
Seismic design shear load = 0.5(1,490 lb) = 745 lb
Wall Line B
Wind design shear load = 1/2 garage shear load + 1/2 house shear load
= 1,964 lb + 0.5(17,411 lb) = 10,670 lb
Seismic design shear load = 745 lb + 0.5(7,493 lb) = 4,492 lb

6-64 Residential Structural Design Guide
Chapter 6 –Lateral Resistance to Wind and Earthquakes
Wall Line D/E
Wind design shear load = 1/2 house shear load = 0.5(17,411 lb) = 8,706 lb
Seismic design shear load = 0.5(7,493 lb) = 3,747 lb
Based on the design shear loads above, each of the wall lines may be designed in a
fashion similar to that used in Step 1 (total shear method) by selecting the appropriate
wall construction to meet the loading demand. For example, the design of wall line B
would proceed as shown below (using the perforated shear wall method in this case) for
the required wind shear load.
The following equations are used to determine the required ultimate shear capacity, F
s
,
of the wall construction (interior and exterior sheathing type and fastening):
F’
s
= [(F
s,ext
)(C
sp
)(C
ns
) + F
s,int
]x[1/SF] (based on Eq. 6.5-1a)
F
psw
= F’
s
C
op
C
dl
[L] (Eq. 6.5-1b)
Substituting the first equation above into the second,
F
psw
= [(F
s,ext
)(C
sp
)(C
ns
) + F
s,int
] [1/SF] C
op
C
dl
[L]
To satisfy the design wind shear load requirement for Wall Line B,
F
psw
≥ 10,670 lb
Assume that the wall construction is the same as used in Example 6.2. The following
parameters are determined for Wall Line B:
C
sp
= 0.92 (Spruce-Pine-Fir)
C
ns
= 0.75 (8d pneumatic nail, 0.113-inch-diameter)
C
dl
= 1.0 (zero dead load due to wind uplift)
SF = 2.0 (wind design safety factor)
C
op
= 0.71 (without the corner window and narrow segment)*
L = 28 ft – 1.33 ft – 3 ft = 23.67 ft (length of perforated shear wall line)*
F
s,int
= 80 plf (Table 6.3, minimum ultimate unit shear capacity)
*The perforated shear wall line begins at the interior edge of the 3’ x 5’ window
opening because the wall segment adjacent to the corner exceeds the maximum aspect
ratio requirement of 4. Therefore, the perforated shear wall is “embedded” in the wall
line.
Substituting the values above into the equation for F
psw
, the following value is obtained
for F
s,ext
:
10,670 lb = [(F
s,ext
)(0.92)(0.75) + 80 plf] [1/2.0] (0.71) (1.0) [23.67 ft]
F
s,ext
= 1,724 plf
By inspection in Table 6.1, the above value is achieved for a shear wall constructed
with 15/32-inch-thick Structural 1 wood structural panel sheathing with nails spaced at
3 inches on the panel edges. The value is 1,722 plf which is close enough for practical
purposes (particularly given that contribution of interior walls is neglected in the above
analysis). Also, a thinner sheathing may be used in accordance with Footnote 5 of
Table 6.1. As another alternative, wall line B could be designed as a segmented shear
wall. There are two large shear wall segments that may be used. In total they are 20 ft
long. Thus, the required ultimate shear capacity for wall line B using the segmented
shear wall method is determined as follows:

Residential Structural Design Guide 6-65
Chapter 6 –Lateral Resistance to Wind and Earthquakes
F’
s
= (F
s,ext
C
sp
C
ns
+ F
s,int
) C
ar
[1/SF] (based on Eq. 6.5-2a)
F
ssw
= F’
s
x L (Eq. 6.5-2b)
F
ssw
≥ 10,670 lb (wind load requirement on wall line B)
Substituting the first equation into the second
F
ssw
= (F
s,ext
C
sp
C
ns
+ F
s,int
) C
ar
[1/SF] x L
The following parameter values are used:
C
sp
= 0.92 (same as before)
C
ns
= 0.75 (same as before)
C
ar
= 1.0 (both segments have aspect ratios less than 2)*
SF = 2.0 (for wind design)
L = 20 ft (total length of the two shear wall segments)*
F
s,int
= 80 plf (minimum ultimate unit shear capacity)
*If the wall segments each had different values for C
ar
because of varying adjustments
for aspect ratio, then the segments must be treated independently in the equation above
and the total length could not be summed as above to determine a total L.
Now, solving the above equations for F
s,ext
the following is obtained:
10,670 lb = [(F
s,ext
)(0.92)(0.75) + 80 plf](1.0)[1/2.0](20 ft)
F
s,ext
= 1,430 plf
By inspection of Table 6.1 using the above value of F
s,ext
, a 4 inch nail spacing may be
used to meet the required shear loading in lieu of the 3 inch nail spacing used if the wall
were designed as a perforated shear wall. However, two additional hold down brackets
would be required in Wall Line B to restrain the two wall segments as required by the
segmented shear wall design method.
Wall Line A poses a special design problem since there are only two narrow shear wall
segments to resist the wind design lateral load (1,964 lb). Considering the approach
above for the segmented shear wall design of Wall Line B and realizing that C
ar
= 0.71
(aspect ratio of 4), the following value for F
s,ext
is obtained for Wall Line A:
F
ssw
= (F
s,ext
C
sp
C
ns
+ F
s,int
) C
ar
[1/SF] x L
1,964 lb = [(F
s,ext
)(0.92)(0.75) + 0*](0.71)[1/2.0](4 ft)
*The garage exterior walls are assumed not to have interior finish. The shared wall
between the garage and the house, however, is required to have a fire rated wall which
is usually satisfied by the use of 5/8-thick gypsum wall board. This fire resistant finish
is placed over the wood structural sheathing in this case and the impact on wall
thickness (i.e. door jamb width) should be considered by the architect and builder.
Solving for F
s,ext
,
F
s,ext
= 2,004 plf

6-66 Residential Structural Design Guide
Chapter 6 –Lateral Resistance to Wind and Earthquakes
By inspecting Table 6.1, this would require 15/32-inch-thick wood structural panel with
nails spaced at 2 inches on center and would require 3x framing lumber (refer to
footnote 3 of Table 6.1). However, the value of C
ns
(=0.75) from Table 6.7 was based
on a 0.113-inch diameter nail for which the table does not give a conversion relative to
the 10d common nail required in Table 6.1. Therefore, a larger nail should be used at
the garage opening. Specifying an 8d common nail or similar pneumatic nail with a
diameter of 0.131 inches (see Table 6.7), a C
ns
value of 1.0 is used and F
s,ext
may be
recalculated as above to obtain the following:
F
ssw
= (F
s,ext
C
sp
C
ns
+ F
s,int
) C
ar
[1/SF] x L
1,964 lb = [(F
s,ext
)(0.92)(1.0) + 0](0.71)[1/2.0](4 ft)
F
s,ext
= 1,503 plf
Inspecting Table 6.1 again, it is now found that 15/32-inch-thick wood structural panel
sheathing with 8d common nails spaced at 4 inches on center provides an ultimate rated
unit shear capacity of 1,539 plf > 1,503 plf. This design does not require the use of 3x
framing lumber which allows the same lumber to be used for all wall construction. The
only added detail is the difference in nail type and spacing for the garage return walls.
From the standpoint of simplicity, the easiest solution would be to increase the width of
the garage shear wall segments; however, design simplicity is not always the governing
factor. Also, a portal frame system may be designed based on the information and
references provided in Section 6.5.2.7.
Finally, the garage should be adequately tied to the building to ensure that the garage
section and the house section act as a structural unit. This may be achieved by fastening
the end rafter or truss top chord in the roof to the house framing using fasteners with
sufficient withdrawal capacity (i.e. ring shank nails or lag screws). The same should be
done for the end studs that are adjacent to the house framing. Ideally, the garage roof
diaphragm may be tied into the house second floor diaphragm by use of metal straps
and blocking extending into the floor diaphragm and garage roof diaphragm a sufficient
distance in each direction (i.e., 4 feet). With sufficient connection to the house end wall
and floor diaphragm, the garage opening issue may be avoided completely. The
connection load to the house discussed above can then be determined by treating the
garage roof diaphragm as a cantilevered horizontal beam on the side of the home with a
fixed end moment at the connection to the house. The fixed end moment (assuming the
garage opening provides no lateral shear resistance) is determined based on the beam
equation for a cantilever beam (see Appendix A). For the wind load on the garage, the
fixed end moment due to lateral load is (3,928 lb)(11 ft) = 43,208 ft-lb. This moment
may be resisted by a strap at either side of the garage roof with about a 2,500 lb design
tension capacity (i.e. 43,208 ft-lb/18 ft = 2,400 lb). Preferably, the strap would be
anchored to the garage roof diaphragm and house floor diaphragm as described above.
Alternatively, this moment could be resisted by numerous lag screws or similar
fasteners attaching the garage framing to the house framing. By this method, the garage
end walls would require no special shear wall design. Of course, connections required
to resist wind uplift and transverse shear loads on the garage door and return walls
would still be required.

Residential Structural Design Guide 6-67
Chapter 6 –Lateral Resistance to Wind and Earthquakes
For the seismic design lateral loads in this example, the garage opening is not so
severely loaded. The design seismic load on the Wall Line A is 745 lb. Using the
approach above (and substituting a safety factor of 2.5 for seismic design), the value of
F
s,ext
determined is 905 plf which is much less than the 2,004 plf determined for the
design wind shear load condition assumed in this example. By inspecting Table 6.1,
7/16-inch-thick Structural 1 sheathing is sufficient and the pnuematic nails used on the
rest of the building’s shear walls may be used. However, this requires the two garage
return walls to be restrained with two hold-down brackets each as in the segmented
shear wall design method. For the seismic load, the garage opening wall (Wall Line A)
may be suitably designed as a perforated shear wall and eliminate the need for two of
the four hold-downs. A portal frame may also be considered for the garage opening (see
Section 6.5.2.7).
Wall Line D/E may be designed in a similar fashion to the options discussed above. In
fact, Wall Line E may be eliminated as a designed shear wall line provided that a
collector is provided to bring the diaphragm shear load into the single wall segment in
wall line D (see the dotted line on the floor plan figure). Of course, Wall line D must be
designed to carry the full design shear load assigned to that end of the building.
Collector design was illustrated in Example 6.3. The connections for overturning (i.e.,
hold-downs) and base shear transfer must be designed as illustrated in Examples 6.1
and 6.2. As an additional option, Wall Line C may be designed as an interior shear wall
line and the wood structural panel sheathing would be placed underneath the interior
finish. This last option would relieve some of the load on the house end walls and
possibly simplify the overall shear wall construction details used in the house.
3. Determine the shear loads on the N-S shear wall lines using the relative stiffness
method and an assumed shear wall construction for the given seismic design condition
only.
Assume that the shear wall construction will be as follows:
• 7/16-inch OSB Structural I wood structural panel sheathing with 8d common nails
(or 0.131-inch diameter 8d pneumatic nails) spaced at 4 inches on center on the
panel edges and 12 inches in the panel field.
• Douglas-fir wall framing is used with 2x studs spaced at 16 inches on center.
• Walls are designed as perforated shear wall lines and adequate hold-downs and
base shear connections are provided.
It will be further assumed that the house and garage are sufficiently tied together to act
as a structural unit. It must be remembered that the relative stiffness design approach is
predicated on the assumption that the horizontal diaphragm is rigid in comparison to the
supporting shear walls so that the forces are distributed according to the relative
stiffness of the shear wall lines. This assumption is exactly opposite to that assumed by
use of the tributary area method.
As given for the design example, the following design seismic shear loads apply to the
first story of the example building:
Design N-S Seismic Lateral Load (mapped S
s
= 1.5g)
House: 7,493 lb total story shear (tributary weight is 37,464 lb)
Garage: 1,490 lb total story shear (tributary weight is 7,452 lb)
Total: 8,983 lb total story shear (total tributary weight is 44,916 lb)

6-68 Residential Structural Design Guide
Chapter 6 –Lateral Resistance to Wind and Earthquakes
Locate the center of gravity
The first step is to determine the center of gravity of the building at the first story level.
The total seismic story shear load will act through this point. For wind design, the process
is similar, but the horizontal wind forces on various portions of the building (based on
vertical projected areas and wind pressures) are used to determine the force center for the
lateral wind loads (i.e., the resultant of the garage and house lateral wind loads).
Establishing the origin of an x-y coordinate system at the bottom corner of Wall Line B of

the example first floor plan, the location of the center of gravity is determined by taking
weighted moments about each coordinate axis using the center of gravity location for the
garage and house portions. Again, the “bump-out” area in living room is considered to
have negligible impact on the estimate of the center of gravity since most of the building
mass is originating from the second story and roof which does not have the “bump-out” in
the plan.
The center of gravity of the garage has the (x,y) coordinates of (-11 ft, 16 ft). The center of
gravity of the house has the coordinates (21 ft, 14 ft).
Weighted moments about the y-axis:
X
cg,building
= [(X
cg,garage
)(garage weight) + (X
cg,house
)(house weight)]/(total weight)
= [(-11 ft)(7,452 lb) + (21 ft)(37,464 lb)]/(44,916 lb)
= 15.7 ft
Weighted moments about the x-axis:
Y
cg,building
= [(Y
cg,garage
)(garage weight) + (Y
cg,house
)(house weight)]/(total weight)
= [(16 ft)(7,452 lb) + (14 ft)(37,464 lb)]/(44,916 lb)
= 14.3 ft
Thus, the center of gravity for the first story is located at the (x,y) coordinates of (15.7 ft,
14.3 ft). The approximate location on the floor plan is about 4 inches north of the center
bearing wall line and directly in front of the stair well leading down (i.e., about 5 feet to the
left of the center of the house).

Residential Structural Design Guide 6-69
Chapter 6 –Lateral Resistance to Wind and Earthquakes
Locate the center of resistance
The center of resistance is somewhat more complicated to determine and requires an
assumption regarding the shear wall stiffness. Two methods of estimating the relative
stiffness of segmented shear walls are generally recognized. One method bases the
segmented shear wall stiffness on it’s length. Thus, longer shear walls have greater stiffness
(and capacity). However, this method is less appealing when multiple segments are
included in one wall line and particularly when the segments have varying aspect ratios,
especially narrow aspect ratios which affect stiffness disproportionately to the length. The
second method bases the segmented shear wall stiffness on the shear capacity of the
segment, which is more appealing when various shear wall constructions are used with
variable unit shear values and when variable aspect ratios are used, particularly when the
unit shear strength is corrected for narrow aspect ratios. The method based on strength is
also appropriate for use with the perforated shear wall method, since the length of a
perforated shear wall has little to do with its stiffness or strength. Rather, the amount of
openings in the wall (as well as its construction) govern its stiffness and capacity.
Therefore, the method used in this example will use the capacity of the perforated shear
wall lines as a measure of relative stiffness. The same technique may be used with a
segmented shear wall design method by determining the shear capacity of each shear wall
line (comprised of one or more shear wall segments) as shown in Example 6.1.
First, the strength of each shear wall line in the building must be determined. Using the
perforated shear wall method and the assumed wall construction given at the beginning of
Step 3, the design shear wall line capacities (see below) are determined for each of the
exterior shear wall lines in the building. The window and door opening sizes are shown on
the plan so that the perforated shear wall calculations can be done as demonstrated in
Example 6.2. It is assumed that no interior shear wall lines will be used (except at the
shared wall between the garage and the house) and that the contribution of the interior
partition walls to the stiffness of the building is negligible. As mentioned, this assumption
can overlook a significant factor in the lateral resistance and stiffness of a typical residential
building.
PSW 1: F
psw1
= 7,812 lb (Wall Line D)
PSW 2: F
psw2
= 3,046 lb (Wall Line E)
PSW 3: F
psw3
= 14,463 lb (North side wall of house)
PSW 4: F
psw4
= 9,453 lb (North side of garage)
PSW 5: F
psw5
= 182 lb (Wall Line A; garage opening)
PSW 6: F
psw6
= 9,453 lb (South side wall of garage)
PSW 7: F
psw7
= 9,687 lb (Wall Line B)
PSW 8: F
psw8
= 11,015 lb (South side wall of house at front)
The center of stiffness on the y-coordinate is now determined as follows using the above
PSW design shear capacities for wall lines oriented in the E-W direction:
Y
cs
= [(F
psw3
)(Y
psw3
) + (F
psw4
)(Y
psw4
) + (F
psw6
)(Y
psw6
) + (F
psw8
)(Y
psw8
)]/(F
psw,E-W
)
= [(14,463 lb)(28 ft)+(9,453 lb)(26 ft)+(9,453 lb)(6 ft)+(11,015 lb)(0 ft)]/(44,384 lb)
= 15.9 ft
The center of stiffness on the x-coordinate is determined similarly considering the wall lines
oriented in the N-S direction:
X
cs
= [(F
psw1
)(X
psw1
) + (F
psw2
)(X
psw2
) + (F
psw5
)(X
psw5
) + (F
psw7
)(X
psw7
)]/(F
psw,N-S
)
= [(7,812 lb)(42 ft)+(3,046 lb)(48 ft)+(182 lb)(-22 ft)+(9,687 lb)(0 ft)]/(20,727 lb)
= 22.7 ft

6-70 Residential Structural Design Guide
Chapter 6 –Lateral Resistance to Wind and Earthquakes
Therefore, the coordinates of the center of stiffness are (22.7 ft, 15.9 ft). Thus, the center of
stiffness is located to the right of the center of gravity (force center for the seismic load) by
22.7 ft – 15.7 ft = 7 ft. This offset between the center of gravity and the center of resistance
will create a torsional response in the N-S seismic load direction under consideration. For
E-W seismic load direction, the offset (in the y-coordinate direction) is only 15.9 ft – 14.3 ft
= 1.6 ft which is practically negligible from the standpoint of torsional response. It should
be remembered that, in both loading directions, the influence of interior partitions on the
center of stiffness (and thus the influence on torsional response) is not considered. To
conservatively account for this condition and for possible error in locating the actual center
of gravity of the building (i.e., accidental torsion), codes usually require that the distance
between the center of gravity and the center of stiffness be considered as a minimum of 5
percent of the building dimension perpendicular to the direction of seismic force under
consideration. This condition is essentially met in this example since the offset dimension
for the N-S load direction is 7 feet which is 10 percent of the E-W plan dimension of the
house and attached garage.
Distribute the direct shear forces to N-S walls
The direct shear force is distributed to the N-S walls based on their relative stiffness without
regard to the location of the center of stiffness (resistance) and the center of gravity (seismic
force center), or the torsional load distribution that occurs when they are offset from each
other. The torsional load distribution is superimposed on the direct shear forces on the shear
wall lines in the next step of the process.
The direct seismic shear force of 8,983 lb is distributed as shown below based on the
relative stiffness of the perforated shear wall lines in the N-S direction. As before, the
relative stiffness is based on the design shear capacity of each perforated shear wall line
relative to that of the total design capacity of the N-S shear wall lines.
Direct shear on PSW1, PSW2, PSW5, and PSW7 is determined as follows:
(total seismic shear load on story)[(F
psw1
)/(F
psw,N-S
)] = (8,983 lb)[(7,812 lb)/(20,727 lb)]
= (8,983 lb)[0.377]
= 3,387 lb
(total seismic shear load on story)[(F
psw2
)/(F
psw,N-S
)] = (8,983 lb)[(3,046 lb)/(20,727 lb)]
= (8,983 lb)[0.147]
= 1,321 lb
(total seismic shear load on story)[(F
psw5
)/(F
psw,N-S
)] = (8,983 lb)[(182 lb)/(20,727 lb)]
= (8,983 lb)[0.009]
= 81 lb
(total seismic shear load on story)[(F
psw7
)/(F
psw,N-S
)] = (8,983 lb)[(9,687 lb)/(20,727 lb)]
= (8,983 lb)[0.467]
= 4,195 lb

Residential Structural Design Guide 6-71
Chapter 6 –Lateral Resistance to Wind and Earthquakes
Wall Line F
psw
Distance from Center of
Resistance
F
psw
(d)
2
PSW1 7,812 lb 19.3 ft 2.91 x 10
6
lb-ft
2
PSW2 3,046 lb 25.3 ft 1.95 x 10
6
lb-ft
2
PSW3 14,463 lb 12.1 ft 2.12 x 10
6
lb-ft
2
PSW4 9,453 lb 10.1 ft 9.64 x 10
5
lb-ft
2
PSW5 182 lb 44.7 ft 3.64 x 10
5
lb-ft
2
PSW6 9,453 lb 9.9 ft 9.26 x 10
5
lb-ft
2
PSW7 9,687 lb 22.7 ft 4.99 x 10
6
lb-ft
2
PSW8 11,015 lb 15.9 ft 2.78 x 10
6
lb-ft
2
Total torsional moment of inertia (J) 1.70 x 10
7
lb-ft
2
Distribute the torsion load
The torsional moment is created by the offset of the center of gravity (seismic force center)
from the center of stiffness or resistance (also called the center of rigidity). For the N-S load
direction, the torsional moment is equal to the total seismic shear load on the story
multiplied by the x-coordinate offset of the center of gravity and the center of stiffness (i.e.,
8,983 lb x 7 ft = 62,881 ft-lb). The sharing of this torsional moment on all of the shear wall
lines is based on the torsional moment of resistance of each wall line. The torsional moment
of resistance is determined by the design shear capacity of each wall line (used as the
measure of relative stiffness) multiplied by the square of its distance from the center of
stiffness. The amount of the torsional shear load (torsional moment) distributed to each wall
line is then determined by the each wall’s torsional moment of resistance in proportion to
the total torsional moment of resistance of all shear wall lines combined. The torsional
moment of resistance of each shear wall line and the total for all shear wall lines (torsional
moment of inertia) is determined as shown below.
Now, the torsional shear load on each wall is determined using the following basic equation
for torsion:
J
)F(dM
V
WALLT
WALL
=
where,
V
WALL
= the torsional shear load on the wall line (lb)
M
T
= the torsional moment* (lb-ft)
d = the distance of the wall from the center of stiffness (ft)
F
WALL
= the design shear capacity of the segmented or perforated shear wall line (lb)
J = the torsional moment of inertia for the story (lb-ft
2
)
*The torsional moment is determined by multiplying the design shear load on the story by
the offset of the center of stiffness relative to the center of gravity perpendicular to the load
direction under consideration. For wind design, the center of the vertical projected area of
the building is used in lieu of the center gravity.

6-72 Residential Structural Design Guide
Chapter 6 –Lateral Resistance to Wind and Earthquakes
Now, the torsional loads may be determined as shown below for the N-S and E-W wall
lines. For PSW1 and PSW2 the torsion load is in the reverse direction of the direct shear
load on these walls. This behavior is the result of the center of shear resistance being offset
from the force center which causes rotation about the center of stiffness. (Center of shear
resistance and center of stiffness may be used interchangeably since the shear resistance is
assumed to represent stiffness.) If the estimated offset of the center of gravity and the center
of stiffness is reasonably correct, then the torsional response will tend to reduce the shear
load on PSW1 and PSW2. However, codes generally do not allow the direct shear load on a
wall line to be reduced due to torsion – only increases should be considered.
The following values for use in the torsion equation apply to this example:
M
T
= (8,983 lb)(7 ft) = 62,881 ft-lb
J = 1.70 x 10
7
lb-ft
2
The torsional loads on PSW5 and PSW7 are determined as follows:
V
psw5
= (62,881 ft-lb)(44.7 ft)(182 lb) / (1.70 x 10
7
lb-ft
2
)
= 30 lb
V
psw7
= (62,881 ft-lb)(22.7 ft)(9,687 lb) / (1.70 x 10
7
lb-ft
2
)
= 813 lb
These torsional shear loads are added to the direct shear loads for the N-S walls and the
total design shear load on each wall line may be compared to its design shear capacity as
shown below.
While all of the N-S shear wall lines have sufficient design capacity, it is noticeable that the
wall lines on the left side (West) of the building are “working harder” and the walls on the
right side (East) of the building are substantially over-designed. The wall construction
could be changed to allow a greater sheathing nail spacing on walls PSW1 and PSW2.
Also, the assumption of a rigid diaphragm over the entire expanse of the story is very
questionable, even if the garage is “rigidly” tied to the house with adequate connections. It
is likely that the loads on Walls PSW5 and PSW7 will be higher than predicted using the
relative stiffness method. Thus, the tributary area method (see Step 2) may provide a more
reliable design and should be considered along with the above analysis. Certainly, reducing
the shear wall construction based on the above analysis is not recommended prior to
“viewing” the design from the perspective of the tributary area approach. Similarly, the
garage opening wall (PSW5) should not be assumed to be adequate simply based on the
above analysis in view of the inherent assumptions of the relative stiffness method in the
horizontal distribution of shear forces. For more compact buildings with continuous
horizontal diaphragms extending over the entire area of each story, the method is less
presumptive in nature. But, this qualitative observation is true of all of the force distribution
methods demonstrated in this design example.
N-S
Wall Lines
Wall Design
Capacity, F
psw
(lb)
Direct
Shear
Load
(lb)
Torsional
Shear Load
(lb)
Total Design
Shear Load
(lb)
Percent of
Design
Capacity
Used
PSW1 7,812 3,387 na* 3,387 43% (ok)
PSW2 3,046 1,321 na* 1,321 43% (ok)
PSW5 182 81 30 111 61% (ok)
PSW7 9,687 4,195 813 5,008 52% (ok)
*The torsional shear load is actually in the reverse direction of the direct shear load for
these walls, but it is not subtracted as required by code practice.

Residential Structural Design Guide 6-73
Chapter 6 –Lateral Resistance to Wind and Earthquakes
Conclusion
This seemingly simple design example has demonstrated the many decisions, variables,
and assumptions to consider in designing the lateral resistance of a light-frame home.
For an experienced designer, certain options or standardized solutions may become
favored and developed for repeated use in similar conditions. Also, an experienced
designer may be able to effectively design using simplified analytical methods (i.e. the
total shear approach shown in Step 1) supplemented with judgment and detailed
evaluations of certain portions or unique details as appropriate.
In this example, it appears that a 7/16-inch-thick Structural I wood structural panel
sheathing can be used for all shear wall construction to resist the required wind shear
loading. A constant sheathing panel edge nail spacing is also possible by using 3 inches
on center if the perforated shear wall method is used and 4 inches on center if the
segmented shear wall method is used (based on the worst-case condition of Wall Line
B). The wall sheathing nails specified were 8d pneumatic nails with a 0.113 inch
diameter. In general, this wall construction will be conservative for most wall lines on
the first story of the example house. If the seismic shear load were the only factor (i.e.,
the wind load condition was substantially less than assumed), the wall construction
could be simplified even more such that a perforated shear wall design approach with a
single sheathing fastening requirement may be suitable for all shear wall lines. The
garage opening wall would be the only exception.
Finally, numerous variations in construction detailing in a single project should be
avoided as it may lead to confusion and error in the field. Fewer changes in assembly
requirements, fewer parts, and fewer special details should all be as important to the
design objectives as meeting the required design loads. When the final calculation is
done (regardless of the complexity or simplicity of the analytic approach chosen and
the associated uncertainties or assumptions), the designer should exercise judgment in
making reasonable final adjustments to the design to achieve a practical, well-balanced
design. As a critical final consideration, the designer should be confident that the
various parts of the structural system are adequately “tied together” to act as a structural
unit in resisting the lateral loads. This consideration is as much a matter of judgement
as it is a matter of analysis.

6-74 Residential Structural Design Guide
Chapter 6 –Lateral Resistance to Wind and Earthquakes
6.7 References
AF&PA, National Design Specification for Wood Construction, ANSI/AF&PA
NDS-1997, American Forest & Paper Association, American Wood
Council, Washington, DC, 1997.
AISI, Shear Wall Values for Light Weight Steel Framing, Publication RG-9601,
American Iron and Steel Institute, Washington, DC, January 1996.
Ambrose, J. and Vergun, D., Design for Lateral Forces, John Wiley & Sons, New
York, NY, 1987.
APA, Diaphragms and Shear Walls, APA–The Engineered Wood Association,
Tacoma, WA, December 1997.
APA, Nail Penetration and Framing Specific Gravity Factors for Shear Walls
and Diaphragms, APA Report T98-22, APA–The Engineered Wood
Association, Tacoma, WA, 1998.
APA, Wood Structural Panel Sheathing for Narrow-Width Wall Bracing, Report
156, APA–The Engineered Wood Association, Tacoma, WA, 1994.
ASTM, ASTM E-564, American Society of Testing and Materials, West
Conshohocken, PA, 1998a.
ASTM, Standard Methods of Conducting Strength Tests of Panels for Building
Construction (ASTM E72-86), American Society of Testing and
Materials, West Conshohocken, PA, 1998b.
ATC, A Critical Review of Current Approaches to Earthquake–Resistant Design,
ATC-34, Applied Technology Council, Redwood City, CA, 1995.
Boughton, G.N. and Reardon, G.F., “Simulated Cyclone Wind Tests on a Timber
Framed House,” Proceedings of the Pacific Timber Engineering
Conference, Vol. 2, Auckland, New Zealand, 1984, 527-534.
Diekmann, Edward R., Design of Wood Diaphragms, Vol. IV, Clark C. Heritage
Memorial Series on Wood, Pennsylvania State University, University
Park, PA, 1986, 479-547.
Dolan, J.D. and Heine, C.P., Monotonic Tests of Wood-Frame Shear Walls with
Various Openings and Base Restraint Configurations, Report No. TE-
1997-001, Virginia Polytechnic Institute and State University, Blacksburg,
VA, 1997a.
Dolan, J.D. and Heine, C.P., Sequential Phased Displacement Cyclic Tests of
Wood-Frame Shear Walls with Various Openings and Base Restrain

Residential Structural Design Guide 6-75
Chapter 6 –Lateral Resistance to Wind and Earthquakes
Configurations, Virginia Polytechnic Institute and State University,
Blacksburg, VA, 1997b.
Dolan, J.D. and Heine, C.P., Sequential Phased Displacement Tests of Wood-
Framed Shear Walls with Corners, Virginia Polytechnic Institute and
State University, Blacksburg, VA, 1997c.
Dolan, J.D. and Johnson, A.C., Cyclic Tests of Long Shear Walls with Openings,
Report TE-1996-002, Virginia Polytechnic Institute and State University,
Blacksburg, VA, 1996b.
Dolan, J.D. and Johnson, A.C., Monotonic Tests of Long Shear Walls with
Openings, Report TE-1996-001, Virginia Polytechnic Institute and State
University, Blacksburg, VA, 1996a.
FEMA, Guidelines for Seismic Rehabilitation of Buildings, Report 273, Federal
Emergency Management Agency, Washington, DC, 1997.
Filiatrault, A. and Foschi, R., “Static and Dynamic Tests of Timber Shear Walls
Fastened with Nails and Wood Adhesive,” Canadian Journal of Civil
Engineering, Vol. 18, 1991.
Griffiths, D.K. and Wickens, H.G., “Timber Frame Walls: Design for Racking
Resistance,” Proceedings of the International Wood Engineering
Conference, Vol. 2, Omnipress, Madison, WI, 1996.
HUD, Evaluation of Housing Performance and Seismic Design Parameters in the
Northridge Earthquake, prepared by the NAHB Research Center, Inc., for
the National Association of Home Builders and U.S. Department of
Housing and Urban Development, Washington, DC, 1999.
HUD, Proposed Minimum Standards for Permanent Low-Cost Housing and for
the Improvement of Existing Substandard Areas, U.S. Department of
Housing and Urban Development, Washington, DC, 1966.
ICBO, Application for Research Committee Recommendation on Alternate
Materials or Methods of Construction, K-Lath Corporation, International
Conference of Building Officials, January 24, 1969.
ICBO, Uniform Building Code, International Conference of Building Officials,
Whittier, CA, 1997.
ICC, International Building Code (Final Draft), International Code Council, Inc.,
Falls Church, VA, 1999.
ICC, International One- and Two-Family Dwelling Code, International Code
Council, Inc., Falls Church, VA, 1998.

6-76 Residential Structural Design Guide
Chapter 6 –Lateral Resistance to Wind and Earthquakes
Karacabeyli, E. and Ceccotti, A., “Nailed Wood-Frame Shear Walls for Seismic
Loads: Test Results and Design Considerations,” Paper T207-6,
Proceedings of the Structural Engineers’ World Congress, American
Society of Civil Engineers, Reston, VA, 1998.
Kasal, B., Leichti, R.J., Itani, R.Y., “Non-Linear Finite Element Model of
Complete Light Frame Wood Structures,” Journal of Structural
Engineering, Vol. 120 No. 1, January 1994.
NAHBRC, Monotonic Tests of Cold-Formed Steel Shear Walls with Openings,
prepared for the U.S. Department of Housing and Urban Development,
American Iron and Steel Institute, and National Association of Home
Builders by the NAHB Research Center, Inc., Upper Marlboro, MD, July
1997.
NAHBRC, Perforated Shear Walls with Conventional and Innovative Base
Restraint Connections, prepared for the U.S. Department of Housing and
Urban Development by the NAHB Research Center, Inc., Upper
Marlboro, MD, May 1999.
NAHBRC, The Performance of Perforated Shear Walls with Narrow Wall
Segments, Reduced Base Restraint, and Alternative Framing Methods,
prepared for the U.S. Department of Housing and Urban Development by
the NAHB Research Center, Inc., Upper Marlboro, MD, May 1998.
NAHBRF, Racking Strengths and Stiffnesses of Exterior and Interior Frame Wall
Constructions, prepared for the U.S. Department of Housing and Urban
Development, NAHB Research Foundation, Rockville, MD, date
unknown.
NBS, Strength of Houses–Application of Engineering Principles to Structural
Design, BMS 109, U.S. Department of Commerce, National Bureau of
Standards, GPO: Washington, DC, 1948.
NES, Power Driven Staples, Nails, and Allied Fasteners for Use in All Types of
Building Construction, Report No. NER-272, National Evaluation Service,
Inc., Falls Church, VA, 1997.
Ni, C., Karacabcyli, E., and Ceccotti, A., “Design of Shear Walls with Openings
under Lateral and Vertical Loads,” Proceedings of the Pacific Timber
Engineering Conference, December 1998 (draft).
NIST, A Summary of the Structural Performance of Single-Family, Wood-Frame
Housing, NISTIR 6224, National Institute of Standards and Technology,
Gaithersburg, MD, 1998.
Patton-Mallory, M., Gutrowski, R.M., and Soltis, L.A., Racking Performance of
Light Frame Walls Sheathed on Two Sides, U.S. Department of
Agriculture, Forest Products Laboratory, Research Paper FPL 448, 1984.

Residential Structural Design Guide 6-77
Chapter 6 –Lateral Resistance to Wind and Earthquakes
Reardon, G. and Henderson, D., “Simulated Wind Loading of a Two-Storey Test
House,” Proceedings of the International Wood Engineering Conference,
Vol. 4, Omnipress, Madison, WI, 1996.
Reardon, G.F., “Effect of Claddings on the Response of Houses to Wind Forces,”
Proceedings of the Second Pacific Timber Engineering Conference, Vol.
2, Auckland, New Zealand, 1989, 101-105.
Reardon, G.F., “Effects of Non-Structural Cladding on Timber Framed House
Construction,” Proceedings of the International Conference on Timber
Engineering, Vol. 2, Seattle, WA, 1988.
SBCCI, Standard Building Code, Southern Building Code Congress International,
Birmingham, AL, 1999.
Soltis, L.A., Wolfe, R.W., and Tuomi, R.L., “Design Approaches for Light-Frame
Racking Walls,” Design and Performance of Light-Frame Structures,
Proceedings 7317, Forest Products Research Society, Madison, WI, 1983.
Sugiyama, H. and Matsumoto, T., “Empirical Equations for the Estimation of
Racking Strength of a Plywood-Sheathed Shear Wall with Openings,”
Summaries of Technical Papers of Annual Meeting, Architectural Institute
of Japan, September 1994.
Testing Engineers, Inc., “Strength Tests of Plastered Building Panels for
Keystone Steel & Wire Division”, Testing Engineers, Inc., Oakland, CA,
May 29, 1970.
Testing Engineers, Inc., “Strength Tests of Plastered Building Panels Using
ASTM E 72-61”, Testing Engineers, Inc., San Jose, CA, April 30, 1971.
Thurston, S.J., Report on Racking Resistance of Long Sheathed Timber Framed
Walls with Openings, Study Report SR54, Building Research Association
of New Zealand (BRANZ), Judgeford, Wellington, New Zealand, 1994.
Tissell, J.R., Structural Panel Shear Walls, Research Report 154, American
Plywood Association, Tacoma, WA, May 1993.
Tuomi, R.L. and McCutcheon, W.J., Testing of a Full-Scale House Under
Simulated Snow Loads and Wind Loads, FPL 234, U. S. Department of
Agriculture, Forest Products laboratory, Madison, WI, 1974.
White, M.W. and Dolan, J.D., “Effect of Adhesives on Shear Wall Performance,”
Systems Approach to Wood Structures, Forest Products Society, Madison,
WI, 1993.
Whittemore, H.L., Cotter, J.B., Stang, A.H., and Phelen, V.B., Strength of
Houses–Application of Engineering Principles to Structural Design of

6-78 Residential Structural Design Guide
Chapter 6 –Lateral Resistance to Wind and Earthquakes
Building Materials and Structures, Report BMS 109, U.S. Department of
Commerce, National Bureau of Standards, Gaithersburg, MD, 1948.
Wolfe, R.W., Contribution of Gypsum Wallboard to Racking Resistance of Light
Frame Walls, U.S. Department of Agriculture, Forest Products
Laboratory, Research Paper FPL 493, December, 1983.
Yasumura, M., “Testing and Evaluation of Seismic Performance of Wood-Frame
Structures in Japan,” Proceedings of the Invitational Workshop on Seismic
Testing, Analysis, and Design of Wood-Frame Construction, California
Universities for Research on Earthquake Effects (CUREe), Richmond,
CA, March 1999.
Yokel, F.Y., His, G., and Somes, F., Full-Scale Test on a Two-Story House
Subjected to Lateral Load, U.S. Department of Commerce, National
Bureau of Standards, Washington, DC, 1973.

Residential Structural Design Guide 7-1
CHAPTER 7
Connections
7.1 General
The objectives of connection design are
• to transfer loads resisted by structural members and systems to other
parts of the structure to form a “continuous load path”;
• to secure nonstructural components and equipment to the building; and
• to fasten members in place during construction to resist temporary
loads during installation (i.e., finishes, sheathing, etc.).
Adequate connection of the framing members and structural systems
covered in Chapters 4, 5, and 6 is a critical design and construction consideration.
Regardless of the type of structure or type of material, structures are only as
strong as their connections, and structural systems can behave as a unit only with
proper interconnection of the components and assemblies; therefore, this chapter
is dedicated to connections. A connection transfers loads from one framing
member to another (i.e., a stud to a top or bottom plate) or from one assembly to
another (i.e., a roof to a wall, a wall to a floor, and a floor to a foundation).
Connections generally consist of two or more framing members and a mechanical
connection device such as a fastener or specialty connection hardware. Adhesives
are also used to supplement mechanical attachment of wall finishes or floor
sheathing to wood.
This chapter focuses on conventional wood connections that typically use
nails, bolts, and some specialty hardware. The procedures for designing
connections are based on the National Design Specification for Wood
Construction (NDS) (AF&PA, 1997). The chapter also addresses relevant
concrete and masonry connections in accordance with the applicable provisions of
Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete (ACI-318) and Building
Code Requirements for Masonry Structures (ACI-530)(ACI, 1999a; ACI 1999b).
When referring to the NDS, ACI-318, or ACI-530, the chapter identifies
particular sections as NDS•12.1, ACI-318•22.5, or ACI-530•5.12.

7-2 Residential Structural Design Guide
Chapter 7 - Connections
For most connections in typical residential construction, the connection
design may be based on prescriptive tables found in the applicable residential
building code (ICC, 1998). Table 7.1 depicts a commonly recommended nailing
schedule for wood-framed homes.
TABLE 7.1 Recommended Nailing Schedule for a Wood-Framed Home
1
Application
Nailing
Method
Number
of Nails
Size of
Nail
Notes
Header to joist End-nail 3 16d
Toenail 2 10d
Joist to sill or girder
Toenail 3 8d
Header and stringer (band) joists to sill Toenail 8d 16 inches on center
Board sheathing Face-nail 2 or 3 8d To each joist
End-nail 2 16d At each stud
Stud to sole plate or top plate
Toenail 4 8d
Sole plate to joist or blocking Face-nail 16d 16 inches on center
Doubled studs
Face-nail,
stagger
10d 16 inches on center
End stud of interior wall to exterior wall
stud
Face-nail 16d 16 inches on center
Upper top plate to lower top plate Face-nail 10d 16 inches on center
Double top plate, laps and intersections Face-nail 4 10d
Continuous header, two pieces, each edge Face-nail 10d 12 inches on center
Ceiling joist to top wall plates Toenail 3 8d
Ceiling joist laps at partition Face-nail 4 16d
Rafter to top plate Toenail 3 8d
Rafter to ceiling joist Face-nail 4 16d
Rafter to valley or hip rafter Toenail 4 10d
Endnail 3 16d
Rafter to ridge board
Toenail 4 8d
Collar beam to rafter, 2-inch member Face-nail 2 12d
Collar beam to rafter, 1-inch member Face-nail 3 8d
Diagonal let-in brace to each stud and
plate, 1-inch member
Face-nail 2 8d
Intersecting studs at corners Face-nail 16d 12 inches on center
Built-up girder and beams, three or more
members, each edge
Face-nail 10d 12 inches on center each ply
Maximum 1/2-inch-thick (or less) wood
structural panel wall sheathing
Face-nail
6d at 6 inches on center at panel edges; 12 inches
on center at intermediate framing
Minimum 1/2-inch-thick (or greater) wood
structural panel wall/roof/floor sheathing
Face-nail
8d at 6 inches on center at panel edges; 12 inches
on center at intermediate framing
Wood sill plate to concrete or masonry
1/2-inch-diameter anchor bolt at 6 feet on center
and within 1 foot from ends of sill members
Source: Based on current industry practice and other sources (ICC,1998, NAHB, 1994; NAHB, 1982).
Note:
1
In practice, types of nails include common, sinker, box, or pneumatic; refer to Section 7.2 for descriptions of these fasteners. Some recent
codes have specified that common nails are to be used in all cases. However, certain connections may not necessarily require such a nail or
may actually be weakened by use of a nail that has too large a diameter (i.e., causing splitting of wood members). Other codes allow box
nails to be used in most or all cases. NER-272 guidelines for pneumatic fasteners should be consulted (NES, Inc., 1997). However, the NER-
272 guidelines are based on simple, conservative conversions of various code nail schedules, such as above, using the assumption that the
required performance is defined by a common nail in all applications. In short, there is a general state of confusion regarding appropriate
nailing requirements for the multitude of connections and related purposes in conventional residential construction.

Residential Structural Design Guide 7-3
Chapter 7 - Connections
The NDS recognizes in NDS•7.1.1.4 that “extensive experience”
constitutes a reasonable basis for design; therefore, the designer may use Table
7.1 for many, if not all, connections. However, the designer should consider
carefully the footnote to Table 7.1 and verify that the connection complies with
local requirements, practice, and design conditions for residential construction. A
connection design based on the NDS or other sources may be necessary for
special conditions such as high-hazard seismic or wind areas and when unique
structural details or materials are used.
In addition to the conventional fasteners mentioned above, many specialty
connectors and fasteners are available on today’s market. The reader is
encouraged to gather, study, and scrutinize manufacturer literature regarding
specialty fasteners, connectors, and tools that meet a wide range of connection
needs.
7.2 Types of Mechanical Fasteners
Mechanical fasteners that are generally used for wood-framed house
design and construction include the following:
• nails and spikes;
• bolts;
• lag bolts (lag screws); and
• specialty connection hardware.
This section presents some basic descriptions and technical information on
the above fasteners. Sections 7.3 and 7.4 provide design values and related
guidance. Design examples are provided in Section 7.5 for various typical
conditions in residential wood framing and foundation construction.
7.2.1 Nails
Several characteristics distinguish one nail from another. Figure 7.1
depicts key nail features for a few types of nails that are essential to wood-framed
design and construction. This section discusses some of a nail’s characteristics
relative to structural design; the reader is referred to Standard Terminology of
Nails for Use with Wood and Wood-Base Materials (ASTM F547) and Standard
Specification for Driven Fasteners: Nails, Spikes, and Staples (ASTM F 1667) for
additional information (ASTM, 1990; ASTM, 1995).

7-4 Residential Structural Design Guide
Chapter 7 - Connections
FIGURE 7.1 Elements of a Nail and Nail Types
The most common nail types used in residential wood construction follow:
• Common nails are bright, plain-shank nails with a flat head and
diamond point. The diameter of a common nail is larger than that of
sinkers and box nails of the same length. Common nails are used
primarily for rough framing.

Residential Structural Design Guide 7-5
Chapter 7 - Connections
• Sinker nails are bright or coated slender nails with a sinker head and
diamond point. The diameter of the head is smaller than that of a
common nail with the same designation. Sinker nails are used
primarily for rough framing and applications where lumber splitting
may be a concern.
• Box nails are bright, coated, or galvanized nails with a flat head and
diamond point. They are made of lighter-gauge wire than common
nails and sinkers and are commonly used for toenailing and many
other light framing connections where splitting of lumber is a concern.
• Cooler nails are generally similar to the nails above, but with slightly
thinner shanks. They are commonly supplied with ring shanks (i.e.,
annular threads) as a drywall nail.
• Power-driven nails (and staples) are produced by a variety of
manufacturers for several types of power-driven fasteners. Pneumatic-
driven nails and staples are the most popular power-driven fasteners in
residential construction. Nails are available in a variety of diameters,
lengths, and head styles. The shanks are generally cement-coated and
are available with deformed shanks for added capacity. Staples are
also available in a variety of wire diameters, crown widths, and leg
lengths. Refer to NER-272 for additional information and design data
(NES, Inc., 1997).
Nail lengths and weights are denoted by the penny weight, which is
indicated by d. Given the standardization of common nails, sinkers, and cooler
nails, the penny weight also denotes a nail’s head and shank diameter. For other
nail types, sizes are based on the nail’s length and diameter. Table 7.2 arrays
dimensions for the nails discussed above. The nail length and diameter are key
factors in determining the strength of nailed connections in wood framing. The
steel yield strength of the nail may also be important for certain shear
connections, yet such information is rarely available for a “standard” lot of nails.

7-6 Residential Structural Design Guide
Chapter 7 - Connections
TABLE 7.2 Nail Types, Sizes, and Dimensions
1
Type of Nail
Nominal Size
(penny weight, d)
Length
(inches)
Diameter
(inches)
6d 2 0.113
8d 2 1/2 0.131
10d 3 0.148
12d 3 1/4 0.148
16d 3 1/2 0.162
Common
20d 4 0.192
6d 2 0.099
8d 2 12 0.113
10d 3 0.128
12d 3 1/4 0.128
Box
16d 3 1/2 0.135
6d 1 7/8 0.092
8d 2 3/8 0.113
10d 2 7/8 0.120
12d 3 1/8 0.135
Sinker
16d 3 1/4 0.148
6d 1 7/8 to 2 0.092 to 0.113
8d 2 3/8 to 2 1/2 0.092 to 0.131
10d 3 0.120 to 0.148
12d 3 1/4 0.120 to 0.131
16d 3 1/2 0.131 to 0.162
Pneumatic
2
20d 4 0.131
4d 1 3/8 0.067
5d 1 5/8 0.080Cooler
6d 1 7/8 0.092
Notes
1
Based on ASTM F 1667 (ASTM, 1995).
2
Based on a survey of pneumatic fastener manufacturer data and NER-272 (NES, Inc., 1997).
There are many types of nail heads, although three types are most
commonly used in residential wood framing.
• The flat nail head is the most common head. It is flat and circular, and
its top and bearing surfaces are parallel but with slightly rounded
edges.
• The sinker nail head is slightly smaller in diameter than the flat nail
head. It also has a flat top surface; however, the bearing surface of the
nail head is angled, allowing the head to be slightly countersunk.
• Pneumatic nail heads are available in the above types; however, other
head types such as a half-round or D-shaped heads are also common.
The shank, as illustrated in Figure 7.1, is the main body of a nail. It
extends from the head of the nail to the point. It may be plain or deformed. A
plain shank is considered a “smooth” shank, but it may have “grip marks” from
the manufacturing process. A deformed shank is most often either threaded or
fluted to provide additional withdrawal or pullout resistance. Threads are annular

Residential Structural Design Guide 7-7
Chapter 7 - Connections
(i.e., ring shank), helical, or longitudinal deformations rolled onto the shank,
creating ridges and depressions. Flutes are helical or vertical deformations rolled
onto the shank. Threaded nails are most often used to connect wood to wood
while fluted nails are used to connect wood to concrete (i.e., sill plate to concrete
slab or furring strip to concrete or masonry). Shank diameter and surface
condition both affect a nail’s capacity.
The nail tip, as illustrated in Figure 7.1, is the end of the shank–usually
tapered–that is formed during manufacturing to expedite nail driving into a given
material. Among the many types of nail points, the diamond point is most
commonly used in residential wood construction. The diamond point is a
symmetrical point with four approximately equal beveled sides that form a
pyramid shape. A cut point used for concrete cut nails describes a blunt point. The
point type can affect nail drivability, lumber splitting, and strength characteristics.
The material used to manufacture nails may be steel, stainless steel, heat-
treated steel, aluminum, or copper, although the most commonly used materials
are steel, stainless steel, and heat-treated steel. Steel nails are typically formed
from basic steel wire. Stainless steel nails are often recommended in exposed
construction near the coast or for certain applications such as cedar siding to
prevent staining. Stainless steel nails are also recommended for permanent wood
foundations. Heat-treated steel includes annealed, case-hardened, or hardened
nails that can be driven into particularly hard materials such as extremely dense
wood or concrete.
Various nail coatings provide corrosion resistance, increased pullout
resistance, or ease of driving. Some of the more common coatings in residential
wood construction are described below.
• Bright. Uncoated and clean nail surface.
• Cement-coated. Coated with a heat-sensitive cement that prevents
corrosion during storage and improves withdrawal strength
depending on the moisture and density of the lumber and other
factors.
• Galvanized. Coated with zinc by barrel-tumbling, dipping,
electroplating, flaking, or hot-dipping to provide a corrosion-
resistant coating during storage and after installation for either
performance or appearance. The coating thickness increases the
diameter of the nail and improves withdrawal and shear strength.
7.2.2 Bolts
Bolts are often used for “heavy” connections and to secure wood to other
materials such as steel or concrete. In many construction applications, however,
special power-driven fasteners are used in place of bolts. Refer to Figure 7.2 for
an illustration of some typical bolt types and connections for residential use.

7-8 Residential Structural Design Guide
Chapter 7 - Connections
FIGURE 7.2 Bolt and Connection Types
In residential wood construction, bolted connections are typically limited
to wood-to-concrete connections unless a home is constructed in a high-hazard
wind or seismic area and hold-down brackets are required to transfer shear wall
overturning forces (see Chapter 6). Foundation bolts, typically embedded in
concrete or grouted masonry, are commonly referred to as anchor bolts, J-bolts,

Residential Structural Design Guide 7-9
Chapter 7 - Connections
or mud-sill anchors. Another type of bolt sometimes used in residential
construction is the structural bolt, which connects wood to steel or wood to wood.
Low-strength ASTM A307 bolts are commonly used in residential construction as
opposed to high-strength ASTM A325 bolts, which are more common in
commercial applications. Bolt diameters in residential construction generally
range from 1/4- to 3/4-inch, although 1/2- to 5/8-inch-diameter bolts are most
common, particularly for connecting a 2x wood sill to grouted masonry or
concrete.
Bolts, unlike nails, are installed in predrilled holes. If holes are too small,
the possibility of splitting the wood member increases during installation of the
bolt. If bored too large, the bolt holes encourage nonuniform dowel (bolt) bearing
stresses and slippage of the joint when loaded. NDS•8.1 specifies that bolt holes
should range from 1/32- to 1/16-inch larger than the bolt diameter to prevent
splitting and to ensure reasonably uniform dowel bearing stresses.
7.2.3 Specialty Connection Hardware
Many manufacturers fabricate specialty connection hardware. The load
capacity of a specialty connector is usually obtained through testing to determine
the required structural design values. The manufacturer’s product catalogue
typically provides the required values. Thus, the designer can select a standard
connector based on the design load determined for a particular joint or connection
(see Chapter 3). However, the designer should carefully consider the type of
fastener to be used with the connector; sometimes a manufacturer requires or
offers proprietary nails, screws, or other devices. It is also recommended that the
designer verify the safety factor and strength adjustments used by the
manufacturer, including the basis of the design value. In some cases, as with
nailed and bolted connections in the NDS, the basis is a serviceability limit state
(i.e., slip or deformation) and not ultimate capacity.
A few examples of specialty connection hardware are illustrated in Figure
7.3 and discussed below.
• Sill anchors are used in lieu of foundation anchor bolts. Many
configurations are available in addition to the one shown in Figure
7.3.
• Joist hangers are used to attach single or multiple joists to the side
of girders or header joists.
• Rafter clips and roof tie-downs are straps or brackets that connect
roof framing members to wall framing to resist roof uplift loads
associated with high-wind conditions.
• Hold-down brackets are brackets that are bolted, nailed, or screwed
to wall studs or posts and anchored to the construction below (i.e.,
concrete, masonry, or wood) to “hold down” the end of a member
or assembly (i.e., shear wall).
• Strap ties are prepunched straps or coils of strapping that are used
for a variety of connections to transfer tension loads.
• Splice plates or shear plates are flat plates with prepunched holes
for fasteners to transfer shear or tension forces across a joint.

7-10 Residential Structural Design Guide
Chapter 7 - Connections
• Epoxy-set anchors are anchor bolts that are drilled and installed
with epoxy adhesives into concrete after the concrete has cured and
sometimes after the framing is complete so that the required anchor
location is obvious.
FIGURE 7.3 Specialty Connector Hardware

Residential Structural Design Guide 7-11
Chapter 7 - Connections
7.2.4 Lag Screws
Lag screws are available in the same diameter range as bolts; the principal
difference between the two types of connectors is that a lag screw has screw
threads that taper to a point. The threaded portion of the lag screw anchors itself
in the main member that receives the tip. Lag screws (often called lag bolts)
function as bolts in joints where the main member is too thick to be economically
penetrated by regular bolts. They are also used when one face of the member is
not accessible for a “through-bolt.” Holes for lag screws must be carefully drilled
to one diameter and depth for the shank of the lag screw and to a smaller diameter
for the threaded portion. Lag screws in residential applications are generally small
in diameter and may be used to attach garage door tracks to wood framing, steel
angles to wood framing supporting brick veneer over wall openings, various
brackets or steel members to wood, and wood ledgers to wall framing.
7.3 Wood Connection Design
7.3.1 General
This section covers the NDS design procedures for nails, bolts, and lag
screws. The procedures are intended for allowable stress design (ASD) such that
loads should be determined accordingly (see Chapter 3). Other types of fastenings
are addressed by the NDS but are rarely used in residential wood construction.
The applicable sections of the NDS related to connection design as covered in this
chapter include
• NDS•7–Mechanical Connections (General Requirements);
• NDS•8–Bolts;
• NDS•9–Lag Screws; and
• NDS•12–Nails and Spikes.
While wood connections are generally responsible for the complex, non-
linear behavior of wood structural systems, the design procedures outlined in the
NDS are straightforward. The NDS connection values are generally conservative
from a structural safety standpoint. Further, the NDS’s basic or tabulated design
values are associated with tests of single fasteners in standardized conditions. As
a result, the NDS provides several adjustments to account for various factors that
alter the performance of a connection; in particular, the performance of wood
connections is highly dependent on the species (i.e., density or specific gravity) of
wood. Table 7.3 provides the specific gravity values of various wood species
typically used in house construction.

7-12 Residential Structural Design Guide
Chapter 7 - Connections
TABLE 7.3
Common Framing Lumber Species and
Specific Gravity Values
Lumber Species Specific Gravity, G
Southern Pine (SP) 0.55
Douglas Fir-Larch (DF-L) 0.50
Hem-Fir (HF) 0.43
Spruce-Pine-Fir (SPF) 0.42
Spruce-Pine-Fir (South) 0.36
The moisture condition of the wood is also critical to long-term
connection performance, particularly for nails in withdrawal. In some cases, the
withdrawal value of fasteners installed in moist lumber can decrease by as much
as 50 percent over time as the lumber dries to its equilibrium moisture content. At
the same time, a nail may develop a layer of rust that increases withdrawal
capacity. In contrast, deformed shank nails tend to hold their withdrawal capacity
much more reliably under varying moisture and use conditions. For this and other
reasons, the design nail withdrawal capacities in the NDS for smooth shank nails
are based on a fairly conservative reduction factor, resulting in about one-fifth of
the average ultimate tested withdrawal capacity. The reduction includes a safety
factor as well as a load duration adjustment (i.e., decreased by a factor of 1.6 to
adjust from short-term tests to normal duration load). Design values for nails and
bolts in shear are based on a deformation (i.e., slip) limit state and not their
ultimate capacity, resulting in a safety factor that may range from 3 to 5 based on
ultimate tested capacities. One argument for retaining a high safety factor in shear
connections is that the joint may creep under long-term load. While creep is not a
concern for many joints, slip of joints in a trussed assembly (i.e., rafter-ceiling
joist roof framing) is critical and, in key joints, can result in a magnified
deflection of the assembly over time (i.e., creep).
In view of the above discussion, there are a number of uncertainties in the
design of connections that can lead to conservative or unconservative designs
relative to the intent of the NDS and practical experience. The designer is advised
to follow the NDS procedures carefully, but should be prepared to make practical
adjustments as dictated by sound judgment and experience and allowed in the
NDS; refer to NDS•7.1.1.4.
Withdrawal design values for nails and lag screws in the NDS are based
on the fastener being oriented perpendicular to the grain of the wood. Shear
design values in wood connections are also based on the fastener being oriented
perpendicular to the grain of wood. However, the lateral (shear) design values are
dependent on the direction of loading relative to the wood grain direction in each
of the connected members. Refer to Figure 7.4 for an illustration of various
connection types and loading conditions.

Residential Structural Design Guide 7-13
Chapter 7 - Connections
FIGURE 7.4 Types of Connections and Loading Conditions
The NDS provides tabulated connection design values that use the
following symbols for the three basic types of loading:
• W–withdrawal (or tension loading);
• Z
⊥
–shear perpendicular to wood grain; and
• Z
||
–shear parallel to wood grain.
In addition to the already tabulated design values for the above structural
resistance properties of connections, the NDS provides calculation methods to
address conditions that may not be covered by the tables and that give more

7-14 Residential Structural Design Guide
Chapter 7 - Connections
flexibility to the design of connections. The methods are appropriate for use in
hand calculations or with computer spreadsheets.
For withdrawal, the design equations are relatively simple empirical
relationships (based on test data) that explain the effect of fastener size
(diameter), penetration into the wood, and density of the wood. For shear, the
equations are somewhat more complex because of the multiple failure modes that
may result from fastener characteristics, wood density, and size of the wood
members. Six shear-yielding modes (and a design equation for each) address
various yielding conditions in either the wood members or the fasteners that join
the members. The critical yield mode is used to determine the design shear value
for the connection. Refer to NDS•Appendix I for a description of the yield modes.
The yield equations in the NDS are based on general dowel equations that
use principles of engineering mechanics to predict the shear capacity of a doweled
joint. The general dowel equations can be used with joints that have a gap
between the members and they can also be used to predict ultimate capacity of a
joint made of wood, wood and metal, or wood and concrete. However, the
equations do not account for friction between members or the anchoring/cinching
effect of the fastener head as the joint deforms and the fastener rotates or develops
tensile forces. These effects are important to the ultimate capacity of wood
connections in shear and, therefore, the general dowel equations may be
considered to be conservative; refer to Section 7.3.6. For additional guidance and
background on the use of the general dowel equations, refer to the NDS
Commentary and other useful design resources available through the American
Forest & Paper Association (AF&PA, 1999; Showalter, Line, and Douglas, 1999).
7.3.2 Adjusted Allowable Design Values
Design values for wood connections are subject to adjustments in a
manner similar to that required for wood members themselves (see Section 5.2.4
of Chapter 5). The calculated or tabulated design values for W and Z are
multiplied by the applicable adjustment factors to determine adjusted allowable
design values, Z’ and W’, as shown below for the various connection methods
(i.e., nails, bolts, and lag screws).
[NDS•12.3 & 7.3]
∆
=′ CCCCZCZ
gtMD
for bolts
egdgtMD
CCCCCCZCZ
∆
=′ for lag screws
tndiegdtMD
CCCCCCZCZ =′ for nails and spikes
[NDS•12.2&7.3]
tntMD
CCCWCW =′ for nails and spikes
egtMD
CCCWCW =′ for lag screws

Residential Structural Design Guide 7-15
Chapter 7 - Connections
The adjustment factors and their applicability to wood connection design
are briefly described as follows:
• C
D
–Load Duration Factor (NDS•2.3.2 and Chapter 5, Table 5.3)–
applies to W and Z values for all fasteners based on design load
duration but shall not exceed 1.6 (i.e., wind and earthquake load
duration factor).
• C
M
–Wet Service Factor (NDS•7.3.3)–applies to W and Z values for all
connections based on moisture conditions at the time of fabrication
and during service; not applicable to residential framing.
• C
t
–Temperature Factor (NDS•7.3.4)–applies to the W and Z values
for all connections exposed to sustained temperatures of greater than
100
o
F; not typically used in residential framing.
• C
g
–Group Action Factor (NDS•7.3.6)–applies to Z values of two or
more bolts or lag screws loaded in single or multiple shear and aligned
in the direction of the load (i.e., rows).
• C
∆
–Geometry Factor (NDS•8.5.2, 9.4.)–applies to the Z values for
bolts and lag screws when the end distance or spacing of the bolts is
less than assumed in the unadjusted design values.
• C
d
–Penetration Depth Factor (NDS•9.3.3, 12.3.4)–applies to the Z
values of lag screws and nails when the penetration into the main
member is less than 8D for lag screws or 12D for nails (where D =
shank diameter); sometimes applicable to residential nailed
connections.
• C
eg
–End Grain Factor (NDS•9.2.2, 9.3.4, 12.3.5)–applies to W and Z
values for lag screws and to Z values for nails to account for reduced
capacity when the fastener is inserted into the end grain (C
eg
=0.67).
• C
di
–Diaphragm Factor (NDS•12.3.6)–applies to the Z values of nails
only to account for system effects from multiple nails used in sheathed
diaphragm construction (C
di
= 1.1).
• C
tn
–Toenail Factor (NDS•12.3.7)–applies to the W and Z values of
toenailed connections (C
tn
= 0.67 for withdrawal and = 0.83 for shear).
It does not apply to slant nailing in withdrawal or shear; refer to
Section 7.3.6.
The total allowable design value for a connection (as adjusted by the
appropriate factors above) must meet or exceed the design load determined for the
connection (refer to Chapter 3 for design loads). The values for W and Z are
based on single fastener connections. In instances of connections involving
multiple fasteners, the values for the individual or single fastener can be summed
to determine the total connection design value only when C
g
is applied (to bolts
and lag screws only) and fasteners are the same type and similar size. However,
this approach may overlook certain system effects that can improve the actual

7-16 Residential Structural Design Guide
Chapter 7 - Connections
performance of the joint in a constructed system or assembly (see Section 7.3.6).
Conditions that may decrease estimated performance, such as prying action
induced by the joint configuration and/or eccentric loads and other factors should
also be considered.
In addition, the NDS does not provide values for nail withdrawal or shear
when wood structural panel members (i.e., plywood or oriented strand board) are
used as a part of the joint. This type of joint–wood member to structural wood
panel–occurs frequently in residential construction. Z values can be estimated by
using the yield equations for nails in NDS 12.3.1 and assuming a reasonable
specific gravity (density) value for the wood structural panels, such as G = 0.5. W
values for nails in wood structural panels can be estimated in a similar fashion by
using the withdrawal equation presented in the next section. The tabulated W and
Z values in NDS•12 may also be used, but with some caution as to the selected
table parameters.
7.3.3 Nailed Connections
The procedures in NDS•12 provide for the design of nailed connections to
resist shear and withdrawal loads in wood-to-wood and metal-to-wood
connections. As mentioned, many specialty “nail-type” fasteners are available for
wood-to-concrete and even wood-to-steel connections. The designer should
consult manufacturer data for connection designs that use proprietary fastening
systems.
The withdrawal strength of a smooth nail (driven into the side grain of
lumber) is determined in accordance with either the empirical design equation
below or NDS•Table 12.2A.
[NDS•12.2.1]
p
2
5
DL)G(1380W = unadjusted withdrawal design value (lb) for a smooth shank
nail
where,
G = specific gravity of the lumber member receiving the nail tip
D = the diameter of the nail shank (in)
L
p
= the depth of penetration (in) of the nail into the member receiving the nail tip
The design strength of nails is greater when a nail is driven into the side
rather than the end grain of a member. Withdrawal information is available for
nails driven into the side grain; however, the withdrawal capacity of a nail driven
into the end grain is assumed to be zero because of its unreliability. Furthermore,
the NDS does not provide a method for determining withdrawal values for
deformed shank nails. These nails significantly enhance withdrawal capacity and
are frequently used to attach roof sheathing in high-wind areas. They are also used
to attach floor sheathing and some siding materials to prevent nail “back-out.”
The use of deformed shank nails is usually based on experience or preference.
The design shear value, Z, for a nail is typically determined by using the
following tables from NDS•12:

Residential Structural Design Guide 7-17
Chapter 7 - Connections
• Tables 12.3A and B. Nailed wood-to-wood, single-shear (two-
member) connections with the same species of lumber using box or
common nails, respectively.
• Tables 12.3E and F. Nailed metal plate-to-wood connections using
box or common nails, respectively.
The yield equations in NDS•12.3 may be used for conditions not
represented in the design value tables for Z. Regardless of the method used to
determine the Z value for a single nail, the value must be adjusted as described in
Section 7.3.2. As noted in the NDS, the single nail value is used to determine the
design value.
It is also worth mentioning that the NDS provides an equation for
determining allowable design value for shear when a nailed connection is loaded
in combined withdrawal and shear (see NDS•12.3.8, Equation 12.3-6). The
equation appears to be most applicable to a gable-end truss connection to the roof
sheathing under conditions of roof sheathing uplift and wall lateral load owing to
wind. The designer might contemplate other applications but should take care in
considering the combination of loads that would be necessary to create
simultaneous uplift and shear worthy of a special calculation.
7.3.4 Bolted Connections
Bolts may be designed in accordance with NDS•8 to resist shear loads in
wood-to-wood, wood-to-metal, and wood-to-concrete connections. As mentioned,
many specialty “bolt-type” fasteners can be used to connect wood to other
materials, particularly concrete and masonry. One common example is an epoxy-
set anchor. Manufacturer data should be consulted for connection designs that use
proprietary fastening systems.
The design shear value Z for a bolted connection is typically determined
by using the following tables from NDS•8:
• Table 8.2A. Bolted wood-to-wood, single-shear (two-member)
connections with the same species of lumber.
• Table 8.2B. Bolted metal plate-to-wood, single-shear (two-
member) connections; metal plate thickness of 1/4-inch minimum.
• Table 8.2D. Bolted single-shear wood-to-concrete connections;
based on minimum 6-inch bolt embedment in minimum f
c
= 2,000
psi concrete.
The yield equations of NDS•8.2 (single-shear joints) and NDS•8.3
(double-shear joints) may be used for conditions not represented in the design
value tables. Regardless of the method used to determine the Z value for a single
bolted connection, the value must be adjusted as described in Section 7.3.2.
It should be noted that the NDS does not provide W values for bolts. The
tension value of a bolt connection in wood framing is usually limited by the
bearing capacity of the wood as determined by the surface area of a washer used
underneath the bolt head or nut. When calculating the bearing capacity of the
wood based on the tension in a bolted joint, the designer should use the small

7-18 Residential Structural Design Guide
Chapter 7 - Connections
bearing area value C
b
to adjust the allowable compressive stress perpendicular to
grain F
c⊥
(see NDS•2.3.10). It should also be remembered that the allowable
compressive stress of lumber is based on a deformation limit state, not capacity;
refer to Section 5.2.3 of Chapter 5. In addition, the designer should verify the
tension capacity of the bolt and its connection to other materials (i.e., concrete or
masonry as covered in Section 7.4). The bending capacity of the washer should
also be considered. For example, a wide but thin washer will not evenly distribute
the bearing force to the surrounding wood.
The arrangement of bolts and drilling of holes are extremely important to
the performance of a bolted connection. The designer should carefully follow the
minimum edge, end, and spacing requirements of NDS•8.5. When necessary, the
designer should adjust the design value for the bolts in a connection by using the
geometry factor C
ρ
and the group action factor C
g
discussed in Section 7.3.2.
Any possible torsional load on a bolted connection (or any connection for
that manner) should also be considered in accordance with the NDS. In such
conditions, the pattern of the fasteners in the connection can become critical to
performance in resisting both a direct shear load and the loads created by a
torsional moment on the connection. Fortunately, this condition is not often
applicable to typical light-frame construction. However, cantilevered members
that rely on connections to “anchor” the cantilevered member to other members
will experience this effect, and the fasteners closest to the cantilever span will
experience greater shear load. One example of this condition sometimes occurs
with balcony construction in residential buildings; failure to consider the effect
discussed above has been associated with some notable balcony collapses.
For wood members bolted to concrete, the design lateral values are
provided in NDS•Table8.2E. The yield equations (or general dowel equations)
may also be used to conservatively determine the joint capacity. A recent study
has made recommendations regarding reasonable assumptions that must be made
in applying the yield equations to bolted wood-to-concrete connections (Stieda, et
al., 1999). Using symbols defined in the NDS, the study recommends an R
e
value
of 5 and an R
t
value of 3. These assumptions are reported as being conservative
because fastener head effects and joint friction are ignored in the general dowel
equations.
7.3.5 Lag Screws
Lag screws (or lag bolts) may be designed to resist shear and withdrawal
loads in wood-to-wood and metal-to-wood connections in accordance with
NDS•9. As mentioned, many specialty “screw-type” fasteners can be installed in
wood. Some tap their own holes and do not require predrilling. Manufacturer data
should be consulted for connection designs that use proprietary fastening systems.
The withdrawal strength of a lag screw (inserted into the side grain of
lumber) is determined in accordance with either the empirical design equation
below or NDS•Table 9.2A. It should be noted that the equation below is based on
single lag screw connection tests and is associated with a reduction factor of 0.2
applied to average ultimate withdrawal capacity to adjust for load duration and
safety. Also, the penetration length of the lag screw L
p
into the main member does

Residential Structural Design Guide 7-19
Chapter 7 - Connections
not include the tapered portion at the point. NDS•Appendix L contains
dimensions for lag screws.
[NDS•9.2.1]
p
4
3
2
3
LD)G(1800W = unadjusted withdrawal design value (lb) for a lag screw
where,
G = specific gravity of the lumber receiving the lag screw tip
D = the diameter of the lag screw shank (in)
L
p
= the depth of penetration (in) of the lag screw into the member receiving the
tip, less the tapered length of the tip
The allowable withdrawal design strength of a lag screw is greater when
the screw is installed in the side rather than the end grain of a member. However,
unlike the treatment of nails, the withdrawal strength of lag screws installed in the
end grain may be calculated by using the C
eg
adjustment factor with the equation
above.
The design shear value Z for a lag screw is typically determined by using
the following tables from NDS•9:
• Table 9.3A. Lag screw, single-shear (two-member) connections
with the same species of lumber for both members.
• Table 9.3B. Lag screw and metal plate-to-wood connections.
The yield equations in NDS•9.3 may be used for conditions not
represented in the design value tables for Z. Regardless of the method used to
determine the Z value for a single lag screw, the value must be adjusted as
described in Section 7.3.2.
It is also worth mentioning that the NDS provides an equation for
determining the allowable shear design value when a lag screw connection is
loaded in combined withdrawal and shear (see NDS•9.3.5, Equation 9.3-6). The
equation does not, however, appear to apply to typical uses of lag screws in
residential construction.
7.3.6 System Design Considerations
As with any building code or design specification, the NDS provisions
may or may not address various conditions encountered in the field. Earlier
chapters made several recommendations regarding alternative or improved design
approaches. Similarly, some considerations regarding wood connection design are
in order.
First, as a general design consideration, “crowded” connections should be
avoided. If too many fasteners are used (particularly nails), they may cause
splitting during installation. When connections become “crowded,” an alternative
fastener or connection detail should be considered. Basically, the connection
detail should be practical and efficient.
Second, while the NDS addresses “system effects” within a particular joint
(i.e., element) that uses multiple bolts or lag screws (i.e. the group action factor
C
g
), it does not include provisions regarding the system effects of multiple joints

7-20 Residential Structural Design Guide
Chapter 7 - Connections
in an assembly or system of components. Therefore, some consideration of
system effects is given below based on several relevant studies related to key
connections in a home that allow the dwelling to perform effectively as a
structural unit.
Sheathing Withdrawal Connections
Several recent studies have focused on roof sheathing attachment and nail
withdrawal, primarily as a result of Hurricane Andrew (HUD, 1999a; McClain,
1997; Cunningham, 1993; Mizzell and Schiff, 1994; and Murphy, Pye, and
Rosowsky, 1995); refer to Chapter 1. The studies identify problems related to
predicting the pull-off capacity of sheathing based on single nail withdrawal
values and determining the tributary withdrawal load (i.e., wind suction pressure)
on a particular sheathing fastener. One clear finding, however, is that the nails on
the interior of the roof sheathing panels are the critical fasteners (i.e., initiate
panel withdrawal failure) because of the generally larger tributary area served by
these fasteners. The studies also identified benefits to the use of screws and
deformed shank nails. However, use of a standard geometric tributary area of the
sheathing fastener and the wind loads in Chapter 3, along with the NDS
withdrawal values (Section 7.3.3), will generally result in a reasonable design
using nails. The wind load duration factor should also be applied to adjust the
withdrawal values since a commensurate reduction is implicit in the design
withdrawal values relative to the short-term, tested, ultimate withdrawal
capacities (see Section 7.3).
It is interesting, however, that one study found that the lower-bound (i.e.,
5th percentile) sheathing pull-off resistance was considerably higher than that
predicted by use of single-nail test values (Murphy, Pye, and Rosowsky, 1995).
The difference was as large as a factor of 1.39 greater than the single nail values.
While this would suggest a withdrawal system factor of at least 1.3 for sheathing
nails, it should be subject to additional considerations. For example, sheathing
nails are placed by people using tools in somewhat adverse conditions (i.e., on a
roof), not in a laboratory. Therefore, this system effect may be best considered as
a reasonable “construction tolerance” on actual nail spacing variation relative to
that intended by design. Thus, an 8- to 9-inch nail spacing on roof sheathing nails
in the panel’s field could be “tolerated” when a 6-inch spacing is “targeted” by
design.
Roof-to-Wall Connections
A couple of studies (Reed, et al., 1996; Conner, et al., 1987) have
investigated the capacity of roof-to-wall (i.e., sloped rafter to top plate)
connections using conventional toenailing and other enhancements (i.e.,
strapping, brackets, gluing, etc.). Again, the primary concern is related to high
wind conditions, such as experienced during Hurricane Andrew and other extreme
wind events; refer to Chapter 1.
First, as a matter of clarification, the toenail reduction factor C
tn
does not
apply to slant-nailing such as those used for rafter-to-wall connections and floor-
to-wall connections in conventional residential construction (Hoyle and Woeste,
1989). Toenailing occurs when a nail is driven at an angle in a direction parallel-

Residential Structural Design Guide 7-21
Chapter 7 - Connections
to-grain at the end of a member (i.e., a wall stud toenail connection to the top or
bottom plate that may be used instead of end nailing). Slant nailing occurs when a
nail is driven at an angle, but in a direction perpendicular-to-grain through the
side of the member and into the face grain of the other (i.e., from a roof rafter or
floor band joist to a wall top plate). Though a generally reliable connection in
most homes and similar structures built in the United States, even a well-designed
slant-nail connection used to attach roofs to walls will become impractical in
hurricane-prone regions or similar high-wind areas. In these conditions, a metal
strap or bracket is preferrable.
Based on the studies of roof-to-wall connections, five key findings are
summarized as follows (Reed et al., 1996; Conner et al., 1987):
1. In general, it was found that slant-nails (not to be confused with toe-
nails) in combination with metal straps or brackets do not provide
directly additive uplift resistance.
2. A basic metal twist strap placed on the interior side of the walls (i.e.,
gypsum board side) resulted in top plate tear-out and premature
failure. However, a strap placed on the outside of the wall (i.e.,
structural sheathing side) was able to develop its full capacity without
additional enhancement of the conventional stud-to-top plate
connection (see Table 7.1).
3. The withdrawal capacity for single joints with slant nails was
reasonably predicted by NDS with a safety factor of about 2 to 3.5.
However, with multiple joints tested simultaneously, a system factor
on withdrawal capacity of greater than 1.3 was found for the slant-
nailed rafter-to-wall connection. A similar system effect was not found
on strap connections, although the strap capacity was substantially
higher. The ultimate capacity of the simple strap connection (using
five 8d nails on either side of the strap–five in the spruce rafter and
five in the southern yellow pine top plate) was found to be about 1,900
pounds per connection. The capacity of three 8d common slant nails
used in the same joint configuration was found to be 420 pounds on
average, and with higher variation. When the three 8d common toenail
connection was tested in an assembly of eight such joints, the average
ultimate withdrawal capacity per joint was found to be 670 pounds
with a somewhat lower variation. Similar “system” increases were not
found for the strap connection. The 670 pounds capacity was similar to
that realized for a rafter-to-wall joint using three 16d box nails in
Douglas fir framing.
4. It was found that the strap manufacturer’s published value had an
excessive safety margin of greater than 5 relative to average ultimate
capacity. Adjusted to an appropriate safety factor in the range of 2 to 3
(as calculated by applying NDS nail shear equations by using a metal
side plate), the strap (a simple 18g twist strap) would cover a multitude
of high wind conditions with a simple, economical connection detail.
5. The use of deformed shank (i.e., annular ring) nails was found to
increase dramatically the uplift capacity of the roof-to-wall
connections using the slant nailing method.

7-22 Residential Structural Design Guide
Chapter 7 - Connections
Heel Joint in Rafter-to-Ceiling Joist Connections
The heel joint connection at the intersection of rafters and ceiling joists
have long been considered one of the weaker connections in conventional wood
roof framing. In fact, this highly stressed joint is one of the accolades of using a
wood truss rather than conventional rafter framing (particularly in high-wind or
snow-load conditions). However, the performance of conventional rafter-ceiling
joist heel joint connections should be understood by the designer since they are
frequently encountered in residential construction.
First, conventional rafter and ceiling joist (cross-tie) framing is simply a
“site-built” truss. Therefore, the joint loads can be analyzed by using methods
that are applicable to trusses (i.e., pinned joint analysis). However, the
performance of the system should be considered. As mentioned earlier for roof
trusses (Section 5.6.1 in Chapter 5), a system factor of 1.1 is applicable to tension
members and connections. Therefore, the calculated shear capacity of the nails in
the heel joint (and in ceiling joist splices) may be multiplied by a system factor of
1.1, which is considered conservative. Second, it must be remembered that the
nail shear values are based on a deformation limit and generally have a
conservative safety factor of three to five relative to the ultimate capacity.
Finally, the nail values should be adjusted for duration of load (i.e., snow load
duration factor of 1.15 to 1.25); refer to Section 5.2.4 of Chapter 5. With these
considerations and with the use of rafter support braces at or near mid-span (as is
common), reasonable heel joint designs should be possible for most typical design
conditions in residential construction.
Wall-to-Floor Connections
When wood sole plates are connected to wood floors, many nails are often
used, particularly along the total length of the sole plate or wall bottom plate.
When connected to a concrete slab or foundation wall, there are usually several
bolts along the length of the bottom plate. This points toward the question of
possible system effects in estimating the shear capacity (and uplift capacity) of
these connections for design purposes.
In recent shear wall tests, walls connected with pneumatic nails (0.131-
inch diameter by 3 inches long) spaced in pairs at 16 inches on center along the
bottom plate were found to resist over 600 pounds in shear per nail (HUD,
1999b). The bottom plate was Spruce-Pine-Fir lumber and the base beam was
Southern Yellow Pine. This value is about 4.5 times the adjusted allowable design
shear capacity predicted by use of the NDS equations. Similarly, connections
using 5/8-inch-diameter anchor bolts at 6 feet on center (all other conditions
equal) were tested in full shear wall assemblies; the ultimate shear capacity per
bolt was found to be 4,400 pounds. This value is about 3.5 times the adjusted
allowable design shear capacity per the NDS equations. These safety margins
appear excessive and should be considered by the designer when evaluating
similar connections from a practical “system” standpoint.

Residential Structural Design Guide 7-23
Chapter 7 - Connections
7.4 Design of Concrete and
Masonry Connections
7.4.1 General
In typical residential construction, the interconnection of concrete and
masonry elements or systems is generally related to the foundation and usually
handled in accordance with standard or accepted practice. The bolted wood
member connections to concrete as in Section 7.3.4 are suitable for bolted wood
connections to properly grouted masonry (see Chapter 4). Moreover, numerous
specialty fasteners or connectors (including power driven and cast-in-place) can
be used to fasten wood materials to masonry or concrete. The designer should
consult the manufacturer’s literature for available connectors, fasteners, and
design values.
This section discusses some typical concrete and masonry connection
designs in accordance with the ACI 318 concrete design specification and ACI
530 masonry design specification (ACI, 1999a; ACI, 1999b).
7.4.2 Concrete or Masonry Foundation Wall to Footing
Footing connections, if any, are intended to transfer shear loads from the
wall to the footing below. The shear loads are generally produced by lateral soil
pressure acting on the foundation (see Chapter 3).
Footing-to-wall connections for residential construction are constructed in
any one of the following three ways (refer to Figure 7.5 for illustrations of the
connections):
• no vertical reinforcement or key;
• key only; or
• dowel only.
Generally, no special connection is needed in nonhurricane-prone or low- to
moderate-hazard seismic areas. Instead, friction is sufficient for low, unbalanced
backfill heights while the basement slab can resist slippage for higher backfill
heights on basement walls. The basement slab abuts the basement wall near its base
and thus provides lateral support. If gravel footings are used, the unbalanced backfill
height needs to be sufficiently low (i.e., less than 3 feet), or means must be provided
to prevent the foundation wall from slipping sideways from lateral soil loads. Again,
a basement slab can provide the needed support. Alternatively, a footing key or
doweled connection can be used.

7-24 Residential Structural Design Guide
Chapter 7 - Connections
FIGURE 7.5 Concrete or Masonry Wall-to-Footing Connections
Friction Used to Provide Shear Transfer
To verify the amount of shear resistance provided by friction alone, assume a
coefficient of friction between two concrete surfaces of µ = 0.6. Using dead loads
only, determine the static friction force, NAF µ= , where F is the friction force (lb),
N is the dead load (psf), and A is the bearing surface area (sf) between the wall and
the footing.
Key Used to Provide Shear Transfer
A concrete key is commonly used to “interlock” foundation walls to
footings. If foundation walls are constructed of masonry, the first course of masonry
must be grouted solid when a key is used.
In residential construction, a key is often formed by using a 2x4 wood board
with chamfered edges that is placed into the surface of the footing immediately after
the concrete pour. Figure 7.6 illustrates a footing with a key. Shear resistance
developed by the key is computed in accordance with the equation below.
[ACI-318•22.5]
nu
VV φ≤
bhf
3
4
V
cn
′=

Residential Structural Design Guide 7-25
Chapter 7 - Connections
FIGURE 7.6 Key in Concrete Footings
Dowels Used to Provide Adequate Shear Transfer
Shear forces at the base of exterior foundation walls may require a dowel to
transfer the forces from the wall to the footing. The equations below described by
ACI-318 as the Shear-Friction Method are used to develop shear resistance with
vertical reinforcement (dowels) across the wall-footing interface.
[ACI-318•11.7]
Masonry Walls Concrete Walls
bbe
d12l ≥
nu
VV φ≤










′
=
yv
4
vm
v
fA12.0
Af350
ofminimumB










′
≤µ=
c
cc
yvfn
A800
Af2.0
fAV
µφ
=
y
u
vf
f
V
A
φ = 0.85
If dowels are used to transfer shear forces from the base of the wall to the
footing, use the equations below to determine the minimum development length
required (refer to Figure 7.7 for typical dowel placement). If development length
exceeds the footing thickness, the dowel must be in the form of a hook, which is
rarely required in residential construction.

7-26 Residential Structural Design Guide
Chapter 7 - Connections
[ACI-318•12.2, 12.5] Concrete Walls
Standard Hooks Deformed Bars
c
b
hb
f
d1200
l
′
=
where f
y
= 60,000 psi














+
αβγλ








′
=
b
TR
c
y
db
d
Kc
f40
f3
l
5.2
d
Kc
b
TR
≤
+
000,60
f
y
=ξ
21
A
A
ll
provided,s
required,s
dbd
′′≥








=
provided,s
required,s
A
A
=ω
[ACI-530•1.12.3,2.1.8] Masonry Walls
Standard Hooks Deformed Bars
.in12Fd0015.0l
sbd
≥= {}
bd
d12maximuml =
be
d25.11l = {}
bd
d12maximuml =
FIGURE 7.7 Dowel Placement in Concrete Footings
The minimum embedment length is a limit specified in ACI-318 that is not
necessarily compatible with residential construction conditions and practice.
Therefore, this guide suggests a minimum embedment length of 6 to 8 inches for
footing dowels, when necessary, in residential construction applications. In
addition, dowels are sometimes used in residential construction to connect other
concrete elements, such as porch slabs or stairs, to the house foundation to control
differential movement. However, exterior concrete “flat work” adjacent to a home
should be founded on adequate soil bearing or reasonably compacted backfill.
Finally, connecting exterior concrete work to the house foundation requires
caution, particularly in colder climates and soil conditions where frost heave may
be a concern.

Residential Structural Design Guide 7-27
Chapter 7 - Connections
7.4.3 Anchorage and Bearing on Foundation Walls
Anchorage Tension (Uplift) Capacity
The equations below determine whether the concrete or masonry shear area
of each bolt is sufficient to resist pull-out from the wall as a result of uplift forces
and shear friction in the concrete.
[ACI-318•11.3, ACI-530•2.1.2]
Concrete Foundation Wall Masonry Foundation Wall
cu
VV φ≤
aa
Bb ≤
cvc
fA4V ′=










′
=
yb
mp
a
fA2.0
fA5.0
ofminimumB










pi
pi
=
2
2
b
v
h
l
ofminimumA










pi
pi
=
2
be
2
b
p
l
l
ofminimumA
Bearing Strength
Determining the adequacy of the bearing strength of a foundation wall
follows ACI-318•10.17 for concrete or ACI-530•2.1.7 for masonry. The bearing
strength of the foundation wall is typically adequate for the loads encountered in
residential construction.
[ACI-318•10.17 and ACI-530•2.1.7]
Concrete Foundation Wall Masonry Foundation Wall
B
c
= factored bearing load
1cc
Af85.0B ′φ≤
aa
Ff ≤
1
a
A
P
f =
φ = 0.7
ma
f25.0F ′≤
When the foundation wall’s supporting surface is wider on all sides than the
loaded area, the designer is permitted to determine the design bearing strength on the
loaded area by using the equations below.
[ACI-318•10.7 and ACI-530•2.1.7]
Concrete Foundation Wall
2
A
A
where
A
A
Af85.0B
1
2
1
2
1cc
≤′φ=
Masonry Foundation Wall
2
A
A
where
AAA
P
f
1
2
121
a
≤=

7-28 Residential Structural Design Guide
Chapter 7 - Connections
7.5 Design Examples
EXAMPLE 7.1 Roof Sheathing Connections
Given
• Design wind speed is 130 mph gust with an open (coastal) exposure
• Two-story home with a gable roof
• Roof framing lumber is Southern Yellow Pine (G=0.55)
• Roof framing is spaced at 24 inches on center
• Roof sheathing is 7/16-inch-thick structural wood panel
Find 1. Wind load (suction) on roof sheathing.
2. Nail type/size and maximum spacing.
Solution
1. Determine the wind load on roof sheathing (Chapter 3, Section 3.6.2)
Step 1: Basic velocity pressure = 24.6 psf (Table 3.7)
Step 2: Adjust for open exposure = 1.4(24.6 psf) = 34.4 psf
Step 3: Skip
Step 4: Roof sheathing G
cp
= -2.2 (Table 3.9)
Step 5: Design load = (-2.2)(34.4 psf) = 76 psf
2. Select a trial nail type and size, determine withdrawal capacity, and calculated
required spacing
Use an 8d pneumatic nail (0.113 inch diameter) with a length of 2 3/8 inches. The
unadjusted design withdrawal capacity is determined using the equation in Section
7.3.3.
W = 1380(G)
2.5
DL
p
G = 0.55
D = 0.113 in
L
p
= (2 3/8 in) – (7/16 in) = 1.9 in
W = 1380(0.55)
2.5
(0.113 in)(1.9 in) = 66.5 lb
Determine the adjusted design withdrawal capacity using the applicable
adjustment factors discussed in Section 7.3.2.
W’ = WC
D
= (66.5 lb)(1.6) = 106 lb
Determine the required nail spacing in the roof sheathing panel interior.
Tributary sheathing area = (roof framing spacing)(nail spacing)
= (2 ft)(s)
Withdrawal load per nail = (wind uplift pressure)(2 ft)(s)
= (76 psf)(2 ft)(s)
W’ ≥ design withdrawal load
106 lb ≥ (76 psf)(2 ft)(s)
s ≤ 0.69 ft
Use a maximum nail spacing of 8 inches in the roof sheathing panel interior.

Residential Structural Design Guide 7-29
Chapter 7 - Connections
Notes:
1. If Spruce-Pine-Fir (G=0.42) roof framing lumber is substituted, W’ would be
54 lb and the required nail spacing would reduce to 4 inches on center in the
roof sheathing panel interior. Thus, it is extremely important to carefully
consider and verify the species of framing lumber when determining
fastening requirements for roof sheathing.
2. The above analysis is based on a smooth shank nail. A ring shank nail may
be used to provide greater withdrawal capacity that is also less susceptible to
lumber moisture conditions at installation and related long-term effects on
withdrawal capacity.
3. With the smaller tributary area, the roof sheathing edges that are supported
on framing members may be fastened at the standard 6 inch on center
fastener spacing. For simplicity, it may be easier to specify a 6 inch on
center spacing for all roof sheathing fasteners, but give an allowance of 2 to 3
inches for a reasonable construction tolerance; refer to Section 7.3.6.
4. As an added measure given the extreme wind environment, the sheathing nail
spacing along the gable end truss/framing should be specified at a closer
spacing, say 4 inches on center. These fasteners are critical to the
performance of light-frame gable roofs in extreme wind events; refer to the
discussion on hurricanes in Chapter 1. NDS•12.3.8 provides an equation to
determine nail lateral strength when subjected to a combined lateral and
withdrawal load. This equation may be used to verify the 4 inch nail spacing
recommendation at the gable end.
Conclusion
This example problem demonstrates a simple application of the nail withdrawal
equation in the NDS. The withdrawal forces on connections in residential construction
are usually of greatest concern in the roof sheathing attachment. In hurricane prone
regions, it is common practice to use a 6-inch nail spacing on the interior of roof
sheathing panels. In lower wind regions of the United States, a standard nail spacing
applies (i.e., 6 inches on panel edges and 12 inches in the panel field); refer to Table
7.1.

7-30 Residential Structural Design Guide
Chapter 7 - Connections
EXAMPLE 7.2 Roof-to-Wall Connections
Given
• Design wind speed is 120 mph gust with an open coastal exposure
• One-story home with a hip roof (28 ft clear span trusses with 2 ft overhangs)
• Roof slope is 6:12
• Trusses are spaced at 24 in on center
Find 1. Uplift and transverse shear load at the roof-to-wall connection
2. Connection detail to resist the design loads
Solution
1. Determine the design loads on the connection (Chapter 3)
Dead load (Section 3.3)
Roof dead load = 15 psf (Table 3.2)
Dead load on wall = (15 psf)[0.5(28 ft) + 2 ft] = 240 plf
Wind load (Section 3.6)
Step 1: Basic velocity pressure = 18.8 psf (Table 3.7)
Step 2: Adjust for open exposure = 1.4(18.8 psf) = 26.3 psf
Step 3: Skip
Step 4: Roof uplift G
cp
= -0.8
Overhang G
cp
= +0.8
Step 5: Roof uplift pressure = -0.8(26.3 psf) = -21 psf
Overhang pressure = 0.8 (26.3 psf) = 21 psf
Determine the wind uplift load on the wall.
Design load on wall = 0.6D + W
u
(Table 3.1)
= 0.6 (240 plf) + {(-21 psf)[0.5(28 ft) + 2 ft] – (21 psf)(2 ft)}
= - 234 plf (upward)
Design load per wall-to-truss connection = (2 ft)(-234 plf) = -468 lb (upward)
Determine the transverse shear (lateral) load on the roof-to-wall connection. The
transverse load is associated with the role of the roof diaphragm in supporting and
transferring lateral loads from direct wind pressure on the walls.
Design lateral load on the wall-to-truss connection
= 1/2 (wall height)(wall pressure)(truss spacing)
Adjusted velocity pressure = 26.3 psf
Wall GC
p
= -1.2,+1.1*
Wind pressure = 1.1(26.3 psf) = 29 psf
*The 1.1 coefficient is used since the maximum uplift on the roof and roof
overhang occurs on a windward side of the building (i.e., positive wall
pressure).
= 1/2 (8 ft)(29 psf)(2 ft)
= 232 lb

Residential Structural Design Guide 7-31
Chapter 7 - Connections
Thus, roof-to-wall connection combined design loads are:
468 lb (uplift)
232 lb (lateral, perpendicular to wall)*
*The lateral load parallel to a wall is not considered to be significant in this example
problem, although it may be checked to verify the transfer of lateral wind loads on the
roof to shear walls; refer to Chapter 6.
2. Determine a roof-to-wall connection detail to resist the combined design load.
Generally, manufacturers publish loading data for metal connectors for multiple loading
directions. The designer should verify that these values are for simultaneous multi-
directional loading or make reasonable adjustments as needed. In this example problem,
the NDS will be used to design a simple roof tie-down strap and slant nail connection.
A tie down strap will be used to resist the uplift load and typical slant nailing will be
used to resist the lateral load. The slant nailing, however, does not contribute
appreciably to the uplift capacity when a strap or metal connector is used; refer to
Section 7.3.6.
Uplift load resistance
Assuming an 18g (minimum 0.043 inches thick) metal strap is used, determine the
number of 6d common nails required to connect the strap to the truss and to the wall top
plate to resist the design uplift load.
The nail shear capacity is determined as follows:
Z = 60 lb (NDS Table 12.3F)
Z’ = ZC
D
(Section 7.3.2)
= (60 lb)(1.6)
= 96 lb
The number of nails required in each end of the strap is
(486 lb)/(96 lb/nail) = 5 nails
The above Z value for metal side-plates implicitly addresses failure modes that may be
associated with strap/nail head tear-through. However, the width of the strap must be
calculated. Assuming a minimum 33 ksi steel yield strength and a standard 0.6 safety
factor, the width of the strap is determined as follows:
0.6(33,000 psi)(0.043 in)(w) = 468 lb
w = 0.55 in
Therefore, use a minimum 1-inch wide strap to allow for the width of nail holes and an
a staggered nail pattern. Alternatively, a thinner strap may be used (i.e., 20g or 0.033
inches thick) which may create less problem with installing finishes over the
connection.
Lateral load resistance
Assuming that a 16d pneumatic nail will be used (0.131 in diameter by 3.5 inches long),
determine the number of slant-driven nails required to transfer the lateral load from the
wall to the roof sheathing diaphragm through the roof trusses. Assume that the wall
framing is Spruce-Pine-Fir (G = 0.42).

7-32 Residential Structural Design Guide
Chapter 7 - Connections
Z = 88 lb (NDS Table 12.3A)*
*A 1-1/4- inch side member thickness is used to account for the
slant nail penetration through the truss at an angle.
Z’ = ZC
D
** **The C
tn
value of 0.83 is not used because the nail is slant driven
and is not a toe-nail; refer to Section 7.3.6.
Z’ = (88 lb)(1.6) = 141 lb
Therefore, the number of nails required to transfer the transverse shear load is
determined as follows:
(232 lb)/(141 lb/nail) = 2 nails
Conclusion
The beginning of the uplift load path is on the roof sheathing which is transferred to the
roof framing through the sheathing nails; refer to Example 7.1. The uplift load is then
passed through the roof-to-wall connections as demonstrated in this example problem.
It should be noted that the load path for wind uplift cannot overlook any joint in the
framing.
One common error is to attach small roof tie-straps or clips to only the top member of
the wall top plate. Thus, the uplift load must be transferred between the two members
of the double top plate which are usually only face nailed together for the purpose of
assembly, not to transfer large uplift loads. This would not normally be a problem if
the wall sheathing were attached to the top member of the double top plate, but walls
are usually built to an 8 ft – 1 in height to allow for assembly of interior finishes and to
result in a full 8 ft ceiling height after floor and ceiling finishes. Since sheathing is a
nominal 8 ft in length, it cannot span the full wall height and may not be attached to the
top member of the top plate. Also, the strap should be placed on the structural
sheathing side of the wall unless framing joints within the wall (i.e., stud-to-plates) are
adequately reinforced.
Longer sheathing can be special ordered and is often used to transfer uplift and shear
loads across floor levels by lapping the sheathing over the floor framing to the wall
below. The sheathing may also be laced at the floor band joist to transfer uplift load,
but the cross grain tension of the band joist should not exceed a suitably low stress
value (i.e., 1/3F
v
); refer to Chapter 5, Section 5.3.1.

Residential Structural Design Guide 7-33
Chapter 7 - Connections
EXAMPLE 7.3 Rafter-to-Ceiling Joist Connection (Heel Joint)
Given
• Rafter and ceiling joist roof construction (without intermediate rafter
braces)
• Roof horizontal span is 28 ft and rafter slope is 6:12 (26 degrees)
• Roof framing is Hem-Fir (G=0.43) with a spacing of 16 inches on-center
• Roof snow load is 25 psf
• Rafter & roofing dead load is 10 psf
• Ceiling dead load is 5 psf
Find 1. The tension load on the heel joint connection
2. Nailing requirements
Solution
1. Determine the tensile load on the heel joint connection
Using basic principles of mechanics and pinned-joint analysis of the rafter and
ceiling joist “truss” system, the forces on the heel joint can be determined. First,
the rafter bearing reaction is determined as follows:
B = (snow + dead load)(1/2 span)(rafter spacing)
= (25 psf + 10 psf)(14 ft)(1.33 ft)
= 652 lb
Summing forces in the y-direction (vertical) for equilibrium of the heel joint
connection, the compression (axial) force in the rafter is determined as follows:
C = (652 lb)/sin(26
o
) = 1,487 lb
Now, summing the forces in the x-direction (horizontal) for equilibrium of the
heel joint connection, the tension (axial) force in the ceiling joist is determined as
follows:
T = (1,487 lb)cos(26
o
) = 1,337 lb
2. Determine the required nailing for the connection
Try a 12d box nail. Using NDS Table 12.3A, the following Z value is obtained:
Z = 80 lb
Z’ = ZC
D
C
d
(Section 7.3.2)
C
D
= 1.25* (snow load duration, Table 5.3)
*NDS uses a factor of 1.15
C
d
= p/(12D) (NDS•12.3.4)
p = penetration into main member = 1.5 inches
D = nail diameter = 0.128 inches
C
d
= 1.5/[12(0.128)] = 0.98
Z’ = (80 lb)(1.25)(0.98) = 98 lb
In Section 5.6.1, a system factor of 1.1 for tension members and connections in
trussed, light-frame roofing systems was discussed for repetitive member
applications (i.e., framing spaced no greater than 24 inches on center). Therefore,
the Z’ value may be adjusted as follows:

7-34 Residential Structural Design Guide
Chapter 7 - Connections
Z’ = (98 lb)(1.1) = 108 lb
The total number of 12d box nails required is determined as follows:
(1,337 lb)/(108 lb/nail) = 12.3
If a 16d common nail is substituted, the number of nails may be reduced to about
8. If, in addition, the species of framing lumber was changed to Southern Yellow
Pine (G = 0.55), the number of nails could be reduced to 6.
Conclusion
This example problem demonstrates the design of one of the most critical roof
framing connections for site-built rafter and ceiling joist framing. In some cases,
the ceiling joist or cross-tie may be located at a higher point on the rafter than the
wall bearing location which will increase the load on the joint. In most designs, a
simple pinned-joint analysis of the roof framing is used to determine the
connection forces for various roof framing configurations.
The snow load duration factor of 1.25 was used in lieu of the 1.15 factor
recommended by the NDS; refer to Table 5.3. In addition, a system factor for
repetitive member, light-frame roof systems was used. The 1.1 factor is
considered to be conservative which may explain the difference between the
design solution in this example and the nailing required in Table 7.1 by
conventional practice (i.e., four 16d common nails). If the slant nailing of the
rafter to the wall top plate and wall top plate to the ceiling joist are considered in
transferring the tension load, then the number of nails may be reduced relative to
that calculated above. If a larger system factor than 1.1 is considered (say 1.3),
then the analysis will become more closely aligned with conventional practice;
refer to the roof framing system effects discussion in Section 5.6.1. It should also
be remembered that the NDS safety factor on nail lateral capacity is generally in
the range of 3 to 5. However, in more heavily loaded conditions (i.e., lower roof
slope, higher snow load, etc.) the connection design should be expected to depart
somewhat from conventional practice that is intended for “typical” conditions of
use.
In any event, 12 nails per rafter-ceiling joist joint may be considered unacceptable
by some builders and designers since the connection is marginally “over-crowed”
with fasteners. Therefore, alternative analysis methods and fastener solutions
should be considered with some regard to extensive experience in conventional
practice; refer to NDS•7.1.1.4 and the discussion above.

Residential Structural Design Guide 7-35
Chapter 7 - Connections
EXAMPLE 7.4 Wall Sole Plate to Floor Connection
Given
• A 2x4 wall bottom (sole) plate of Spruce-Pine-Fir is fastened to a wood floor
deck
• Floor framing lumber is Hem-Fir
• A 3/4-inch-thick wood structural panel subfloor is used
• The bottom plate is subject to the following design loads due to wind and/or
earthquake lateral loads:
250 plf shear parallel-to-grain (shear wall slip resistance)
120 plf shear perpendicular-to-grain (transverse load on wall)
• The uplift load on the wall, if any, is assumed to be resisted by other
connections (i.e., uplift straps, shear wall hold-downs, etc.)
Find A suitable nailing schedule for the wall sole plate connection using 16d pneumatic
nails (0.131inch diameter by 3.5 inches long).
Solution
It is assumed that the nails will penetrate the sub-flooring and the floor framing
members. It will also be conservatively assumed that the density of the sub-floor
sheathing and the floor framing is the same as the wall bottom plate (lowest
density of the connected materials). These assumptions allow for the use of NDS
Table 12.3A. Alternatively, a more accurate nail design lateral capacity may be
calculated using the yield equations of NDS•12.3.1.
Using NDS Table 12.3A, it is noted that the closest nail diameters in the table are
0.135 and 0.128 inches. Interpolating between these values, using a side member
thickness of 1.5 inches, and assuming Spruce-Pine-Fir for all members, the
following Z value is obtained:
Z = 79 + [(0.131-0.128)/(0.135-0.128)](88 lb – 79 lb) = 83 lb*
Z’ = ZC
D
= 83 lb (1.6) = 133 lb
*Using the NDS general dowel equations as presented in AF&PA Technical
Report 12 (AF&PA, 1999), the calculated value is identical under the same
simplifying assumptions. However, a higher design value of 90 pounds may be
calculated by using only the subfloor sheathing as a side member with G = 0.5.
The ultimate capacity is conservatively predicted as 261 pounds.
Assuming that both of the lateral loads act simultaneously at their full design
value (conservative assumption), the resultant design load is determined as
follows:
Resultant shear load = sqrt[(250plf)
2
+ (120 plf)
2
] = 277 plf
Using the conservative assumptions above, the number of nails per linear foot of
wall plate is determined as follows:
(277 lb)/(133 lb/nail) = 2.1 nails per foot
Rounding this number, the design recommendation is 2 nails per foot or 3 nails
per 16 inches of wall plate.

7-36 Residential Structural Design Guide
Chapter 7 - Connections
Conclusion
The number of 16d pneumatic nails (0.131 inch diameter) required is 2 nails per foot of
wall bottom plate for the moderate loading condition evaluated. The number of nails
may be reduced by using a larger diameter nail or by evaluating the nail lateral capacity
using the yield equations of NDS•12.3.1.
As in Example 7.3, some consideration of extensive experience in conventional
residential construction should also be considered in view of the conventional fastening
requirements of Table 7.1 for wood sole plate to floor framing connections (i.e., one
16d nail at 16 inches on center); refer to NDS•7.1.1.4. Perhaps 2 nails per 16 inches on
center is adequate for the loads assumed in this example problem. Testing has
indicated that the ultimate capacity of 2 16d pneumatic nails (0.131 inch diameter) can
exceed 600 lb per nail for conditions similar to those assumed in this example problem;
refer to Section 7.3.6. The general dowel equations under predict the ultimate capacity
by about a factor of two. Using 2 16d pneumatic nails at 16 inches on center may be
expected to provide a safety factor of greater than 3 relative to the design lateral load
assumed in this problem (i.e., [600 lb/nail] x [2nails/1.33 ft]/277 plf = 3.2).
As noted in Chapter 6, the ultimate capacity of base connections for shear walls should
at least exceed the ultimate capacity of the shear wall for seismic design and, for wind
design, the connection should at least provide a safety factor of 2 relative to the wind
load. For seismic design, the safety factor for shear walls recommended in this guide is
2.5; refer to Chapter 6, Section 6.5.2.3. Therefore, the fastening schedule of 2-16d
pneumatic nails at 16 inches on center is not quite adequate for seismic design loads of
the magnitude assumed in this problem (i.e., the connection does not provide a safety
factor of at least 2.5). The reader is referred to Chapter 3, Section 3.8.4 for additional
discussion on seismic design considerations and the concept of “balanced” design.

Residential Structural Design Guide 7-37
Chapter 7 - Connections
EXAMPLE 7.5 Side-Bearing Joist Connection
Given
• A 2x10 Douglas-Fir joist is side-bearing (shear connection) on a built-up wood
girder
• The design shear load on the side-bearing joint is 400 lb due to floor live and
dead loads
Find 1. The number of 16d box toenails required to transfer the side-bearing (shear)
load.
2. A suitable joist hanger
Solution
1. Determine the number of 16d box toenails required
Z’ = ZC
D
C
d
C
tn
Z = 103 lb (NDS Table 12.3A)
C
D
= 1.0 (normal duration load)
C
d
= 1.0 (penetration into main member > 12D)
C
tn
= 0.83 (NDS•12.3.7)
Z’ = (103 lb)(0.83) = 85 lb
The number of toenails required is determined as follows:
(400 lb)/(85 lb/nail) = 4.7 nails
Use 6 toenails with 3 on each side of the joist to allow for reasonable construction
tolerance in assembling the connection in the field.
2. As an alternative, select a suitable manufactured joist hanger.
Data on metal joist hangers and various other connectors are available from a number
of manufacturers of these products. The design process simply involves the selection of
a properly rated connector of the appropriate size and configuration for the application.
Rated capacities of specialty connectors are generally associated with a particular
fastener and species of framing lumber. Adjustments may be necessary for use with
various lumber species and fastener types.
Conclusion
The example problem details the design approach for two simple methods of
transferring shear loads through a side-bearing connection. One approach uses a
conventional practice of toe-nailing the joist to a wood girder. This approach is
commonly used for short-span floor joists (i.e., tail joist to header joist connections at a
floor stairwell framing). For more heavily loaded applications, a metal joist hanger is
the preferred solution.

7-38 Residential Structural Design Guide
Chapter 7 - Connections
EXAMPLE 7.6 Wood Floor Ledger Connection to a Wood or Concrete Wall
Given
• A 3x8 wood ledger board (Douglas-Fir) is used to support a side-bearing floor
system.
• The ledger is attached to 3x4 wall studs (Douglas-Fir) spaced at 16 inches on
center in a balloon-framed portion of a home; as a second condition, the ledger
is attached to a concrete wall.
• The design shear load on the ledger is 300 plf due to floor live and dead loads.
Find 1. The spacing of 5/8-inch-diameter lag screws required to fasten the ledger to
the wood wall framing
2. The spacing of 5/8-inch-diameter anchor bolts required to fasten the ledger to
a concrete wall
Solution
1. Determine connection requirements for use of a 5/8-inch-diameter lag screw
Z’ = ZC
D
C
g
C
∆
C
d
(Section 7.3.2)
Z
s⊥
= 630 lb* (NDS Table 9.3A)
C
D
= 1.0 (normal duration load)
C
g
= 0.98 (2 bolts in a row) (NDS Table 7.3.6A)
C
∆
=1.0**
C
d
= p/(8D) = (3.09 in)/[8(5/8 in)] = 0.62 (NDS•9.3.3)
p = (penetration into main member) – (tapered length of tip of lag screw)***
= 3.5 in – 13/32 in = 3.09 in
*The Z
s⊥
value is used for joints when the shear load is perpendicular to the grain
of the side member (or ledger in this case).
**A C
∆
value of 1.0 is predicated on meeting the minimum edge and end
distances required for lag screws and bolts; refer to NDS•8.5.3 and NDS•9.4.
The required edge distance in the side member is 4D from the top of the ledger
(loaded edge) and 1.5D from the bottom of the ledger (unloaded edge), where D is
the diameter of the bolt or lag screw. The edge distance of 1.5D is barely met for
the nominal 3-inch-wide (2.5 inch actual) stud provided the lag screws are
installed along the center line of the stud.
***A 6-inch-long lag screw will extend through the side member (2.5 inches
thick) and penetrate into the main member 3.5 inches. The design penetration into
the main member must be reduced by the length of the tapered tip on the lag
screw (see Appendix L of NDS for lag screw dimensions).
Z’ = (630 lb)(1.0)(0.98)(1.0)(0.62) = 383 lb
The lag bolt spacing is determined as follows:
Spacing = (383 lb/lag screw)/(300 plf) = 1.3 ft
Therefore, one lag screw per stud-ledger intersection may be used (i.e., 1.33 ft
spacing). The lag screws should be staggered about 2 inches from the top and
bottom of the 3x8 ledger board. Since the bolts are staggered (i.e., not two bolts
in a row), the value of C
g
may be revised to 1.0 in the above calculations.

Residential Structural Design Guide 7-39
Chapter 7 - Connections
2. Determine connection requirements for use of a 5/8-inch-diameter anchor bolt in a
concrete wall
Z’ = ZC
D
C
g
C
∆
(Section 7.3.2)
Z
⊥
= 650 lb* (NDS Table 8.2E)
C
D
= 1.0 (normal duration load)
C
g
=1.0**
C
∆
= 1.0***
* The Z
⊥
value is used since the ledger is loaded perpendicular to grain
**The bolts will be spaced and staggered, not placed in a row.
***Edge and end distance requirements of NDS•8.5.3 and NDS•8.5.4 will be met
for full design value.
Z’ = (650 lb)(1.0)(1.0)(1.0) = 650 lb
The required anchor bolt spacing is determined as follows:
Spacing = (650 lb)/(300 plf) = 2.2 ft
Therefore, the anchor bolts should be spaced at about 2 ft on center and staggered
from the top and bottom edge of the ledger by a distance of about 2 inches.
Note: In conditions where this connection is also required to support the wall
laterally (i.e., an outward tension load due to seismic loading on a heavy concrete
wall), the tension forces may dictate additional connectors to transfer the load into
the floor diaphragm. In lower wind or seismic load conditions, the ledger
connection to the wall and the floor sheathing connection to the ledger are usually
sufficient to transfer the design tension loading, even though it may induce some
cross grain tension forces in the ledger. The cross-grain tension stress may be
minimized by locating every other bolt as close to the top of the ledger as
practical or by using a larger plate washer on the bolts.
Conclusion
The design of bolted side-bearing connections was presented in this design
example for two wall construction conditions. While not a common connection
detail in residential framing, it is one that requires careful design consideration
and installation since it must transfer the floor loads (i.e., people) through a shear
connection rather than simple bearing. The example also addresses the issue of
appropriate bolt location with respect to edge and end distances. Finally, the
designer was alerted to special connection detailing considerations in high wind
and seismic conditions.

7-40 Residential Structural Design Guide
Chapter 7 - Connections
EXAMPLE 7.7 Wood Sill to Foundation Wall
Given
• The foundation wall is connected to a wood sill plate and laterally supported as
shown in the figure below.
• Assume that the soil has a 30 pcf equivalent fluid density and that the
unbalanced backfill height is 7.5 ft.
• The foundation wall unsupported height (from basement slab to top of wall) is
8 ft.
• The wood sill is preservative-treated Southern Yellow Pine.
Find 1. The lateral load on the foundation wall to sill plate connection due to the
backfill lateral pressure
2. The required spacing of ½-inch-diameter anchor bolts in the sill plate
Solution
1. Determine the lateral load on the sill plate connection
Using the procedure in Section 3.5 of Chapter 3 and the associated beam
equations in Appendix A, the reaction at the top of the foundation wall is
determined as follows:
R
top
= ql
3
/(6L) = (30 pcf)(7.5 ft)
3
/[6(8 ft)] = 264 plf

Residential Structural Design Guide 7-41
Chapter 7 - Connections
2. Determine the design lateral capacity of the anchor bolt and the required spacing
Z’ = ZC
D
C
M
C
t
C
g
C
∆
(Section 7.3.2)
Z
⊥
= 400 lbs* (NDS Table 8.2E)
C
D
= 0.9 (life-time load duration, Table 5.3)
C
M
= 1.0 (MC < 19%)
C
t
= 1.0 (temperature < 100
o
F)
C
g
= 1.0 (bolts not configured in rows)
*The value is based on a recommended 6 inch standard embedment of the anchor
bolt into the concrete wall. Based on conventional construction experience, this
value may also be applied to masonry foundation wall construction when bolts are
properly grouted into the masonry wall (i.e., by use of a bond beam).
Z’ = (400 lb)(0.9) = 360 lb
Anchor bolt spacing = (360 lb)/(264 plf) = 1.4 ft
Note: According to the above calculations, an anchor bolt spacing of about 16
inches on center is required in the sill plate. However, in conventional residential
construction, extensive experience has shown that a typical anchor bolt spacing of
6 ft on center is adequate for normal conditions as represented in this design
example. This conflict between analysis and experience creates a dilemma for the
designer that may only be reconciled by making judgmental use of the “extensive
experience” clause in NDS•7.1.1.4. Perhaps a reasonable compromise would be
to require the use of a 5/8-inch-diamter anchor bolt at a 4 ft on center spacing.
This design may be further justified by consideration of friction in the connection
(i.e., a 0.3 friction coefficient with a normal force due to dead load of the
building). The large safety factor in wood connections may also be attributed to
some of the discrepancy between practice or experience and analysis in
accordance with the NDS. Finally, the load must be transferred into the floor
framing through connection of the floor to the sill (see Table 7.1 for conventional
toenail connection requirements). In applications where the loads are anticipated
to be much greater (i.e., taller foundation wall with heavier soil loads), the joint
may be reinforced with a metal bracket at shown below.

7-42 Residential Structural Design Guide
Chapter 7 - Connections
Conclusion
This example demonstrates an analytic method of determining foundation lateral
loads and the required connections to support the top of the foundation wall
through a wood sill plate and floor construction. It also demonstrates the
discrepancy between calculated connection requirements and conventional
construction experience that may be negotiated by permissible designer judgment
and use of conventional residential construction requirements.

Residential Structural Design Guide 7-43
Chapter 7 - Connections
EXAMPLE 7.8 Deck Header to Post Connection
Given
• A 2x8 preservative-treated header is attached to each side of a deck post in a
bolted, double shear connection to support load from deck joists bearing on the
headers.
• The deck post is a preservative treated 4x4.
• The deck framing lumber is preservative-treated Southern Yellow Pine.
• The design double shear load on the connection is 2,560 lb (1,280 lb per header).
Find Determine if two 5/8-inch-diameter bolts are sufficient to resist the design load.
Solution
Calculate the design shear capacity of the bolted joint assuming that the bolts are
located approximately 2 inches from the top and bottom edge of the 2x8 headers
along the centerline of the 4x4 post.
Z’ = ZC
D
C
M
C
t
C
g
C
d
(Section 7.3.2)
Z
s⊥
= 1,130 lb* (NDS Table 8.3A)
C
D
= 1.0** (Normal duration of load)
C
M
= 1.0 (MC < 19%)
C
t
= 1.0 (Temperature < 100
o
F)
C
g
= 0.98 (2 bolts in a row) (NDS Table 7.3.6A)
C
∆
= 1.0 (for the bottom bolt only)*** (NDS•8.5.3)
*The Z
s⊥
value is used because the side members (2x8) are loaded perpendicular to grain and the
main member (4x4) is loaded parallel to grain.
**A normal duration of load is assumed for the deck live load. However, load duration studies for
deck live loads have not been conducted. Some recent research has indicated that a load duration
factor of 1.25 is appropriate for floor live loads; refer to Table 5.3 of Chapter 5.
***The top bolt is placed 2 inches from the top (loaded) edge of the 2x8 header and does not meet
the 4D (2.5 inch) edge distance requirement of NDS•8.5.3. However, neglecting the bolt entirely
will under-estimate the capacity of the connection.
Z’ = (1,130 lb)(0.98) = 1,107 lb (bottom bolt only)
If the top bolt is considered to be 80 percent effective based on its edge distance
relative to the required edge distance (i.e., 2 inches / 2.5 inches = 0.8), then the
design shear capacity for the two bolts in double shear may be estimated as
follows:
Z’ = 1,107 lb + 0.8(1,107 lb) = 1,993 lb < 2,560 lb NG?
Conclusion
The calculation of the design shear capacity of a double shear bolted connection is
demonstrated in this example. As shown in the calculations, the connection
doesn’t meet the required load in the manner analyzed. A larger bolt diameter or
3 bolts may be used to meet the required design load. However, as in previous
examples, this connection is typical in residential deck construction (i.e.,
supporting deck spans of about 8 ft each way) and may be approved by the
“extensive experience” clause of NDS•7.1.1.4. As additional rationale, the

7-44 Residential Structural Design Guide
Chapter 7 - Connections
capacity of shear connections in the NDS is related to a yield (or deformation) limit
state and not capacity. On the basis of capacity, the safety margins are fairly
conservative for such applications; refer to Section 7.3.1. The use of a 1.25 load
duration factor for the deck live load will also increase the joint capacity to a value
nearly equivalent to the design load assumed in this example.

Residential Structural Design Guide 7-45
Chapter 7 - Connections
EXAMPLE 7.9 Wood King and Jamb Stud to Floor or Foundation Connection
Given
• From Example 7.2, the net design uplift load at the roof-to-wall connection

was determined to be 234 plf for a 120 mph gust, open exposure wind
condition.
• Assume that the uplift loads at the top of the wall are adequately transferred
through interconnection of wall framing members (i.e. top plates, sheathing,
studs, headers to king and jamb studs, etc.) to the base of the upper story wall.
• The framing lumber is Hem-Fir
Find 1. The net uplift load at the base of the king and jamb studs adjacent to a 6 ft
wide wall opening
2. An adequate connection detail to transfer the uplift load
Solution
1. Determine the net design uplift load at the base of the king and jamb studs
supporting the 6 ft header using the ASD load combinations in Chapter 3.
Tributary load
= (1/2 header span + 1/2 stud spacing)[uplift load – 0.6(wall dead load)]
= [0.5(6 ft) + 0.5(1.33 ft)][234 plf – 0.6(64 plf)]
= 717 lb (uplift)
2. Determine the number of 8d common nails in each end of an 18g (0.043 inch
minimum thickness) steel strap
Z’ = ZC
D
(Section 7.3.2)
Z = 82 lb (NDS Table 12.3F)
C
D
= 1.6 (wind load duration)
Z’ = (82 lb)(1.6) = 131 lb
The number of nails required in each end of the strap is determined as follows:
(717 lb)/(131 lb/nail) = 6 nails
Note: As an option to the above solution, the same strap used on the layout studs
may be used on the jamb and king stud connection by using multiple straps. The
uplift strap on the layout studs would be required to resist 234 plf (1.33 ft) = 311
lb. Therefore, two or three of these straps could be used at wall opening location
and attached to the jamb and king studs. If the single strap is used as calculated in
the example problem, the jamb and king studs should be adequately
interconnected (i.e., face nailed) to transfer shear load from one to the other. For
example, if the header is strapped down to the top of the jamb stud and the king
stud is strapped at its base, then the two members must be adequately fastened
together. To some degree, the sheathing connections and other conventional
connections will assist in strengthening the overall load path and their
contribution should be considered or enhanced as appropriate.

7-46 Residential Structural Design Guide
Chapter 7 - Connections
As another alternative design, the king/jamb stud uplift connection may serve a
dual role as a wind uplift strap and a shear wall hold-down restraint if the wall
segment adjacent to the opening is designed to be a part of the building’s lateral
force resisting system (i.e., shear wall segment). The method to calculate hold-
down restraint forces for a shear wall is detailed in Chapter 6, Section 6.5.2.4.
The uplift force due to wind would be simply added to the uplift force due to
shear wall restraint to properly size a hold-down bracket or larger strap than
required for wind uplift alone.
Regardless of whether or not the wall segment is intended to be a shear wall
segment, the presence of wind uplift straps will provide overturning restraint to
the wall such that it effectively resists shear load and creates overturning restraint
forces in the uplift straps. This condition is practically unavoidable because the
load paths are practically inseparable, even if the intention in the design analysis
is to have separate load paths. For this reason, the opposite of the approach
described in the paragraph above may be considered to be more efficient. In other
words, the wind uplift strap capacity may be increased so that these multiple
straps also provide multiple overturning restraints for perforated shear walls; refer
to Chapter 6, Section 6.5.2.2. Thus, one type of strap or bracket can be used for
the entire job to simplify construction detailing and reduce the potential for error
in the field. This latter approach is applicable to seismic design (i.e., no wind
uplift) and wind design conditions.
Conclusion
In this example, the transfer of wind uplift loads through wall framing adjacent to
a wall opening is addressed. In addition, several alternate design approaches are
noted that may optimize the design and improve construction efficiency – even in
severe wind or seismic design conditions.

Residential Structural Design Guide 7-47
Chapter 7 - Connections
EXAMPLE 7.10 Concrete Wall to Footing (Shear) Connection
Given
Maximum transverse shear load on bottom of wall = 1,050 plf (due to soil)
Dead load on wall = 1,704 plf
Yield strength of reinforcement = 60,000 psi
Wall thickness = 8 inches
Assume µ = 0.6 for concrete placed against hardened concrete not intentionally
roughened.
f’
c
= 3,000 psi
Find • Whether a dowel or key is required to provide increased shear transfer capacity
• If a dowel or key is required, size accordingly
Solution
1. Determine factored shear load on wall due to soil load (i.e., 1.6H per Chapter 3,
Table 3.1)
V = 1,050 plf
V
u
= 1.6 (1,050 plf)= 1,680 plf
2. Check friction resistance between the concrete footing and wall
V
friction
= µN = µ(dead load per foot of wall)
= (0.6)(1,704 plf) = 1,022 plf < V
u
= 1,680 plf
Therefore, a dowel or key is needed to secure the foundation wall to the footing.
3. Determine a required dowel size and spacing (Section 7..2 and ACI-318•5.14)
A
vf
= V
u
/ (φf
y
µ)
= (1,680 plf)/[(0.85)(60,000)(0.6)] = 0.05 in
2
per foot of wall
Try a No. 4 bar (A
v
= 0.20 in
2
) and determine the required dowel spacing as
follows:
A
vf
= A
v
/S
0.05 in
2
/lf = (0.2 in
2
)/S
S = 48 inches
Conclusion
This example problem demonstrates that for the given conditions a minimum of
one No. 4 rebar at 48 inches on center is required to adequately restrict the wall
from slipping. Alternatively, a key may be used or the base of the foundation wall
may be laterally supported by the basement slab.
It should be noted that the factored shear load due to the soil lateral pressure is
compared to the estimated friction resistance in Step 1 without factoring the
friction resistance. There is no clear guideline in this matter of designer
judgment.

7-48 Residential Structural Design Guide
Chapter 7 - Connections
EXAMPLE 7.11 Concrete Anchor
Given
• 1/2-inch diameter anchor bolt at 4 feet on center with a 6 inch embedment
depth in an 8-inch thick concrete wall
• The bolt is an ASTM A36 bolt with f
y
= 36 ksi and the following design
properties for ASD; refer to AISC Manual of Steel Construction
(AISC,1989):
F
t
= 19,100 psi (allowable tensile stress)
F
u
= 58,000 psi (ultimate tensile stress)
F
v
= 10,000 psi (allowable shear stress)
• The specified concrete has f’
c
= 3,000 psi
• The nominal design (unfactored) loading conditions are as follows:
Shear load = 116 plf
Uplift load = 285 plf
Dead load = 180 plf
Find Determine if the bolt and concrete are adequate for the given conditions.
Solution
1. Check shear in bolt using appropriate ASD steel design specifications (AISC,
1989) and the ASD load combinations in Chapter 3.
f
v
=
)in196.0(
)ft4(plf116
areabolt
loadshear
2
= = 2,367 psi
F
v
= 10,000 psi
f
v
≤ F
v
OK
2. Check tension in bolt due to uplift using appropriate ASD steel design
specifications (AISC, 1989) and the appropriate ASD load combination in
Chapter 3.
T = [ (285 plf) - 0.6 (180 plf)] (4 ft) = 708 lb
f
t
=
bolt
A
T
=
2
in196.0
lb708
= 3,612 psi
f
t
≤ F
t
3,612 psi < 19,100 psf OK
3. Check tension in concrete (anchorage capacity of concrete) using ACI-318•11.3
and the appropriate LRFD load combination in Chapter 3. Note that the assumed
cone shear failure surface area, A
v
, is approximated as the minimum of pi (bolt
embedment length)
2
or pi (wall thickness)
2
.
V
u
= T = [1.5 (285 plf) - 0.9 (180 plf)] (4 ft) = 1,062 lb
A
v
= minimum of





=pi
=pi
22
22
in201)in8(
in113)in6(
φV
c
= φ4A
v

c
’f = (0.85)(4)(113 in
2
) psi000,3 = 21,044 lb
V
u
&le;φV
c
1,062 lb ≤ 21,044 lb OK

Residential Structural Design Guide 7-49
Chapter 7 - Connections
Conclusion
A 1/2-inch diameter anchor bolt with a 6 inch concrete embedment and spaced 4
feet on center is adequate for the given loading conditions. In lieu of using an
anchor bolt, there are many strap anchors that are also available. The strap anchor
manufacturer typically lists the embedment length and concrete compressive
strength required corresponding to strap gauge and shear and tension ratings. In
this instance, a design is not typically required−the designer simply ensures that
the design loads do not exceed the strap anchor’s rated capacity.

7-50 Residential Structural Design Guide
Chapter 7 - Connections
7.6 References
ACI, Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete and Commentary, ACI
Standard 318-99, American Concrete Institute, Farmington Hills, MI,
1999a.
ACI, Building Code Requirements for Masonry Structures, ACI Standard 530,
American Concrete Institute, Farmington Hills, MI, 1999b.
AF&PA, General Dowel Equations for Calculating Lateral Connection Values,
Technical Report 12, American Forest & Paper Association, Washington,
DC, 1999.
AF&PA, National Design Specification for Wood Construction (NDS), American
Forest & Paper Association, Washington, DC, 1997.
AISC, Manual of Steel Construction Allowable Stress Design, Ninth Edition,
American Institute of Steel Construction, Inc., Chicago, 1989.
ASTM, Standard Specification for Driven Fasteners: Nails, Spikes, and Staples
(ASTM F 1667), American Society of Testing and Materials, West
Conshohocken, PA, 1995.
ASTM, Standard Terminology of Nails for Use with Wood and Wood-Base
Materials (ASTM F 547), American Society of Testing and Materials,
West Conshohocken, PA, 1990.
Conner, H., Gromala, D., and Burgess, D., “Roof Connections in Houses: Key to
Wind Resistance,” Journal of Structural Engineering, Vol. 113, No. 12,
American Society of Civil Engineers, Reston, VA, 1987.
Cunningham, T.P., Roof Sheathing Fastening Schedules For Wind Uplift, APA
Report T92-28, American Plywood Association, Tacoma, WA, 1993.
Hoyle, R.J. and Woeste, F.R., Wood Technology in the Design of Structures, fifth
edition, Iowa State University Press, Ames, IA, 1989.
HUD, Reliability of Conventional Residential Construction: An Assessment of
Roof Component Performance in Hurricane Andrew and Typical Wind
Regions of the United States, prepared by the NAHB Research Center,
Inc., for the U.S. Department of Housing and Urban Development,
Washington, DC, 1999a.
HUD, Perforated Shear Walls with Conventional and Innovative Base Restraint
Connections, prepared by the NAHB Research Center, Inc., for the U.S.
Department of Housing and Urban Development, Washington, DC, 1999b.

Residential Structural Design Guide 7-51
Chapter 7 - Connections
ICC, International One- and Two-Family Dwelling Code, International Code
Council, Inc., Falls Church, VA, 1998.
McClain, T.E., “Design Axial Withdrawal Strength from Wood: II. Plain-Shank
Common Wire Nails,” Forest Products Journal, Volume 47, No. 6,
Madison, WI, 1997.
Mizzell, D.P. and Schiff, S.D., Wind Resistance of Sheathing for Residential
Roofs, Clemson University, Clemson, SC, 1994.
Murphy, S., Pye, S., and Rosowsky, D., System Effects and Uplift Capacity of
Roof Sheathing Fasteners, Structures Congress, American Society of Civil
Engineers, New York, NY, 1995.
NAHB, Cost Effective Home Building: A Design and Construction Handbook,
prepared by the NAHB Research Center, Inc., for the National Association
of Home Builders, Washington, DC, 1994.
NAHB, Wood Frame House Construction, Second Edition, edited by Robert
Stroh, Ph.D., and Gerald Sherwood, P.E., Delmar Publications and NAHB
Home Builder Press, Washington, DC, 1982.
NES, Power-Driven Staples and Nails for Use in All Types of Building
Construction, NER-272, National Evaluation Service, Inc., Falls Church,
VA, 1997.
Reed, T.D., Rosowsky, D.V., and Schiff, S.D., Uplift Capacity of Rafter-to-Wall
Connections in Light-Frame Construction, Clemson University, Clemson,
SC, 1996.
Showalter, J., Line, P., and Douglas, P., Calculation of Lateral Connection Values
Using General Gowel Equations, Paper No. 994176, American Society of
Agricultural Engineers, St. Joseph, MI, 1999.
Stieda, C.K.A, et al., Lateral Strength of Bolted Wood-to-Concrete Connections,
Forintek Canada Corp., Vancouver, British Columbia, Canada, February
1999.

7-52 Residential Structural Design Guide
Chapter 7 - Connections

Residential Engineering Design Guide A-1
Appendix A
Shear and Moment
Diagrams and
Beam Equations
qh
L
h
L-h
x
SHEAR MOMENT
V
V
M
max
R
R
1
2
2
1
q = equivalent fluid density of soil (pcf)
qh = soil presure (psf) at x = 0
V
2
=
V
1
= R
1
=
V
x
= V
1
(where x < h)
V
x
= V
2
(where x ≥ h)
M
x
= V
1
x (where x < h)
M
x
= −V
2
(L - x) (where x ≥ h)
Figure A.1 - Simple Beam (Foundation Wall) - Partial Triangular Load
L6
qh
R
3
2
−
=−
)
L3
h
l(qh
2
1
2
−
)xh2(xq
2
1
−−
32
qx
6
1
qhx
2
1
+−
q
V2
hhx
12
max
M@
−−=








+−−≅≅∆
L144
h
48
h
960
L
128
hL
EI
qL
)
2
L
xat(
3223
max

Appendix A – Shear and Moment Diagrams and Beam Equations
A-2 Residential Structural Design Guide
L
x
SHEAR MOMENT
M
max
P P
ee
MM
=
2
2
2
1
1
1
V
max
R
R
1
2






=
>−=
>−=
=
=
==
L
x
MM
MMwhereMMM
MMwhereMMM
ePM
ePM
L
M
RV
maxx
2121max
1212max
222
111
max
2max
Figure A.2 - Simple Beam (Wall or Column) - Eccentric Point Loads
V
R R
M
SHEAR
MOMENT
x
L
w
L/2 L/2
max
V
()
()
323
x
4
max
x
2
max
x
max
xLx2L
EI24
wx
)
2
L
xat(
EI384
wL5
xL
2
wx
M
)
2
L
xat(
8
wL
M
x
2
L
wV
2
wL
VR
+−=∆
==∆
−=
==






−=
==
Figure A.3 - Simple Beam - Uniformly Distributed Load

Appendix A - Shear and Moment Diagrams and Beam Equations
Residential Engineering Design Guide A-3
RR
M
SHEAR
MOMENT
x
L
V
V
0.58L 0.42L
max
w
max
1
1
2
2
)L7xL10x3(
EIL180
xw
EI77
Lw
)
15
8
1Lxat(
)xL(
L3
xw
M
39
Lw2
)
3
L
xat(M
L
w
3
w
V
3
w2
VR
3
w
VR
4224
2
max
x
3
max
max
22
2
max
x
max
max
2
2
maxmax
x
max
22
max
11
+−=∆
=−=∆
−=
==
−=
==
==
Figure A.4 - Simple Beam - Load Increasing Uniformly to One End
RR
M
SHEAR
MOMENT
x
L
V
V
ab
P
max
2
1
1
2
R
1
= V
1
(max when a<b) =
L
Pb
R
2
= V
2
(max when a>b) =
L
Pa
M
max
(at point of load) =
L
Pab
M
x
(when x<a) =
L
Pbx
∆
max
[at x =
3
)b2a(a +
when a<b] =
EIL27
)b2a(a3)b2a(Fab ++
∆
a
(at point of load) =
EIL3
bPa
22
∆
x
(when x<a) =
EIL6
Pbx
(L
2
- b
2
- x
2
)
Figure A.5 - Simple Beam - Concentrated Load at Any Point

Appendix A - Shear and Moment Diagrams and Beam Equations
Residential Engineering Design Guide A-5
R
SHEAR
MOMENT
x
L
V
M
P
ab
max
R = V = P
M
max
(at fixed end) = Pb
M
x
(when x>a) = P(x-a)
∆
max
(at free end) =
EI6
Pb
2
(3L-b)
∆
a
(at point of load) =
EI3
Pb
3
∆
x
(when x<a) =
EI6
Pb
2
(3L-3x-b)
∆
x
(when x>a) =
EI6
)xL(P
2
−
(3b-L+x)
Figure A.8 - Cantilever Beam - Concentrated Load at Any Point
R
SHEAR
MOMENT
x
L
V
w
R
V
3/8 L
M
max
M
1/4 L
1
2
1
1
2
R
1
= V
1
=
8
wL3
R
2
= V
2
= V
max
=
8
wL5
V
x
= R
1
- wx
M
max
=
8
wL
2
M
1
(at x = ) =
2
wL
128
9
L
8
3
=
M
x
= R
1
x -
2
wx
2
∆
max
(at x = )331(
16
L
+ = 0.42L) =
EI185
wL
4
∆
x
=
EI48
wx
(L
3
– 3Lx
2
+ 2x
3
)
Figure A.9 - Beam Fixed at One End, Supported at Other - Uniformly Distributed Load

Appendix A – Shear and Moment Diagrams and Beam Equations
A-6 Residential Structural Design Guide
R
SHEAR
MOMENT
x
L
V
M
P
ab
R
V
M
Pa/R
1
2
1
2
1
2
2
R
1
= V
1
=
3
2
L2
Pb
(a + 2L)
R
2
= V
2
=
3
L2
Pa
(3L
2
- a
2
)
M
1
(at point of load) = R
1
a
M
2
(at fixed end) =
2
L2
Pab
(a + L)
M
x
(when x<a) = R
1
x
M
x
(when x>a) = R
1
x - P(x-a)
∆
max
(when a<0.4L at x =
22
22
aL3
aL
L
−
+
) =
EI3
Pa
222
322
)aL3(
)aL(
−
−
∆
max
(when a>0.4L at x =
aL2
a
L
+
) =
aL2
a
EI6
Pab
2
+
∆
a
(at point of load) =
3
3
2
EIL12
bPa
(3L + a)
∆
x
(when x<a) =
3
2
EIL12
xPa
(3aL
2
– 2Lx
2
- ax
2
)
∆
x
(when x>a) =
3
EIL12
Pa
(L-x)
2
(3L
2
x - a
2
x - 2a
2
L)
Figure A.10 - Beam Fixed at One End, Supported at Other - Concentrated Load at Any Point
V
RR
SHEAR
MOMENT
x
L
w
L/2 L/2
V
maxM maxM
M
0.2 L
1
R = V =
2
wL
V
x
= 





− x
2
L
w
M
max
(at ends) =
12
wL
2
M
1
(at center) =
24
wL
2
M
x
=
12
w
(6Lx - L
2
- 6x
2
)
∆
max
(at center) =
EI384
wL
4
∆
x
=
EI24
wx
2
(L - x)
2
Figure A.11 - Beam Fixed at Both Ends - Uniformly Distributed Loads

Appendix A - Shear and Moment Diagrams and Beam Equations
Residential Engineering Design Guide A-7
R
R
SHEAR
MOMENT
x
L
M
P
ab
V
V
M
M
1
1
1
2
2
2
p
R
1
= V
1
(max. when a<b) =
3
2
L
Pb
(3a + b)
R
2
= V
2
(max. when a>b) =
3
2
L
Pa
(a + 3b)
M
1
(max. when a<b) =
2
2
L
Pab
M
2
(max. when a>b) =
2
2
L
bPa
M
a
(at point of load) =
3
22
L
bPa2
M
x
(when x<a) =
2
2
1
L
Pab
xR −
∆
max
(when a>b at x =
ba3
aL2
+
) =
2
23
)ba3(EI3
bPa2
+
∆
a
(at point of load) =
3
33
EIL3
bPa
∆
x
(when x<a) =
3
22
EIL6
xPb
(3aL - 3ax - bx)
Figure A.12 - Beam Fixed at Both Ends - Concentrated Load at Any Point
V
R R
M
SHEAR
MOMENT
x
L
w
V
x
V
M
1
1
1
1
2
3
2
2
R
1
= V
1
=
L2
w
(L
2
- a
2
)
R
2
= V
2
+ V
3
=
L2
w
(L + a)
2
V
2
= wa
V
3
=
L2
w
(L
2
+ a
2
)
V
x
(between supports) = R
1
- wx
V
x1
(for overhang) = w(a - x
1
)
M
1
(at x =








−
2
2
L
a
1
2
L
) =
22
2
)aL()aL(
L8
w
−+
M
2
(at R
2
) =
2
wa
2
M
x
(between supports) =
L2
wx
(L
2
- a
2
- xL)
M
x1
(for overhang) =
2
w
(a - x
1
)
2
∆
x
(between supports) =
wx
EIL24
(L
4
– 2L
2
x
2
+ Lx
3
- 2a
2
L
2
+ 2a
2
x
2
)
∆
x1
(for overhang) =
EI24
wx
1
(4a
2
L - L
3
+ 6a
2
x
1
- 4ax
1

2
+ x
1
3
)
Figure A.13 - Beam Overhanging One Support - Uniformly Distributed Load

Appendix A – Shear and Moment Diagrams and Beam Equations
A-8 Residential Structural Design Guide
V
R R
SHEAR
MOMENT
x
L
x
V
M
max
P
1
1
1
2
2
R
1
= V
1
=
L
Pa
R
2
= V
1
+ V
2
=
L
P
(L + a)
V
2
= P
M
max
(at R
2
) = Pa
M
x
(between supports) =
L
Pax
M
x1
(for overhang) = P(a - x
1
)
∆
max
(between supports at x =
3
L
) =
EI39
PaL
2
∆
max
(for overhang at x
1
= a) =
EI3
Pa
2
(L + a)
∆
x
(between supports) =
EIL6
Pax
(L
2
- x
3
)
∆
x
(for overhang) =
EI6
Px
1
(2aL + 3ax
1
- x
1
2
)
Figure A.14 - Beam Overhanging One Support - Concentrated Load at End of Overhang
R
R
SHEAR
MOMENT
2L
w
R
LL
V
V
V
V
3/8 L 3/8 L
x
M max
1
2
2
3
x
x
M
123
R
1
= V
1
= R
3
= V
3
=
8
wL3
R
2
=
8
wL10
V
2
= Vm =
8
wL5
M
max
=
8
wL
2
−
M
1
[at x =
8
L3
] =
128
wL9
2
M
x
[at x < L] =
2
wx
8
wLx3
2
−
∆
max
[at x ≅ 0.46L] =
EI185
wL
4
Figure A.15 - Continuous Beam - Two Equal Spans and Uniformly Distributed Load

Appendix A - Shear and Moment Diagrams and Beam Equations
Residential Engineering Design Guide A-9
R R
SHEAR
MOMENT
2L
w
R
LL
V
V
V
7/16 L
x
M
maxM
1 23
1
2
3
1
R
1
= V
1
= wL
16
7
R
2
= V
2
+ V
3
= wL
8
5
R
3
= V
3
= wL
16
1
−
V
2
= wL
16
9
M
max
[at x = L
16
7
] =
2
wL
512
49
M
1
[at R
2
] =
2
wL
16
1
−
M
x
[at x < L] =
16
wx
(7L - 8x)
∆
max
[at x ≅ 0.47L] =
EI109
wL
4
Figure A.16 - Continuous Beam - Two Equal Spans with Uniform Load on One Span
R
R
SHEAR
MOMENT
w
R
LL
V
V
V
x
V
M
M
x
1
1
2 3
13
2
4
1
12
2
3
M
R
1
= V
1
=
1
1
L
M
+
2
wL
1
R
2
= wL
1
+ wL
2
- R
1
- R
3
R
3
= V
4
=
1
1
L
M
+
2
wL
2
V
2
= wL
1
- R
1
V
3
= wL
2
- R
3
M
1
[at x < L
1
, max. at x =
w
R
1
] = R
1
x =
2
wx
2
M
2
=
)LL(8
wLwL
21
3
1
3
2
+
+
−
M
3
[at x
1
< L
2
, max. at x
1
=
w
R
3
] = R
3
x
1
-
2
wx
2
1
Figure A.17 - Continuous Beam - Two Unequal Spans and Uniformly Distributed Load

Appendix A – Shear and Moment Diagrams and Beam Equations
A-10 Residential Structural Design Guide

Residential Structural Design Guide B-1
Appendix B
Unit Conversions
The following list provides the conversion relationship between U.S. customary units and the International System
(SI) units. A complete guide to the SI system and its use can be found in ASTM E 380, Metric Practice.
To convert from to multiply by
Length
inch (in.) meter(µ) 25,400
inch (in.) centimeter 2.54
inch (in.) meter(m) 0.0254
foot (ft) meter(m) 0.3048
yard (yd) meter(m) 0.9144
mile (mi) kilometer(km) 1.6
Area
square foot (sq ft) square meter(sq m) 0.09290304
square inch (sq in) square centimeter(sq cm) 6.452
square inch (sq in.) square meter(sq m) 0.00064516
square yard (sq yd) square meter(sq m) 0.8391274
square mile (sq mi) square kilometer(sq km) 2.6
Volume
cubic inch (cu in.) cubic centimeter(cu cm) 16.387064
cubic inch (cu in.) cubic meter(cu m) 0.00001639
cubic foot (cu ft) cubic meter(cu m) 0.02831685
cubic yard (cu yd) cubic meter(cu m) 0.7645549
gallon (gal) Can. liquid liter 4.546
gallon (gal) Can. liquid cubic meter(cu m) 0.004546
gallon (gal) U.S. liquid* liter 3.7854118
gallon (gal) U.S. liquid cubic meter(cu m) 0.00378541
fluid ounce (fl oz) milliliters(ml) 29.57353
fluid ounce (fl oz) cubic meter(cu m) 0.00002957
Force
kip (1000 lb) kilogram (kg) 453.6
kip (1000 lb) Newton (N) 4,448.222
pound (lb) kilogram (kg) 0.4535924
pound (lb) Newton (N) 4.448222
Stress or pressure
kip/sq inch (ksi) megapascal (Mpa) 6.894757
kip/sq inch (ksi) kilogram/square 70.31
centimeter (kg/sq cm)

Appendix B - Unit Conversions
Residential Structural Design Guide B-2
To convert from to multiply by
pound/sq inch (psi) kilogram/square 0.07031
centimeter (kg/sq cm)
pound/sq inch (psi) pascal (Pa) * 6,894.757
pound/sq inch (psi) megapascal (Mpa) 0.00689476
pound/sq foot (psf) kilogram/square 4.8824
meter (kg/sq m)
pound/sq foot (psf) pascal (Pa) 47.88
Mass (weight)
pound (lb) avoirdupois kilogram (kg) 0.4535924
ton, 2000 lb kilogram (kg) 907.1848
grain kilogram (kg) 0.0000648
Mass (weight) per length)
kip per linear foot (klf) kilogram per 0.001488
meter (kg/m)
pound per linear foot (plf) kilogram per 1.488
meter (kg/m)
Moment
1 foot-pound (ft-lb) Newton-meter 1.356
(N-m)
Mass per volume (density)
pound per cubic foot (pcf) kilogram per 16.01846
cubic meter (kg/cu m)
pound per cubic yard kilogram per 0.5933
(lb/cu yd) cubic meter (kg/cu m)
Velocity
mile per hour (mph) kilometer per hour 1.60934
(km/hr)
mile per hour (mph) kilometer per second 0.44704
(km/sec)
Temperature
degree Fahrenheit (°F) degree Celsius (°C) t
C
= (t
F
-32)/1.8
degree Fahrenheit (°F) degree Kelvin (°K) t
K
= (t
F
+ 459.7)/1.8
degree Kelvin (°F) degree Celsius (°C) t
C
= (t
K
-32)/1.8
*One U.S. gallon equals 0.8327 Canadian gallon
**A pascal equals 1000 Newton per square meter.
The prefixes and symbols below are commonly used to form names and symbols of the decimal multiples and
submultiples of the SI units.
Multiplication Factor Prefix Symbol
1,000,000,000 = 10
9
giga G
1,000,000 = 10
6
mega M
1,000 = 10
3
kilo k
0.01 = 10
-2
centi c
0.001 = 10
-3
milli m
0.000001 = 10
-6
micro µ
0.000000001 = 10
-9
nano n

Index
Residential Structural Design Guide
A zone, 4-52
Adhesive, 6-75
Admixtures, 4-5, 4-6
Allowable masonry stress, 4-35, 4-39
Anchor bolt, 7-41
Aspect ratio, 6-46
Axial load, 4-20, 4-40, 5-64
Backfill, 4-34, 4-35, 4-47, 4-64, 4-70, 4-72, 4-80, 4-84
Base shear, 6-42, 6-43, 6-49
Basement, 3-9, 5-70
Beams and stringers, 5-5
Bearing, 4-8, 4-9, 4-12, 4-14, 5-11, 5-16, 5-17, 5-50,
5-53, 5-55, 5-56, 5-63, 7-27
Bending, 4-14, 4-22, 4-31, 5-13, 5-14, 5-16, 5-17, 5-18,
5-20, 5-53, 5-56, 5-74, 5-81, 5-84
Blocking, 6-24
Board, 5-62, 6-24, 7-2
Bolt, 7-8, 7-9
Bottom plate, 6-27, 6-43
Box nail, 7-5
Bracing, 1-20, 1-22, 1-23, 1-24, 4-2, 5-15, 5-19, 5-23,
5-27, 5-34, 5-43, 5-44, 5-46, 5-48, 5-63, 5-72, 5-74,
6-2, 6-9, 6-24, 6-26, 6-74
Bridging, 5-27, 5-83
Built-up beam, 5-28
Built-up column, 5-38
Cantilever, 4-14, 5-55, 5-56, 5-57, 5-58, 6-60, 6-66
Capacity, 4-8, 4-21, 4-22, 4-23, 4-25, 4-32, 4-36, 4-37,
4-38, 4-39, 4-40, 4-42, 5-16, 6-25, 6-26, 6-29, 7-27,
7-51
Ceiling joist, 5-21, 5-40, 7-2
Checks, 5-16
Chord, 6-42, 6-49
Cold-formed steel, 1-9, 5-26
Collector, 6-8, 6-54, 6-67
Column, 4-28, 5-11, 5-15, 5-18, 5-39, 5-70, 5-81
Combined bending and axial load, 5-16
Common nail, 7-4
Composite action, 2-4
Compression parallel to grain, 5-10
Compression perpendicular to grain, 5-10
Concentrated load, 3-6
Concrete masonry unit, 4-6, 4-7
Concrete masonry, 1-10, 4-6, 4-7
Concrete, 1-6, 1-7, 1-10, 1-11, 1-25, 1-26, 3-5, 3-6,
3-38, 4-2, 4-4, 4-5, 4-6, 4-7, 4-10, 4-11, 4-13, 4-14,
4-16, 4-20, 4-22, 4-23, 4-25, 4-28, 4-29, 4-30, 4-31,
4-32, 4-41, 4-44, 4-47, 4-48, 4-49, 4-50, 4-58, 4-64,
4-68, 4-70, 4-72, 4-75, 4-77, 4-88, 4-89, 4-90, 7-1,
7-23, 7-24, 7-25, 7-26, 7-27, 7-38, 7-47, 7-48, 7-50
Connection, 7-8, 7-9, 7-11, 7-30, 7-33, 7-35, 7-37,
7-38, 7-43, 7-45, 7-47, 7-50, 7-51
Cripple stud, 5-32
Cyclic, 3-38
Cyclic, 6-74, 6-75
Damage, 1-19, 1-22, 1-25, 1-26, 2-23, 3-39
Dampening, 3-25
Dead load, 3-4, 3-24, 3-31, 3-32, 4-58, 4-61, 4-64,
4-70, 4-72, 4-77, 4-80, 4-84, 5-49, 5-52, 5-72, 7-30,
7-47, 7-48
Decking, 5-5
Defects, 1-17
Deflection, 3-28, 3-38, 4-30, 4-32, 5-14, 5-16, 5-20,
5-21, 5-22, 5-55, 5-56, 5-80, 5-82, 5-83
Deformation, 2-13, 3-40
Density, 3-6, 3-8, 3-9, 3-10, 3-18, 3-34, 4-4, 4-35,
4-64, 4-67, 4-70, 4-72, 4-80, 4-84, 4-87, 6-29
Design load, 4-64, 5-72, 7-28, 7-30
Diaphragm, 6-11, 6-12, 6-14, 6-18, 6-38, 6-39, 6-40,
6-56
Dimension lumber, 5-5
Dowel, 4-24, 7-26, 7-50
Drainage, 4-34, 4-47
Drift, 6-35, 6-37
Durability, 3-19, 5-6
Earthquake (see Seismic also), 1-21, 1-22, 1-23, 1-25,
2-15, 2-17, 3-22, 3-24, 3-25, 3-29, 3-37, 3-39, 6-1,
6-2, 6-19, 6-75, 6-78
Eccentricity, 4-26, 4-27, 4-82, 4-86
Engineered wood, 1-8, 5-16, 5-30
Epoxy-set anchor, 7-17
Euler buckling, 4-25, 4-82, 5-15, 5-38
Expansive soil, 3-30
Exposure, 5-8
Failure, 1-20, 4-13, 6-3, 6-8
Fastener, 3-34, 5-31, 6-24
Flexure, 4-14, 4-15, 4-17
Flitch plate beam, 5-30
Flood load, 2-4
Floor joist, 5-24
Footing, 4-8, 4-10, 4-11, 4-14, 4-16, 4-47, 4-54, 4-58,
4-61, 4-62, 7-23, 7-47
Foundation wall, 1-17, 3-4, 4-25, 4-34, 4-47, 4-85
Free water, 5-6
Fungi, 5-6
Geometry, 1-13, 2-3, 3-11, 4-76, 5-79, 6-11, 6-20, 6-36
Grade, 4-5, 4-6, 4-20, 4-42, 4-49, 4-50, 5-8, 5-55, 5-58,
5-63, 5-70, 6-22, 6-23
Gravel footing, 4-11
Gravity load, 2-3, 3-31, 3-32
Grout, 3-5, 4-8
Gypsum, 1-17, 3-6, 6-24, 6-78
Header, 5-14, 5-37, 5-67, 5-82, 7-2, 7-43
Hold-down, 6-9, 6-27, 6-28, 7-9
Horizontal diaphragm, 2-11, 6-6
Horizontal reinforcement, 4-83
Horizontal shear, 5-53
Hurricane, 1-18, 1-19, 1-20, 1-21, 1-26, 1-27, 2-15,
2-25, 7-20, 7-50
I-joists, 1-8, 5-22, 5-24, 5-25, 5-26, 5-28, 5-30, 5-54
Impact, 3-18, 3-40, 5-12, 5-83
Insulating concrete form (ICF), 1-10, 4-51
Jetting, 4-52
Joist hanger, 7-9
Key, 1-18, 1-20, 1-23, 2-15, 3-29, 5-10, 6-18, 7-24,
7-25, 7-50

Index
Residential Structural Design Guide
Lag screw, 7-11, 7-18, 7-19
Lateral load, 2-4, 3-12, 3-15, 4-21, 4-36, 4-39, 7-31
Lateral support, 4-34
Limit state, 2-15, 2-17, 5-9, 5-10, 5-51, 5-65, 5-66
Lintel, 4-31, 4-32, 4-44, 4-77
Live load, 3-6, 3-31, 3-32, 4-58, 4-61, 4-64, 4-70, 4-72,
4-77, 4-80, 4-84, 5-49, 5-52
Load combination, 3-2, 4-87, 5-25
Load duration, 5-9, 5-11, 5-12, 5-36
Load sharing, 2-4
Load-bearing wall, 5-35
Machine stress rated, 5-5
Minimum reinforcement, 4-77, 4-83
Model building code, 1-13
Modular housing, 1-6
Modulus of elasticity, 5-10
Moisture, 5-6
Monolithic slab, 4-49
Mortar, 4-7, 4-36, 4-88
Nail size, 5-31, 5-45, 6-30
Nail, 5-31, 5-45, 6-22, 6-30, 6-38, 6-74, 7-2, 7-4, 7-5,
7-6, 7-28
NBS, 2-4, 2-24, 6-14, 6-76
Nonsway frame, 4-70
One-way shear, 4-12
Oriented strand board (OSB), 1-6, 1-8, 5-7, 5-8, 5-31,
5-63, 6-23, 6-41, 6-42, 6-48, 6-67
Overturning, 6-31, 6-33
Parallel shear, 4-21, 4-85
Partition, 5-44
Permafrost, 3-39, 4-57
Permanent wood foundation, 4-47
Perpendicular shear, 4-21, 4-23
Pile cap, 4-50
Piles, 4-2, 4-50
Plate, 2-25, 5-23, 5-42, 5-44, 5-84, 7-35
Platform framing, 1-1
Plywood box beam, 5-30
Plywood, 1-26, 5-7, 5-8, 5-30, 5-31, 5-81, 5-83, 6-77,
7-50
Pneumatic nail, 7-6
Portal frame, 6-37
Portland cement, 1-22, 1-23, 4-4, 4-6
Post-and-beam framing, 1-1
Posts and timbers, 5-5
Preservative-treated wood, 4-1, 4-45
Probability, 2-16, 2-23, 2-24, 3-38
Punching shear, 4-12
Rafter, 3-35, 5-40, 5-43, 5-72, 5-76, 5-77, 5-78, 7-2,
7-9, 7-33
Rankine, 3-8
REACH, 1-15
Rebar, 4-6
Reinforcement, 4-5, 4-18, 4-30, 4-43, 4-49
Reliability, 1-26, 2-16, 2-24, 2-25, 5-13, 5-14, 5-82,
5-84, 7-50
Resistance, 2-19, 2-21, 3-40, 5-81, 5-82, 6-1, 6-22,
6-23, 6-25, 6-29, 6-75, 6-77, 6-78, 7-50, 7-51
Ridge beam, 5-76
Risk, 1-27, 2-22
Roof overhang, 3-19, 3-34
Roof truss, 3-35, 5-41, 5-42, 5-43
Safety, 2-1, 2-14, 2-16, 2-17, 2-19, 2-21, 2-22, 2-24,
3-39, 3-40, 5-16, 6-29
Seismic (see Earthquake also), 1-25, 2-2, 2-3, 3-23,
3-24, 3-26, 3-39, 3-40, 4-34, 6-29, 6-41, 6-48, 6-60,
6-62, 6-63, 6-64, 6-67, 6-75, 6-76, 6-78
Shakes, 3-5
Shank, 7-7
Shear parallel to grain, 5-10
Shear wall, 2-11
Sheathing, 5-31, 5-45, 5-62, 6-38, 6-74, 7-20, 7-28,
7-50, 7-51
Shrinkage, 5-6, 5-16, 5-23, 5-51
Single shear, 3-28, 6-9, 6-28, 6-30
Sinker nail, 7-5
Site-fabricated beam, 5-30
Slab-on-grade, 4-49
Sliding, 6-35, 6-40
Slump, 4-5, 4-88
Snow load, 2-17, 4-64
Softwood, 5-6, 5-83
Soil bearing test, 4-8
Sole plate, 7-2
Solid, 3-5, 4-7, 4-35, 4-36, 4-48
Spaced column, 5-38
Species, 5-4, 5-55, 5-59, 5-63, 5-67, 6-29, 7-12
Specific gravity, 3-6, 6-25, 6-29, 6-36, 6-37, 6-41,
6-48, 6-52
Splice, 7-9
Static, 6-75
Stiffness, 5-11, 6-14, 6-35, 6-40
Strap tie, 7-9
Structural wood panel, 3-6, 5-7
Strut, 6-6
Stucco, 6-23
Stud, 4-47, 5-5, 5-14, 5-63, 5-84, 6-41, 6-48, 7-2, 7-45
Sway frame, 4-25
System, 2-2, 3-4, 3-26, 5-13, 5-14, 5-22, 5-25, 5-33,
5-37, 5-40, 5-67, 5-82, 5-83, 6-4, 7-19, 7-51
Temperature, 3-30, 5-11, 7-43
Tension capacity, 5-63
Tension parallel to grain, 5-10
Termites, 5-7
Tie-down, 1-20, 3-16, 3-17, 3-19, 3-20, 3-34
Timber pile, 4-50
Toenail, 3-34, 6-3, 7-2
Top plate, 6-27
Topographic effect, 3-15
Tributary area, 6-11
Tributary load, 7-45
Truss, 1-5, 1-7, 2-25, 2-9, 2-10, 3-17, 3-33, 3-35, 3-19,
4-87, 5-18, 5-23, 5-28, 5-41, 5-42, 5-43, 5-44, 5-45,
5-46, 5-79, 5-23, 5-42, 5-44, 5-84, 6-18, 6-66
V zone, 4-51
Vibration, 5-22, 5-84
Visually graded, 5-5
Water reducer, 4-5

Index
Residential Structural Design Guide
Weight, 3-10, 4-4, 4-7, 4-80, 6-23, 6-